Home

3500 Process Controller HA027988_15_3500

1. v v v See Chapter See Chapter 18 See Chapter 18 See Chapter 21 See Chapter 20 See Chapter 19 18 Polynomial Programmer Real Time User Switch Switch Over Timer Setup amp Edit Clock prontos De sua Oso TO 5 v v v y Y See Chapter 19 See Chapter 22 See Chapter 15 See Chapter 29 See Chapter 23 See Chapter 15 Humidity Zirconia User Values Transducer Totaliser Scaling pco neces O Hire O ua AD par O roate ss v v v v See Chapter 16 See Chapter 25 See Chapter 24 See Chapter 15 Figure 4 5 Navigation Diagram 60 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers 5 Chapter5 Function Block Wiring Input and output parameters of function blocks are wired together in software to form a particular instrument or function within the instrument A simplified overview of how these may be interconnected to produce a single control loop is shown below User Manual Inputs Control Processes Input Output Process Input PV Loop I O Module 1 Sensor p PV Input List Lp List Mod1A List eg Chapter 7 Main Setup Tune Chapter 10 thermocouple PID SP OP Diag Lp List I O Module Chapter 21 2 Programmer Mod2A List E a Prog Lists Chapter 10 peu io Ghapei22 apter Lin 16 List Chapter 19 a Application specifid I
2. 7 7 WA Servo to new PV rate is the ramp rate at power fail Power Off Time level Ramp back power fail during Time to target segments l l Setpoint If the programmer was defined as a Time to Target eer programmer then when the power is returned the previous ramp rate will be recovered The Time remaining will be recalculated The rule is to maintain RAMP RATE but alter TIME REMAINING Ramp Rate Servo to PV level Sensor Break Recovery Power Off Time On sensor break the program state changed to HOLD if the current state is RUN or HOLDBACK Sensor break is defined as status bad on the PV Input parameter If the program state is in HOLD when PV input status returns to OK the program state is automatically set back to RUN Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 22 14 Operating a Program The program may be operated from the RUN HOLD button on the front of the controller or via digital inputs or via digital communications or via parameters found in the Program Setup lists 22 14 1 Run In run the programmer working setpoint varies in accordance with the profile set in the active program A program will always run non configured programs will default to a single Dwell end segment 22 14 2 Reset In reset the programmer is inactive and the controller behaves as a standard controller It will 1 Continue to control with the setpoint determine
3. Return to Cal State This can be done by pressing followed by a Press or Dto Accept The display will return to Idle It is now necessary to calibrate the high point To 16 sla 18 ia 20 21 Press 4 or to select Hi to calibrate the high point Then Confirm then Go Trim will be shown Press again to scroll to Cal Trim Press or Dto adjust the value read by the voltmeter to 9 00V The value shown on the controller display is arbitrary and has the range 32768 to 32767 Return to Cal State This can be done by pressing followed by O Press or to Accept The display will return to Idle The above procedure should be repeated for all retransmission outputs Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 27 27 1 27 2 Chapter 27 Configuration Using iTools Configuration of the instrument which has been described so far in this manual has been through the user interface of the controller iTools provides a software platform for configuring Eurotherm instruments and also allows additional functions such as naming of certain parameters and creating User Pages to be performed This chapter gives an introduction to using iTools to configure 3500 series instruments Further details are available in the Tools Help Manual Part No HA028838 which can be downloaded from
4. 8 Press to scroll to IO Type 9 Press a or M to Time Prop 8 2 4 Example To Calibrate a VP Output The Cal State parameter in this list allows you to fully open or fully close the valve when it is required to calibrate a feedback potentiometer used with a bounded VP control Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes Lac T The loop is temporarily vat a a ar disconnected to allow the valve to ri drive fully open 1 From the LgclO LA page press to scroll to Cal State 2 Press a or M to select Raise 3 Now select the page header which contains the Potentiometer Inout module 4 Press to scroll to Cal State in the Potentiometer list section 10 3 9 5 Press or O to select Hi Then Confirm The controller will automatically calibrate to the potentiometer position The messages Go and Busy will be displayed during this time If successful the message Passed will be displayed and if unsuccessful Failed will be displayed A fail could be due to the potentiometer value being out of range See also section 10 4 5 6 Drive the valve fully closed using Lower in the LgclO page Then repeat 3 4 and 5 for the Lo calibration point Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 91 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 8 2 5 Logic Output Scaling If the output is configured for time
5. gt gt o A a a 2 O O O O O O O O O O JO O O O joOo o jo O O O JO O O O o o x lt w w ClSOlSSOlSOIRIAIRI DIII S52 OJO JO JO OJO O JO Q O ojala aay 410 INIA AINI gt NIAJ AIN jo jala ioio COIN BI WINM O l gt 10 lia Ov ho gt 315 0x013b Recipe LastDataset O None 1 Set 1 2 Set 2 3 Set 3 4 Set 4 5 Set 5 6 Set 6 7 Set 7 8 Set 8 0x013d Loop 1 0P Ch1PotPosition uE Lo0p 1 OP ChaPotPosiion SS to0p 1 0P ChaTravelfime o o 350 0x015e Loop 1 OP Ch1PotBreak 0 Off 1 On Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 357 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 358 MODBUS MODBUS Parameter Enumerations Hex 360 0x0168 PV PV 361 0x0169 LgclO LA PV 362 0x016a LgclO LB PV 48 Logic input 49 Contact closure 50 Logic output 51 Time proportioned output 52 VP raise output 53 VP lower output 48 Logic input 49 Contact closure 50 Logic output 51 Time proportioned output 52 VP raise output 53 VP lower output 363 0x016b RIyAA PV 50 On Off 51 Time proportion 52 VP raise 53 VP lower 364 0x016c Mod 1 A PV IS CO al O x lt Oo de O1 oe 365 Mod 1 8 PV ee Mod 1 C PV es Mod 2A PV EA 368 Mod 2 8 PV ee Mod 2 C PV ee Mod 3 APV A 7 Mod 3 8 PV ed Mod 3 C PV CS 374 Mod 4 8 PV INN Mod 4 C PV ee 377 Mod 5B PV o Mod 5 C PV N 380 Mod 6 8 PV de Mod 6 C PV et ass Loop 1 SP ARSP AA 186 Loop 1 SP SPTrim A Loop 15etup CHiControlIype Loop 1
6. List Header Inst Sub header Enb Enable User Manual Parameter Value Description or to change Analogue alarms UOUUUUUU All 8 analogue alarms disabled NARNIA All 8 analogue alarms enabled BCD switch input Both inputs disabled Both inputs enabled Counters Both counters disabled Both counters enabled PackBitEn Pack bits Allows All four blocks disabled up to 16 booleans ll to be packed into EEEN All four blocks enabled one word UnpackBitEn Un pack bits To O O OU Al four blocks disabled remove booleans from the word EENE All four blocks enabled Digital alarms 91010420480 All 8 digital alarms disabled BEER EEEE All 8 digital alarms enabled Humidity control Humidity block disabled Humidity block enabled IO expander IO expander disabled IO expander enabled OU Both monitors disabled EE Both monitors enabled e E Logic operators d444J4J40U All 8 logic operators disabled En1 En2 En MERA Mn IAN All 8 logic operators enabled Logic 8 operator Both operators disabled Both operators enabled Input linearisation Both input linearisation tables disabled Both input linearisation tables enabled Load enable Load 1 2 disabled Load 1 2 enabled O U Control Loop 1 2 disabled EE Control Loop 1 2 enabled Math2 Analogue Maths O O0 O O O OO U Als maths operators disabled i id MERA All 8 maths operators enabled MultiOper Multi input UU Multi operator input disabled operator block AN Multi operat
7. 23 1 2 oo e Input Scale 18 3 2 Loop Mode Lp Diag 21 9 Input to 8 18 4 1 LP Setup 2142 Input1 Value Math11 18 3 2 Loop Summary Input2 Scale 18 3 2 LoopOP CH2 20 1 Input2 Value Math12 18 3 2 PA Inst Type ostit 6 aw Limit IntHold 2134 an 251 Inv21 30 IOExp 11 1 1 Low Outout 21 64 Inv31 40 IOExp ERI LowerKey 32 Lac 1O Cp Break Lp Diag 21 RIAA 400 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 NO lt NO 00 24 00 00 NO N N 00 al o 00 NO 7 2 4 O NO O m x E d gt Co gt ul gt os 3 A N as 00 al 00 al O 00 o w w 0 NIN NO O 5 lo N w w O w No No ln WwW ly Os On A e Os On EEN 00 AJW N 9 3500 Series Controllers Lp OP sol Lp SP Aali Lp OP 21 8 1 Inst Enb Parameter Main Bar Val Man Mode Man Track ManOP Manual Startup Math2 En1 En2 En3 6 3 1 Max Con Tick 6 7 Max Inst Segs 6 7 Noise Load 20 1 toad oo Off Time Prog Edit Sync All 22 17 1 Part No HA027988 E O NO NM NM CO NN C lt O Issue 15 Jun 13 User Manual RTClock 15 4 1 RTClock 15 4 1 5 5 Out 1871 Out Hi Limit 18 5 6 Out High 19 1 2 Out Lo Limit 18 5 6 Out21 30 111 1 Out31 40 Hal P Parameter Off Time1 Off Time2 Offset Offset Offset On Day1 On Day2 On Time On Time On Time2 OP1 Beacon OP
8. 6 Down Scale The measurement will be forced to adopt its low limit this is like having a resistive pull down on an input circuit In addition the status of the measurement is set to BAD such that any function block using this measurement can operate its own fallback strategy For example the control loop may hold its output 198 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 20 Chapter 20 Load There are two load simulation blocks which provide styles of load for each loop This allows an instrument configuration to be tested before connection to the process plant In the current issue of firmware the simulated loads available are Oven and Furnace 20 1 Load Parameters List Header Load ss s s sCSY List Header Load ss s s sCSY Load Sub headers 1 and 2 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press Z or a to change values Level Type The type of load simulation to use Oven Simulates the Oven Conf Oven is a simple load of 3 first order lags characteristics of a providing a single process value for typical oven connection to the control loop Furnace Simulates the Furnace consists of 12 interactive first order characteristics ota lags giving a slave PV followed by 6 typical furnace ee first order lags giving a master Out Gain The gain of the load the input power is multiplied by gain before use by the load The time constant of lag 1 in the Oven load and slav
9. No sensor break alarm Status of the sensor break alarm Off or On SBrk Alarm SBrk Out L L L L L Conf w W Disp Hi Display reading high OO Disp Lo Display reading low OO Range Hi Input high value OO See section 10 4 1 Downscale Same as PV input See section 0 for further Fall Good explanation lack of calibration or a saturated input Fall Bad The Status parameter would Clip Good Range Lo Input low value Fallback Configures the default value in case of an erroneous condition The error may be due an out of range value a sensor break 04 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual List Header Mod Sub headers xA x the number of the slot in which the module is fitted Parameter Description Value Default Access Press or to change values Level indicate the error condition and Clip Bad could be used to diagnose the problem Fallback has several modes and may be associated with the Fallback PV parameter Fallback PV To set the value of PV during a sensor break Instrument range Conf Filter Time Input filter time Off to 500 00 m ss s 0 00 4 L3 An input filter provides damping of the input hh mm ss or hh mm signal This may be necessary to prevent the effects of excessive noise on the PV input Emiss Emissivity This parameter only appears if the Off 0 1 to 1 0 10 L3 input is configured for Pyrometer It
10. The Hot Box Thermocouples are calibrated in terms of EMF generated by the measuring junctions relative to the reference junction at 0 C Different reference points can produce different characteristics of thermocouples therefore referencing at another temperature does present problems However the ability of the hot box to work at very high ambient temperatures plus a good reliability factor has led to an increase in its usage The unit can consist of a thermally insulated solid aluminium block in which the reference junctions are embedded The block temperature is controlled by a closed loop system and a heater is used as a booster when initially switching on This booster drops out before the reference temperature usually between 55 C and 65 C is reached but the stability of the hot box temperature is now important Measurements cannot be taken until the hot box reaches the correct temperature Isothermal Systems The thermocouple junctions being referenced are contained in a block which is heavily thermally insulated The junctions are allowed to follow the mean ambient temperature which varies slowly This variation is accurately sensed by electronic means and a signal is produced for the associated instrumentation The high reliability factor of this method has favoured its use for long term monitoring CJC Options in 3500 Series 0 CJC measurement at instrument terminals 1 CJC based on external junctions kept at OC Ice Po
11. 1233 12a 1295 O x12a6 1227 1298 1229 x12a3 ab 1200 Oxi2ad 1238 Oxi 2af Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 361 O Ojojoj jo O olojo O O Ojojojo o Oj oOo o oOo OoO O Ojoj jojo jO O JO O JO O olojo O O XIXIXI IxXI x x x x x gt x x X xX x lt x lt oOojo o o o oJjo o o O olojo Oo Oo Os ON OS ON ON ON ON ON ON Os a aj an al al O IN IN N O O JO O o w OO aJa O oa ajo Ojo gt ano gt o Es O x1299 Math2 4 Out User Manual 3500 series Controllers MODBUS MODBUS Parameter Hex 4784 0x12b0 Math2 12 In2 4785 0x12b1 Math2 12 Out 4786 0x12b2 Math2 13 1n1 4787 0x12b3 Math2 13 In2 4788 0x12b4 Math2 13 Out 4789 0x12b5 Math2 14 In1 4790 0x12b6 Math2 14 In2 4791 0x12b7 Math2 14 Out 4792 0x12b8 Math2 15 In1 4793 0x12b9 Math2 15 In2 4794 0x12ba Math2 15 Out 4795 0x12bb Math2 16 In1 4796 0x12bc Math2 16 In2 4797 0x12bd Math2 16 Out 4798 0x12be Math2 17 In1 4799 0x12bf Math2 17 In2 4800 0x12c0 Math2 17 Out 4801 0x12c1 Math2 18 In1 4802 0x12c2 Math2 18 In2 4803 0x12c3 Math2 18 Out 4804 0x12c4 Math2 19 In1 4805 0x12c5 Math2 19 In2 4806 0x12c6 Math2 19 Out 4807 0x12c7 Math2 20 In1 4808 0x12c8 Math2 20 In2 4809 0x12c9 Math2 20 Out 4810 0x12ca Math2 21 In1 4811 0x12cb Math2 21 In2 4812 0x12cc Math2 21 Out 4813 0x12cd Math2 22 In1 4814 0x12ce Math2 22 In2 4815 0x12cf Math2 22 Out 4816 0x12d0 Math2 23 1n1 4817 0x12d1 Math2 23 In2 4818 0x12d2 Math2 23 Out 4819 0x12d3 Math2
12. 24 4 3 1 Configure the Input Set input to 20mV where OmV reading of 0 and 20 0 mV reading of 2000 In configuration level Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press PUT Reut ee 40mV Lin Type to Linear as many times as necessary to select the input to be calibrated 410 Tyee Lin Tyree Units Configure Disp Hi and Disp Lo to correspond da il PUT neut to load cell ms e i O to 2000 P required parameter Dise Hi g 5 i Configure Range Hi and Range Lo to input mV 3 Use or a to change Dise Lo gt A d i range 0 20mV parameter values Ss PA PUInput Do not set offsets at this stage E N Let Set Lo Point 24 4 3 2 Configure the Transducer Power Supply Module In configuration level Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press In this example Mod 4 Mod Ident As a single output module only 4A is available Meas Value PU as many times as necessary to select the module in which the Transducer Power Supply is fitted 2 Press to scroll to Voltage and or to change to 10 Volts An excitation of 10V will give and input of 2mV V i e 20 0mV Shunt has no effect for a load cell 290 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 24 4 3 3 Transducer Values In configuration level Do This The Display You Should See A
13. Control Setpoint Loop Generator SP Measured Simplified Control Function Block temperaturel Figure 21 1 Single Loop Single Channel The actual measured temperature or process variable PV is connected to the input of the controller The PV is compared with a setpoint SP or required temperature If there is an error between the set and measured temperature the controller calculates an output value to call for heating or cooling The calculation depends on the process being controlled In this controller it is possible to select between a PID On Off Boundless or Bounded Valve Position algorithm The output s from the controller OP are connected to devices on the plant which cause the heating or cooling demand to be adjusted resulting in a change in PV which in turn is measured by the sensor This is referred to as closed loop control 21 2 Control Loop Function Blocks The control loop consists of a number of function blocks The parameters associated with each function block are presented in sub headings Each sub heading is listed under the overall page header Lp Lp1 for the first loop and LP2 for the second loop The function blocks described in this chapter are Sub heading Typical Parameters Section Number Main Overview of the main parameters such as Auto Manual select 21 3 current PV current output demand selected setpoint value and working setpoint value Setup To config
14. a Os On 402 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers Load 20 1 UsrVal 25A Count TS Ripple Carry Sil RTClock En 6 3 1 Run 15 3 1 Run Hold Func Run Hold Key Run Hold Key 7 Safe OP 7181 SBreak 162 SBrk Alarm PV Input Sbrk OP Lp OP 21 8 1 SBrk Type PV Input SBrk Type O 10 3 SBrk Value PV Input d SBrk Value od od Res n Res n Res n NI NI On Ww w N N Ni NM NS Reset Reset Reset Res n Resol n Resolution Resolution N N SbyAct SbyAct SbyAct M 10 3 Lp Diag 21 9 Jun 13 00 N AJ lt gt gt O N Scale Lo Sched CBH Sched CBL Sched LpBrk Part No HA027988 Issue 15 User Manual Lp Diag 2 Lp PID 5 Parameter Sched MR Sched OPHi Sched OPLo Sched PB Sched R2G Sched Td Sched Ti Sched Type Access 3 2 Prog Edit Sync All 22 17 1 Scroll Key Segment Single Program Edit ea NA Prog Edit Sync All ZA Tol Single Program Edit 22 19 1 Segment Segment Type Segment Type Prog Edit Sync All 22 17 1 Segments Left Segments Used Segments Used Single Program Edit 22 NGS 6 n J w Segs Per Prog Select Select Selected IP SelMax SelMin SensorB Serial Num Program Setup 22 16 Single Program Edit 22 19 1 Lp SP 21 7 1 nst In Program Setup 16 Mstrcomms 14 9 2 16 7 7 Servo Servo Servo ToPV Show MAC Shunt Shunt State SkipSeg SlvData
15. set this to the time required for the Dwell It is also possible to set up a guaranteed soak for this segment so that it does not proceed until the segment has been at SP for the required time At Time Event set this to Event 1 Note Time Event will only be displayed if TimeEvent has been turned on in configuration level in the Program Setup page Then set the time delay into the segment at which the event is to turn on followed by the time when it is to turn off Note On and Off times are both referenced to the start of the segment please refer to section 22 4 2 for further details Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 273 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 22 17 5 2 Example 2 Configure Segment 3 to Wait For Digital Input LA Refer to Chapter 5 for step by step instructions to wire a parameter through the user interface ls 2 3 4 In configuration level select Program Setup page and the parameter Prgln1 Press A MAN the display will show Wire From Press until LgclO LA is shown followed by to select PV Press A MAN again and to OK In the Program Setup page the parameter Prgin1 will have the symbol ES displayed to the left of the parameter name to indicate that it has been wired to a parameter In Program Edit page select Wait as the Segment Type in the relevant segment Then select Wait For Prgln1 When the
16. to Lo and Confirm The display will show Go followed by Busy while the controller automatically calibrates to the minimum position When complete Passed should be displayed If Failed is displayed this may indicate that the potentiometer is outside the range of the input Adjust the potentiometer for the maximum required position This may not necessarily be on the end stop Repeat 2 above for the Hi position The controller will now use these values until it is powered down If it required to store these values which is the usual case press O or O to Accept The controller will store these values for future use Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 11 Chapter11 1O Expander The lO Expander is an external unit which can be used in conjunction with the 3500 series controllers to allow the number of digital lO points to be increased There are two versions 10 Inputs and 10 Outputs 20 Inputs and 20 Outputs Each input is fully isolated and voltage or current driven Each output is also fully isolated consisting of four changeover contacts and six normally open contacts in the 10 IO version and four changeover and sixteen normally open contacts in the 20 lO version Data transfer is performed serially via an IO Expander module which is fitted in the J serial communications slot This module is identified as IOExp in the Comms J parameter l
17. will be applied to loop 1 The numbers of characters is limited to 11 for both 3504 and 3508 although truncated to 10 for the 3508 Custom loop names are over written when the loop is being auto tuned by the default text Loop 1 Loop 2 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 339 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 27 18 Example 1 To Configure Lgc2 Operator 1 In this example when either input 1 or 2 is true OR the output text will read Open When neither input is true it will read Closed 1 SelectLg2 1 2 Select either OutUsrTxtOff or OutUsrTxtOn and enter the required text in the Value column se MEE File Device Explorer View Options Window Help El B a ph h T x E G e Mew File Open File Load Save Print Scan Add Remove Access Views Help craphical Wiring EBParameter Explorer EBlDevice Panel Terminal Wiring Brbevice Recipe La Watch Recipe HHProgramm ARYCOM1 ID00 1 3504 COM1 1D001 3504 Parameter Explorer Lec2 1 Wired From Logic Operation OR El AlmSum mary Input Value 1 ie 1 00 Input Value 2 Ages 0 00 FallbackType Fallback Condition FALSEBAD 04 7 Invert sense of Input alue None 0 7 Out The Result 4024 Open 1 7 Status Output Status Good 0 gt OutlsrTtCf User Text to replace Off forthe Output OutUsrTxtGn User Text to replace On for the Output Open Comms Commstab Level 2 Engineer 3504 w E2 30 OutsrTxtof User Text to replace Off for the Output 27
18. 16300 0092 wove 2068 1020 512 250 128 os 2 resareguen 0 1 0 7 0 rtorriolfol olefoforolo Word 2 is the parameter value For Type Ramp the enumeration is 1 Tene ele ol e 7 s 4 s 2 7 0 Decimal 32768 16384 8192 4096 2068 1023 512 256 128 oa 32 16 8 4 2 1 Readreques 0 o J o o o lo oloo lolo ooe Parameter value 1 puts 0000 0000 0000 0001 into Word 2 Response Wait for one of the following responses to be received a Assuming that the write request has been successful The command code for an extended read request is 3000 hex The parameter address is 1500 hex so the response is 3000 1500 4500 hex Bitno ee n an 16384 8192 4096 a e gt Ee 128 64 32 16 8000 4000 2000 1000 800 400 200 100 80 40 20 10 Function Command code Reserved Parameter Tag Address ea ee ce E A A EA Oe E b Ifthe write request was unsuccessful the error response is Error code 7000 hex parameter address 1500 hex 8500 hex CA A ee ee O a 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8000 4000 2000 1000 800 400 200 100 80 40 20 10 Function Command code Reserved Parameter Tag Address O E E tpojojfojojojfo Generally it is only required to write to this parameter once en send the clear command as shown in the previous examples then repeat the above for the remaining parameters starti
19. 6 The beacons on the top banner show the status of the program e g RUN HLD Assuming the Program Status screen has been selected as the summary screen the progress of the program can be read from a list of parameters in this view These are typically 1 Program number or name if a program name has been configured 2 Current segment Number and Type 3 Segment time left 4 Delayed start Counts down to 0 before starting the program execution The delay may be cancelled by setting itto O while counting down Note When the delay is 1 minute and as the resolution is minute the delay is decremented and appears to have a value of O for 1 minute 5 Current Status Run Hold or Reset 6 PSP the current value of the setpoint 7 Segment Target the value of the SP required at the end of the segment 8 Segment Rate 9 Cycles left 10 Fast run 11 Status of event outputs 12 Program time left 13 Segment time left 14 The above parameters are also available for Ch2 It is possible to toggle between channel 1 and channel 2 using Eis 22 18 Alternative Ways to Edit a Program e Tools may be used to enter or edit programs See Chapter 27 for a description e A program may also be set up using SCADA communications See Appendix A IfiTools Program Editor is connected then any editable program related parameter cannot be changed for a period of time approximately 1 minute After this period these parameters are releas
20. DewPoint Zirconia control process value The O2 or dew point value derived from temperature and remote gas reference inputs SootAlm L3 R O No alarm Probe sooting alarm output Not if ProbeType xZircoDew output Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 In alarm NI D 3500 Series Controllers User Manual List Header Zirconia Sub headers Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select or o to change Level PVFrozen This is a Boolean which freezes the PV during a purging cycle It may have been wired for example to disable control output during purging CleanStat The burn off state of the zirconia probe Waiting Cleaning Recovering CleanProb Enable clean probe Do not clean This may be wired to initiate automatically or probe if un wired can be set by the user Initiate probe A 00 ProbeStat Indicates the status of the probe OK Normal Isa R O working mVSbr Probe input in sensor break TempSbr Temperature input in sensor break MinCalcT Probe deteriorating Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 175 User Manual 3500 series Controllers Zirconia Table 3 Probe Type equations shown in Table 3 are no longer recommended and are included for compatibility with existing installations Table 3 includes Oxygen probes only i e xBoschO2 17 xLogO2 16 X O2 15 List Header Zirconia Sub headers Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select or a
21. End of Autotune Autotune Figure 21 9 Autotune at Setpoint Action Start of Autotune A test is done at the start of autotune to establish the conditions for a tune at setpoint The conditions are that the SP must remain within 0 3 of the range of the controller if PB Units Setup list is set to Percent If PBUnits is set to Eng then the SP must remain within 1 engineering unit 1 in 1000 Range is defined as Range Hi Range Lo for process inputs or the range defined in section 7 2 1 for temperature inputs The output is frozen at the current value for one minute and the conditions are continuously monitored during this period If the conditions are met during this period autotune at setpoint is initiated at B If at any time during this period the PV drifts outside the condition limits a tune at setpoint is abandoned Tuning is then resumed as a tune from above or below setpoint depending on which way the PV has drifted Since the loop is already at setpoint there is no need to calculate a Tune Control Setpoint the loop is forced to oscillate around the Target Setpoint Initiate oscillation the process is forced to oscillate by switching the output between the output limits From this the period of oscillation and the peak to peak response is measured PID terms are calculated An extra heat stage is provided and all heating and cooling power is turned off at H allowing the plant to respond nat
22. N Setpoint 2 is the secondary setpoint of the controller It is often used as a standby setpoint SP HighLim Maximum limit allowed for the local Between Range Hi and SP Range L3 setpoints LowLim Hi SP LowLim Minimum limit allowed for the local Between SP HiLim and Range Lo Range ES setpoints Lo Alt SP En To enable the alternative setpointto be No Alternative setpoint used This may be wired to a source disabled such as the programmer Run input Alternative setpoint See note 1 enabled Alt SP This may be wired to an alternative source such as the programmer or remote setpoint See note 1 Rate Limits the maximum rate at which the Off or 0 1 to 9999 9 engineering working setpoint can change units per minute The rate limit may be used to protect the load from thermal shock which may be caused by large step changes in setpoint RateDone Flag which indicates when the setpoint No Setpoint changing R O is changing or completed Yes Complete SPRate Setpoint rate disable Does not appear No Enabled Off L3 Disable if Rate Off Yes Disabled No Servo to PV Enable ServoToPV Disabled When Rate is set to any value other Yes Enabled than Off and Servo to PV is enabled changing the active SP will cause the working SP to servo to the current PV No Conf R O in L3 before ramping to the new target SP L3 Trim is an offset added to the setpoint Between SP Trim Hi and SP Trim The trim may be either
23. PID demand limit This will normally be 100 3 Repeat the above for Disp Lo This will normally be set to zero y rr In this example the output will 4 Press to scroll to Range e Hi 9 Lac 10 switch on for 8 of the time when Dise Lo 4 Be the PID demand signal is at 0 Ds tesa arae ye A Gi es S Press al eee Brass Lo Similarly it will remain on for 90 upper output limit 6 Repeat the above for Range Lo to set the lower switching limit 92 of the time when the demand signal is at 100 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 9 Chapter9 AA Relay Output A changeover relay is standard on all 3500 series controllers and is connected to terminals AA normally open AB common and AC normally closed Parameters in the RlyAA list allow the relay functions to be set up 9 1 To Select AA Relay List Select Level 3 or Configuration level as described in Chapter 3 Then press as many times as necessary until the header RlyAA is displayed 9 2 AA Relay Parameters List Header RlyAA No Sub headers Name Parameter Value Default Access to select Description O or a to change Level To configure the On off output Conf O Time proportioning output wor Parameters available if lO Type is configured as Time Proportioning List Header RlyAA No Sub headers Name Parameter Value Default Access to select Desc
24. Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 241 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 22 2 Programmer Types 22 2 1 Time to Target Programmer Each segment consists of a single duration parameter and a set of target values for the profiled variables 1 The duration specifies the time that the segment takes to change the profiled variables from their current values to the new targets 2 A dwell type segment is set up by leaving the target setpoint at the previous value 3 A Step type segment is set up by setting the segment time to zero Setpoint Time 4 min 3 min 4 min 2 min Figure 22 2 All Segments Configured as Time to Target A SyncAll programmer can only be set as a Time to Target programmer 22 2 2 Ramp Rate Programmer A ramp rate programmer specifies it s ramp segments as maximum setpoint changes per time unit Each segment can be specified by the operator as Ramp Rate Dwell or Step see section 22 3 for a full listing of segment types Ramp Rate the setpoint changes at a rate in units time 2 Dwell the time period is set there is no need to set the target value as this is inherited from the previous segment 3 Step specify target setpoint only the controller will use that setpoint when the segment is reached Setpoint Time 25 per min 3min 12 5 per min 25 min Figure 22 3 Ramp Rate Programmer A SyncStart programmer can be set as a Ramp Rate or Time to Target programmer 242 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13
25. Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 15 3 1 Totaliser Parameters List Header Total Sub headers 1 to 2 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access Go Core Level to select Press or to change values Thetotalised valve 99999 t o 19999 A R O L3 The value to be totalised 9999 9 to 9999 9 Note the totaliser stops accumulating if the input is Bad Units Totaliser units None Cont AbsTemp V mV A mA PH mmHg psi Bar mBar RH mmWG inWG inWW Ohms PSIG 02 PPM CO2 CP sec RelTemp Vacuum sec min hrs Res n Totaliser resolution XXXXX Alarm SP Sets the totalised value at 99999 to 99999 L3 which an alarm will occur Off Alarm OP This is a read only value Alarm inactive Off L3 On Alarm output active Total gt Alarm Setpoint Run Runs the totaliser No Timer not running No L3 Yes Select Yes to run the timer No No L3 Yes which indicates the alarm output On or Off The totalised value can be a positive number or a negative number If the number is positive the alarm occurs when Total gt Alarm Setpoint If the number is negative the alarm occurs when Hold Holds the totaliser at its Timer notin hold current value Hold timer Note The Run amp Hold parameters are designed to be wired to for example digital inputs Run must be on and Hold must be off for the totaliser to operate Reset Resets the totali
26. pee parameter Is Clear highlighted its Tag number is shown Tag 1 00001 Use Demand Data Number of Output Words The Tag number is the same as the Modbus address Description Eurotherm 3508 3504 Phase 2 ay i Chapter P ters placed into this wind il be placed into the Profibus Output Data Use d d drop t t d withi arameters placed into this window will be placed into the Profibus Output Data Use drag and drop to move parameters around within 30 MODBUS the window SCADA TABLE 140 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Example Produce a GSD file to allow gain scheduling using a PID settings stored in a PLC Input Data e Process Variable Output Data e Proportional Band e Integral Time e Derivative Time e Cutback High e Cutback Low In this application the PLC monitors Process Variable actual temperature and when it passes into a particular pre set band sets the output data parameters from settings stored in the PLC A limit of 117 total input and output words including the requirements for demand data is imposed by the configurator When this limit is reached it will no longer be possible to add parameters into either the input or output lists until other parameters have been deleted Note that some masters are unable to deal with more than 32 inputs and 32 outputs To obtain a summary of the I O memory map for the current GSD file select View I O map f
27. sub protocol This allows read write access to any parameter within the controller using Tags which identify the parameters Each parameter has a unique 16 bittag Parameter tags are the same as the modbus addresses a list of which is given Chapter 30 MODBUS SCADA TABLE The tags are also shown in the GSD File Editor and also in iTools When Demand Data is used the first four 16 bit registers of the PROFIBUS DP Output data are reserved to encode a request message using the protocol The control program is responsible for writing values into the first four registers to make requests The instrument uses the first four registers of PROFIBUS DP input data as a response message to return values and indicate success or failure of the operation that was requested Demand Data is enabled by the PROFIBUS DP master setting the first byte of the module configuration data to 73 hex This is done automatically Home Run Alar when the check box Use Demand Data in the Profibus GSD Editor Tag 1 040001 program is selected gt isien Demand Data is supported by standard software in many PLCs and can be implemented as part of the PLC program Demand Data uses the first 8 bytes in both the request and response message of the cyclic Data Exchange Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 141 User Manual 14 5 6 1 Demand Data Structure 142 Read Request from Master ol Register Number The first four registers are rese
28. 0 Off 0 Off 0 NoError 0 Off 0 noon Level 2 Engineer 3504 v F2 17 EnablePIbSched Enable Programmer PID Set a Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 345 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 27 13 Cloning The cloning feature allows the configuration and parameter settings of one instrument to be copied into another Alternatively a configuration may be saved to file and this used to download to connected instruments The feature allows new instruments to be rapidly set up using a known reference source or standard instrument Every parameter and parameter value is downloaded to the new instrument which means that if the new instrument is used as a replacement it will contain exactly the same information as the original Cloning is generally only possible if the following applies e The target instrument has the same hardware configuration as the source instrument e The target instrument firmware i e Software built into the instrument is the same as or a later version than that of the source instrument The instrument firmware version is displayed on the instrument when power is applied AN It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the information cloned from one instrument to another is correct for the process to be controlled and that all parameters are correctly replicated into the target instrument Below is a brief description of how to use this feature Further details are available i
29. 0 FalseBad The output value is FALSE if one or both of the inputs is and the status is BAD eee 1 TrueBad The output value is TRUE and the status is BAD 2 FalseGood The output value is FALSE and the status is GOOD 3 TrueGood The output value is TRUE and the status is GOOD Invert The sense of the input value Neither input inverted a ala both of the inputs ae P Invert both inputs Output The output from the operation Output activated is a boolean true false value Output not activated a 184 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 18 2 Eight Input Logic Operators The eight input logic operator may be used to perform operations on eight inputs It is possible to enable two eight input logic operators from the Inst Opt page When this is done a page headed Lgc8 can be found using the button This page contains up to two instances which are selected using the W or button 18 2 1 Eight Input Logic Operator Parameters List Header Lgc8 8 Input Operators Sub headers 1 to 2 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press or a to change values Level OFF To select the type of operator Operator turned off Conf Output ON when all inputs are L3 R O ON Output ON when one input is ON Exclusive OR This parameter is used to configure the number of inputs for the operation Invert Used to invert selected inputs l l prior to
30. 1 ua Counter Output 11273 ______On j DigAlarm Inhibit 11271 No 0 1 3 Humidity Latch 11268 None 0 IPMonitor Alarm Acknowledge 11274 No 0 Lac2 Block 11270 No 0 Loc8 Priority 11269 Med 2 J Lin16 Delay Time 11272 0 EUROTHERM COM1 1D001 3504 The simulation shows how the controller display will appear when the event is true Figure 27 12 To Configure Digital Alarms 320 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 27 10 Graphical Wiring Editor Select E Graphical aias GWE and monitor parameter values to view and edit instrument wiring You can also add comments 1 Drag and drop required function blocks into the graphical wiring from the list in the left pane 2 Click on parameter to be wired from and drag the wire to the parameter to be wired to do not hold mouse button down 3 Right click and choose Edit Parameter Value to change values 4 Select parameter lists and switch between parameter and wiring editors 5 Download to instrument when wiring completed 6 Add comments and notes 7 Dotted lines around a function block show that the function requires downloading iTools loj x File Device Wiring View Options Window Help os U 6 pF X Q New File Open
31. 10Vdc power GOJA White supply Ep o 30 1KQ oC Internal ee i switch to lt D Red connect Rcal Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 23 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 1 7 14 Analogue Input T C RTD V mA mV Slots 1 3 4 amp 6 only e Hardware Code AM e Typical Usage Second PV input Remote setpoint e Isolated 240Vac CATI Thermocouple 3 wire RTD eee or 1 4 to 2V Go A e A ne 6 B 09 B acd C For 2 wire 60 C eee x this i i 1_09 P iscailine x D A Current mV 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA 40mV or 80mV mVolt source Current source 2 490 resistor supplied ala all U OO WD D 1 7 15 Analogue Input Zirconia Probe e The temperature sensor of the zirconia probe can be connected to the Fixed PV input terminals V and V or to an Analogue Input module terminals C amp D The Volt Source connected to an Analogue Input module terminals A amp D Fixed PV or an Analogue Analogue Input Module Input Module Ie i
32. 15 2 2 On Pulse Timer Mode This timer is used to generate a fixed length pulse from an edge trigger e The output is set to On when the input changes from Off to On e The output remains On until the time has elapsed e Ifthe Trigger input parameter recurs while the Output is On the Elapsed Time will reset to zero and the Output will remain On e The triggered variable will follow the state of the output The diagram illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different input conditions Elapsed Time Triggered oo T y Input Interval gt Time Output Elapsed Time Triggered DL Figure 15 4 On Pulse Timer Under Different Input Conditions Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 161 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 15 2 3 On Delay Timer Mode 162 This timer provides a delay between the trigger event and the Timer output e The Outputis OFF when the nputis OFF or has been On for less than the delay time e The elapsed time will increment only when the nputis ON and will reset to O when the nput goes OFF e With the nputON and once the 7 me has elapsed the Output will be set to ON e The Outputwill remain On until the nputis cleared to Off e The riggered variable will follow the nput The following diagrams illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different nout conditions Time When the elapsed time is e pi lessthan the set time no Input Output is generated Time O
33. 249 invalid 250 analogue IP 251 dual dc OP 252 HRDCOut O triple logic IP 7 triple logic OP 8 transmitter PSU 14 transducer PSU 20 tri contact IP 21 single logic 24 pot IP 32 dual relay 35 dual triac 40 changeover relay 48 relay 49 triac 56 no module 63 bad ident 242 dc OP 243 dc retrans 249 invalid 250 analogue IP 251 dual dc OP 252 HRDCOut O triple logic IP 7 triple logic OP 8 transmitter PSU 14 transducer PSU 20 tri contact IP 21 single logic 24 pot IP 32 dual relay 35 dual triac 40 changeover relay 48 relay 49 triac 56 no module 63 bad ident 242 dc OP 243 dc retrans 249 invalid 250 analogue IP 251 dual dc OP 252 HRDCOut 0x33CO Zirconia 1 CleanProbe O No 1 Yes MAICI Zirconia 1 Time2Clean aa Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Parameter Enumerations 0x33C2 Zirconia ProbeOeet J O S 0x33C3 Zirconia t CleanFreq J oO oOo 0x33C4 Zirconia t CleanTime J S 0x33C5 Zirconia MaxRcovTime Sd AA EE i EAN MODBUS MODBUS 13250 13251 13252 13253 13254 13255 13256 13257 13258 0 33C6 03307 0x338 0x33C9 Ox33CA Zirconia 1 ProbeType 25 MMI 26 AACC 26 Drayton 27 Accucarb 29 SSI 30 MacDhui 31 Bosch 32 BarberC 33 Feranova 34 ProbeMV 35 Eurotherm 13259 13260 13261 13262 13263 13264 13265 13266 13267 13268 13269 13270 13271 13272 13273 13274 13275 13276 13312 13313 133
34. 322 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 Part No HA027988 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 27 10 3 1 Function Block Context Menu Right click in the function block to show a context menu which has the following entries Function Block View Re Route Wires Re Route Input Wires Re Route Output Wires Show Wires Using Tags Hide Unwired Connections Copy Delete Undelete Bring To Front Push To Back Edit Parameter Value Parameter Properties Parameter Help 27 10 4 Tooltips Brings up an iTools parameter list which shows all the parameters in the function block If the block has sub lists these are shown in tabs Throw away current wire route and do an auto route of all wires connected to this block Only do a re route on the input wires Only do a re route on the output wires Adds named tags to wires Displays only those parameters which are wired and hides all unwired connections Right click over an input or output and copy will be enabled this menu item will copy the iTools url of the parameter which can then be pasted into a watch window or OPC Scope If the block is downloaded mark it for delete otherwise delete it immediately This menu entry is enabled if the block is marked for delete and unmarks it and any wires connected to it for delete Bring the block to the front of the diagram Moving a block will also bring it to the front Push the block to the back of the diagram Useful of ther
35. 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 22 3 22 3 1 22 3 2 22 3 3 22 3 4 22 3 5 Segment Types Depending on the type of program configured a segment may be set as Rate A Ramp segment provides a controlled change of setpoint from an original to a target setpoint The duration of the ramp is determined by the rate of change specified Two styles of ramp are possible in the range Ramp Rate or Time To Target The segment is specified by the target setpoint and the desired ramp rate The ramp rate parameter is presented in engineering units C F Eng per real time units Seconds Minutes or Hours If the units are changed all ramp rates are re calculated to the new units and clipped if necessary Dwell The setpoint remains constant for a specified period at the specified target The 3 operating setpoint of a dwell is inherited from the previous segment 1 EN Step The setpoint changes instantaneously from its current value to a new value at the beginning of a segment A Step segment has a minimum duration of 1 second Time A time segment defines the duration of the segment In this case the target setpoint is defined and the time taken to reach this value A dwell period is set by making the target setpoint the same value as the previous setpoint GoBack Go Back allows segments in a program to be repeated a set number of times The diagram shows an example of a program which is required to repeat the
36. Broadcast Comms Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 151 User Manual 14 8 2 14 8 3 152 Wiring Connections Broadcast Communications 3500 series Controllers The Digital Communications module for the master can be fitted in either Communications Module slot H or J and uses terminals HA to HF or JA to JF respectively The Digital Communications module for the slave is fitted in either slot J or slot H The wiring connections and the precautions shown in section 1 8 apply ElA422 ElA485 4 wire or ElA232 Rx connections in the master are wired to Tx connections of the slave Tx connections in the master are wired to Rx connections of the slave 3500 Slave 1 Master FIA422 ElA422 ElA485 EIA485 A wire 4 wire Terminal Function Terminal number Tx TxA HE or JE Tx TxB HF or JF Rx RxA HB or JB Rx RxB HC or JC Common HD or JD 3500 Tx Ty Slave 1 Master EIA232 ElA232 Rx Com Terminal Function Terminal number Tx HE or JE Rx HF or JF Common HD or JD Figure 2 Rx Tx Connections for EIA422 EIA485 5 wire EIA232 ElA485 2 wire Connect A in the master to A of the slave Connect B in the master to B of the slave This is shown diagrammatically below 3500 A Slave 1 Master EIA485 EIA485 B Com Terminal Function Terminal number B Tx HE or JE A Rx HF or JF Common HD or JD Figure 3 Rx Tx Connections ElA484 3 wire Example To Sen
37. EElsraphical Wiring EBParameter Explorer EDevice Panel ME Terminal Wiring BrDevice Recipe amp iWatch Recipe Programmer user Pages Mope l G Page 1 yx aala nal s Loop 1 Summary Page Loop 2 Summary Page Dual Loop Summary Page User Pages Main Display Loop Main PV El PRP COM1 IDOO 1 35 s amp 3 Access 9 Instrument EUROTHERM E IO Promote Parameter List 2 items E AlmSummary AS dle f COM1 ID COME text oniy Immediate SP Comms Programmer 1 Run ImmPSP no user text 9 Commstab haa Loop Programmer a 1 LQ Setup te lt E 2 Ga Program Selected User Page Selected Promote Parameter 2 Diag SegRate Level leveit vw ttemNr CyclesLef Promote Parampter Totals Style z FastRun EndOutpuf Used Items 2 Free ltems 62 0 00 0 00 Access y ImmPSP til 2 Drag and drop the ind parameter into the appropriate row 3 Level 2 Engineer Figure 27 6 Place Immediate Programmer Setpoint on a User Page This parameter can now be changed from the User Page on the controller when the programmer is in Hold Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 315 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 27 8 Recipe Editor Up to 8 recipes can be stored They can also be named by the user Recipes allow the operator to change the operating values of up to 24 parame
38. Engineer COM1 ID001 3504 User Page Editor Figure 27 4 User Pages Editor Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 311 User Manual 27 7 1 312 To Create a User Page CNA Conditional Text Value Only ESE split Row CEJ Single Aow E a Dual Aow m Triple Row EC Left origin Bar MA Centre origin Bar HC Ear Graph Title 1 HA Ear Graph Title 2 Descriptio User text only left justified Cancel 3500 series Controllers ge fi z Press 795 3 to select the page number 1 to 8 Double click in the first row of the table to the right of the instrument display The pop up window shows a list of styles Choose the style then select the parameter from the pop up list To enter user text where applicable either right click or double click under User Text If the style is text only you will be prompted to enter this as soon as the style is selected Right click in the list to Insert an item Remove an item Edit Wire Allows you to change the parameter selected Edit Text Allows you to enter your own text for the parameter displayed Edit Style This is shown in the pop up window Read Parameter Properties Open Parameter Help 6 Select the operator level at which the user page will be displayed DERAT lhe D 7 Ifa bar graph is displayed set the low and high graph axes n The format of the user page is shown in the instrument view EN EA 0 00 yoo The user page can now be saved and do
39. Fj Leo Volt i V orC source C D V or D th 24 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers 1 7 16 Zirconia Probe Construction Outer Electrode de Ceramic Insulator N Hot End ae Inner Electrode NY fe A ii eae ht Bi Zirconia Sensor fe eo Outer metallic shell of the probe Figure 1 6 Schematic of Zirconia Probe 1 7 17 Zirconia Probe Screening Connections User Manual Screen Zirc mV Thermocouple The zirconia sensor wires should be screened and connected to the outer shell of the probe if it is situated in an area of high interference Screen Outer Electrode lt NEO RA NS A ae X Inner Electrode Zirc mV j TER tA y Screened Cable Thermocouple Figure 1 7 Zirconia Probe Wiring Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 KW RR HR RI 25 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 1 8 1 8 1 Digital Communications Connections Digital Communications modules can be fitted in two positions in both 3508 and 3504 controllers The connections being available on HA to HF and JA to JF depending on the position in which the module is fitted The two positions could be used for example to communicate with iTools configuration package on one position and to a PC running a supervisory package on the second p
40. For a PID controller this means that the heater power decreases as the PV increases For an on off controller output 1 usually heat will be on 100 when PV is below the setpoint and output 2 usually cool will be on when PV is above the setpoint Hysteresis applies to on off control only and is set in the units of the PV In heating applications the output will turn off when the PV is at setpoint It will turn on again when the PV falls below SP by the hysteresis value This shown in Figures 21 16 and 21 17 below for a heat and cool controller The hysteresis is used to prevent the output from chattering at the control setpoint If the hysteresis is set to 0 then even the smallest change in the PV when at setpoint will cause the output to switch The hysteresis should be set to a value which provides an acceptable life for the output contacts but which does not cause unacceptable oscillations in the PV If this performance is unacceptable it is recommended that you try PID control Deadband Ch2 DeadB can operate on both on off control or PID control where it has the effect of widening the period when no heating or cooling is applied However in PID control its effect is modified by both the integral and derivative terms Deadband might be used in PID control for example where actuators take time to complete their cycle thus ensuring that heating and cooling are not being applied at the same time Deadband is likely to be used therefore
41. Offline 01063 On Of R O See section 14 3 for an ManRec AutoRec Conf explanation 0 0 to 60 0 seconds foo R O in 00 L3 WdogRecy 0 0 to Wdog Timeout Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 149 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 14 7 Comms Indirection Table 3500 series controllers make a fixed set of parameters available over digital communications using Modbus addresses This is know as the SCADA Table The SCADA Modbus address area is 0 to 16111 3EEFH There are three addresses reserved to allow Tools to detect the instrument 107 121 and 122 these cannot be set as a Destination value The following Modbus addresses have been reserved for use via the Comms Indirection Table By default the addresses have no associated parameters Modbus Range Decimal Modbus Range Hex 15360 to 15615 3C00 to 3CFF The programmer area 2000h 27BFh within the SCADA table is not supported When accessed here the parameter may be presented as scaled integer minutes or Native format and may be flagged as read only The Comms Table is used to make additional parameters which are not in the SCADA table available for specific applications It is recommended that iTools is used to set up the required table as shown in section 30 The following parameters are available in the Comms Table List Header Commstab Sub headers 1 to 250 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press D or MD to change values
42. POCO O CalStateHi Shown when the output is Channel C List Header Mod Sub headers 1C 2C or 4C 24V transmitter supply Channel type 24V PSU 24V transmitter supply aS L3 R O R O Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 103 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 10 3 5 Analogue Input The analogue input module provides additional analogue inputs for multi loop controllers or other multi input measurements List Header Mod Sub headers xA x the number of the slot in which the module is fitted Name Parameter Description Value Default Access O to select Press or to change values Level lO Type PV input type Selects input ThermoCpl Thermocouple Conf eN InnOS RTD Platinum resistance L3 R O thermometer HiZV High impedance voltage input typically used for zirconia probe T Res n Resolution XXXXX to No decimal points to four X XXXX decimal points CJC Type To select the cold junction Internal See description in section 7 2 2 compensation method OC for further details 45 C 50 C External Off Sensor break type Low Sensor break will be detected when its impedance is greater than a low value Off ff L3 R O Conf Conf Conf Internal SBrk Type Conf High Sensor break will be detected when its impedance is greater than a high value o No srta Manual latching See also OO Sets the alarm action whena sensor break condition is Chapter 12 detected No latching Alarms
43. Resolution Linearity error Calibration error Drift with temperature Common mode rejection Series mode rejection Input leakage current Input impedance 10V Range Range Resolution mV Resolution Linearity error Calibration error Drift with temperature Common mode rejection Series mode rejection Input impedance Notes 1 2 Transmitter PSU LA and LB Rating Isolation Digital lO LA and LB Isolation Input Rating Functions Output Rating Functions AA Relay Type Rating Isolation Functions Input Output Modules Part No HA027988 Issue 15 User Manual 14nA 100MQ lt 3 3uV with 1 6sec filter 80mV to 80mV 16 bits lt 0 033 best fit straight line lt 7 5uV 0 052 of measurement at 25 C lt 0 2uV C 28ppm C of measurement from 25 C gt 175dB maximum of 264Vrms gt 101dB maximum of 280mV pk pk 14nA 100MQ 1 4V to 2 0V lt 90uV with 1 6sec filter 16 bits lt 0 015 best fit straight line lt 420uV 0 044 of measurement at 25 C lt 125uV C 28ppm C of measurement from 25 C gt 155dB maximum of 264Vrms gt 101dB maximum of 4 5V pk pk 14nA 100MQ 3 0V to 10 0V lt 550uV with 1 6sec filter 16 bits lt 0 007 of reading for zero source resistance Add 0 003 for each 10 of source plus lead resistance lt 1 5mV 0 063 of measurement at 25 C lt 66uV C 60ppm C of measurement from 25 C gt 145dB maximum of 264Vrms allowed
44. The sub header is shown in the top right hand corner as Enb in the diagram To select a different sub header press wW or O or numerical e g AnAlm 1 Analogue Alarm 1 igure 4 3 Sub Header 4 1 2 To Access a Parameters in a Function Block Press the scroll button until the required parameter is located Each parameter in the list is selected in turn each time this button is pressed The following example shows how to select the first two parameters in the Alarm List All parameters in all lists follow the same format List Header Alarm Number 1 Alarm Type in this example Absolute or Full scale High Alarm Input level Press for further parameters This list is continuous and will scroll back to the top of the list OR Press to jump back to the top of the list Figure 4 4 Parameters 58 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 4 1 3 To Change the Value of a Parameter Press 4 or to raise or lower the value of an analogue numeric parameter or to change the selection of enumerated parameter options Any parameter preceded by is alterable provided the system is in a safe state to allow the parameter to be changed For example Program Number cannot be changed if the program is running it must be in Reset mode If an attempt is made to alter the parameter its value is momentarily replaced by and no value is entered 4 1 3 1 Analogue
45. X XXXX Input Input Value Range of the input wired to The input to the linearisation block Sub headers 1 to 2 To select the input type J K L R B N T S PL2 C PT100 Conf The linearisation type selects which of Linear SqRoot L3 R O the instruments linearisation curves is applied to the input signal The instrument contains a number of thermocouple and RTD linearisations as standard In addition there are a number of custom linearisations which may be downloaded using Tools to provide linearisations of non temperature sensors Conf L3 R O Units of the output None AbsTemp V mV A mA PH mmHg psi Bar mBar RH mmWG inWG inWW Ohms PSIG O2 PPM CO2 CP sec RelTemp Vacuum sec min hrs Conf L3 R O L OO L3 R O L E L L Conf Wt Ww Wt Ww Fallback Type Clip Bad For an explanation see The fallback strategy will come into Note 1 at the end of this effect if the status of the input value is section bad or if the input value is outside the range of input high scale and input low scale In this case the fallback strategy may be configured as DownScale E OO Good Good indicates the L3 R O value is within range and the input is notin sensor break Indicates the status of the linearised output Bad Indicates the Value is out of range or the input is in sensor break Note This is also effected by the configured fallback strategy I
46. ce lt Name gt Commstab An ee ee ene ee a DOut02 MW E a S Out ds 4 Loop 8 lt Name gt Programmer sama 10 cycle s e R Program a c DOut_03 Segment SenT T a T a oe y E a z lt Name gt Dia egType ime ime oBac ime ime Diag GobackSeg 3 DOut_04 GobackCycles 10 lt Name gt DOut_01 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 On 1 On 1 DOut_02 Off 0 On 1 On 1 Off 0 Off 0 lt Name gt DOut_03 DOut_04 DOut_05 DOut_06 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 On 1 Off 0 DOut_06 lt Name gt DOut_07 lt Name gt DOut_0 DOut_08 4444 4 4 4 4 44 4 4 4 4 4 4 TTP GR a TP TTT Tn a E mI DOut05 Fa E f DOut_08 lt Name gt a Y Level 2 Engineer 3504 v E2 14 P 27 12 4 Menu Entries and Tool Buttons Most of the menu entries documented above have an associated tool button that performs the same action Hold the mouse over each button to find out what it does 27 12 5 The Context Menu There is a context menu on the spreadsheet that has Select All Copy Paste Insert Paste Over Insert and Delete entries These perform the same actions as those in the Edit menu Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 333 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 27 12 6 27 12 7 27 12 8 27 12 9 Naming Programs The programs can be given names These names are saved in the program file and as comments in any clone file made from the i
47. continuous Program cycles apply to both channels In the event that one channel completes a cycle before the second channel has finished the first channel will automatically wait until the second channel has completed In other words there is an implied sync point at the end of each cycle so channel 1 will wait for channel 2 and visa versa to complete the first cycle before progressing to the next Servo Servo can be set in configuration so that when a program is run the setpoint can start from the initial controller setpoint or from the current process value Whichever it is the starting point is called the servo point This can be set in the program Servo to PV will produce a smooth and bumpless start to the process Servo to SP may be used in a Ramp Rate programmer to guarantee the time period of the first segment Note in a Time to Target programmer the segment duration will always be determined by the setting of the Segment Duration parameter Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 251 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 22 11 22 11 1 22 11 2 22 12 22 13 252 Power Fail Recovery In the event of power fail to the controller a strategy may be set in configuration level which defines how the controller behaves on restoration of the power These strategies include Continue The program setpoint returns immediately to its last value prior to the power down then return to the target setpoint at the ramp rate se
48. gt 92dB maximum of 5V pk pk allowed 62 5kQ to 667kQ depending on input voltage Calibration accuracy quoted over full ambient operating range and for all input linearisation types Contact Eurotherm for details of availability of custom downloads for alternative sensors 24Vdc 20mA with LA LB connected in parallel 264Vac double insulation from the PSU and communication Not isolated from each other 264Vac double insulation from the PSU and communication Voltage level Open 0 to 7 3Vdc Closed 10 8 to 24Vdc Contact Closure Open gt 12000 Closed lt 480Q Includes program control alarm acknowledge SP2 select manual keylock RSP select standby 18Vdc O 15mA min 9mA 10 Includes control outputs alarms events status Form C changeover Min 1mA O 1Vdc Max 2A O 264Vac resistive1 000 000 operations with external snubber 264Vac double insulation Includes control outputs alarms events status Jun 13 391 User Manual lO Modules 3508 lO Modules 3504 Analogue Input Module Calibration accuracy Sample rate Isolation Input filter Zero offset User Calibration Functions Thermocouple Range Types Effective resolution Linearisation accuracy Cold junction compensation Cold junction accuracy Resistance Thermometer Range Resistance Thermometer types Resolution C Effective Resolution Linearity error Calibration error Drift with temperature Common mode rejection Series mode rejection Lead resistanc
49. in on off control only The second example below adds a deadband of 20 to the first example HYST C Heating and Cooling i Type both on off SP 300 C HYST H Setpoint 300 C Control Action reverse Heating Hysteresis OP1 On j Heating 100 K Cooling Hysteresis No OP 10 C OP2 On Cooling 100 4 4 A Heating Coolingonat Cooling Heating on at off at SP SP HYST C offat SP SP HYST H 300 C 310 C 300 C 292 C Figure 21 16 Deadband OFF HYST C AND Settings SP 300 C o and Cooling Mailh both on off Setpoint 300 C Control Action reverse Heating Hysteresis 8 C OP1 On A O Heating 100 A Hysteresis No OP F A OP2 On Deadband set at 50 of f aa ea ee the cooling hysteresis i e cooling 100 T gt e 50C Power deadband i tt L a Heating Coolingonat Cooling off Heating on at offatSP SP HYST C atD BAND SP HYST H 300 C 310 C 305 C 292 C Figure 21 17 Deadband ON set at 50 of Cooling Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 21 9 Diagnostics Function Block These are generally read only parameters which may be used for diagnostic purposes They may be wired to produce an application specific strategy For example the loop break alarm may be wired to the PV of the AA Relay or other output module to produce a physical output if the loop break time is exceeded List Header Lp1 or Lp2 Sub header
50. therefore always a 16 bit word EA E si 32768 16384 8192 4096 mh E ES 256 128 64 32 16 8000 4000 2000 1000 400 200 100 80 40 20 10 1 Function E Parameter Tag Address Endon Set all these bits to 0 for a read request Resened to the value to be written for a write request on request 144 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Input Data Response The data encoded in these registers is to Respondto a message Request Response Word 1 Word 1 is a bit field containing the response code and the parameter tag if it is less than 16383 It is constructed as follows Tene e e nu A IC 7 ES E EE Decimal 32768 16384 6192 4096 2068 1023 512 256 128 64 32 ie e a le Function Response code Reserved Parameter Tag Address No Acknowledge null command All of these bits should be 0 following a No Command request command Successful read or write 1 Should be 0 request Should tain the parameter ta Unsuccessful 1 Should add E a read or write be 0 request Request Response Word 2 Echoes the extended parameter tag if it was included in the command mn mw pe pela ooe o ee 32168 2048 s12 256 128 These bits will all be 0 if extended addressing has not been required because the address is less than 2048 If the address required extended addressing then these bits will contain the parameter address Request Re
51. to change Level Probe Type Configures the type of probe to be used xBoschO2 17 Values shown here prefixed by x are no Oxygen longer used but are included for xLogO2 16 backwards compatibility X O2 15 Resol n Resolution of the calculated result MinCalcTp Minimum temperature at which the 99999 to 99999 720 L3 calculation will be valid OxygenExp The exponent units ofthe log oxygen type 24 to 24 calculation Only shown for O2 probes Tempinput Zirconia Zirconia probe temperature input value temperature input Zirconia probe temperature input value Temp range sd range TempOfts Sets a temperature offset for the probe 99999 to 99999 ProbelP Zirconia probe mV input 99999 to 99999 ProbeOffs Zirconia probe mV offset 99999 to 99999 Oxygen Calculated oxygen Only shown for O2 probe types ProbeFlt Probe Fault Indicates a sensor break fault PVFrozen This is a Boolean which freezes the PV during a purging cycle It may have been wired for example to disable control output during purging ProbeStat Indicates the status of the probe Probe input in sensor Temperature input in sensor break MinCalcT EM EM 176 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Gas References only shown for Probe Types NOT prefixed by x List Header Zirconia Sub headers GasRefs Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select or a to change Level CO_Local Referen
52. to digital inputs so that the state of the function y function can be controlled externally Page Key Scroll Key Auto Man Key Run Hold Key Prog Key The format of this table is used throughout this manual to summarise all parameters in a list The title of each table is the list header Column 1 shows the mnemonic Name of the parameter as it appears on the display Column 2 describes the meaning or purpose of the parameter Column 3 the value of the parameter Column 4 a description of the enumeration Column 5 the default value set when the controller is first delivered Column 6 the access level for the parameter If the controller is in a lower access level the parameter will not be shown When changing passwords please make a record the new password 56 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 4 Chapter4 Function Blocks The controller software is constructed from a number of function blocks A function block is a software device which performs a particular duty within the controller It may be represented as a box which takes data in at one side as inputs manipulates the data internally using parameter settings and outputs the data Some of these parameters are available to the user so that they can be adjusted to suit the characteristics of the process which is to be controlled A representation of a function block is shown below Name 3 corresponds to Loop Lp Fun
53. x1980 x19A0 x19C0 x19E0 0x1A00 0x1A20 0x1A40 0x1A60 0x1A80 Ox1AA0 x1ACO x1AEO x1B00 x1B20 372 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Programmer2 Sync Ch2 Segment1 Segment Segment Segment Segments Segment Segment Segment Segment Segmenti Segment Segment12 Segmenti3 Segment 4 Segments Segmenti Segmenti Segments Segment Segment20 Segment Segment22 Segment23 Segment24 Segment25 Segment2 Segment27 Segment28 Segient29 Segment30 Segment Segment32 Segment33 Segment34 Segments Segment3 Segment Segment3 Segment39 Segment40 Segment Segmenta Segment 3 Segment a Segment s Segment Segmentd7 Segmenta Segmenta Segment50 Reserved for future expansion 8576 0x2180 10175 0x27BF Programmer2 Sync Ch2 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 373 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 30 4 4 Parameters Available in Every Segment of a Programmer The following table lists the offsets for Segment parameters that are available over SCADA comms 1 30 4 5 Example Programmer 1 2 Segment 1 Parameters 7 Segment EndAction Segment OnTime The following table shows the Tag addresses for parameters available in Segment 1 for Programmers 1 and 2 Every segment has the same number of parameters each calculated by adding the offsets shown in the table above to the Segment Type parameter given in the table in section 30 4 3 Segment Data Table Pro
54. 0 5 11 bits 264Vac double insulation Jun 13 User Manual 393 User Manual Logic Input Modules Module types Isolation Rating Functions Logic Output Modules Module types Isolation Rating Functions Relay Modules Module types Isolation Rating Functions Triac Modules Module types Isolation Rating Functions Transmitter PSU Module Type Isolation Rating Transducer PSU Module Type Isolation Bridge voltage Bridge resistance Internal shunt resistor I O Expander Type Isolation Ratings Communications 394 3500 series Controllers Triple contact closure triple logic level No channel isolation 264Vac double insulation from other modules and system Voltage Level Open 3 to 5Vdc O lt 0 4mA Closed 10 8 to 30Vdc O 2 5mA Contact Closure Open gt 28kQ Closed lt 100Q Includes program control alarm acknowledge SP2 select manual keylock RSP select standby Single channel triple channel No channel isolation 264Vac double insulation from other modules and system Single 12Vdc 24mA source Triple 12Vdc 9mA source Includes control outputs alarms events status Single channel Form A Single channel Form C dual channel Form A 264Vac double insulation Min 100mA 12Vdc Max 2A 264Vac resistive Min 400 000 max load operations with external snubber Includes control outputs alarms events status Single channel dual channel 264Vac double insulation lt 0
55. 1 2 Action on Power Fail Programmer 1 2 Servo Action Programmer 1 2 Synchronisation Mode Programmer 1 2 Reset Event Outputs Programmer 1 2 Current Program 5193 9257 Mulas Programmer 1 2 Current Running Segment 5194 5258 5195 5239 5196 5260 5197 5261 5198 5262 5199 5263 5200 5264 5201 5265 5202 5266 5203 5267 5204 5268 5205 5269 5206 5270 Programmer 1 2 Program Status Programmer 1 2 Setpoint Programmer 1 2 Number of CyclesLeft Programmer 1 2 Current Segment Type Programmer 1 2 Current Target SP Value Programmer 1 2 Segment Ramp Rate Programmer 1 2 Program Time Left Programmer 1 2 PV Input Programmer 1 2 Setpoint Input Programmer 1 2 Event Output 1 Programmer 1 2 Segment Time Left Programmer 1 2 End of Segment Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 371 User Manual 30 4 3 Programmer Segment Address Assignement 3500 series Controllers The following table shows the address ranges set aside for the Programmer segments Segment48 6880 Segment49 6912 Segment50 6944 Reserved for future expansion 5312 0x14C0 5375 0x14FF Programmert Sync Ch Programmer Syne Chi Segment48 Segment49 Segments0 un tart Address hex x1440 x1480 O x1500 0x1520 0x1540 0x1560 0x1580 Ox15A0 0x15C0 0x15E0 0x1600 x1620 x1640 x1660 x1680 x16A0 x16C0 x16E0 x1700 x1720 x1740 x1760 x1780 x17A0 x17C0 x17E0 x1800 x1820 x1840 x1860 x1880 x18A0 x18C0 x18E0 x1900 x1920 x1940 x1960
56. 1 and 2 This means that calibration of the transducers can be done at this level although with some small limitations 24 2 1 Tare Calibration The 3500 controller has an auto tare function which is used for example when it is required to weigh the contents of a container but not the container itself The procedure is to place the empty container on the weighbridge and zero the controller Since it is likely that following containers may have different tare weights the auto tare feature is available in the controller at access level 1 provided Cal Enable is set to Yes in configuration level The procedure is as follows Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 Place the empty container on the weigh bridge 2 Press until the Txdr1 or 2 Txdri page is displayed ra 1200 06 Start Tare es 3 Press until Start Tare is Start Cal Mc displayed 4 Press a or M to select Yes The controller automatically calibrates the to the tare weight which is measured by the transducer and stores this value During this measurement the displays shown here will be shown If the calibration fails the message Cal Tagar Failed will be shown Cal Failed This may be due to the measured input being out of range This will also be shown in the parameter list Txdr1 Start Cal Start Hi Cal Cal Status vr al led 282 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series
57. 10359 Alarm 8 Inhibit 10360 0x2878 Alarm 8 Delay A 10361 0x2879 Alarm 8 Out 10362 0x287a Alarm 8 Ack 11264 0x2c00 DigAlarm 1 Type 8 None 9 Positive edge 10 Negative edge 11 Edge triggered 12 High 13 Low 11268 0x2c04 DigAlarm 1 Latch 11269 0x2c05 DigAlarm 1 Priority 11270 DigAlarm 1 Block 11271 DigAlarm 1 Inhibit 11272 DigAlarm 1 Delay AAA 11273 DigAlarm 1 Out 11274 Ox2c0a DigAlarm 1 Ack 11280 0x2c10 DigAlarm 2 Type 8 None 9 Positive edge 10 Negative edge 11 Edge triggered 12 High 13 Low 11284 0x2c14 DigAlarm 2 Latch 11285 0x2c15 DigAlarm 2 Priority 11286 0x2c16 DigAlarm 2 Block 11287 DigAlarm 2 Inhibit 11288 DigAlarm 2 Delay PA 11289 0x2c19 DigAlarm 2 Out 11290 Ox2cla DigAlarm 2 Ack 11296 0x2c20 DigAlarm 3 Type 8 None 9 Positive edge 10 Negative edge 11 Edge triggered 12 High 13 Low 11300 0x2c24 DigAlarm 3 Latch 11301 0x2c25 DigAlarm 3 Priority 11302 0x2c26 DigAlarm 3 Block 11303 0x2c27 DigAlarm 3 Inhibit 11304 0x2c28 DigAlarm 3 Delay A 11305 0x2c29 DigAlarm 3 Out 11306 Ox2c2a DigAlarm 3 Ack ES a 0x2c30 DigAlarm 4 Type 8 None 9 Positive edge 10 Negative edge 11 Edge triggered 12 High 13 Low 11316 0x2c34 DigAlarm 4 Latch 11317 0x2c35 DigAlarm 4 Priority 11318 0x2c36 DigAlarm 4 Block 11319 0x2c37 DigAlarm 4 Inhibit 11320 0x2c38 DigAlarm 4 Delay coo LLL 11321 0x2c39 DigAlarm 4 Out 11322 Ox2c3a DigAlarm 4 Ack 11328 0x2c40 DigAlarm 5 Type 8 None 9 Positive edge 10 Negative edge 11 Edge trigg
58. 1282 1287 Hex 0x0448 Parameter Loop 2 PID CutbackLow Loop 2 PID CutbackHigh Loop 2 PID RelCh2Gain Loop 2 OP Ch1TravelTime Loop 2 SP SP1 Loop 2 SP SP2 Loop 2 SP SPTrim Loop 2 PID ManualReset Loop 2 0P OutputHighLimit Loop 2 0P OutputLowLimit Loop 2 OP SafeOutVal Loop 2 SP Rate Loop 2 OP Rate Loop 2 Diag Error Loop 2 OP PotCalibrate Loop 2 PID ProportionalBand2 Loop 2 PID IntegralTime2 Loop 2 PID ManualReset2 Loop 2 PID DerivativeTime2 Loop 2 PID RelCh2Gain2 Loop 2 0P Ch1PotPosition Loop 2 Diag IntegralOutContrib Loop 2 SP SPTrimHighLimit Loop 2 SP SPTrimLowLimit Loop 2 PID ActiveSet Loop 2 SP RateDisable Loop 2 PID LoopBreakTime Loop 2 0P ManualOutVal Loop 2 0P Ch10ut Loop 2 0P Ch10OnOffHysteresis Loop 2 0P Ch20nOffHysteresis Loop 2 0P FeedForwardGain Loop 2 0P FeedForwardOffset Loop 2 OP FeedForwardTrimLimit Loop 2 SP SPHighLimit Loop 2 SP SPLowLimit Loop 2 Diag DerivativeOutContrib Loop 2 PID CutbackLow2 Loop 2 PID CutbackHigh2 Loop 2 0P Ch20Out Loop 2 OP TrackEnable Loop 2 OP TrackOutVal Loop 2 PID Boundary2 3 Loop 2 PID Boundary1 2 Loop 2 SP SPHighLimit Loop 2 SP SPLowLimit Loop 2 PID ProportionalBand3 Loop 2 PID IntegralTime3 Loop 2 PID ManualReset3 Loop 2 PID DerivativeTime3 Loop 2 PID RelCh2Gain3 Loop 2 PID ActiveSet Loop 2 0P FeedForwardVal Loop 2 OP PotCalibrate Loop 2 Diag PropOutContrib Loop 2 SP SPTrim Loop 2 Diag SBrk Loop 2 Diag LoopBreakAlarm 3500 series Controllers Enumerations
59. 14 Issue 14 adds furthe description of Profibus and changes to Modbus address list to include tag addresses and adds the following warning on battery life Issue 15 corrects the output rate limit from seconds to minutes and clarifies upscale and downscale fallback Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 9 User Manual A Warning Back up Battery This instrument is fitted with a battery designed to retain configuration and other settings in the event of a failure of the instrument power supply This battery has an expected life of 10 years minimum at a nominal ambient working temperature e g 25 C The battery life may be reduced if it is consistently operated in an elevated ambient temperature environment 10 3500 series Controllers Maintenance Schedule A battery failure is only evident following a failure of the instrument power supply The battery should be replaced at regular intervals Between 6 and 10 years is recommended depending on usage and operating temperature The battery is not user serviceable contact your local service centre to make suitable arrangements On older instruments contact your supplier to have the battery replaced prior to failure The age of the instrument is shown on the side label This contains a serial number where the last four characters either show the week number and year of manufacture WW YY or a date in the format UK YYWW It is important to maintain a record of instrumen
60. 18 1 Example 2 Configure User Text Block 1 In this example the output user text will show Large or Small depending on the state of a digital input in this case the LA input It can also be used to read TwoUnits 999Units or 1 Units depending on the value of an analogue input i e 2 999 or 1 respectively reat AE File Device Explorer View Options Window Help a El 3 h cP x D a ES New File Open File Load Save Print Scan Add Remove Access Views i Help craphical Wiring EBParameter Explorer ElDevice Panel MM Terminal wiring Brbevice Recipe amp twatch Recipe AYProgrammer Muser Pa COM1 1D001 3504 Parameter Explorer UsrTxt 1 OX a 4 YCOM1 1D001 3504 m ev 1 a Description Address Y Input 4 CustomList Custom List Out Output User Text LA Program 38 UsrTxt 3 1 Ga 2 3 3 eq 4 I Browse Level 2 Engineer 3504 v E2 30 Tole Lee ee i cheer F Fc Concal 1 Select UsrTxt 1 2 Press the ellipsis button in CustomList 3 A pop up window is shown In the pop up enter a value 1 and 0 are used for Booleans or Analogue values Any analogue value can be entered between 32767 and 32766 Enter text against the chosen value In this example when the input is true Large will be displayed When false Small is displayed The user text can also be wired to a source parameter In the above exa
61. 18 3 186 Maths Operators Maths Operators sometimes known as Analogue Operators allow the controller to perform mathematical operations on two input values These values can be sourced from any available parameter including Analogue Values User Values and Digital Values Each input value can be scaled using a multiplying factor or scalar The parameters to use the type of calculation to be performed and the acceptable limits of the calculation are determined in Configuration level In access level 3 you can change values of each of the scalars The Math Operators page is only available if the operators have been enabled in Inst page sub header Opt It is possible to enable any one of 24 separate calculations they do not have to be in sequence In the Inst Opts page they are shown in three sets of 8 labelled Math2 En1 enable operator set 1 to 8 Math 2 En2 enable operator set 9 to 16 and Math En3 enable operator set 17 to 24 Math2 denotes a two input math operator When math operators are enabled a page headed Math2 can be found using the button This page contains up to twenty four instances which are selected using the or D button Input 1 Math operator Output Value result of calculation Input 1 Scalar Input 2 Input 2 Scalar Figure 18 3 2 Input Math Operators Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 18
62. 24 In1 4820 0x12d4 Math2 24 In2 4821 0x12d5 Math2 24 Out 4822 0x12d6 Lge2 1 1n1 4823 0x12d7 Lgc2 1 ln2 4824 0x12d8 Lgc2 1 Out 4825 0x12d9 Lgc2 2 1n1 4826 Ox12da Lge2 2 1n2 4827 0x12db Lgc2 2 Out 4828 0x12dc Lge2 3 1n1 4829 0x12dd Lgc2 3 In2 4830 0x12de Lgc2 3 Out 4831 0x12df Lge2 4 1n1 4832 0x12e0 Lgc2 4 In2 4833 0x12e1 Lgc2 4 Out 4834 0x12e2 Lgc2 5 In1 4835 0x12e3 Lgc2 5 In2 4836 0x12e4 Lgc2 5 Out 4837 0x12e5 Lgc2 6 ln1 4838 0x12e6 Lgc2 6 ln2 4839 0x12e7 Lgc2 6 Out 4840 0x12e8 Lgc2 7 ln1 4841 0x12e9 Lge2 7 In2 Enumerations O off 1 on O off 1 on O off 1 on O off 1 on Oo off 1 on O off 1 on 362 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual MODBUS MODBUS Parameter Enumerations 4842 4843 4844 4845 4846 4847 4848 4849 4850 4851 4852 4853 4854 4855 4856 4857 4858 4859 4860 4861 4862 4863 4864 4865 4866 4867 4868 4869 4870 4871 4872 4873 4874 4875 4876 4877 4878 4879 4880 4881 4882 4883 4884 4885 4886 4887 4888 4889 4890 4891 4892 4893 4894 4895 4896 4897 4898 4899 Ox12ea 0x12eb x12ec x12ed Ox12ee x12ef x12f0 x12f1 x12f2 x12f3 x12f4 x12f5 x12f6 x12f7 x12f8 0x12f9 0x12fa x12fb x12fc x12fd x12fe x12ff x1300 x1301 x1302 x1303 x1304 x1305 x1306 x1307 x1308 x1309 0x130a x130b 0x130c x130d x130e x130f x1310 x1311 0x1312 0x1313 x1314 x1315 x1316 x1317 x1318 x1319 x131a 0x131b x131c x131d x131
63. 5 AllMemory to clear the memory Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 29 Chapter 29 User Switches 29 1 The User Switch Function Block has been added from software version 2 70 A User Switch provides a general purpose boolean switch It is most useful when incorporated in a User Page where it can perform a specific task suited to the particular application Eight User Switches are available and each may be configured as Auto Reset the switch remains On for a minimum of 110ms after which is is automatically set to Off Manual Reset the switch remains On until it is set to Off manually The text associated with the State parameter Off On by default may be changed using iTools to suit the application requirements User Switch Parameters The parameters are only available if one or more User Switch function blocks are enabled see section 6 3 1 Use to page to the Switch heading List Header Switch Sub headers 1 to 8 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access O to select Press or to change values Level The selected switch may be ManReset the switch remains On until itis ManReset Conf configured as Manual or set to Off manually Automatic reset AutoReset the switch remains On for a minimum of 110ms after which is is automatically set to Off 29 2 1 From any display press as many times as necessary to select Switch 2 Se
64. 75A O 264Vac resistive Includes control outputs alarms events status Single channel 264Vac double insulation 24Vdc 20mA Single channel 264Vac double insulation Software selectable 5Vdc or 10Vdc 300Q to 15kQ 30 1KQ 0 25 used for calibration of 350Q bridge at 80 20 I O 4 Form C relays 6 Form A relays 10 logic inputs 40 I O 4 Form C relays 16 Form A relays 20 logic inputs 264Vac double insulation between channels 264Vac double insulation between channels Relay Min 100mA 12Vdc Max 2A O 264Vac resistive Logic input Open 3 to 5Vdc O lt 0 4mA Closed 10 8 to 30Vdc O 2 5mA Using EX comms module in comms slot J Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers Software features Control Number of loops Control types Cooling types Modes Overshoot inhibition Number of PID sets Control options Setpoint options Setpoint programmer Program function Program names No of profile channels Operation Events Segment types Digital inputs Servo action Power failure modes Other functions Process Alarms Number Type Latching Other features Digital Alarms Number Type Latching Other features Zirconia Number Functions Supported probes Gas reference Probe diagnostics Probe burn off Other features Humidity Number Functions Measurement Atmosphere compensation Other features Recipes Number Parameters Length of Name Selection Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 U
65. 902 3 4 818 902 3 4 Parameter 3500 parameter Hex decimal mnemonic L Remote Min Scalar UserVals UserVal7 Decimal Cycle time for channel 1 Mod1 Chn1 Min On Time Same Decimal as MT in 3500 Loop Cutback High also Decimal supported as Hb in 3500 Mod1 Chn1 Min On Time Same Decimal as CH in 3500 Instrument Identity Instrument ID 3508 E480 3504 E440 Display Maximum Bar graph max Display Minimum Bar graph min 378 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers 31 1 1 SW Status Word 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 818 902 3 4 Function Clear Set Data Format Free Fixed Sensor Break No Yes Key Lock Enabled Disabled Spare Spare Param changed via keys No Yes Spare Spare Alarm 2 state Off On Spare Alarm 1 state Off On Spare Alarm Active No alarm New Alarm1 or 2 SP2 Active SP1 SP2 Remote Active Local Remote Manual Mode Auto Man 31 1 2 OS Optional Status word Optional Status Word OS Bit 0 1 2 3 4 Part No HA027988 818 902 3 4 Function Clear Set Values of the first nibble Bits 0 3 represent Program Status Value of O Reset 2 Run 3 Hold 4 End 5 Ramp End 6 in holdback Value of 1 is not used Hold Logged R O Skip Current Segment w o Ramp Dwell Digital Input Lock Segment Number LSB Seg No Seg No Segment Number MSB Digital O P2 Off On Digital O P1 Off On Digital Input 2 Off On Dig
66. AO ie e ee P A Cn 1D Hoda thresholds EQ added to OR Aimi LE Fanmi bargraph Oh Tes O Pare J LI Lo f l r od Dawe haben Aaa a AS ta a OD Come l allin Elisi F pr A in ae se an Ba Fi Wisi Acedia la da 1 ane pry OPW Drein Laas apar e Pe r ped A A ia IP oe i ee Leg EF 507 A E oa oe EIF Ll a Edit alarm message Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Retransmission of Channel 1 Output Value The most common requirement is to retransmit parameters such as PV SP Output 1 or 2 or Error In 3500 controllers however it is possible to re transmit any wireable parameter The example below shows how to do this Select Graphical Wiring The view below shows a simple single channel controller with alarms The output is wired to the LA logic output for control purposes dEl RUN INEPERIGES i i 1 Drag and drop IO ModlDs block from the IO list Choose a module e g 1 and select DC Retran 2 Click on the parameter to be retransmitted in this case OP Ch1Out Drag a wire do not hold the mouse button down to Lt in the bottom right hand corner of O ModIDs block 3 Select Mod1 Ident in the pop up window 4 The procedure may be repeated if it required to retransmit other parameters via other modules Drag ee Chee Hike 235700 combo UTE Crapical Wiring Hairi Fats qua I When saved the dotted lines become solid
67. Blue Red Green and Set 4 M Parapara Chhai which has not been re named and is a copy of Green The values may be Copy Paramaisr cirit entered individually in the relevant field or snapshot all current values The Comment column may be hidden or revealed by selecting Columns in a the pop up A comment may simply be typed into the field AA CO b Some parameters such as Target SP which cannot be wired cannot be put into recipe In this case an error message is displayed COM1 ID001 3504 Device Recipe Editor em a x 5 A Tag List Parameter Description Value Tag Loop 1 5P SF setpoint 1 300 00 b 00 366 00 100 00 lag Loop1 5P 3P2 setpoint z 350 00 345 00 400 00 156 00 e Tag3 Loop1 HI ProporionalBand Proportional Bar 60 00 0 00 60 00 10 00 Tag4 Loop1 HID Integral Time Integral Time 444 00 gt 360 00 7 444007 21 00 7 z Tag Loop 1 FPIO DervativeTime Derivative Time at 0 60 00 Of iO 6 00 gt bi Tagh Tag Tags Tag 4 Tada 10 Es Figure 27 8 Example of Three Simple Recipes 316 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 27 8 2 Recipe Menu Commands 27 8 3 Part No HA027988 Load Recipe Save Edit Parameter Delete Parameter Edit Parameter Value Rename Parameter Tag Parameter Properties Copy Parameter Paste Parameter Columns Load Access Level Level1 Level2 Level3 Config Never Used t
68. Charged capacitors Before removing an instrument from its sleeve disconnect the supply and wait at least two minutes to allow capacitors to discharge It may be convenient to partially withdraw the instrument from the sleeve then pause before completing the removal In any case avoid touching the exposed electronics of an instrument when withdrawing it from the sleeve Failure to observe these precautions may cause damage to components of the instrument or some discomfort to the user Electrostatic discharge precautions When the controller is removed from its sleeve some of the exposed electronic components are vulnerable to damage by electrostatic discharge from someone handling the controller To avoid this before handling the unplugged controller discharge yourself to ground Cleaning Do not use water or water based products to clean labels or they will become illegible Isopropyl alcohol may be used to clean labels A mild soap solution may be used to clean other exterior surfaces of the product 386 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 32 3 Installation Safety Requirements Safety Symbols Various symbols are used on the instrument they have the following meaning A Caution refer to the accompanying documents Protective Conductor Terminal Personnel Installation must only be carried out by suitably qualified personnel Enclosure of live parts To prevent hands or metal tools touch
69. Comms Table The tables that follow do not include every parameter in the 3500 The Comms Table is used to make most parameters available at any SCADA address See also section 14 7 Sub folders 1 to 250 Source Source Parameter Taken from source parameter Conf Native Native Data Format 0 Integer Integer Conf 1 Native i e Float or long ReadOnly Read Only 0 Read Write R W Conf Read Write only if source is 1 Read Only R W Minutes Minutes 0 Seconds Seconds Conf Units in which time is scaled 1 Minutes It is recommended that iTools should be used to set up the required table Entering a value in the Source parameter may be done in two ways 1 drag the required parameter into the Source 2 right click the Source parameter select Edit Wire and browse to the required parameter In the Example below the PV of Loop 1 would be available at addresses 200 and 201 as a two register floating point number its native data type COM1 10255 Mini Parameter Explorer Commestab B 1 la Ja Ja ls Je Jr Je Ja Jw Ju Name Description ale Wired From 2 Destination Modbus Destination 00 amp Source Source Parameter 20331904 Loop 1 Main PY a Native Native Data Format Native 1 ReadOnly Read Only Read Only 1 amp Minutes Minutes Seconds 0 There are 250 comms table entries available 30 2 SCADA Addresses The address field in Tools displays the parameter s Modbus address Th
70. Conf A change made to a parameter takes a finite time Enter configuration mode then return to the to be entered If the power to the controller is required operating mode It may be necessary turned off before the change has been entered to re enter the parameter change since it will not then this alarm will occur have been entered in the previous configuration Do not turn the power off to the controller while ConF is flashing Calibration error Re instate Factory calibration EEPROM error Return to factory for repair Non vol memory error Note the error and contact your supplier E Lin Invalid input type This refers to custom Go to the INPUT list in configuration level and linearisation which may not have been applied set a valid thermocouple or input type correctly or may have been corrupted 12 7 To Set Up Alarms Using Tools iTools may be used to configure alarms and enter alarm messages See Chapter 27 for further details Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 123 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 13 Chapter 13 BCD Input 13 1 124 The Binary Coded Decimal BCD input function block uses a number of digital inputs and combines them to make a numeric value A very common use for this feature is to select a setpoint program number from panel mounted BCD decade switches The block uses 4 bits to generate a single digit Two groups of four bits are used to generate a two digit value 0 to 99 The block outputs four resu
71. Connected Instruments h Open Tools and with the controller connected press on the iTools menu bar Tools will search the communications ports and TCPIP connections for recognisable instruments Controllers connected with the configuration clip CPI will be found at address 255 regardless of the address configured in the controller The iTools Help Manual part no HA028838 provides further step by step instructions on the general operation of iTools This and the iTools software may be downloaded from www eurotherm co uk In the following pages it is assumed that the user is familiar with these instructions and has a general understanding of Windows h Sean m ors 4 A x aal Mihe wing Meroe Epor Mosie hand WTearmraiirg Esteve paye EivpoAste Aromas Bss Page Moet soe HToob Seni CES Linii E eiur EN ETA E doma OSADO op Erase D Freyan Lan 2 Eri Ta ES de In the View menu select Panel Views to show the controller fascia Press KA to change the controller between operator and configuration levels Figure 27 1 Opening View Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 27 5 Parameter Set Up Allows parameters to be configured E Parameter Explorer Press or double click the folder in the browser to get this view 2 Open up the parameter list by clicking on the required folder Double clicking another folder will
72. Controllers User Manual 24 3 Strain Gauge A strain gauge consists of a resistive four wire measurement bridge where all four arms are in balance when no pressure is being measured It is energised by the transducer power supply normally 5Vdc or 10Vdc which is a module fitted into any slot It is calibrated by switching a calibration resistor across one arm of the four wire measurement bridge For this reason the calibration is referred to as Shunt calibration The value of this resistor is chosen so that it represents 80 of the span of the transducer Some transducers have the calibration resistor fitted internally in the transducer itself In this case the parameter Shunt in the transducer power supply module is set to External If the transducer does not have a calibration resistor fitted set Shunt Internal In this case the controller uses its calibration resistor which is mounted in the power supply module The value of this resistor is 30 1KQ Consult the data provided by the transducer manufacturer to determine if this resistor is correct for the transducer in use If not it will be necessary to fit resistors externally to achieve the correct value 24 3 1 Calibration Using the Calibration Resistor Mounted in the Transducer This is illustrated using the following example Strain Gauge range 0 to 3000 psi output 3 33mV V this figure is quoted by the manufacturer Transducer power supply set to 10 Volt e
73. Diag Name Parameter Description Value Default Access A oe press on 2 t6 change values Level the PV Loop Mode Reads the mode of the loop i e it is Auto In iTools Manvel or Of mode oniy See sections 2 4 and 2 6 Loop off The requested control output this could L3 R O be the target of the active output if an output rate limit is configured Working output high limit This is the Wrk OPLo to 100 L3 R O value used to limit the output power of the loop and is derived from the gain scheduled limit the remote limit and the safety limit Working output low limit This is the 100 to Wkg OPHi L3 R O value used to limit the output power of the loop and is derived from the gain scheduled limit the remote limit and the safety limit Loop break alarm This is active when the Loop break not in alarm L3 R O loop break time LBT set in the PID list Yes Active section 21 5 10 is exceeded Prop OP Shows the contribution of the L3 R O Proportional term to the control output InOP Shows the contribution of the Integrator to the control output Deriv OP Shows the contribution of the Derivative to the control output Target OP Wrk OPHi Wrk OPLo Lp Break ESO L3 R O SensorB No sensor break alarm L3 R O Sensor break Sched PB These are the current values of the Sched e abla acer yr Sched Td Scheduling Sched OPLo The scheduled output low limit E Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 239 User Manual
74. Dwell 6 to Output 3 Ramp 7 to Output 3 Dwell 7 to Output 3 Ramp 8 to Output 3 Dwell 8 to Output 3 3500 series Controllers 3500 Support Fully supported Not supported Ignored always returns zero N A N A Not supported Ignored always returns zero Supported as described Relay AA status N A Supported as described Not supported This nibble is ignored and always returns zero 3500 Support Digital Event bit 3 for segment 1 ramp 1 Digital Event bit 3 for segment 2 dwell 1 Digital Event bit 3 for segment 3 ramp 2 Digital Event bit 3 for segment 4 dwell 2 Digital Event bit 3 for segment 5 Digital Event bit 3 for segment 6 dwell 3 Digital Event bit 3 for segment 7 ramp 4 ramp 3 Digital Event bit 3 for segment 8 dwell 4 Digital Event bit 3 for segment 9 ramp 5 Digital Event bit 3 for segment 10 dwell 5 Digital Event bit 3 for segment 11 ramp 6 Digital Event bit 3 for segment 12 dwell 6 Digital Event bit 3 for segment 13 dwell 7 Digital Event bit 3 for segment 14 Digital Event bit 3 for segment 15 ramp 8 ramp 7 Digital Event bit 3 for segment 16 dwell 8 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers 31 1 5 Digital Output Status Word2 02 User Manual Bit 0 1 15 DigOpStat1 02 818 902 3 4 Function Clear Set End to output 3 Not used Spare 3500 Support Digital Event bit 3 for En
75. Eso Message Emu Cour l Exoephonlounl Esceplion Count 0 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Tab 2 Master Comms Block 2 2704 Slave 2 is set up in Tab 2 The Master is continuously writing Target Setpoint parameter address 2 to Slave 2 at instrument address 3 using Function Code 6 The Target Setpoint for slave 2 is wired to the programmer PSP Programmer 1 Run PSP u OOM 0001 3508 Parameter Explorer Msircomms Made Block Mode Cont 0 Enable Masher Comms Block Enable Yes il Usrval2 al Port Master Comms Pol H 0 SuspendCount Faine Court Before Suspen 5 Suspend xceec Suspend Count Exceeded Ho SusperdARely Suspend Asty Interval 30s Hode Stave instrument Node Addy 3 Func Modbus Function Code Funcil E Address Parameter Access 2 7 ShDatal Shave Data 1 19620 Progrsmmer 1 Aun PSP e Formal Data Formal Sn 0 Factor Data Factor 1 000 Difset Cala Offset 0 000 ExcepborCode Last Modbus Exception Code o TrangactCount Total Transaction Count 466245 SuccessLount Successful Transachon Cour 46556 E morour Message Emor Count BES ExcephonCourt Exception Court 0 Tab 3 Master Comms Block 3 EPower Slave 3 is set up in Tab 3 The Master is continuously writing Remote Setpoint 1 parameter address 1294 to Slave 3 at instrument address 4 using Function Code 6 The Target Setpoint for Slave 3 is wired to the programmer PSP Program
76. Ethernet and Devicenet Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 14 3 1 14 3 2 14 3 2 1 14 3 2 2 14 3 2 3 14 3 2 4 14 3 2 5 14 3 2 6 Communications Identity The identity id shows that a communications board is fitted or not Protocol Modbus Jbus Protocol MODBUS defines a digital communication network to have only one MASTER and one or more SLAVE devices Either a single or multi drop network is possible All message transactions are initiated by the MASTER Eurotherm instruments communicate using the Modbus RTU binary protocol The JBUS protocol is identical in all respects but 1 is added to the MODBUS protocol parameter or register address Both use a numeric index but the JBUS index starts at 0 while the MODBUS index starts at 1 Modbus is available in the H or the J port modules 3500 series instruments have a fixed table of addresses referred to as the SCADA table which are designed for use with SCADA or PLC packages A full list ofthese addresses is given in Appendix A Every parameter may be addressed from the Tools OPC server using the OPC name Devicenet Protocol DeviceNet is a cost effective communications link designed to replace hardwired I O interconnection between industrial devices Devicenet is simple to use through the application of automated software configuration tools and simple wiring layouts Engineering cost and time to design c
77. File Load Save Print Scan Add Remove Access Views Help E Graphical Wiring Parameter Explorer E Device Panel ff Terminal Wiring BlaDevice Recipe Ej wWatch Recipe Programmer M User Pages Porc Scope BiTools Secure PRP COM 10001 3504 En 0M1 1D001 3504 Graphical Wiring gt ve N 59 100 E Xx 9a 13 wires used 237 fre go Comment 12 Monitor 2 D 10 ete ji Display BarMax Diagnostics PwrF F l pri AA TT Display BarMin Diagnostics EnCount Q BCDImput Main P Main vYorkingSP cl TF Comms Tune AutotuneEnable PID ActiveSet Display AuxBarval2 LF Counter Acti i A 7 Ol TF Dig larm 2 1 IPMonitor OF Lgc2 i TF Loca f i Click this z H ne ent button to wire oa a CE Loop BIEN a D Math2 parameters LF MultiOper TF Mux8 TF Poly Programmer Recipe Setup Synein ATClock e Setup P in SwitchOver Main AutoMan by Setup SPIn Setup PYEventOP OF Timer Main P in i Setup ProgReset Run PSP OO D Total Tune AutotuneEnable Setup ProgRun _ a D Tedi SP SPSelect Setup ProgHold Setup Syncin Setup ProgRun Usival SP SPI Setup ProgRunHold gt Setup P in Setup PVEventOP o Zirconia Setup ProgRunReset E Setup SPin Run PSP setup Prgln1 Setup PWWaitlP Setup Prgln2 d Setup PYWaitlP Run CurProg Indicates O Blocks Jl dear of Level 2 Engineer 3504 v F2 17 COM1 1D001 3504 Graphical Wiring one Y Figure 27 13 Graphical Wiring Editor for a Dual Prog
78. Invert See also parameter section 8 2 1 On The output will drive to electrical high value regardless of the Invert parameter Cont The output will assume a status according to how it is driven For motor valve outputs the options are Frz Freeze only shown if the output is configured for valve position control Cont Continue only shown if the output is configured for valve position control Off if Invert No On if Invert No L3 R O Current state of the output PV Normally wired to the output of a function block such as PID output to control a plant actuator The next seven parameters are only shown when IO Type Time Prop outputs Off or When Off is selected the Min Conf R O L3 Demand for output to be off if Invert No Alterabl e if not wired Demand for output to be on if Invert No O Ww Cycle Time Allows the output to be 0 01 to 60 00 seconds switched on and off within the See also set time period section 8 2 2 Applies only if the output type is Time Proportioning Min OnTime The minimum time in Auto seconds that the relay is on 0 01 to or off 150 00 seconds See also section 8 2 2 Applies only to an output type configured as Time Proportioning and is only available when Cycle Time Off Res n Display resolution This sets the number of decimal place
79. Issue 15 Jun 13 85 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 7 2 7 PV Offset All ranges of the controller have been calibrated against traceable reference standards This means that if the input type is changed it is not necessary to calibrate the controller There may be occasions however when you wish to apply an offset to the standard calibration to take account of known errors within the process for example a known sensor error or a known error due to the positioning of the sensor In these instances it is not advisable to change the reference calibration but to apply a user defined offset It is also possible to apply a two point offset and this is described in the next section PV Offset applies a single offset over the full display range of the controller and can be adjusted in Level 3 It has the effect of moving the curve up a down about a central point as shown in the example below Display Reading x Factory calibration Fixed offset e g 2 Electrical Input Figure 7 2 PV Offset 7 2 7 1 Example To Apply an Offset e Connect the input of the controller to the source device which you wish to calibrate to e Set the source to the desired calibration value e The controller will display the current measurement of the value e Ifthe display is correct the controller is correctly calibrated and no further action is necessary If you wish to offset the reading Do This The Display You Should See Additional No
80. It is usual to wire inputs to a source within the controller which selects that input at the appropriate time or event Two multiplexers may be enabled from the Inst Opt page A page headed Mux8 can then be found using the button This page contains up to two instances which are selected using or button 18 4 1 Multiple Input Operator Parameters List Header Mux8 8 Input Operators Sub headers 1 to 2 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select SI change values Level High Limit The high limit for all inputs and Low Limit to 99999 decimal point depends 99999 Conf the fall back value on resolution Low Limit The low limit for all inputs and the 99999 to High Limit decimal point depends 99999 Conf fall back value on resolution Fallback The state of the Output and Clip Bad Descriptions see section Conf Status parameters in case of a Clip Good 18 4 2 fault condition This parameter Fall Bad could be used in conjunction with Fall Good Fallback Val Upscale DownScale Fallback Used in accordance with 99999 to 99999 decimal point depends on Conf Val Fallback to define the output resolution value during fault conditions Select Used to select which input value Input1 to Input8 is assigned to the output Input1 to 8 Inputvalues normally wired to an 99999 to 99999 decimal point depends on input source resolution Output Indicates the analogue value of Between high
81. Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 15 2 6 Timer Parameters List Header Timer Sub headers 1 to 4 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access Qe tach Level to select Press or to change values Type Timer type Timer not configured Off or as On Pulse Generates a fixed length pulse from an ordered edge trigger On Delay Provides a delay between input trigger event and timer output One Shot Simple oven timer which reduces to zero before switching off in Compressor timer guaranteeing that the output remains ON for a time after the input signal has been removed Duration of the timer For 0 00 0 to 99 59 59 L3 re trigger timers this value is entered once and copied to the time remaining parameter whenever the timer starts For pulse timers the time value itself is decremented Elapsed Timer elapsed time 0 00 0 to 99 59 59 T R O L3 Time Input Trigger Gate input Turn On to start timing A timing Output Timer output Output off Timer has timed out Triggered Timer triggered timing Not timing This is a status output to indicate that the timers input has been detected Timer timing The above table is repeated for Timers 2 to 4 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 165 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 15 3 166 Totalisers A totaliser is an electronic integrator primarily used to record the numeric total over time of a measured value that is expressed as a rate For example th
82. Loop 1 process variable LP2 PV Connected to Loop 2 process variable Module1to Connected to an analogue input module and only Module of the Alarm Type is not a deviation alarm Init Setpoint To adjust the alarm threshold within the range of the source Always if Type None Alarm 1 to 8 Init None No latching Always if Type None Alarm 1 to 8 Automatic latching see 2 7 1 Manual latching see section 2 7 1 Alarm beacon does not light but any output associated with the event will activate and a scrolling message will appear Finished i aai Continue back around the quick configuration list Go to normal operation The loop s are set to Auto on exit from quickstart mode and the controller re starts in Level 2 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 37 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 38 To Re enter Quick Start Mode If you have exited from Quick Start mode by selecting Yes to the Finished parameter and you need to make further changes the Quick start mode can be entered again at any time The action which takes place depends on one of two previous conditions as follows Power up After a Quick Start Configuration 1 Hold down then power up the controller Keep this button pressed until the Quick start screen as shown in section 2 1 is displayed Press to enter the quick start list You will then be asked to enter a passcode Use or to enter the passcode def
83. Loop Break Alarm parameter to be set It does not affect the control action unless it is wired in software or hardware to affect the control specifically It is assumed that so long as the requested output power is within the output power limits of a control loop the loop is operating in linear control and is therefore not in a loop break condition However if the output becomes saturated then the loop is operating outside its linear control region Furthermore if the output remains saturated at the same output power for a significant duration then this could indicate a fault in the control loop The source of the loop break is not important but the loss of control could be catastrophic Since the worst case time constant for a given load is usually known a worst case time can be calculated over which the load should have responded with a minimum movement in temperature By performing this calculation the corresponding rate of approach towards setpoint can be used to determine if the loop can no longer control at the chosen setpoint If the PV was drifting away from the setpoint or approaching the setpoint at a rate less than that calculated the loop break condition would be met If an autotune is performed the loop break time is automatically set to Ti 2 for a Pl or PID loop alternatively 12 Td for a PD loop For an On Off controller loop break detection is also based on loop break time as 0 1 SPAN where SPAN Range High Range Low Th
84. None L Seu able Yes o o abet Absolute ig See also section 22 4 1 Abs Lo Absolute low Dev Hi Deviation high Dev Lo Deviation low Dev Band Deviation band PV Threshold Only appears when a PV Event is configured Range units sets the level at which the PV event becomes active Time Event To set the type of time event applicable in Off No time event the selected segment for program channel 2 configured 1 7 e Only appears if TimeEvent in the Program Event Eventi configured Setup table Yes as a time event See also section 22 4 2 On Time Time wrt the start of the segment at which the 0 00 00 to 500 00 event is true Only appears if Time Event Off See section 22 4 2 for error conditions Off Time Time wrt the start of the segment at which the 0 00 00 to 500 00 event is false Only appears if Time Event Off See section 22 4 2 for error conditions UsrVal General purpose user value only available Range limits when PV Event is not configured Resolution for UsrVal is derived this parameter may be given a customised from RstUVal To adjust name see section 27 12 14 resolution softwire a user value Note a Reset User Value may be set in the to RstUVal and configure its Programmer Status page in operator level resolution as required PID Set To select the PID set for the selected PID set 1 2 or 3 will Set1 segment be used in the selected segment GSoak Type This parameter is only
85. Offset Hi Point should be set to 2000 to correspond to the transducer range 2 Inthe PV Input list scroll to Hi Offset and adjust until the full PUT MPut load condition reads 2000 0 Lo Offset F l Hi Point High and Low offsets are also described in GHi Offset section 7 2 8 292 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 24 5 Comparison 24 5 1 24 5 2 Comparison calibration is used to calibrate the controller against a known reference instrument The load is removed or taken to a minimum from both instruments The controller low end calibration is done using the Start Calibration parameter This enables a CalAdjust parameter which is a scaling factor on the Output Value to read the same as the reference instrument The Output Value may be wired for use in a control strategy and displayed for example on a user screen To calibrate the high end add a weight to both transducers and when the reading has become stable select the Start Hi Cal parameter then enter the new reading from the reference instrument into CalAdjust The Output Value can be internally wired as the measured value in a particular control strategy Reference Measurement Device Controller under Calibration HUBROTHERM Reference weight Reference Measurement Transducer Transducer Figure 24 6 Comparison Calibration Physical Wiring As Load Cell Configure Parameters Config
86. On Ox2c6a DigAlarm 7 Ack O No 1 Yes 0x2c70 DigAlarm 8 Type 0x2c67 DigAlarm 7 Inhibit O No 1 Yes 0x2c68 DigAlarm 7 Delay 8 None 9 Positive edge 10 Negative edge 11 Edge triggered 12 High 13 Low 0x74 0x2c75 02078 02077 02 78 0 2 79 Ox2cTe 0 Off 1 On O triple logic IP 7 triple logic OP 8 transmitter PSU 14 transducer PSU 20 tri contact IP 21 single logic 24 pot IP 32 dual relay 35 dual triac 40 changeover relay 48 relay 49 triac 56 no module 63 bad ident 242 dc OP 243 dc retrans 249 invalid 250 analogue IP 251 dual dc OP 252 HRDCOut O triple logic IP 7 triple logic OP 8 transmitter PSU 14 transducer PSU 20 tri contact IP 21 single logic 24 pot IP 32 dual relay 35 dual triac 40 changeover relay 48 relay 49 triac 56 no module 63 bad ident 242 dc OP 243 dc retrans 249 invalid 250 analogue IP 251 dual dc OP 252 HRDCOut O triple logic IP 7 triple logic OP 8 transmitter PSU 14 transducer PSU 20 tri contact IP 21 single logic 24 pot IP 32 dual relay 35 dual triac 40 changeover relay 48 relay 49 triac 56 no module 63 bad ident 242 dc OP 243 dc retrans 249 invalid 250 analogue IP 251 dual dc OP 252 HRDCOut O triple logic IP 7 triple logic OP 8 transmitter PSU 14 transducer PSU 20 tri contact IP 21 single logic 24 pot IP 32 dual relay 35 dual triac 40 changeover relay 48 relay 49 triac 56 no module 63 bad ident 242 dc OP 243 dc retrans
87. Parameters When the raise or lower button is first depressed there is a single increment or decrement of the least significant digit Either button can be held down to give a repeating action at an accelerating rate 4 1 3 2 Enumerated Parameters Each press of the raise or lower button changes the state of the parameter Either button can be held down to give a repeating action but not at an accelerating rate Enumerated parameters are allowed to wrap around 4 1 3 3 Time Parameters Time parameters start with a resolution of 0 1 second mm ss s 0 00 0 to 59 59 9 When 59 59 9 is reached the resolution becomes 1 second hh mm ss 1 00 00 to 99 59 59 When this limit is reached the resolution becomes 1 minute hhh mm 100 00 to 500 00 4 1 3 4 Boolean Parameters These are similar to enumerated parameters but there are only two states Pressing either the raise or lower button causes the parameter to toggle between states 4 1 3 5 Digital Representation Characters Parameters whose values are used digitally i e bitfields are represented by Mon State or Ll _ Off State A parameter may be represented by using any number of bits between 1 and 16 inclusive Scrolling on to the parameter selects the leftmost bit and subsequent scroll operations move the selected bit right by one Backscroll may be used to move the selected bit towards the left Raise and lower buttons are used to turn the selected bit on or off respectively Part No HA0279
88. Poly Lin16 SwitchOver Mux8 Multi Operator O Mod and lO PV blocks can be configured to act on bad status in varying ways The options available are as follows 0 Clip Bad The measurement is clipped to the limit it has exceeded and its status is set to BAD such that any function block using this measurement can operate its own fallback strategy For example control loop may hold its output to the current value 1 Clip Good The measurement is clipped to the limit it has exceeded and its status is set to GOOD such that any function block using this measurement may continue to calculate and not employ its own fallback strategy 2 Fallback Bad The measurement will adopt the configured fallback value which has been set by the user In addition the status of the measured value will be set to BAD such that any function block using this measurement can operate its own fallback strategy For example control loop may hold its output to the current value 3 Fallback Good The measurement will adopt the configured fallback value which has been set by the user In addition the status of the measured value will be set to GOOD such that any function block using this measurement may continue to calculate and not employ its own fallback strategy 4 Up Scale The measurement will be forced to adopt its high limit This is like having a resistive pull up on an input circuit In addition the status of the measured va
89. Relay Output module a E Breakout JH tracks as required to disconnect ee the snubber f wW Figure 1 18 Snubber Removal Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 31 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 2 Chapter 2 Getting Started A brief start up sequence consists of a self test in which all elements of the display are illuminated and the software version is shown What happens next depends on one of two conditions Power up out of the box when the controller has no preset configuration and is switched on for the very first time it will start up in QuickStart mode This is an intuitive tool for configuring the controller and is described in section 2 1 below The controller has been powered up previously and is already configured In this case go to l section 2 3 2 1 Quick Start New Controller Unconfigured Quick Start is a tool which enables the controller to be matched to the most common processes without the need to go to full configuration level described later in this Manual When the controller is switched on for the very first time it will display the Startup screen shown below s ee ol e Po EUROTHERM 7 j 3504 Display 3508 Display Figure 2 1 Start Up Views Manual mode section 2 6 is always selected when in Quick Start mode because the controller resets to cold start when Quick Start is selected ZN Incorrect configuration can result in damage to the process
90. Set Paste Data Set Watch Recipe Used to edit the value of the selected assigned parameter within the selected recipe Values can also be edited via double left clicking the value itself Used to clear the value of the selected assigned parameter within the selected recipe thus disabling it from loading when the recipe is selected to load Allows the user to rename the selected recipe This name is used to identify individual recipes default Set1 Set8 Note Number of recipes dependent upon features Used to clear all values in the selected recipe thus disabling all from loading when the recipe is selected to load Used to copy all of the assigned parameters current values into the selected recipe Used to copy all values of the selected recipe Used to paste all values of a previously copied recipe into the selected recipe The Watch Recipe editor is set up in the same way as the Device Recipe editor The difference between the Device Recipe and the Watch Recipe editors is that with the Device Recipe the parameters and data sets are stored as parameters on the device whereas the Watch Recipe window is a file based system Unlike the Watch Recipe window the downloading of data values to their corresponding parameters can be performed from the device front panel without the need for iTools to be running Issue 15 Jun 13 317 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 27 9 To Setup Alarms 27 9 1 Example To Customise An
91. Setup CH2ControlIype Access ConfPasscode UA 523 Comms Wait Loop 1 0P CoolType Loop 1 SP SPTrack 527 Coop 1 5P ManualTrack Loop 1 SP SPTrack ee 532 0x0214 Loop 1 0OP FeedForwardType 0 FF disabled 1 FF remote 2 FF current setpoint 3 PV 534 0x0216 PV CalState 1 idle 2 Low point volts 3 high point volts 4 factory default 5 stored 6 factory cal stored 11 idle 12 low point HZ input 13 high point HZ input 14 cal restored to factory default 15 user cal stored 16 factory cal stored 20 factory rough cal point 21 idle 22 low point mV 23 hi point mV 24 cal restored to factory default 25 user cal stored 26 factory cal stored 30 cal point for factory rough cal 31 idle 32 low point for mV 33 hi point for mV 34 cal restored to factory default 35 user cal stored 36 factory cal stored 51 idle 52 CJC cal used with Term temp parameter 54 cal restored to factory default 55 user cal stored 56 factory cal stored 200 confirmation of request to cal 201 start cal 202 abort cal 210 cal point for factory rough cal 212 cal in progress 213 abort cal 220 cal completed successfully 221 cal accepted but not stored 222 abort cal 223 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Hex od PCS ad falls 090224 r 090225 PVRangelow SCS d 550 0x0226 Loop 1 Setup DerivativeType 0 only PV changes cause changes to the derivative 1 changes to either PV or SP will cause a change to
92. Terminals 30 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 1 8 8 1 8 9 Example Wiring Diagram Controller fuse 2A type T Heater fuse Line Snubber Heater Neutral Cooling or alarm relay Figure 1 17 Example Wiring Diagram Please refer to the EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility Handbook Part No HA025464 for details of good wiring practice This can be downloaded from www eurotherm co uk Snubbers Snubbers are used to prolong the life of relay contacts and to reduce interference when switching inductive devices such as contactors or solenoid valves The fixed relay terminals AA AB AC is not fitted internally with a snubber and it is recommended that a snubber be fitted externally as shown in the example wiring diagram Ifthe relay is used to switch a device with a high impedance input no snubber is necessary All relay modules are fitted internally with a snubber since these are generally required to switch inductive devices However snubbers pass 0 6mA at 110V and 1 2mA at 230Vac which may be sufficient to hold on high impedance loads If this type of device is used it will be necessary to remove the snubber from the circuit The snubber is removed from the relay module as follows Unplug the controller from its sleeve Remove the relay module Use a screwdriver or similar tool to snap out the track The view below shows the tracks in a Dual
93. Used to select the type of 0 Off Transducer type unconfigured Off Conf transducer calibration to perform 1 Shunt Shunt calibration See descriptions at the gt losada koad Call beginning of this chapter 3 Compare Comparison Cal Enable To make the transducer ready No Not ready No Cont for calibration Yes Ready Must be set to Yes to allow calibration to be done at L1 This includes Tare Cal Range Max The maximum permissible Range minimum to maximum display 99999 1000 Conf range of the scaling block Range Min The minimum permissible Minimum display 19999 to Range max Conf range of the scaling block Start Tare Begin tare calibration L1 if Cal Enable Yes L1 if Cal Enable Yes Z O Start tare calibration No Yes Starts the Calibration process No Note for Load Cell and Yes Start calibration Comparison calibration Start Cal starts the first calibration point No Yes No Yes Z O Start Cal L1 if Cal Z O Start Hi Cal For Load Cell and Comparison calibration the Start High Cal must be used to start the second calibration point Enable Yes Start high calibration Z O Clears the current calibration constants This returns the To delete previous calibration calibration to unity gain values Tare Value Enter the tare value of the Range between maximum display and container minimum display Input Hi Sets the scaling input high Range between Inpu
94. Value Default Access to select gt or a to change Level High Sensor break will be detected when its impedance is greater than a high value SBrk Alarm Sets the alarm action Manual latching see also the alarm L3 when a sensor break a er ies Chapter 12 condition is detected Alarms No sensor break alarm SBrk Out Sensor break alarm status Off or On Disp Hi see also section 7 2 6 Display Reading displayable reading These parameters displayable reading V mV mA Range Hi Configures the maximum input types electrical input level L3 R O E OO L3 L3 L3 Configures the minimum Range Lo electrical input level e Electrical Input Range Lo Range Hi Fallback Strategy Downscale Meas Value Input range lo 5 of See also section 7 2 5 the mV signal received from the PV input Upscale Meas Value Input range Hi 5 of the mV signal received from the PV input Fall Good Meas Value Fallback PV 1 0 Fallback Conf Fall Bad Meas Value Fallback PV Clip Good Meas Value Input range Hi lo 5 Clip Bad Meas Value Input range Hi lo 5 Fallback PV Fallback value See also section 7 2 5 Filter Time Input filter time Off to 500 00 hhh mm An input filter provides damping of the m ss s to hh mm ss to hhh mm input signal This may be necessary to prevent the effects of excessive noise on the PV input Conf 0 01 6 Emiss Emissivity Used fo
95. a user defined 6 label may be displayed on two lines of the controller display The following example shows the entry set up for digital inputs LA ELE Hl 1 Trip 4 435 The description can be up to 20 characters T ral a 7 Inpie Row long and is spread between the first two lines See Note on the display The parameter value appears 149 96 je the third line on the third line PETT Hi on I Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 313 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 8 10 11 314 aini This places a bar graph to the left of the me Left igin bal display with user text to the right Keep the user text length to a minimum 15000 Teme Piai Do not forget to set up the Graph Low and High limits This places a bar graph with centre origin to PA Lentre Eng Bar the left of the display with user text to the right Keep the user text length to a rr E minimum NULL E l Error Do not forget to set up the Graph Low and High limits HE Par Graph Title 7 This adds Text Graph Low and High Limits only If this is associated with a parameter the name of the parameter is used as the text wm T The text is truncated if too long q 5 p ae D UJ It is necessary to add the bar graph as a separate item 0 Pressure 1000 y _ _ TOOAAA lher Tat FRF tm p G h TH This adds centre zero value 0 00 to the bar ar Geen Ke 2 graph plus text The display will
96. above On Day2 activated On Time Time of day when alarm 1 and 2 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 On Time2 are activated Off Day1 Days when alarm 1 and 2 are de See table above Off Day2 activated Off Time1 Time of day when alarm 1 and 2 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 Off Time2 are de activated Out1 Alarm 1 and 2 output Off Alarm output not activated L3 Out2 On Alarm output activated 168 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 16 Chapter16 Application Specific 16 1 Humidity Control Humidity and altitude control is a standard feature of the 3500 controller In these applications the controller may be configured to generate a setpoint profile see Chapter 22 Programmer Operation Also the controller may be configured to measure humidity using either the traditional Wet Dry bulb method figure 16 1 or it may be interfaced to a solid state sensor The controller output may be configured to turn a refrigeration compressor on and off operate a bypass valve and possibly operate two stages of heating and or cooling 16 1 1 Example of Humidity Controller Connections SCR for temperature control Humidify Solenoid e Ela Wet bulb Dry bulb temp temp In the above example the following modules are fitted This will change from installation to installation Module 1 Analogue or relay to drive dehumidify valve Module 3 PV input module for wet bulb temperature RTD Standard Digital Used as logic
97. acknowledge inhibiting and blocking Inhibit is an input to the Alarm function It allows the alarm to be switched OFF Typically the Inhibit is connected to a digital input or event so that during a phase of the process alarms do not activate For Example if the door to a furnace is opened the alarms may be inhibited until the door is closed again Hysteresis is used to prevent signal noise from causing the Alarm output to oscillate Alarm outputs become active as soon as the PV exceeds the Alarm Setpoint They return to inactive after the PV has returned to the safe region by more than the hysteresis value Typically the Alarm hysteresis is set to a value that is greater than the oscillations seen on the instrument display Determine the type of latching the alarm will use if any Auto latching allows acknowledgement while the alarm condition is still active whereas manual latching needs the condition to revert back to safe before the alarm can be acknowledged See also the description in section 12 1 Used in conjunction with the latching parameter It is set when the user responds to an alarm Alarm Blocking is used to prevent alarms from activating during start up In some applications the measurement at start up is in an alarm condition until the system has come under control Blocking causes the alarms to be ignored until the system is under control in the safe state after this any deviations trigger the alarm The
98. al A e PP e O N 84 as RAMIS aa 84 AS CNG e E ia msenin ion tieueinnd meen bse neunlans cuseeue heute niin eertbnsaninerruanee 85 Paa PY A PP A enn EE A E AEE EET 86 AS TROP a E E os 87 8 CHAPTERS LOGIC INPUT OUBPUD sedisssccosaccscsstissaecscdeasesnseeserncssudseavesnceenssdsdeauvedunscasedsdeensests 88 8 1 To select Ros ol Stands 88 8 2 LOGIC lO Parameters inn 88 8 2 1 Output State When the Controller is in Stand by 0 ec cceeccecceseeseeseeseeseeseceeceeeesesaesaecseceeceeeeseeaesaeeaeseeeeseeseeseeaeens 90 8 2 2 Cycle Time and Minimum On Time Algorithms sasvrnssssdnvosdensenmeisnrinondenrerasdeserasd eaveaneuneeunordenseeneunnannondensanndidensveneast 90 8 2 3 Example To Configure a Time Proportioni a Logic Output vincessissscovsstverecevsersnsnemeapdsnnines oven ueaseenueidonseddnassees 91 8 2 4 Example To Calibrate a VP OUTPUT artis 91 o Log o a a e E E E E N 92 8 40 Example To Scalea Proportionina Logie Output esien erie aa i R E R 92 Y CHAPTERS AARELAY OUTPUT vccsiscsicccscacessrecastcsrccstivanvcsttccweestcncvascsectvacaovsvexstieaecretssseesskicas 93 9 1 LA nn re ne eS A E A 93 92 AAR lay Parame CONS onenn A E A 93 9 2 1 Example To Wire the AA Relay to an Ail aii rra atar AA 95 Dt RCV CUT e E E o ro OCA In 95 10 CHAPTER 10 MODULE CONFIGURATION sssscccsccccccccccccccssssssssssscsssccceeeees 96 10 1 To Fita New M d l seroraren ara E N A NE S 97 10 2 Module ldentificatiOi orcos e 98 10 3 Module T
99. alarm is removed 2 7 2 Sensor Break Indication An alarm condition 5 br is indicated if the sensor or the wiring between sensor and controller becomes open circuit or the input is over range The message Sbreak is shown in the message centre together with the source of the sensor connection This may be PVInupt or Modx if an analogue module is fitted For a resistance thermometer input sensor break is indicated if any one of the three wires is broken For mA input sensor break will not be detected due to the load resistor connected across the input terminals For Volts input sensor break may not be detected due to the potential divider network connected across the input terminals Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 43 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 2 8 Message Centre The lower section of the HOME display contains an alpha numeric set of messages These messages change between different controller types and operating modes and are grouped in summary pages The 3504 contains more information than the 3508 and generally the parameter descriptions are longer due to the larger display 2 8 1 Summary Pages 3504 3508 Press A set of pre defined summary pages CUOTA ER ii are shown at each press the following views show examples These are typically a summary of programmer loops and alarm operation A further eight customised pages can be programmed off line using iTools programming software
100. allows users typically OEMs or distributors to be able to protect their intellectual property by preventing unauthorised cloning of controller configurations OEM security is only available as a special order and is identified by special number EUO722 which appears on the label showing the order code The feature provides the user with the ability to enter an OEM Security Password after which unless the password is entered it inhibits Tools from communicating with the controller in its normal way Notes 1 When using the controller through its front panel buttons it will not be possible to view or configure the wiring between blocks section 5 1 but all HMI parameters will be visible and alterable as normal 2 The Setpoint Program Editor in iTools cannot be used while OEM Security is active neither can a program be operated run held or reset through iTools Programs can however be edited and operated through the controller front panel buttons 3 It will still be possible to access communication parameters via the SCADA table 4 lf features such as OPC Scope are required then Custom Tags may be used to access the SCADA area 28 2 Using OEM Security The OEM Security feature enables three new addresses to become active in the SCADA region These are 1 Address 16116 Locked this is a read only Boolean parameter that returns 1 TRUE when the instrument is OEM secured 2 Address 16117 Lock Code this is a wri
101. allows you to 1 Enable controller function blocks 2 Enable options 3 Customise the display 4 Read information about the controller 5 Read internal diagnostics 6 2 To Select Instrument Configuration Select Configuration level as described in Chapter 3 Press from the Access list The first view displayed is the header Inst plus the sub header Enb This allows you to enable or disable instrument options The symbol indicates further sub headers are available To select these press or EUROTHERM ETETA p z L Of F alsin Ej Iret Ent Figure 6 1 Instrument Configuration Displays 6 3 Function Block Options Function blocks are described in Chapter 5 Function blocks may be enabled or disabled in the Inst Enb list If the function block is enabled a list header containing parameters applicable to the feature will be available as shown in the Navigation diagram section 4 2 If the option is disabled the list header will not be shown thus ensuring that only those parameters which are relevant to the application are displayed Chargeable options can only be enabled if they have been ordered 1 Press to scroll to the option required 2 Press 4 or to edit the option L Disabled ll Enabled 70 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers 6 3 1 To Enable Function Blocks The following table lists the options which can be enabled in the controller
102. and 4 4 wire 485 El only 232 Modbus Master Bisynch WLOOS a 9 AM Analogue input not slot 2 or 2 wire 485 Modbus 232 Modbus Master 5 master Jare 285 Modbus Calibration Certificate Triple logic input master 4 wire 485 Modbus CERT1 Cert of Triple contact input Ethernet 10base Amaster conformity Triple logic output Profibus 3 Confia Tool CERT2 ee onfig Tools calibration connector 3 2AVdc t tter PSU St Custem TeBele gt N Standard Tools CD Cust m Labels Transducer PSU 5 or 10Vdc i PRAI Special No No High resolution DC retrans amp Non Standard Option EU1234 Special No 24Vdc Product Language a Isolated single logic output 2 VO slots 4 5 and 6 are only available on the 3504 3 Only available with the Protibus Controller No other comms module may be titted FE1234 Custom config ES1234 Custom software 12 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 1 3 Configuration Code Quick Start Code Loop 1 Config Loop 1 Loop 1 Loop 1 Loop 1 Loop 1 Units Function PV Range Lo Range Hi Config Loop 1 Function Loop 1 PV Loop 1 Range Low config 1 Fx with Factory VX Single Chan VP without Eonia a oe Loop 1 units au a Onion L Thermocouple Loop 1 Range High Centigrade A DUNE ENEADO N Thermocouple Enter value Centigrade _ TS eN E Pe 8 Thermocouple ER Dual Chan PID VP with P Platine Bs PV Dual Chan PID VP without eS If standard contig is selecte
103. and low limits the output e e ia Status Used in conjunction with Fallback Good R O to indicate the status of the Bad operation Typically status is used to flag fault conditions and may be used as an interlock for other operations Res n Indicates the resolution of the The resolution of the output is output taken from the selected input If the selected input is not wired or if its status is bad then the resolution will be set to 1dp 18 4 2 Fallback The fallback strategy will come into effect if the status of the input value is bad or if the input value is outside the range of Input Hi and Input Lo In this case the fallback strategy may be configured as Fall Good If the input value is above High Limit or below Low Limit then the output value is set to the Fallback value and the Status is set to Good Fall Bad If the input value is above High Limit or below Low Limit then the output value is set to the Fallback value and the Status is set to Bad Clip Good If the input value is above High Limit or below Low Limit then the output value is set to the appropriate limit and Status is set to Bad If the input signal is within the limits but its status is bad the output is set to the Fallback value Clip Bad If the input value is above High Limit or below Low Limit then the output value is set to the appropriate limi
104. and or personal injury and must be carried out by a competent person authorised to do so Itis the responsibility of the person commissioning the controller to ensure the configuration is correct 32 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers 2 1 1 To Configure Parameters in Quick Start Mode With QckStart selected press to scroll through the list of parameters Edit the parameters using the or buttons Each time button is pressed a new parameter will be presented User Manual This is illustrated by the following example The views shown are taken from the 3504 controller From the Startup view shown in the previous section you can press or O to select Configuration Mode To fully configure the controller refer to later sections of this handbook Backscroll to scroll back through parameters press and hold then press to go back through the list of parameters You can also press and hold O Dto go forward this has the same effect as pressing alone Example Do This From the Start view press Press a or O to change the Display Additional Notes The first parameter to be configured is Units It resides in the PV Input List because it is associated with the process Units variable When the required choice is selected a brief blink of the display indicates that it has been accepted 3 A different parameter is selected each t
105. been powered down Cust1 to Cust3 Name This displays the name of the table downloaded or No tbl if none is loaded 8 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 Y 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Note 1 O There is no error 1 Bad or unrecognised module ident A module has been inserted and has a bad or unrecognised ident either the module is damaged or the module is unsupported 3 Factory calibration data bad The factory calibration data has been read from an I O module and has not passed the checksum test Either the module is damaged or has not been initialised 4 Module changed for one of a different type The configuration may now be incorrect 5 I O Chip DFC1 communication failure The onboard generic I O Chip DFC1 will not communicate This could indicate a build fault in the instrument 6 I O Chip DFC2 communication failure The onboard generic I O Chip DFC2 will not communicate This could indicate a build fault in the instrument 7 V O Chip DFC3 communication failure The onboard generic I O Chip DFC3 will not communicate This could indicate a build fault in the instrument 10 Calibration data write error An error has occured when attempting to write calibration data back to an I O module s EE 11 Calibration data write error An error occured when trying to read calibration data back from the EE on an I O module 13 Fixed PV input error An error occured whilst reading data from the fixed PV Input EE 18 C
106. can be printed Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 27 12 12To Copy a Program e Inthe display shown above to copy the complete program right click in the soreadsheet section and Select All e Right click again in the spreadsheet section and Copy e Select the program number to be copied to e g Program 2 e Right click in the new section and Paste All 27 12 13To Copy a Segment of a Program e Right click in the segment to be copied and select Copy e To add the segment at the end of the program right click outside the segments and Paste Add e To insert right click in the preceding segment and Paste Insert e To over write a segment right click in the segment and Paste Over Segments will be added to the Event Outputs at the same time 27 12 14To Name a User Value The programmer User Value may be given a name e Open the parameter list for the Programmer Setup page e Select UValName and type in the required text In this example Power e User Value in the Program Edit page in the controller will be replaced by this text File Device Explorer view ram E da Mew File Open File Load PERA COM IDOO1 3504 H E Lin16 H E Load a Loop H E Math H E Multioper H E Muze H E Poly Seon Programmer 2 H E Setup E H E Run Moro E 61 23 Program H E Recipe H RTClock H E Switchover H E Timer 6 23 Total i Txdr H E Usr
107. changes non linearly against the PID demand The algorithm provides optimum performance for these methods of cooling Oil Cooling Being non evaporative oil cooling is pulsed in a linear manner It is deep and direct and will not need such a high cool gain as fan cooling Water cooling A complication with water cooling comes if the zone is running well above 100 C Usually the first few pulses of water will flash off into steam giving a greatly increased cooling capacity due to the latent heat of evaporation When the zone settles down less or even no evaporation is a possibility and the cooling is less severe To handle evaporative cooling choose the water cool mode from the controller parameter list This technique delivers much shortened pulses of water for the first few percent of the cooling range when the water is likely to be flashing off into steam This compensates for the transition out of the initial strong evaporative cooling Fan Cooling This is much gentler than water cooling and not so immediate or decisive because of the long heat transfer path through the finned aluminium cooler and barrel With fan cooling a cool gain setting of 3 upwards would be typical and delivery of pulses to the blower would be linear i e the on time would increase proportionally with percentage cool demand determined by the controller Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 21 8 8 21 8 9 Feedforw
108. communications option Protocols Isolation Transmission standard Ethernet communications option Protocol Isolation Transmission standard Features DeviceNet Maximum baud rate Main Process Variable Input Calibration accuracy Sample rate Isolation Input filter Zero offset User Calibration Thermocouple Range Resolution Linearisation accuracy Cold junction compensation Cold junction accuracy Resistance Thermometer Range Resistance Thermometer types Resolution C Resolution Linearity error Calibration error Common mode rejection Series mode rejection Lead resistance Input impedance Bulb current 40mV Range Range Resolution uV Resolution Linearity error Calibration error Drift with temperature Common mode rejection Series mode rejection 390 3500 series Controllers 100 to 230Vac 15 48 to 62 Hz max 20W 3508 15W 24Vac 15 10 48 to 62 Hz 24Vac 15 20 5 ripple voltage max 20W 3508 15W High Voltage VH 30A duration lt 100uS Low Voltage VL 15A duration lt 100uS CE cUL listed file E57766 Gost 2 modules can be fitted Modbus RTU or I O expander only in J comms port Modbus RTU Slave Profibus DP DeviceNet El Bisync 818 style mnemonics Modbus RTU master broadcast 1 parameter I O Expander 264Vac double insulated EIA232 EIA485 CAN DeviceNet Profibus Slot H only Modbus TCP 10baseT 264Vac double insulated 802 3 DHCP client 4 simu
109. configure digital alarms List Header DgAlm Sub headers 1 to 8 Name Parameter A Value Default Access to select Press D or to change values Level Type A the type of alarm The alarm will trigger None Alarm not configured not Alarm not configured As order Conf when the condition is reached Pos The mpurehanges code L3 R O Edge from low to high condition Neg The input changes Edge from high to low condition Edge Any change of the input condition High The input signal is high Low The input signal is low Input The state of the input This is normally wired to i No alarm a source Active The output state of the alarm L3 R O L3 R O if wired Inhibit Inhibit is an input to the Alarm function It Alarm not inhibited allows the alarm to be switched OFF Typically Inhibit function active the Inhibit is connected to a digital input or event so that during a phase of the process alarms do not activate __ So Lo Delay Delay between sensing the alarm condition 0 00 0 to 500 00 0 00 0 Only and displaying it If in the time between the mm ss s applicable two the alarm goes safe then no alarm is ata to High and Shown and the delay timer is reset It can be Low alarms used on systems that are prone to noise HHH mm 122 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 12 6 Diagnostic Alarms Diagnostic alarms indicate a possible fault within the controller or connected devices E
110. cool ON For PID control the output may be edited between 100 and 100 if cool is configured The true output value is subject to limiting and output rate limit For valve position control the raise and lower buttons in manual will directly control the raise and lower relay or triac outputs From digital communications it is possible to control the valve by sending nudge commands A single nudge command will move the valve by 1 minimum on time In manual mode the natural state will be rest If sensor break occurs while the controller is in automatic the controller will output the sensor break output power However the user can now switch to manual control In this case manual will become active and the user can edit the output power On leaving manual i e returning to automatic control the controller will again check for sensor break If autotune is enabled while in manual mode the autotune will remain in a reset state such that when the user puts the controller into automatic control the autotune will start Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 203 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 21 4 Loop Set Up Function Block 21 4 1 21 4 1 1 21 4 1 2 204 Loop Set Up configures the type of control required for each channel Types of Control Loop Three types of control loop may be configured These are On Off control PID control or control of motorised valves On Off Control On Off control is the simplest means of control an
111. dialog Recommended connections are shown with a green plug other parameters which are available are yellow and if you click the red button the unavailable parameters are shown red To dismiss the connection dialog either press the escape key on the keyboard or click the cross at the bottom left of the dialog Once the wire has started the cursor will change and a dotted wire will be drawn from the output to the current mouse position To make the wire either click on a recommended input to make a wire to that parameter or click anywhere except on a recommended input to bring up the connection dialog Choose from the connection dialog as described above The wire will now be auto routed between the blocks New wires on series 3000 instruments are shown dotted until they are downloaded Right click on the wire to show the wire block context menu which has the following entries Force Exec Break Part No HA027988 Force Exec Break Re Route Wire Use Tags Find Start Find End Delete Undelete Bring To Front Push To Back Issue 15 If wires form a loop a break point has to be found where the value which is written to the block input comes from a block which was last executed during the previous instrument execute cycle thus introducing a delay This option tells the instrument that if it needs to make a break it should be on this wire Throw away wire route and generate an automatic route from scratch If a wire
112. external messages are being received The CFG clip may be used while EIA232 EIA485 ProfiBus communicatiGns modules are fitted but it is not recommended that communications are active on these modules while the CFG clip is in use as conflicts may occur Fitting of the CFG clip while the IR clip is in use will result in the IR communications being overridden and the CFG clip communications accepted Cloning of Configuration Port Settings Full instrument cloning is supported via the CFG clip without the need for instrument power although errors may be reported with I O module settings This is because the modules are not powered so confirmation of downloaded settings is not possible If the IR comms port is used during cloning then parameters associated with both J and H ports are cloned If the H port is used then the J port settings are cloned but not the H port settings If the J port is used then the H port settings are cloned but not the J port settings Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 4 3 Digital Communications Parameters Digital communications parameters may be found in the Comms page Communications modules may be fitted in the H slot or J slot The following table shows the parameters available in each position List Header Comms Sub headers H and J Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press or a to change values Level Ident Ident
113. for message framing Despite its name it is an ASCII based asynchronous protocol Data is transferred using 7 data bits even parity 1 stop bit this may be changed in the controller El Bisynch identifies parameters within an instrument using what are known as mnemonics These are usually two letter abbreviations for a given parameter for example PV for Process Variable OP for Output SP for Setpoint and so on El BiSync communications within the 3500 series instruments allows for the reading writing of a number of parameters over EIA232 or ElA485 communications using the parameter s mnemonic as a reference and the 818 amp 902 3 4 style El BiSync communications protocol This does not include 900EPC controllers El BiSync is available in the H or the J port modules and has been included in this instrument for backward compatibility Where mnemonic conflicts occur the 818 mnemonic takes priority The mnemonics are the same as the 818 amp 902 3 4 controllers and these are shown in Appendix B together with a description of the parameter in both series of controllers Ethernet Modbus TCP See section 14 4 Modbus Master MBUS_M See section 14 9 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 131 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 14 3 3 Baud Rate The baud rate of a communications network specifies the speed that data is transferred between instrument and master A baud rate of 9600 equates to 9600 Bits per second Since a si
114. h AAA 5 Press RUN HOLD Wirer oon LE BCh1 Ontur Ler 6 Press ress Chi Qubeut hCancel GDE 7 Press O to OK 8 Now repeat 3 to 8 but for LgclO LB 5 1 5 Wiring Using iTools The recommended method of wiring is to use iTools A description of how iTools may be used for graphical wiring is given in Chapter 27 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 65 User Manual 5 1 6 66 Wiring Floats with Status Information 3500 series Controllers There is a subset of float values which may be derived from an input which may become faulty for some reason e g sensor break over range etc These values have been provided with an associated status which is automatically inherited through the wiring The list of parameters which have Block Input Output Parameters Parameters In2 associated status is as follows Parameters Parameters gt A O Programmer Setup woo IA Poly a AO Lin1 Txdr e Humidity Val RelHumid C PV C PV z MultiOper SumOut Parameters appear in both lists where they can be used as inputs or outputs depending on configuration The action of the block on detection of a Bad input is dependent upon the block For example the loop treats a Bad input as a sensor break and takes appropriate action the Mux8 simply passes on the status from the selected input to the output etc Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual The
115. is over it Parameters in function blocks are coloured blue if they are alterable and the mouse pointer is over them A wire which is connected to an input which is currently unalterable and a block to which the wire is connected is selected or the mouse pointer is over it is coloured purple red blue Diagram Context Menu Right click in the spaces around the wires and function blocks to show the diagram context menu which has the following entries Re Route Wires Align Tops Align Lefts Space Evenly Delete Undelete Select All Copy Graphic Save Graphic Centre Throw away current wire route and do an auto route of all selected wires If no wires are selected this is done to all wires on the diagram Re Route Wires Line up the tops of all the selected items except wires Align Tops Line up the left hand side of all the selected items except wires Align Lefts This will space the selected items such that their top left Space Evenly corners are evenly spaced Select the first item then select the rest by control clicking them in the order you wish them to be 2 Delete spaced then choose this menu entry l Undelete Delete or mark for delete series 3000 instruments all selected items Select All This menu entry is enabled if any of the selected items are marked for delete and unmarks them when selected Copy Graphic Select all wires Save Graphic If there is a selection it is copied to the clipboard as a Windows Centre m
116. it immediately If you created a new program or opened a saved program you will have to save the changes to a file Saving Programs The stand alone editor has a File Save menu entry which is used to write the program out to a file Each program is saved in a separate file If you wish to clone all of the programs from one instrument to another you will have to use the iTools cloning facilities to do this When using the editor within iTools there is an entry on the Programmer menu for saving programs 27 12 10Moving Programs Around The File Send To menu entry can be used to copy a program to a connected instrument A dialog pops up in which you have to select the instrument and the destination program number You can use this to copy programs within the same instrument or to open a program file and download it 27 12 11Printing a Program 334 There is no direct printing support in the Programmer Editor but you can generate a report using Microsoft Excel as follows Right click on the graph and choose Copy Chart Open a new spreadsheet in Excel and paste the chart position to taste Go back to the Programmer Editor and Choose Edit Select All followed by Edit Copy Switch to Excel choose the top left cell for the segment data and then choose Edit Paste Optionally delete any columns that have no settings and format the cells Print the spreadsheet The program is listed down rather than across the page so long programs
117. less than 1200M 31 instruments and one master may be connected The balanced differential signal transmission is less prone to interference and should be used in preference to ElA232 in noisy environments ElA485 may be used with Half Duplex Communications such as MODBUS RTU To use ElA485 buffer the ElA232 port of the PC with a suitable EIA232 EIA485 converter The Eurotherm KD485 Communications Adapter unit is recommended for this purpose The use of a EIA485 board built into the computer is not recommended since this board may not be isolated which may cause noise problems or damage to the computer and the RX terminals may not be biased correctly for this application To construct a cable for ElA485 operation use a screened cable with one ElA485 twisted pair plus a separate core for common Although common or screen connections are not necessary their use will significantly improve noise immunity The terminals used for ElA485 digital communications are listed in the table below ner rn Y These are the functions normally assigned to socket pins Please check your PC manual to confirm Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 127 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 14 2 14 2 1 14 2 2 14 2 3 128 Configuration Ports In addition to the above communications the H port also supports infrared IR Clip and configuration CFG Clip communications see also Chapter 27 These interfaces always adhere to default settings regar
118. loop Track SP parameter as the PV control The SP input is used in the servo to input setpoint start type Note SP Input is normally wired from the loop Track SP parameter The programmer may be configured to Start program from Conf start from either the PV or the working current PV value PSI Start program from See also section 22 10 the current working setpoint If the program has been configured to use PVStart start from the segment in which the PV resides servo to SP will be ignored Power fail recovery strategy Ramp Ramp back to Cont See also section 22 11 program setpoint at the previous ramp rate Continue program Continue program Configures the display resolution of ramp XXXX X to Conf rates see Program Edit page X XXXX Not Shown for SyncAll programmer Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 257 SP Input Servo Power Fail Rate Res User Manual 3500 series Controllers List Header Program Setup Sub header Ch1 or Ch2 Max Events To set the maximum number of output 1 to 8 Cont events required for the program This is for convenience to avoid having to scroll through unwanted events when setting up each segment PVEvent Enable PV Event provides an alarm facility N No Conf on Programmer s PVInput PV Event Type and Threshold are defined in each E ae Segment parameters are listed in the Program Edit page Enables the first Event Output to be N Cont configured as a Time E
119. mV source Replace the copper cable shown in the previous diagram with the appropriate compensating cable for the thermocouple in use Thermocouple Controller vj eO simulator set to T C type and 0 C Thermocouple Compensating cable es Figure 26 5 Connections for Thermocouple Calibration Set the mV source to internal compensation for the thermocouple in use and set the output for OmV Then Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 This example is for PV Input configured as a type K thermocouple 2 From the Cal State press a PLL APLI or to select CJC Sk Value 3 Press a or mM to select Go 4 The remaining procedure is the same as described in the previous section The controller automatically calibrates to the CJC input at OmV As it does this the display will show Busy then Passed assuming a successful calibration If it is not successful then Failed will be displayed This may be due to an incorrect input mV 302 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 26 3 5 RTD Calibration The two points at which the RTD range is calibrated are 150 00Q and 400 00Q Before starting RTD calibration e A decade box with total resistance lower than 1K must be connected in place of the RTD as indicated on the connection diagram below before the instrument is powered up If at any instant the instrument was powered up without this
120. may also be necessary to use a triple digital input module in addition The wiring procedure is the same and the example given below wires BCD input 1 to LA Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 20 From any display press O ECDIn In this example BCD block 1 is used until the BCDIn page is Int reached ln Ins 21 Press a or mM to select 1 or 2 as required 22 Press O to scroll to In1 E aIr Iriz Ins ere WireF ron 23 Press H display l ma a WireFrom O i J PV is the parameter required and this eae O ane a ne WISF rim procedure copies the parameter to be parameter which is to be wired LacIo wired from from In this example Logic MAL input LA o 25 Press a Lac IOLA PU EE AA GHE This pastes the parameter to In1 26 Press O to confirm P P Note the arrow next to the parameter which indicates it has been wired Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 125 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 14 Chapter 14 Digital Communications Digital Communications or comms for short allows the controller to communicate with a PC or a networked computer system or any type of communications master using the protocols supplied A data communication protocol defines the rules and structure of messages used by all devices ona network for data exchange Communications can be used for many purposes SCADA packages plecs data logging for a
121. may be impaired The installer must ensure the safety and EMC of any particular installation Safety This controller complies with the European Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC by the application of the safety standard EN 61010 Electromagnetic compatibility This controller conforms with the essential protection requirements of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC by the application of appropriate product specific international standards This instrument satisfies the general requirements of the commercial and industrial environments defined in EN 61326 For more information on product compliance refer to the Technical Construction File 32 1 GENERAL The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice While every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information your supplier shall not be held liable for errors contained herein Unpacking and storage The packaging should contain an instrument mounted in its sleeve two mounting brackets for panel installation and an Installation amp Operating guide Certain ranges are supplied with an input adapter If on receipt the packaging or the instrument are damaged do not install the product but contact your supplier Ifthe instrument is to be stored before use protect from humidity and dust in an ambient temperature range of 10 C to 70 C 32 2 Service and repair This controller has no user serviceable parts Contact your supplier for repair Caution
122. open more parameter lists Right click in the parameter list to reveal or hide columns 3 To change the analogue value of a parameter double click the parameter and change its value To change the value of an enumerated parameter open the drop down menu and use the pop up window 4 The Access button puts the controller into configuration mode In this mode the controller can be set up without its outputs being active Press Access again to return to operating level 5 The instrument view is optional Select Panel Views in the View menu 6 To find a parameter select the Find tab File Device Explorer View Options Window Help DP DD a amp h P XK Q New File Open File Load Save Print Scan Add Remove Access Views Help 2 Graphical Wiring Parameter Explorer BlDevice Panel MM Terminal Wiring BeDevice Recipe bgt Watch Recipe AProgrammer User Pages opc COM1 1D001 3504 Parameter Explorer Alarm 1 e y v E 3 Access Name Description Address Low Limit High Limit Wired From Comment Instrument Message Popup Message Io Type Alarm Type 10240 AbsHi 1 None 0 DevBand 5 4 in Alarm Input 0 00 10000000000 00 10000000000 00 AUS Threshold Threshold 10241 7 00 10000000000 00 10000000000 00 Alarm Out Output 10249 Of Pal Inhibit Alarm Inhibit 10247 1 Comms Hysteresis Alarm Hysteresis 10242 0 00 10000000000 00 Commstab Latch Latching Mode 10244
123. operation HWUOUUUUUU No inputs inverted This is a status word with one EENHEETEN All 8 inputs inverted bit per input the left hand bit i When configuring over comms the invert inverts input 1 parameter is interpreted as a bitfield where 0x1 input 1 0x2 input 2 0x4 input 3 0x8 input 4 0x10 input 5 0x20 input 6 0x40 input 7 0x80 input 8 Out Invert Invert the output No Output not inverted No L3 Yes Output inverted In1 to In8 Input state 1 to 8 Normally wired to a logic analogue or user Off L3 value When wired to a floating point values less than or equal to 0 5 or greater than or equal to 1 5 will be rejected e g the value of the Igc8 block will not change Values between 0 5 and 1 5 will be interpreted as ON when greater than or equal to 0 5 and OFF when less than 0 5 May be set to a constant value if not wired Out Output result of the operator On Output activated R O Off Output not activated The eight input logic operator may be used to perform the following operations on 8 inputs Oper Operation Description 0 OFF The selected logic operator is turned off 1 AND The output result is ON when ALL 8 inputs are ON The output result is ON when one or more of the 8 inputs are ON 3 XOR Exclusive OR the output is ON if an ODD number of inputs are ON The output is OFF if an even number of inputs are ON Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 185 User Manual 3500 series Controllers
124. operation has been requested e Indicates that a Read or Write request has been completed successfully e Indicates that a Read or Write has failed Error Codes in input register 4 are as follows ErrorCode Meaning S 0 1 2 Invalid Tag Number Read Only Parameter Value out of range Because the First Word of the Output data is used to contain several different fields it is important to understand how the various components are distributed within the 16 bits which make up the word The tables which follow show how the bits are divided between the three components The least significant bit is numbered 0 and the highest significant bit is numbered 15 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 143 User Manual 3500 series Controllers Output Data Command The data encoded in these registers is to Request a message Request Word 1 Word 1 is a bit field containing a command code and a parameter tag if it is less than 16383 It is constructed as shown below BENO refs a ste orca he NEAN a a o 1 EN EA 64 32 16 8000 4000 2000 1000 400 200 100 80 40 20 10 Function Commandcode code RE Parameter Lo Parameter Tag Addres Lo Parameter Tag Addres Set __Command code __ these bits to 0 when L Reserved Data needs no action eae Read Must be request 0 CeCe t 0 EAUS Set these bits to the address of the target parameter only if the Read of 1 1 Must be address is less than 2048 dec Otherwise set all th
125. or Dio change values User Manual Default Access Level Sub header LA and LB Inverted Output off logic 0 For an alarm this is when the alarm is active Output on logic 1 For an alarm this is when the alarm is in active This is the normal setting for alarms Time Prop outputs Off or 0 01 to 60 00 seconds Cycle Time Allows the output to be switched on and off within the set time period See also section 8 2 2 Applies only to an output type configured as Time Proportioning Min OnTime Auto 0 01 to 150 00 seconds The minimum time in seconds that the relay is See also on or off section 8 2 2 Res n Applies only to an output type configured as Time Proportioning or ValvRaise and is only available when Cycle Time Off Display resolution This sets the number of decimal places displayed by Disp Hi and Disp Lo parameters Disp Hi The maximum 0 000 to displayable reading 100 000 Disp Lo The minimum displayable 0 000 to reading 100 000 SbyAct The maximum electrical input output level 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 to 00 The minimum electrical input output level Standby action Determines the action of an output when the instrument is in Standby Mode See also section 8 2 1 Meas Val The current value of the output demand signal When Off is selected the Min OnTime algorithm will run When set to any other value the CycleTi
126. or direct acting increases when the PV is below SP This is the usual setting for heating control Direct acting The output increases when the PV is above SP This is the usual setting for cooling control PB Units Sets the presentation style of the Eng Engineering units e g C or F See also Proportional band Percent Per cent of loop span Range Hi section 21 5 2 Range Lo Deriv Type Selects whether the derivative acts PV Only changes in PV cause PV only on PV changes or on Error changes to the derivative either PV or Setpoint changes output Generally used for process systems particularly using valve control where it reduces wear on valve mechanics Changes to either PV or SP will cause a derivative output Derivative on error should be used with a programmer since it tends to reduce ramp overshoot It is also generally an advantage to use derivative on error for temperature control systems to give a quick response to small setpoint changes The above two parameters do not appear if either Ch1 or Ch2 are configured for Off or OnOff control Customised name for the loop Configured using iTools see section 27 17 206 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 21 5 PID Function Block The PID function block consists of the following parameters 21 5 1 Loop Parameters PID A summary of the parameters used to optimize the control are listed in the following table List Header L
127. output powers in different segments by wiring the UserValOP to the output power parameter Resolution for UsrVal is derived from RstUVal To adjust resolution softwire a user value to RstUVal and configure its resolution as required The User Value may be given a customised name using iTools configuration package as described in section 27 15 248 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 22 5 22 5 1 Holdback Holdback freezes the program if the process value PV does not track the setpoint SP by more than a user defined amount The instrument will remain in HOLDBACK until the PV returns to within the requested deviation from setpoint The display will flash the HOLD beacon In a Ramp it indicates that the PV is lagging the SP by more than the set amount and that the program is waiting for the process to catch up Holdback maintains the correct soak period for the product Each program can be configured with a holdback value Each segment determines the holdback function Holdback will cause the execution time of the program to extend if the process cannot match the demanded profile Holdback state will not change the user s access to the parameters The parameters will behave as if in the RUN state The diagram below demonstrates that the demanded setpoint SP will only change at the rate specified by the program when the PV s deviation is less than the holdback value
128. percent per minute the PID can change Output rate limit is useful in preventing rapid changes in output from damaging the process or the heater elements O See also section 21 8 3 Channel hysteresis only shown when the 0 0 to 200 0 10 0 channel is configured as OnOf See also section 21 8 10 0 0 to 200 0 10 0 Issue 15 Jun 13 231 L L OO User Manual List List Header Lp1 or Lp2 s s sOY List Header Lp1 or Lp _ _ leader O S or List Header Lp1 or Lp2 s s sOY Name Parameter Description to select To set the action which takes place in the event of a sensor break Value SbrkOP See also section 21 8 4 Sets the level which the output power goes to in the event of a sensor break Sbrk Mode Sbrk OP and SbrkMode is set to SbrkOP See also section 21 8 4 Safe OP Sets the output level to be adopted when the loop is inhibited Selects the mode of manual operation ManOP Output Lo Lo LastMOP The output when the loop is in manual Note In manual mode the controller will still limit the maximum power to the power limits however it could be dangerous if the instrument is left unattended at a high power setting It is important that the over range alarms are configured to protect your process We recommend that all processes are fitted with an independent over range ooliceman Forced manual output value When Man Mode
129. period and is used in the determination of R2G Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 21 6 15 21 6 16 Manual Tuning If for any reason automatic tuning gives unsatisfactory results you can tune the controller manually There are a number of standard methods for manual tuning The one described here is the Ziegler Nichols method Adjust the setpoint to its normal running conditions it is assumed this will be above the PV so that heat only is applied Set the Integral Time Ti and the Derivative Time Td to OFF Set High Cutback CBH and Low Cutback CBL to Auto Ignore the fact that the PV may not settle precisely at the setpoint If the PV is stable reduce the proportional band so that the PV just starts to oscillate Allow enough time between each adjustment for the loop to stabilise Make a note of the proportional band value PB and the period of oscillation T If PV is already oscillating measure the period of oscillation T then increase the proportional band until it just stops oscillating Make a note of the value of the proportional band at this point Set the proportional band integral time and derivative time parameter values according to the calculations given in the table below Type of control Proportional band Integral time Ti Derivative time PB MERC ME seconds Proportional only only PB Heo cond PB Ex Manually Settin
130. positive or Lo negative the range of the trim may be restricted by the trim limits Setpoint trims may be used in a retransmission system A master zone may retransmit the setpoint to the other zones a local trim may be applied to each zone to produce a profile along the length of the machine SP Trim NO 26 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual List Header Lp1 or Lp2 Sub header SP Name Parameter Description Value Default Access Level to select es CL op E ie change values Man Track Manual track enable Off Manual tracking L3 R O To allow the Local SP to follow the On disabled value of the current PV when the Manual tracking controller is in Manual mode enabled ia See also section 21 7 5 Track PV The programmer tracks the PV when it is servoing or tracking See also section 21 7 5 Track SP Manual Tracking Value The SP to track for manual tracking See also section 21 7 4 SPIntBal SP Integral Balance Off O L3 R O This is also known as debump in some Alterable in instances It forces the integral to be config balanced upon changes in target setpoint Note 1 Connections to the programmer are made automatically when the loop and programmer are enabled and there are no existing connections to these parameters SP Track Setpoint track enable Setpoint tracking To allow the Local SP to follow the disabled value of the Remote SP Setpoint tracking a See also section 21
131. program is run the program will not progress to the next segment until digital input LA becomes true Other strategies may be set up using a similar procedure 22 17 5 3 Example 3 To Repeat a Section of a Program 274 This uses a GoBack segment Segment oe 3 4 5 p 7 8 Repeat 4 times Segments 1 to 5 of the program are set up as described in Example 1 At Segment 6 adjust Segment Type GoBack At GoBack Seg set the value to 3 using or At GoBack Cycles set the value to 4 using or 7 At Segment 7 continue to set the program as described in Example 1 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 22 17 5 4 Example 4 To Run a Dual Programmer Programs can be run in operator level 1 2 or 3 1 Choose the Summary screen which is most appropriate see section 2 8 1 2 Press RUN HOLD button Run may also be activated from an external source if a digital input has been configured or via digital communications 3 Ifa delayed start has been configured the display will ask for a time delay to be entered then press RUN HOLD again as prompted The program will run at the end of the delay time 4 Ifno program has been set up or other error detected see section 22 16 Prog error an error message is displayed otherwise the program will start to run 5 Briefly press RUN HOLD button to hold the program or hold this button down for 3 seconds to reset the program
132. read set the segment duration for the first 8 dwell segments Mnemonics 01 06 are used to poll or configure the digital event outputs per segment Configuring the programmer with a non 818 style program will not produce consistent results as mnemonics 1 I8 represent segments 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 amp 15 Mnemonics t1 t8 represents segments 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 amp 16 Reading Setting Segment Types The r1 r8 mnemonics can be used to change read rate segment types first 8 odd numbered segments by using negative values A value of zero represents a step segment a value of 1 represents an un configured segment within the evolution products this results in a segment type of dwell with zero time effectively a non segment and values of 2 for an End segment The resolution of these mnemonics is again defined by the resolution of Loop PV The values are scaled accordingly so a Loop PV resolution giving 2 decimal places will show a value of 0 02 for an end segment or 0 02 in fixed format mode Program Selection Character B gt ABCD of mnemonic SW Status word represents the currently selected program number This nibble can be written to to select the current program or read from to determine the currently selected program This is limited to 15 programs being a single nibble If a program greater than 15 is selected within the instrument then this byte will return a value of 0 Status Words 818 amp 902 3 4 Status words hav
133. saad ea latina A 221 216 14 Relative CookGaitn iim WellLagoea Process Aida 222 Zi o Mandal TUN ic 223 ZOO Manually Seting Relative Cool Gas a S 223 21 6017 Manually SETS the Cutback Valss sirarne A ais 224 21 7 Setpoint FUNCTION BOCK tia di 225 21 7 1 toop MAME as 226 21 2 SPO A E A E AE ee a ee 228 21 7 3 A ca uldae E mpnava toeia dca utpeeaa ca aaan ad ep eeeERe Deetee 228 21 7 4 o diate E ne eee 229 21 7 5 EEE NI ON 229 21 8 O tpu t Function O 230 21 8 1 Loop Parameters OUTP UA AA AA AAA 230 21 8 2 PUEI a A E ental uvoe ces tie aheeg 234 21 8 3 OPU CR AEEA a E acs E E EAE A E taciaeameatia te 235 21 8 4 Sensor Bicak MOUE cers R E N E N 2300 21 8 5 OO OA 235 21 8 6 Power Feed FONA erarnan A RO 236 21 8 7 ESTAIS ITA A do 236 21 8 8 so 1014 al Cid E A A N eG a ee 237 21 89 Nudge Rae LOWE uane nr ET EAEN ETNE TEE EE ETARE 237 21 8 10 EffectofControlAction Hysteresis and Desa iaa 238 21 9 Diagnostics FUNCTION BIOCKs civecssescissicexisiessesicscctecsesstarsubastocesasstousavessextcosbaayessesassevssiosssoasterseceeeee 239 22 CHAPTER 22 SETPOINT PROGRAMVIMER occcciooosi scoccococonc noccccaciontocacacacodocinncancados 240 22 1 Dita Programmer Modest isa 241 22 1 1 SVACA AO AM dial 241 22 12 Se a A AA 241 221 3 Sale Enmedio 241 22 2 Programmer IPS aaa 242 22 2 1 meto SUERO MA e 242 22 2 2 Ram RS Pro dra MMS ISS 242 22 3 o 0 Gaal hd A O OURO EE UE ECOE ED 243 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 5 User Manual 3500 seri
134. same section a number of times and then continue the program Segment 1 Segment 2 Segments 3 to 6 Segment 7 At this point Go Back To l When planning a program it is advisable to PROMEN ensure that the end and start setpoints of the program are the same otherwise it will step to the different levels Segment 6 is defined as a Goback Seg specifies the segment to go Go Back segment back to Goback Cycles specifies the number of times the goback loop is executed This section is repeated n Overlapping Goback loops are disallowed times AA ee Not Note 1 If a second or more Go Back segments are created they cannot return to a segment before the previous Go Back segment as shown In this diagram a Go Back segment can be created from 3 to 2 or 1 Go Back segments can also be created from 7to or5o0r4but 1 2 3 GoBack 4 5 6 7 Go Back not from 7 to 2 or 1 Segments Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 243 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 22 3 6 244 Wait Wait specifies the criterion for which a segment cannot proceed to the next segment Any segment can be defined as Wait in the Program Edit page The next parameter is then Wait For and here you define the criterion Wait For criteria None No action Prgln1 Wait until Input 1 is true Prgln2 Wait until Input 2 is true Prgln 1 amp 2 Wait until Inputs 1 AND 2 are true Prgln 1or2 Wait until Input
135. segment state No Yes Conf Conf Conf HI Conf Conf R O R O R O R O R O program control NO 76 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Now select the program number to be created or edited Press followed by or O Programs can be created and edited in Level 3 or configuration level This gives access to parameters which allow you to set up each segment of the selected program The following table lists these parameters List Header Program Sub header 1 to 50 Parameter Description Value Default Access Press D or to change e values Segments This value automatically increments when 1 to 50 1 R O Used another segment is added Holdback Deviation between SP and PV at which Minimum setting O ES Value holdback is applied This value applies to the whole program Ramp Units Time units applied to the segments Seconds L3 i Minutes Hour Hours Cycles Number of times the whole program repeats Cont Repeats L3 1 to 9999 continuously Program executes once to 9999 times End 3 Segment To define the type of segment Last segmentin the End L3 Type program See also section 22 3 Rate of change of SP Duration to new SP Duration at previous SP Rapid change to new SP To insert a new program in the current program End Type Only shown if Segment Type End The program will Dwell L3 Defines the action to be taken a
136. show graph limits text and the parameter value If this T takes up too many characters then priority is f j given first to the value then to the text then i to the limits Err 17 05 Note 1 A user page is produced by adding styles one after another Generally this can be made in any order However the default style of 3500 series displays is to show a heading in the first line of the alpha numeric section followed by a list of parameters and their descriptions the scroll button being used in operator mode to select parameters When producing a user page it is recommended that this default style is followed avoid confusion during operation In the case of a Triple Line display if this placed as the first item in the user page the first line of user text takes up the title space If another Triple Line style follows this you will be unable to scroll to this in operator mode To avoid this make the first line a title using Text style Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 27 7 3 Immediate Programmer Setpoint A parameter ImmPSP is available in Tools which can be promoted to a User Page on the controller display It is identical to the normal PSP except that changes using the raise lower buttons on the front panel take immediate effect A typical application is where it required to nudge the setpoint gradually up or down for example in crystal growing applications It must
137. shown PV Wait WaitVal Configures the type of alarm to be applied to the PVWaitIP parameter This sets the value at which the PV Wait parameter becomes active It is not shown if PV Wait None None No alarm type applied None Abs Hi Absolute high Abs Lo Absolute low Dev Hi Deviation high Dev Lo Deviation low Dev Band Deviation band a If Segment Type Call Program Call Cycles End Type Event Outs 272 Call the following two parameters are shown UP to 50 current program number L3 excluded Enter the program number to be inserted in place of the selected segment Only shown if Segment Type Call Defines the number of times the inserted program repeats Only shown if Segment Type Call Only shown if Segment Type End Defines the action to be taken at the end of the program To define the state of up to eight event outputs in the selected segment 00000000 to SHEER or TOOOOOOO to SHEER T Time event O event off E event on Cont Repeats continuously 1 to 999 Program executes 1 to 999 times Dwell The program will remain Dwell L3 at last SP indefinitely SafeOP The power output will go to a defined level Reset The program will return to controller only mode 3 Time event This will be shown in the first event only when Time Event Event 1 See section 224 2 NS Part No HAO2
138. shown if Segment Type End Defines the action to be taken at the end of the program To define the state of up to eight event outputs in the selected segment 00000000 to SHEER or TOOOOOOO to SHEER T Time event O event off W event on Issue 15 Jun 13 User Manual Sub header 1 to 50 These may also have user eee ei AA names Value Press D or to change values PID set 1 Set o SafeOP here A EA Access Level The program will l remain at last SP indefinitely The program will return to controller only mode The output value goes to a predefined level The value is set in the list LP OP see chapter 21 Of Time event CIS will be shown in the first event only when Time Event Event 1 See section 22 4 2 263 User Manual 3500 series Controllers List Header Program Edit Sync All Sub header 1 to 50 These may also have user defined program names On the next On the next press of the next Segment is selected 22222 O O S of the next Segment is selected If If Segment Type Wait the following parameter is shown ssi iss Type Wait the following parameter is shown Wait For Allows you to select the condition to become Prgln1 Wait until input 1 is true before proceeding true Prgln2 Wait until input 2 is true Prgln1n2 Wait until input 1 AND input 2 is true Prgln1or2 Wait until input 1 OR input 2 is true PVWai
139. that the program to be run has already been entered Setpoint programming is described in detail in Chapter 22 Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 Press da 2 Press a or O to choose the program number to be run scroll through parameters associated with the running program The parameters are listed in the above table 4 Repeated pressing of will 6 To Reset a program press and hold for at least 3 seconds In this example Program Number 1 It may also have a user defined name In the 3504 Program names can be entered using the off line programming package iTools If a delayed start has been configured the program will start to run after the delay period set The RUN beacon is illuminated at the top of the display The view shown here shows program being run segment number and type and time left to complete this segment These show current value of channel 1 setpoint and current value of channel 2 setpoint The target value of channel 1 is also shown Press bog again to continue the program When the program is complete RUN will flash RUN will extinguish and the controller will return to the HOME display shown in section 2 3 Alternatively run hold or reset a program by scrolling to Program Status using and select Run Hold or Reset using WM or O The button 3504 only provides a short cut to the Program Status page
140. the controller to be calibrated a i Select calibration of the low position L3 R O against the maximum and Select calibration of the high position potentiometer l e Confirm the position to calibrate Adjust the pot to minimum position select Lo Start calibration followed by Confirm The controller will automatically Calibration stopped calibrate to this position Controller automatically calibrating Repeat for the maximum ae o SONE Calibration OK position and selecting Hi If the potentiometer is part Calibration bad of the valve positioning i motor it may be difficult to Tostan uny e Vales adjust the pot position In Save User To store the new values to EE this case refer back to memory For User calibration tion 8 2 4 Save Fact To store the new values to EE memory For Factory calibration password protected Load Fact Load factory calibration Save User required for permanent use of Factory calibration Status Working condition of the OK Potentiometer input broken R O See note 2 module Sbreak section 10 3 1 10 3 10 Transmitter Power Supply This module may be used to provide 24Vdc to power an external transmitter List Header Mod Sub headers xA xB xC x the number of the slot in which the module is fitted Parameter Description Value Default Access Press or to change values Level Channel type TxPSU Transducer power supply MS L3 R O Status Module status OK Normal
141. to PV Outer Cancel HE Note the arrow next to the parameter which has been wired 17 Press as instructed to F 1 ARA confirm rt Moss Lal To remove a wire see section 5 1 3 9 2 2 Relay Output Scaling If the output is configured for time proportioning control it can be scaled such that a lower and upper level of PID demand signal can limit the operation of the output value The procedure for this is the same as logic outputs described in section 8 2 5 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 95 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 10 Chapter10 Module Configuration Plug in IO modules provide additional analogue and digital IO These modules can be fitted in any of six slots The terminal connections for these are given in Chapter 1 Installation The type and position of any modules fitted in the controller is shown in the order code printed on the label on the side of the controller This can be checked against the order code in Chapter 1 The module part number is printed on the side of the plastic case of the module Spare modules can be ordered by contacting Eurotherm support service where they can be supplied using a SUB number For reference this is shown in the final column of the table below All modules fitted are identified in the controller under the page heading ModIDs Modules are available as single channel two channel or three channel IO as listed below Instrument Idents Nu
142. to establish steady state conditions B to D First heat cool cycle to establish first overshoot CBL is calculated on the basis of the size of this overshoot assuming it is not set to Auto in the initial conditions B to F Two cycles of oscillation are produced from which the peak to peak response and the true period of oscillation are measured PID terms are calculated F to G An extra heat stage is provided and all heating and cooling power is turned off at G allowing the plant to respond naturally Measurements made during this period allow the relative cool gain R2G to be calculated CBH is calculated from CBL R2G H Autotune is turned off at and the process is allowed to control at the target setpoint using the new control terms Autotune can also occur when the initial PV is above SP The sequence is the same as tuning from below setpoint except that the sequence begins with full cooling applied at B after the first one minute settling time 218 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers 21 6 11 Autotune From Below SP Heat Only The sequence of operation for a heat only loop is the same as that previously described for a heat cool loop except that the sequence ends at F since there is no need to calculate R2G User Manual At F autotune is turned off and the process is allowed to control using the new control terms Relative cool gain R2G is set to 1 0 for heat on
143. to be set for the condition to become true Abs Lo Absolute low Dev Hi Deviation high GoBack Seg Only appears if the segment type is GoBack It defines the 1 to the number of segments defined segment to return to to repeat that part of the program GoBack Sets the number of times the chosen section of the program is 1 to 999 Cycles repeated Call Program Only applies to single program and only if the segment is Call Up to 50 current program number Enter the program number to be inserted in the segment excluded Call Cycles Defines the number of times the called program repeats Cont Continuous 1 to 999 Once to 999 times Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 51 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 2 8 4 Control Summary Page On the Control Summary page the following parameters are available SP Select To select SP1 or SP2 Between range As levels of access code To set the rate at which the setpoints change Lev 1 alterable in To start self tuning Off On Lev To set proportional band 0 to 99999 Ll a cet Parameter To set relative cool gain 0 1 to 10 0 MI appear if To set cut back high Auto to 99999 A control a configured To set cut back low Auto to 99999 A for On Off To set a high limit on the control output 100 0 to 100 0 100 0 To set a low limit on the control output 100 0 to 100 0 OO Ch1 OnOff Channel 1 hysteresis Only if configured and for On Off 0 0 to 200 0 Hyst control Ch2 OnOff Channel 2 hysteres
144. to calibrate to e With the source set to its low output set the Lo Point to 0 This defines the low point at which you wish to calibrate the sensor to the controller Set Lo Offset until the display reads as required e With the source set to its high output set the Hi Point to 1000 This defines the high point at which you wish to calibrate the sensor to the controller Set Hi Offset until the display reads as required Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 87 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 8 Chapter 8 Logic Input Output There are two logic IO channels standard on all controllers which may be configured independently as inputs or outputs Connections are made to terminals LA and LB with LC as the common for both Parameters in the LgclO lists allow each IO to be configured independently under the sub headers LA and LB Note the two IO are not isolated from each other since they share a common return The logic IO channels can also be used as a transmitter power supply as described in section 1 6 2 8 1 To select Logic IO list Select Level 3 or Configuration level as described in Chapter 3 Then press as many times as necessary until the header LgclO is displayed 8 2 Logic IO Parameters List Header LgclO Sub header LA and LB Name Parameter Value Default Access to select Description Press or Dto change values Level To configure the Input Logic input Input Conf
145. to scroll to the to strain gauge range 0 to 3000 required parameter PUT ret Configure Range Hi and Range Lo to the input Dise Hi 3000 A _ 3 Use or to change Dis Lo At mV range 0 33 30mV parameter values Sr ge Hi att TA 24 3 3 3 Configure the Transducer Power Supply Module In configuration level Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes In this example Mod 4 1 Press as many times Mio 45 as necessary to select the module in which the Transducer Power Supply is fitted As a single output module only 4A is available Bi aernt Pier PEL Meas Value Pi External refers to the calibration resistor Rca 2 Press o to scroll to fitted externally to the controller internally in the Shunt and a or O to Mod 4H transducer change to External Status Oe An excitation of 10V will give an input of ESA external 3 33mV V i e 33 3mV 3 Press to scroll to Who tye i Uolts Voltage and O or to change to 10 Volts Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 285 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 24 3 3 4 Transducer Values In configuration level Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes O l In this example transducer 1 is being used 1 Press as many times Track ji Configure Cal Type Shunt as necessary to select the iw ee medir be Cal Tore Sarit Cal Enable Yes this enables cal parameters ee ee m
146. type of load For typical applications we recommend Schaffner FN321 or FN612 If the unit is used in table top equipment which is plugged into a standard power socket then it is likely that compliance to the commercial and light industrial emissions standard is required In this case to meet the conducted emissions requirement a suitable mains filter should be installed We recommend Schaffner types FN321 and FN612 Routing of wires 388 To minimise the pick up of electrical noise the low voltage DC connections and the sensor input wiring should be routed away from high current power cables Where it is impractical to do this use shielded cables with the shield grounded at both ends In general keep cable lengths7 to a minimum Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 33 Appendix B Technical Specification Environmental performance Temperature limits Storage Humidity limits Panel sealing Shock Vibration Altitude Atmospheres Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Emissions and immunity Electrical safety INSTALLATION CATEGORY II POLLUTION DEGREE 2 Physical Panel mounting Dimensions and weight Panel cut out dimensions and weight Operator interface Type Main PV display Message display Status beacons Access levels User pages Number Parameters Functions Access level Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Operation O to 50 C 10 to 70 C Operation 5 to 95 RH n
147. which the Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 Custom 1 to 8 A summary of the Loop parameters are displayed in the message centre Bar Scale Max Upper limit of the vertical bar graph 99999 to scale 99999 Bar Scale Min Lower limit of the vertical bar graph scale Main Bar Val Main bar graph value parameters are displayed in the message centre section 2 8 1 in the This can be wired to any parameter See also section 6 5 2 English French German Spanish Defines the level in which a program Defines the level in which the control page 1 is shown Control2 Page Defines the level in which the control page 2 is shown Alarm Page Defines the level in which the alarm page is shown Alarm Enables disables the alarm summary o Disabled CN COC MO B By default the output beacons are wired to operate when channel 1 or channel 2 outputs from the selected loop are active They can however Transducer 1 Scaling page is visible Transducer 2 Scaling page is visible User Manual Dis Display Default Access Dor to change Level Loop summary Loop Conf Program summary Customised Access Off the controller will not revert to the HOME 1 min display Enabled On Conf Disabled Disabled Enabled Conf Disabled n Enabled Disabled O Conf Conf 200 Conf E OO E OO E Conf Level1 Conf Conf Conf R O R O Conf Level 1 Conf
148. words from the slave The SlvData1 to 16 parameters will contain the values received from the slave Read input register Read up to 16 words from the slave The SlvData1 to 16 parameters will contain the values received from the slave Force coil Write a single bit The value in SlvData1 will be written to the slave Load register Write a single word The value in SlvData1 will be written to the slave Force multiple coils Write up to 16 bits The value in SlvData1 will be written to the slave Load multiple registers The values in SlvData1 to 16 will be written to the slave R W in L3 and conf if Enable No R W in conf R O in L3 A value of 0 is allowed for compatibility with JBUS slaves For function codes 1 2 and 15 up to 16 bits may be read or written into SlvData1 For function codes 3 4 and 16 up to 16 words may be read or written into SlvData1 to 16 as appropriate R W in L3 if Write Functions 5 6 15 16 SlvData1 is always available SlvData2 16 are not available for bit functions Otherwise available according to item count R O for Read Functions 1 2 3 4 R W in conf R O in L3 The slave data is treated as a 16 bit signed integer When writing to the slave the value is clipped to the limits 32768 to 32767 The slave data is treated as a 16 bit unsigned integer When writing to the slave the value is clipped to the limits O to 65535 155 User
149. work as expected 21 4 1 5 Motorised Valve Output Connections The loop output which has been configured as valve position can be wired to the Logic IO LA and LB or to a Dual Output Relay Logic or Triac module Only one lO Type needs to be configured in the dual lO output since the second will assume the opposite type For example if Loop 1 Channel 1 output is wired to Logic IO LA and the IO Type is configured as Valve Raise then IO Type for Logic lO LB will be Valve Lower as shown below lO LgclO LA Main AutoMan Main PV Main PV Main WorkingSP Tune AutotuneEnable OP Ch1 Out SP SPSelect SP SP1 SP SP2 SP AltSPSelect SP AltSP SP SPTrim OP ManualMode OP ManualOutVal Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 LA PV IO LgclO LB LB PV 205 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 21 4 2 Loop Parameters Set up A summary of the parameters used to configure the type of control are listed in the following table List Header Lp1 or Lp2 Sub header Setup Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press 0 or a to change values Level Ch1 Control Selects the channel 1 2 control As Conf cho Contral algorithm Different algorithms ordered L3 R O Sac ales may be selected for channels 1 and PID 3termorPIDcontrol section 21 4 1 2 In temperature control applications Ch1 is usually heating Che is cooling Rev Control Act Sets the direction of control i e Reverse acting The output reverse
150. www eurotherm co uk Features e Parameter Set up e Device Operation e Device Recipe e Program Editing e Configuration of User Pages e Graphical Wiring e Cloning On Line Off line Editing If you open the editor on a real device then all the changes you make will be written to the device immediately All the normal instrument rules apply so you will be able to make the same changes to the parameters of a running instrument that you could make using its front panel If you open a program file or open the Programmer Editor on a simulation you will need to save the program or send it to a real device Offline programming is actually done using an instrument simulation that can hold as many programs as areal instrument If you wish to create a set of programs which will all be used in a single instrument you can create a new program and then change the program number using the spin control and edit another program Each program must be saved separately If you make a change to one program and switch to another program you will be prompted to save that program Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 307 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 27 3 27 4 308 Connecting a PC to the Controller The controller may be connected to the PC running iTools using the EIA232 or EIA485 communications digital communications ports H or J as shown in section 1 8 1 Alternatively using the IR clip or configuration clip as shown in section 14 2 To Scan for
151. 0 4 Seal ype Time 2 Time 2 GoBack 6 Time 2 gt Wait 5 End 0 S Duration 5m 10m 8m oo 3m e EndType Dwell 1 W aitFor Pralni 0 GobackSeg 2 GobackCycles 12 EventOuts a 1 MIA 2 ee TargetSP 1 100 00 100 00 250 00 250 00 Holdback 1 Off 0 gt Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 TargetSP 2 200 00 200 00 290 00 200 00 Holdback 2 Off 0 gt Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 27 12 1 1 Segment Types 332 Possible segment types are Rate Dwell Step Time GoBack Wait Call and End all of which are available in a Single Programmer In a SyncAll programmer Rate Dwell Step are not available In a SyncStart programmer Call is not available Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 27 12 2 The Spreadsheet The segment values are shown in a spreadsheet format Each cell either contains a set of enumerated values shown as a drop down list a numerical value or a duration To change an enumeration either type its numeric value or choose from the drop down list If the enumeration is for an event output and so only has the values On 1 and Off 0 you can double click the cell to change to the other value To change a numeric value click on the cell and type the new value It is accepted when you move on to another cell using the enter tab or arrow keys To change a duration type it in the format __h __m__s__ms where _ is anumber
152. 00 Series Controllers User Manual 10 1 To Fit a New Module IO modules can be fitted in any of six slots in the 3504 and any of three slots in 3508 controllers Communications modules can be fitted in any of two slots A list of available IO modules is given in Table 10 1 These modules are fitted simply by sliding them into the relevant position as shown below When a module has been changed the controller will power up with the message Error M X Changed where X is the module number This must be acknowledged by pressing and O together Communications Module lt lt IO Modules IO Modules Figure 10 1 View of the Plug in Modules Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 97 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 10 2 Module Identification Press until the list header ModIDs is displayed The type of lO module fitted in any of the six slots three if 3508 is shown The identification of the module fitted is shown in Table 10 1 10 3 Module Types The tables in the following pages list the parameters available for the different modules 10 3 1 Relay Logic or Triac Outputs These modules are used to provide an output to a two state output device such as a contactor SSR motorized valve driver etc List Header Mod Sub headers xA triac changeover or 2 pin relay xA and xC dual relay dual triac xA xB xC triple logic x the number of the slot in which the module is fitt
153. 1 4 To Check RTD Input Calibration Connect a decade box with total resistance lower than 1K and resolution to two decimal places in place of the RTD as indicated on the connection diagram below before the instrument is powered up If at any instant the instrument was powered up without this connection then at least 10 minutes must elapse from the time of restoring this connection before RTD calibration check can take place Controller n Matched impedance copper copperleads y Decade Box Figure 26 3 Connections for RTD Calibration The RTD range of the instrument is 200 to 850 C It is however unlikely that it will be necessary to check the instrument over this full range Set the resistance of the decade box to the minimum range For example 0 C 100 00Q Check the calibration is within 0 25 of reading 1LSD Set the resistance of the decade box to the maximum range For example 200 C 175 86Q Check the calibration is within 0 25 of reading 1LSD Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 299 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 26 2 Input Calibration If the calibration is not within the specified accuracy follow the procedures in this section Inputs which can be calibrated e mV Input This is a linear 80mV range calibrated at two fixed points This should always be done before calibrating either thermocouple or resistance thermometer inputs mA ranges are included in the mV range e Thermocouple c
154. 1 to SlvData16 SmpHld SootAlm 21 5 1 22 16 Source SP HighLim SP Input N NO NO oo Os SP Input SP LowLim SP Select SP Track SP Trim SP Trim Hi SP Trim Lo SP2 Lp SP SPRate Disable NO N4 BEN NO N4 lt NO N HEN p ws pa Lp SP User Manual Td Td2 Td3 Lp PID 21 5 1 404 3500 series Controllers Tens acom zs Threshold Anam 12 4 Threshold IPMon 17 2 Ti Ti2 Ti3 21 96 1s Time 15 2 6 RTClock 15 4 1 Prog Edit Sync All ZA ATM Program Setup 22 16 Comms 14 9 2 Zirconia Time Time Above Time Event Time2Clin TimeEvent Timeout Timer En Tolerance 15 3 1 Inst Enb Ss Triggered 15 2 6 Type Load 20 1 UnpackBitEn 637 UserVal 16 UserValOP 16 UsrVal Prog Edit Sync All 22 17 Part No HA027988 Total Total Totalise En Track En Track OP Track PV Track SP Transact Count ON EEN WW o Ls PA NO NO Os NO NO d o Value Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual NenionNun nett a Wdog Action Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 405 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 35 Declaration of Conformity Inve nss sS Eurotherm Declaration of Conformity Manufacturer s name Eurotherm Limited Manufacturer s address Faraday Close Worthing West Sussex BN13 3PL United Kingdom Product type Process controller and programmer Models 3504 Status level A1 and above 350
155. 10307 Alarm 5 Reference ONPE 10308 AlartnS Latch 10303 Alarm 5 Priority 10310 Alarm 5 Block 10311 Alartn S inhib 10312 Alarm 5 Delay AA 10313 Alarm 5 Out 10314 Alartn5 Ack 10320 0x2850 Alarm 6 Type 0 None 1 Abs High 2 Abs Low 3 Dev 10321 Alarm 6 Threshold ed 10322 Alarm 6 Hysteresis a 10323 Alarm Reference E 10324 Alarm Latch 10325 Alarm 6 Priority 10326 Alarm Block 10327 Alarm Inhibit 10328 Alarm 6 Delay PER 10323 Alarm Qu 10330 Alartn 6 Ack 10336 0x2860 Alarm 7 Type 0 None 1 Abs High 2 Abs Low 3 Dev 10337 Alarm 7Threshold AAA 10338 Alarm 7 Hysteresis IN 10339 Alarm 7 Reference A OA 10340 Alartn 7 Latch 10342 Alart 7 Block 10343 Alarm 7 Inhibit 10344 Alartn 7 Delay ed 10345 Alarm7 Qu 10346 Alarm 7Ack 10352 0x2870 Alarm 8 Type 0 None 1 Abs High 2 Abs Low 3 Dev 10353 Alarm 8 Threshold NEON 10354 Alarm 8 Hysteresis A 10355 Alartn 8 Reference A 10356 Alarm BLatch 366 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 of change 7 Falling rate of change High 4 Dev low 5 Dev Band 6 Rising rate of change 7 Falling rate of change High 4 Dev low 5 Dev Band 6 Rising rate of change 7 Falling rate of change High 4 Dev low 5 Dev Band 6 Rising rate of change 7 Falling rate of change High 4 Dev low 5 Dev Band 6 Rising rate of change 7 Falling rate of change 3500 Series Controllers User Manual MODBUS MODBUS Parameter 10357 0x2875 Alarm 8 Priority 10358 0x2876 Alarm 8 Block
156. 14 13315 13316 13317 13318 13319 13320 x33CB__ ZirconiatProbenput SiS Ox33CC_ Zirconia Oxygenxp Sd Ox33CD Zirconia Oxygen Sid 0x33CE 0x33D0 ZrconiatwkGes SP 0x3302 Zirconia Temper 0x3303 Zirconia RemGasRef J SSS 0x33D5 1 ae 0x3306 Zirconia MinCalTemp Sd 013308 013309 0x33DB Zirconia 1 ProcFactor AA IN Zrconiat Tolerence SSS 3400 HumidityWetOfset OSS 03401 Humidiy Pressure OSS S 0x3403 Humidiy Psychrocos oOo ox3404 HumidityRelHumid O OOS S Hamid Demon Humidiy Dytemp OOS SS 033407 Humidity WetTemp oS Zirconia 1 DewPoint Humidity Resolution O X 1 X X 2 X XX 3 X XXX 4 X XXXX olo oO oO oO oO oO oO oO Z x X x x x x x x x T w w OO OO OW OW Se OO OO D 518 5 a E z SISIA E U U U U U os ul N O gt N D T 0x3408 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 369 User Manual 30 4 30 4 1 370 3500 series Controllers Dual Programmers via SCADA Comms and Profibus Tag Addreses It is possible to edit and run programs for either asynchronous or synchronous programmers using SCADA communications As programs can be run by any programmer and segments are located in a free formatted pool the SCADA addresses of Program Segment parameters are dependent upon a number of factors and hence a set procedure must be followed These tables also show the Tag addresses for Profibus protocol Parameter Tables The following table lists the offsets for Programmer paramete
157. 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual MODBUS MODBUS Parameter Enumerations 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027 5028 5029 8192 10176 10188 10200 0x1393 0x1394 0x1395 0x1396 x1397 x1398 x1399 x139a x139b x139c x139d x139e x139f x13a0 x13a1 x13a2 0x13a3 x13a4 x13a5 MultiOper 1 In MultiOper 1 In7 MultiOper 1 In8 MultiOper 1 SumOut MultiOper 1 MaxOut MultiOper 1 MinOut MultiOper 1 AverageOut MultiOper 2 In1 MultiOper 2 In2 MultiOper 2 In3 MultiOper 2 In4 MultiOper 2 In5 MultiOper 2 In MultiOper 2 In7 MultiOper 2 In8 MultiOper 2 SumOut MultiOper 2 MaxOut MultiOper 2 MinOut MultiOper 2 AverageOut Comms ProgNum ojo O oO O O O x x X T No No No O CO 00 O x ae ik O NI On oO olojo ololojojo O O 0x27c0 Ox27cc 0x27d8 AlmSummary AnAlarmByte AlmSummary DigAlarmByte AlmSummary SBrkAlarm 10240 0x2800 Alarm 1 Type 0 None 1 Abs High 2 Abs Low 3 Dev High 4 Dev low 5 Dev Band 6 Rising rate of change 7 Falling rate of change 10241 0x2801 Alarm 1 Threshold AS 10242 0x2802 Alarm 1 Hysteresis led 10243 0x2803 Alarm 1 Reference MI nnn 10244 ox2804 Alarm 1 Latch 10245 0x2805 Alarm 1 Priority 10246 0x2806 Alarm 1 Block 10247 0x2807 Alarm 1 Inhibit 10248 0x2808 Alarm 1 Delay AAA 10249 0x2809 Alarm 1 Out 10250 0x280a Alarm 1 Ack 10256 0x2810 Alarm 2 Type 0 None 1 Abs Hig
158. 15 Jun 13 47 User Manual 3500 series Controllers Note 1 Holdback 48 Holdback freezes the program if the process value PV does not track the setpoint SP by more than a user defined amount The instrument will remain in HOLDBACK until the PV returns to within the requested deviation from setpoint The display will flash the HOLD beacon In a Ramp it indicates that the PV is lagging the SP by more than the set amount and that the program is waiting for the process to catch up In a Dwell it freezes the dwell time if the difference between the SP and PV exceeds the set limits In both cases it maintains the correct soak period for the product see also section 22 5 In addition to the usual PV Holdback Holdback is also the state when synchronisation is taking place For a SyncAll programmer this occurs if Holdback has caused one PSP to be held back while the other has progressed to completion For a SyncStart programmer this occurs when Ch1 2 is waiting for the other channel In both models it occurs when a Wait segment has been configured and is active When one channel has reached the end of the first cycle and is waiting fro the other channel to complete its first cycle Both channels will start cycle 2 only when they have both completed Implied Sync point at the end of each cycle Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers 2 8 3 2 To Select and Run a Program User Manual In this example it is assumed
159. 17 4 Input Monitor Parameters List Header IPMon Sub headers 1 or 2 Value Name Parameter Description Default Access to select Press or to change values Level Input The input value to be May be wired to an input source The range L3 R O monitored will depend on the source if wired The maximum measured value As above R O L3 recorded since the last reset O minimum measured value As above recorded since the last reset The input timer accumulates the time the input PV spends above this trigger value R O L3 baa reshold Days Accumulated days the input has Above spent above threshold since the last reset Accumulated time above the Threshold since last reset Days is an integer count of the 24 hour periods only The Days value should be combined with the Time value to make the total time above threshold The time value accumulates from 00 00 0 to 23 59 9 Overflows are added to the days Time Above value Days threshold for the monitors time alarm Used in combination with the Alm Time parameter The Alm Out is set to true if the inputs accumulated time above threshold is higher than the timer high parameters Alm Days Time threshold for the monitors 0 00 0 to 99 59 59 time alarm Used in combination with the Alm Days parameter The Alm Out is set to true if the inputs accumulated time above threshold is higher than the timer high parameters Set true if the accumulated time th
160. 2 Beacon o gl Oper Oper Operation OPHi 2 3 OPLo 2 3 E gt On Out Invert d On NO Os Output a 3 2 Output Output 00 09 Output SO 00 a NI Output Output vo puestas 24 6 401 N 00 Output Hi La O Output Lo Output Res n N co WW 00 N User Manual 3500 series Controllers 143 Program Prog Edit Sync Stat 22 17 2 passcode Imsmf 66 propor Lp Diag 21 9 Passcode2 instint 66 Protocol 14 3 Passcode3 instint 66 Bye 162 72 o me ie o A lt 00 N U U u u Poly En V 77 31 14 9 2 PV Event Prog Edit Sync Start 22 17 2 PotBrk Mode Lp OP 21 8 1 PV Input Program Setup 22 16 Lp OP 21 8 1 PV Input Single Program Edit 22 19 1 Math Operators 18 3 1 Onn oa Program Setup 22 16 PV Out2 00 oa el Single Program Edit 22 191 PV Start Prog Edit Sync Start 22 A TZ dies PV Threshold Prog Edit Sync Start 22 172 PV Wait Prog Edit Sync Start 2207 2 PVEvent Program Setup 22 16 Comms ia PVEventOP Program Setup 22 16 Prgln2 16 Pwr Fail Count 6 7 Priority Aia Pwr In 21 8 1 PB Tyne 164 R2G R2G2 21 5 1 pra ProbelP 16 4 Ramp Rate 22 172 ProbeOffs 16 4 Ramp Rate Za ProbeStat 16 4 Ramp Units 22 17 2 ProcFact 16 4 Ramp Units ZIAD Ay ula Prog RunReset Program Setup 22 16 Range Min NO NO oo Os de NO IN W N No tn
161. 22 1971 ycles Prog Edit Sync All 22 17 1 Equal to or Cycles Single Program Edit 22 19 1 greater than Logic operators 18 1 2 398 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 N p On D 6 6 e 3500 Series Controllers Equal to or less than Logic operators 18 1 2 Error Count 6 7 Error1 6 7 Error3 Inst Dia 6 7 Error4 6 7 Error5 6 7 Fallback PV Input Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 User Manual G Soak Value Prog Edit Sync Start 22 17 2 H2_Remote 16 4 Hi Offset 10 3 Hi Point 10 3 High Limit 18 3 2 High Limit Mux8 18 4 1 High Limit UsrVal 25 1 High Output 21 6 4 Hold 15 34 Holdback Type 22 17 2 Holdback Type Single Program Edit LL Holdback Value 22 17 2 Holdback Value 22 19 1 Humidity En 6 3 1 Inst Opt Math8 Home Page Mm J n Home Timeout HotSwp de N D Ident Idle Stack Free ImmSP Total In 6 BCDIn 12 6 BCDIn 12 6 399 5 O amp Dd TIES o Dd 5 UU O Y 5 In 1 10 In 11 20 O m x lt O 5 N O m x Res ad md User Manual 3500 series Controllers Parameter Section Parameter Section In High 19 2 Invert 10 3 Peete IO Exp En 6 3 1 A O Type Int to 14 IO Type In1 to In 20 IOExp IO Type 10 3 Int to Int 14 10 1 IP Address 1 14 4 Ins IP Address 4 14 4 Ind 18 5 6 IP Mon En 631 R Mode LastCln Zirconia 16 4 LATCH 1812 LBT LBT2 LBT3 21 5 1 Math Operators 18 3 1
162. 3 o ojofjo ojijojo 4 o ofojofofifoji 5 LC EA EC OOOO ooo tpt ifs yay 255 338 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 27 17 Loop Naming An additional parameter LoopName has been added to the Loop Setup page for use controllers fitted with software versions 2 30 This parameter is only available in Tools and will allow names to be given to each loop The name will show on the loop summary pages only it is not shown in the dual loop summary page since there is insufficient space for meaningful text Tools File Device Explorer View Options Window Help El Pa gt pa Su ar x F Q Mew File Open File Load Save Print Scan Add Remove Access View s E eraphical Wiring EBParameter Explorer E Device Panel MM Terminal wiring BrDevice Recipe 4Watch Recipe Programme Econ noo1 3509 COM1 ID001 3504 Parameter Explorer Loop 1 _ lolx gt ul Wired From nET Access P CH1ControlType Heat Chl Control Type H E Instrument CH2ControlType Cool Ch2 Control Type 5 33 IO ControlAction Control Action BE AlmSummary 4 PBUnits Proportional Band Units H E Comme Derivative Type Derivative Type y ito LoopName Loop Name ef Loop il 3 1 Loop 1 Setup 6 parameters 1 hidden Ei 2 car Programmer 1 1 Program 3 Diag 3 Browse Level 2 Engineer 3504 v E2 32 E EUROTHERM RUHHOLD 3504 E 0 a a In this example the name Top Zone
163. 3 1 Math Operations The following operations can be performed 0 Off The selected analogue operator is turned off 1 Add The output result is the addition of Input 1 and Input 2 2 Sub Subtract The output result is the difference between Input 1 and Input 2 where Input 1 gt Input 2 Hot Swap Input 1 appears at the output provided input 1 is good If input 1 is bad then input 2 value will appear at the output An example of a bad input occurs during a sensor break condition 9 SmpHld Sample and Hold Normally input 1 will be an analogue value and input B will be digital The output tracks input 1 when input 2 1 Sample The output will remain at the current value when input 2 0 Hold If input 2 is an analogue value then any non zero value will be interpreted as Sample The output is the value at input 1 raised to the power of the value at input 2 l e input 1 2 15 10 x The output result is 10 raised to the power of Input 1 value l e 10 Input 2 has no effect 51 Select Select input is used to control which Analogue Input is switched to the output of the Analogue Operator If the select input is true input 2 is switched through to the output If false input 1 is switched through to the output See example below Select input An input 1 If Select Input 1 then An input 2 is selected gt An If Select Input 0 then An input 1 is selected input 2 When Boolean parameters are used
164. 3 TORENA Factor EU o Nea podia dead ouseseateor eles 301 26 3 4 Thermocouple CAIDO Mess ico Ia o 302 26 3 5 RED Cali Bra Oare O E T E T OT 303 26 4 Calibration O N O E T 304 26 5 Valve Position o e O 305 26 6 DC Output and Retransmission Calibration omoomomommoommeemmmmme 306 27 CHAPTER 27 CONFIGURATION USING ITOOLS occcccccccccccccccccccccccococococcccccccccccccccncss 307 27 1 Features EES 307 27 2 On Line Ot ne E Citing iii attain Riek alates 307 27 3 Conmecting a PC to the Controller a 308 27 4 To Scan for Connected Instruments seesseessesssessscesscessocesoesssesescsssoeeseeessceeseesscesseesseeeseeeseesse 308 27 5 Parameter et OD R dai ias 309 27 6 Device Pane leie ii sacucasuseas telascaneatesasasbianiuncstasaaceaees 310 27 7 Dd tecsesecat nce cececctetcee etc cuectes cane EE 311 27 7 1 To Create a User Pa NA 312 2 JZ O ne RPS SE et ee 313 ZN OIE Cale Programmer eto tur 315 27 8 REGCID CE GION ernea a a a T T T T 316 27 8 1 To SEPUDA RE Dita 316 27 8 2 Recipe Menu ONO SiN 317 27 8 3 WERE at AR AAA aa 317 27 9 To Setup Alas ios 318 27 9 1 Example To Customise Analogue Alarm Messages 318 27 9 2 Alarmo anman Rag E ta ashe A a a a une a a a a a nce ate 319 2793 re Customise Digital Alarm Messages lineas A ena a a NN 320 2110 Graphical WINING E GIRO la ti a A A A 321 27O arapca Winnog TOO ID a A AN 321 2a TENDINITIS IA 322 ZII USO FUACUON BIOS AI A Inia 322 PS A A sseeseet nsec esas ave aap te
165. 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 22 17 3 Summary of Parameters which appear for different Segment Types Pressing will scroll through the parameters listed in the above table When the last parameter in a segment is configured the next press of willtake you to the next segment number This will always be an End segment until it is configured differently The following table shows a summary of the parameters which appear for different Segment Types For this summary it is assumed that Holdback Type PV Event and Time Event are set to Off Segment 1 Segment Type Rate Target SP Ramp Rate Holdback Type PV Event Time Event UsrVal PID Set Event Outs Segment 5 Segment 2 Segment Type Time Target SP Duration Holdback Type Segment 3 Segment Type Dwell Duration Gsoak Type PV Event PV Event Time Event Time Event UsrVal PID Set Event Outs Segment 6 Segment Type Segment Type Wait Wait For Part No HA027988 Issue 15 GoBack GoBack Seg GoBack Cycles Jun 13 UsrVal PID Set Event Outs Segment 4 Step Holdback Type PV Event UsrVal PID Set Event Outs Segment 7 Segment Type End End Type PID Set Event Outs Segment Type 269 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 22 17 4 To Edit a Single Channel Programmer By default when the program is configured as a Single Programmer in the Inst Opt page only programmer channel 1 can be r
166. 3500 series Controllers 22 Chapter 22 Setpoint Programmer The purpose of a setpoint programmer is to vary the setpoint in a controlled manner over a set period of time The resulting Program is divided into a flexible number of Segments each being a unit of time The total number of segments available in 3500 controller is 500 or a maximum of 50 per program and it is possible to store up to 50 separate programs It is often necessary to switch external devices at particular times during the program Up to eight digital event outputs can be programmed to operate during those segments In controllers fitted with software versions 1 XX a single programmer block is provided This is suitable for applications such as heat treatment or firing of ceramics materials where a single variable temperature is controlled Parameters specific to this earlier version are listed in the Appendix at the end of this chapter In controllers fitted with software versions 2 onwards two single programmer blocks are included The dual controller allows two process variables to be controlled and is suitable for applications such as environmental chambers controlling for example temperature and humidity An example of a dual program and two event outputs is shown below Program LNs t SS PV Segment Ps 4 Segment 1 Time SP profile Channel 1 SP profile m Ys Channel 2 Nat 1 Target Start R
167. 48 1020 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Function Reserved Parameter Tag Address Readrequest 0 o o 1 o ofo 1 o ojojofi i ijo Successful write code 4096 dec tag address 270 dec 4366 dec 1000 10E 110E hex Response Step 5a Ifthe Autotune write was successful poll Stage of Tune tag 269 until Autotune complete ae lelea eaa E A A A TE EE Decimal 32768 16384 8192 2098 2048 1020 12 256 128 64 32 16 9 4 2 1 Function Reserved Parameter Tag Address Readrequest 0 0 o 1 o fo pfop1jo0opojofoj1 1jojr1 Successful write code 4096 dec tag address 269 dec 4365 dec 1000 10D 110D Hex Step 6 To determine when Autotune is complete Look at the enumeration of the Stage of Tune parameter at address 269 until the enumeration changes to 12 Complete Any value for register 1 other than 4108 signifies an error has occurred in which case register 4 will contain an error code of 0 or 1 or 2 MAME PMA eae es EEES EA EA Ee Decimal 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Response ro po potty of ofopfo opofopel tt poto Meaning Parameter value is 8 4 12 Step 5b If an error occurs after Step 4 Code 7 Step 5a becomes Teno as a ele om yrs 7s 7 e s 4 3 2 i o Decimal 32768 16384 6192 4096 2068 1024 512 256 128 oa 32 168 a12 Function Command code Reserv
168. 508 The controller automatically displays parameters applicable to the module fitted if no module is fitted in a slot then it does not appear in the list Each module can have up to three inputs or outputs These are shown as A B or C after the module number and this corresponds to the terminal numbers on the back of the instrument If the I O is single only A appears If it is dual A and C appears if it is triple A Band C appear Note 1 Ifa Dual DC Output module is fitted it cannot be configured using the Quick Start Code To configure this module refer to the User Manual part no HAQ27988 which can be downloaded from www eurotherm co uk Note 2 Ifan incorrect module is fitted the message Bad Ident will be displayed Change over Relay R4 Relay Triac Not Used Always if the 2 pin Relay R2 function All parameters the same as RIyOP AA including module is fitted Triac output T2 Min OnTime if the OP is a relay Dual Relay RR Relay Triac Dual Triac output TT function Relay function Single Logic Output Logic Out function Not Used Always if the LO All parameters the same as RlyOP AA module is titted Triple Logic Output TP DC Output D4 DC Output function Always if the DC Retransmission D6 module is fitted LP1Ch20P Loop 1 Channel 2 control output LP2Ch10P Loop 2 Channel 1 control output LP2 Ch2OP Loop 2 Channel 2 control output LP1 SP Tx Loop 1 setpoint retransmission LP1 PV Tx Loop 1 PV r
169. 6 Can be wired to logic inputs to provide remote program control Program reset is provided so that it may be No Yes wired from digital inputs to reset the program RESET is an INPUT only The Program is held in RESET while the reset input is TRUE Prog Reset Program run is an input to the programmer No Yes When it is switched from False 0 to True 1 the programmer runs its program Note Reset will override this input Prog Run At the end of a program the Program will not re run until Program Run has been set to False and back to True Prog Hold Holds the program while the input is true No Yes Note Reset overrides this input 258 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual List Header Program Setup Sub header Ch1 or Ch2 Prog RunHold RunReset Advance SkipSeg Event 1 to 8 Outputs showing event states On Off End of Seg Flag showing end of segment state On Off PVEventOP UserValOP Sync Input Un lt 5 O a a Part No HA027988 No Yes R O These parameters can be wired to provide a Run Hold facility See section 22 14 7 Program Run Hold is an input to the programmer While itis in the True 1 state it runs the program When itis switched from True 1 to False 0 the programmer Holds its program Note Reset overrides this input in all states Hold overrides this input when in Run state At the end of a program the P
170. 7 4 enabled W Off Off ff Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 227 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 21 7 2 Setpoint Limits The setpoint generator provides limits for each of the setpoint sources as well as an overall set of limits for the loop These are summarised in the diagram below oa dO Range Hi A ons le I gt Figure 21 13 Setpoint Limits OO GO Range Hi and Range Lo provide the range information for the control loop They are used in control calculations to generate proportional bands Span Range Hi Range Lo 21 7 3 Setpoint Rate Limit Allows the rate of change of setpoint to be controlled This prevents step changes in the setpoint It is a simple symmetrical rate limiter and is applied to the working setpoint which includes setpoint trim It is enabled by the Rate parameter If this is set to Off then any change made to the setpoint will be effective immediately If it is set to a value then any change in the setpoint will be effected at the value set in units per minute Rate limit applies to SP1 SP2 and Remote SP When rate limit is active the RateDone flag will display No When the setpoint has been reached this parameter will change to Yes This flag will be cleared if the target setpoint subsequently changes When Rate is set to a value other than Off an additional parameter SPRate Disable is displayed which allows the setpoint rate limit to
171. 79 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 6 5 2 Bar Graph 3504 Only The bar graph shown on the left hand side of the display can be wired to any analogue parameter The example shown in section 27 11 1 shows the bar graph wired to the main PV Markers can also be placed on the bar graph which can be used to indicate minimum and maximum points These points are defined by the parameters Aux1 Bar Val and Aux2 Bar Val respectively The markers may be fixed in position by leaving these two parameters unwired and entering an analogue value Alternatively they may be wired in the following example they are wired to low and high alarm points Aux1 Bar Val Main Bar Value PV below both markers Aux1 Bar Val Main Bar Value PV between both markers Aux1 Bar Val Main Bar Value PV above both markers Figure 6 2 Bar Graph Markers 76 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 6 6 Instrument information This list provides information about the controller as follows List Header Sub header Inf Inst Parameter Description Inst Type The type of instrument e g 3504 can be used over comms to identify the instrument being communicated with Version Num The version of instrument software Can be used to identify the build of software being used and hence what features are available If an upgrade is performed this will be updated and the instrument non volatile ram will be re initia
172. 7988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 22 17 5 Examples Showing How to Set up and Run Dual Programmers The following sections show some examples of setting up program parameters 22 17 5 1 Example 1 Configure a Rate followed by a Dwell Segment This example applies to Single Channel and SyncStart programmers only For a SyncAll programmer the procedure is similar except the segments are set up as Time type segments only DA ger N 10 Dwell SP1 Ai e m o aa o cg aes Rate gt Duration Segment 1 Rate Segment 2 Dwell Event 2 a Timed Event 1 SO JJ In Program Setup select the channel to be set up using or Y For convenience it is also possible to toggle between Ch1 and Ch2 using the pow button To set Event 1 to be atimed event press U to select TimeEvent and or Y to Yes TimeEvent is only available in the Ch1 list and applies to both channels In Program Edit select the program number to be set up Using scroll through the parameters setting their values as required using or Y at each parameter At Segment Type press to Rate At Target SP press to the required target SP At Ramp Rate press to the required rate of change of SP Scroll through the remaining parameters and set these as required At Event Outs set Event 2tom The list then returns to Segment number 2 At Segment Type press to Dwell At Duration
173. 8 Status level Al and above Satety specification EN61010 1 2001 EMC emissions specification EN61326 1 2006 Class B Ethernet Devicenet options Class A EMC immunity specification EN61326 1 2006 Industrial locations Eurotherm Limited hereby declares that the above products contorm to the satety and EMC specifications listed Eurotherm Limited further declares that the above products comply with the EMC Directive 2004 108 EC and also with the Low Voltage Directive Z2006 95 EC Signed AL has Dated 3a ni Lay Signed for and on behalf of Eurotherm Limited Kevin Shaw RED Director AREA LSO hars fee TTA 406 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 407 www eurotherm com Contact Information Eurotherm Head Office Worldwide Offices Faraday Close Durrington www eurotherm com global Represented by Worthing West Sussex BN13 3PL Sales Enquiries General Enquiries T 44 01903 695888 T 44 01903 F 0845 130 9936 268500 F 0845 265982 Scan for local contacts Copyright Invensys Eurotherm Limited 2013 Invensys Eurotherm the Eurotherm logo Chessell EurothermSuite Mini8 Eycon Eyris EPower EPack nanodac piccolo Foxboro and Wonderware are trademarks of Invensys plc its subsidiaries and affiliates All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners All rights are strictly reserve
174. 84 PowerFailAct Offset 5 5189 24 To edit Segment1 Channel data use Programmer Sync Ch1 Segment Start address plus the parameter offset for example to configure the segment type the address to be written to is Programmer Segment Data Start address 5376 Segment Type Offset 0 5376 To configure Ch1 TargetSP the address to be written to is Programmer Segment Data Start address 5376 Segment TargetSP Offset 6 5382 25 To edit Segment Channel2 data use Programmer2 Sync Ch2 Segment Start address plus the parameter offset for example to configure Ch2 TargetSP the address to be written to is Programmer Segment Data Start address 6976 Segment TargetSP Offset 6 6982 For additional segments repeat steps 3 and 4 using the corresponding segment numbers e Programmer 1 Segment 1 Data Programmer 1 Segment 2 Data Programmer1 Segment 7 Data Programmer 2 Segment 1 Data Programmer 2 Segment 2 Data Programmer2 Segment n Data Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 375 User Manual 30 6 376 Asynchronous Programmers setup Syncin Setup Syne 1 setup Progkeset Rin SP Setup ProgRur Run PVE vantQr setup ProgHold setup ProgRunHold Setup Progetunkeset setup Pron Setup Proin2 Setup PvEwentP RUN ur Tog 3500 series Controllers Programmer 2 Setup Synelr kun SP setup ProgFesel Run PYEventQOP setup ProgRun Setup ProgHold setup ProgkunHo d setup ProgRunReset Setup Prgln setup F
175. 88 Issue 15 Jun 13 59 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 4 2 Navigation Diagram The diagram below shows all the function blocks available in the 3500 series controllers as list headings in configuration level A function block will not be shown if it has not been enabled or ordered if it is a chargeable option Select in turn using Access List Instrument PV Input Logic IO AA Relay Module Configuration Output Identities Dis soa Or wen po EAS 5S 0 E A 9 Y See Chapter 3 See Chapter 6 See Chapter 7 See Chapter 8 See Chapter 9 See Chapter 1 Digital BCD Input Analogue Alarm IO Expander Modules Communications Alarms Summary Of fof hejo ole O y v v v v v See Chapter 14 See Chapter 13 See Chapter 12 See Chapter 12 See Chapter 11 See Chapter 10 Communications Counter Digital Alarms Input Monitor Logic Eight Input Logic Table Operators Operators o o dota oe po y v v v v See Chapter 14 amp 28 See Chapter 15 See Chapter 12 See Chapter 17 See Chapter 18 See Chapter 18 Multiple Input Multi Input Maths operators Control Loops Load Input Maths Ops Operator Lp1 amp Lp2 Linearisation lo Pole polo mola pol v y y y y
176. Addresses are to be dynamically allocated then all MAC addresses must be supplied to the network administrator For fixed IP Addresses the Network Administrator will provide the IP address as well as a SubNet Mask These must be configured into the instrument during set up through the COMMS page Remember to note the allocated addresses 14 4 5 Network Connection Screw the RJ45 adapter into the instrument H port as shown in section 1 8 4 Use standard CAT5 cable to connect to the Ethernet 10BaseT switch or hub Use cross over cable only if connecting one to one with a PC acting as network master 14 4 6 Dynamic IP Addressing Within the Comms page of the instrument set the DHCP enable parameter to Dynamic Once connected to the network and powered the instrument will acquire its IP address SubNet Mask and Default gateway from the DHCP Server and display this information within a few seconds 14 4 7 Fixed IP Addressing Within the Comms page of the instrument ensure the DHCP enable parameter is set to Fixed then set the IP address and SubNet Mask as required and defined by your network administrator 14 4 8 Additional notes 1 The Comms page also includes configuration settings for Default Gateway these parameters will be set automatically when Dynamic IP Addressing is used When fixed IP addressing is used these settings are only required if the instrument needs to communicate wider than the local area netw
177. Alarm Summary page ALM beacon on continuously alarm has been acknowledged Further details of alarm indication are shown in section 2 7 12 3 4 To Acknowledge an Alarm Press and Ack together as instructed on the display The action which now takes place will depend on the type of latching which has been configured Non Latched Alarms As stated above when an alarm condition occurs a red flashing alarm beacon is displayed accompanied by an alarm message If a relay has been configured to operate when this alarm occurs as shown in section 12 3 2 the relay will relax to the alarm condition this is the default state for alarm relay outputs This state will continue for as long as the alarm condition remains If the alarm condition disappears before it has been acknowledged all indication will be cancelled and the alarm output relay will reset to the energised non alarm state If the alarm condition is present when the alarm is acknowledged the red alarm beacon will continuously light the alarm message will disappear and the output relay will remain in the alarm condition If the alarm condition is then removed both the red beacon and the relay output will reset Note If the Invert parameter found in the Output List is set to No the relay will energise in alarm and be in the de energised state when no alarm is present The default setting is Yes Automatic Latched Alarms The alarm conti
178. BL by the value of the overshoot in display units If undershoot is observed increase the value of the parameter CBH by the value of the undershoot in display units Display Units PV approaching SP from above adjust CBH Initial overshoot Initial undershoot Setpoint PV approaching SP from below adjust CBL Time Figure 21 11 Manual Setting of Cutback Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 21 7 Setpoint Function Block The controller setpoint is the Working Setpoint which may be sourced from a number of alternatives This is the value ultimately used to control the process variable in a loop The working setpoint may be derived from 1 SP1 or SP2 both of which are manually set by the user and can be switched into use by an external signal or through the user interface 2 From an external remote analogue source 3 The output of a programmer function block This will therefore vary in accordance with the program in use The setpoint function block also provides the facility to limit the rate of change of the setpoint before itis applied to the control algorithm It will also provide upper and lower limits These are defined as setpoint limits SP HighLim and SP LowLim for the local setpoints and instrument range high and low for other setpoint sources All setpoints are ultimately subject to a limit of Range Hi and Range Lo User configurable
179. CTO e Y O A eee Cal Point 4 filets Cal Point 3mm a err S aT ee iv bacwens toes A dd Input A to 14 gt Output Lo eg 0 C Input Lo eg 0 C Input Hi eg 1000 C Figure 19 3 Compensation for Sensor Discontinuities The calibration of the sensor uses the same procedure as described above Adjust the output displayed value against the corresponding input value to compensate for any errors in the standard linearisation of the sensor Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 195 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 19 1 2 Input Linearisation Parameters List Header Lin16 Sub headers 1 to 2 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access DM or h Level to select Press or to change values Units Units of the linearised output None None Conf AbsTemp V mV A mA PH mmHg psi Bar mBar RH mmWG inWG inWW Ohms PSIG 02 PPM CO2 CP sec RelTemp Vacuum sec min hrs Resolution of the output value XXXXX XXXX X XXX XX XX XXX X XXXX P Conf 3 Input Input measurement to linearise Range of the source of the input L Wire to the source for the custom linearisation Fall Type Fallback type Clip Bad For an explanation see Note Clip Good 1 at the end of section 19 2 Fallback Bad Fallback Good Up Scale Down Scale In the event of a bad status the Range of the source of the input output may be configured to adopt the fallback value This allows the strategy to dictate a safe outp
180. Calibrate a Load Cell This is illustrated using the following example Load cell Range 0 to 2000 grams load cell output 2mV V quoted by the manufacturer Transducer power supply set to 10 Volt excitation fitted in module position 4 This produces a full load output of 20 0mV 24 4 1 1 Physical Wiring 288 A 1 Load Cell 10Vdc power supply Input if an analogue input module is used in the appropriate slot D amp _ Figure 24 5 Load Cell Wiring Diagram Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 24 4 2 Configure Parameters Configure the controller as follows Enable one Txdr block in the controller options page see example section 24 3 3 1 PV Input values lO Type see example section 7 2 6 Lin Type angela oO 3 Transducer Power Supply module 10 Volts see example section 10 3 11 Not applicable Txdr Values Cal Type Load Cell Clear Cal No If set to yes this will clear the previous calibration Internal Soft wiring Txdr Input Value If an analogue input module is used see example section 5 1 from PVInput PV wire the Txdr Input to the PV of the module Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 289 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 24 4 3 Configuration Examples The following sections show examples of how these parameters are configured Skip this section if this explanation is not required or if the calibration is being carried out in access levels 1 or 2
181. D inputs The graph below shows an example of input scaling where it is required to display 75 0 when the input is 4mV and 500 0 when the input is 20mV If the input exceeds 5 of the Range Lo or Range Hi settings sensor break will be displayed For m inputs Display 4 20mA 9 96 49 8mV with Reading 2 490 load resistor Diss q aay aa 0 20mA 0 49 8mV with eg 500 0 2 49Q load resistor mA input will detect sensor break if mA lt 3mA Use a current source to remove shunt resistor errors Disp Lo eg 75 0 Electrical Input Range Lo Range Hi eg 4 mV eg 20 mV Figure 7 1 PV Input Scaling 7 2 6 1 Example To Scale a Linear Input Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 Select Conf as described in Chapter 3 Then press O to select PVInput Linearisation type and resolution should 2 Press to scroll to IO Type also be set as appropriate 3 Press a or M to mA Volts or mV 4 Press to scroll to Disp Hi 5 Press a or M to 500 00 PLT Apt EE E 7 Press a or M to 75 00 The controller will read 500 0 for a mA 8 Press to scroll to Range Hi input of 20 00 9 Press a or M to 20 000 The controller will read 75 0 for a mA 10 Press to scroll to Range Lo input of 4 00 11 Press a or M to 4 000 6 Press to scroll to Disp Lo PLIT eet Part No HA027988
182. E Ww gt gt m Segment Last segmentinthe End program Segment Type See also section 22 3 Rate of change of SP Time duration of the segment Duration at previous SP Immediate change to new SP Wait for event before progressing to the next segment GoBack Go back to a previous segment and repeat See section 22 3 5 To set the desired setpoint value at the end Range units of the segment This appears for Rate Time or Step segment types Ramp Rate To set the rate of change of setpoint This Units time only appears if Segment Type Rate Duration Only appears if Segment Type Dwell or 0 00 00 to 500 0 0 00 00 Time It sets the length of the dwell period Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 265 Target SP E ww L3 User Manual 3500 series Controllers List Header Program Edit Sync Start Sub header 1 to 50 These may also have user ee ee names Parameter Description Value Default Access Press D or to change sel values Holdback Sets the deviation between SP and PV at No holdback Type which holdback is applied to programmer applied to the channel 2 The value is set by Holdback segment Value and applies to the whole program Hsidbackisabelics when PV lt SP by the Holdback Value Holdback is applied when PV gt SP by the Holdback Value Holdback is applied when PV lt gt SP by the Holdback Value PV Event Only appears if PVEvent in the Program None No PV event
183. E EO E OT E O E AONE 135 14 4 4 DACP OSING S Ouenn E ai E ELE EEE EEL E AE 135 14 4 5 Network Canne eoio krea N N 135 14 4 6 Dynamic PAGINE O A wsulet nena ansas ete 135 14 4 7 FIRS FACTS IAG alos aaa 135 14 4 8 Additonal MOTE Sarrera r a e E E E TOE A ET eae ve cen aed 135 14 4 9 EOG UAE errre te eR er tren Crt terre er ne ere tr ere rer errr ee tere er errrtr tr 136 UN MUN STUN Is das 136 14 5 PROMI US Protocol anoo E Old 137 14 5 1 POM MeL SN AAV Te Seated area taeda aaa eater O E TS 137 14 5 2 ODA ECRANE aaa ans 138 14 5 3 NEWMoOn co BIG OSU Ora A OEEO E 138 14 5 4 Toostie Eurotherm GS DEGRON a cae 139 14 5 5 Launch eS DEA O AAN 140 14 5 6 Demand Data 141 14 6 DeviceNet Protocol iii A A AA AAA EER 149 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 14 6 1 e aaa aac ieee canter umn acai nC ac aalera hn ccntauees 149 14 7 Comms indirection Table sareuri access Gostcerscvade ndeedaavdeca aac cessscecesscesesenctasasusstasaneaceentes 150 14 8 Broadcast COmMMUNICAtlOns aoier eea E eave vet osbocetsoncecseccedsasocevesecacesasecoeseunss 151 14 8 1 SOOO a A A nal a EA 151 14 8 2 Wining Connections Broadcast Communications soseer O 152 14 8 3 Example To Send SP from the Master to SP Mala nia 152 14 9 Modbus Master Communications sscccssssccssssccssssecessscecesssceeesssccesssscesessscessssscessssseeesseeeees 153 14 9 1 WINAEOAN OCU ONS ri A os 153 14 9 2 Mod US Master o eee 153 14 9 3 SECU OS ea
184. E g H A Setup PVinput Setup ProgramRun Setup SPinput Run PSP 2 7 E 3 Browse Oy Find Blocks 4 Level 2 Engineer 3504 v E0 20 Z Note The wires on this diagram are auto generated if the loop and programmer are enabled and there are no wires connected to the four inputs Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 329 User Manual Bargraph 330 3500 series Controllers Es RR ie deer ery fre Geen fires ee FE a hera iir per Pin PA j rin Du OR Aaa L rammri g lma O fer Be O Hane o F rma O ai LU Pridonio D Total D ECDInput T Lyri F Es m Ari rr OF Muxs OF Txdr fe Lom Oia D SwitchOver 1 ATOlock OF Counter D Usal OF Lac8 D Lac2 OF Humidity Recipe t t t Th baazi leer ore a ieie tye p aorta Beier See Bete Det ce Oo 3500 Bargraph linked es to the Loop PV Does For me Copos Err nep ig ere uscar Tune AutotuneEnable SP SPSelect SP SP1 AY Browse Og Find 1D Blocks al gt f Z Level 2 Engineer 3504 v E0 20 l Y Bargraph with Alarm Values Displayed e PP a ee En a E E i i e A a SSS UE h pa o p p po qe ar o 3 U h gt A fede DEFE Laa Coe El Dar dl Me de OE Memo reste hores rr rn Bete pr Mi
185. Enabled will bumplessly return to control when tracking is turned off RemOPL Remote output low limit 100 0 to 100 0 Can be used to limit the output of the loop from a remote source or calculation This must always be within the main limits RemOPH Remote output high limit 100 0 to 100 0 ae Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 233 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 21 8 2 Output Limits The diagram shows where output limits are applied PID List Including Gain Scheduling output limits OPHi 1 00 y ry Diag List OPLo 100 x l Output Level 3 OPHi2 1 dE Sched OPHi Writable NOT Diagnostics Wireable Sched OPLo Read only f Wrk OPHi A OPLo2 100 4 OPHi3 100 Writable NOT y Wireable Working output Wrk OPLo ry OPLo3 100 Output List er OPL limiting to ve RemOPH PIUA Y N RemOPL 100 Writable AND TuneOPH Wireable ra A TuneOPL Figure 21 14 Output Limits e Individual output limits may be set in the PID list for each set of PID parameters when gain scheduling is used e The parameters Sched OPHi and Sched OPHLo found in the Diagnostics List may be set to values which override the gain scheduling output values e A limit may also be applied from an external source These are RemOPH and RemOPLo Remote output high and low found in the Output List These parameters are wireable For example they may be wired to an analogue input m
186. Good Bad Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 193 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 19 Chapter 19 Input Characterisation 19 1 Input Linearisation The Lin16 function block converts an input signal into an output PV using a series of up to 14 straight lines to characterise the conversion The function block provides the following behaviour 1 The Input values must be monotonic and constantly rising 2 To convert the MV to the PV the algorithm will search the table of inputs until the matching segment is found Once found the points either side will be used to interpolate the output value 3 If during the search a point is found which is not above the previous below for inverted then the search will be terminated and the segment taken from the last good point to the extreme In Hi Out Hi see following diagram Terminated search Output 1 to 14 Ignored data points b e o In Lo Input 1 to 14 In Hi Out Lo Figure 19 1 Linearisation Example Notes 1 The linearisation block works on rising inputs rising outputs or rising inputs falling outputs It is not suitable for outputs which rise and fall on the same curve 2 Input Lo Output Lo and Input Hi Output Hi are entered first to define the low and high points of the curve It is not necessary to define all 15 intermediate points if the accuracy is not required Points not defined will be ignored and a straight line fit will apply between the l
187. Header IOExp Sub headers None Expander Type Expander type None None Conf 10ln 100ut 10 inputs 10 outputs 20In 200ut 20 inputs 20 outputs Status IO Expander status Good OK L3 R O COMM FAIL No communications In 1 10 Status of the first 10 digital inputs oO Off L3 R O OOOOOOOOooto MEM Os In 11 20 Status of the second 10 digital inputs oO Off OCOOCOOOOOO to eee y Op Out21 30 Status of the first 10 digital outputs Press Y to select outputs in turn The flashing underlined output can be changed using buttons OoOoO0000000 to 7 HENO Out31 40 Status of the second 10 digital outputs Press Y to select outputs in turn The flashing underlined output can be changed using buttons OoOoO0000000 to 7 HEN Inv21 30 To change the sense of the first 10 O direct outputs E Inverted Inv31 40 To change the sense of the second O direct 10 outputs E Inverted In1 to In 20 State of each configured input Oor 1 These are normally wired to L3 a digital source If not wired they can be changed here Out21 to Out 40 State of each configured output Off or On L3 114 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 12 Chapter12 Alarms Alarms are used to alert an operator when a pre set level has been exceeded They are indicated by a message in the message centre and the red ALM beacon as described in section 2 7 They may also switch an output usually a relay see section 12 3 2 to a
188. Invensys Furotherm 3500 Engineering Handbook 3500 Process Controller HA027988 15 June 2013 2013 Eurotherm Limited All rights are strictly reserved No part of this document may be reproduced modified or transmitted in any form by any means nor may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates without the prior written permission of Eurotherm Limited Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement The specification in this document may therefore be changed without notice The information in this document is given in good faith but is intended for guidance only Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document 3500 series Controllers User Manual 3508 and 3504 Process Controllers User Manual List of Sections Warning Batteries VO 1 CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION ooonnoccccccccccccccccccccccononicinonocccococccccocococccononos 11 1 1 What Instrument DO Have ocios 11 IA a A RN 11 az Orderable ACCES O SEAN EA 11 12 3504ana 3508 Ordering COde siiicitian till 12 bz mputand Opt Modules oia on in 12 1 3 Configuration Code Quick Start Code isis 13 14 Howto lastallthe Controller usina ao dois 15 A DIMAS E 15 EZ Tolistaline Co tol 16 143 Unpladging thie onto land e EE EE AEE E O TAA 16 t3 Electrical C onneto
189. L Local Setpoint SP1 Loop Target Setpoint Decimal S2 Setpoint 2 SP2 Loop Setpoint 2 Decimal RT Local setpoint trim Loop Setpoint Trim Decimal MP V P Pot Value Loop Ch1 Valve Position Decimal RI Remote Input Loop Scheduler Remote Input Decimal TM Time remaining in current program Programmer Segment time Decimal segment remaining LR Loops remaining for current program Programmer Cycles left Decimal r1 r8 Ramp rate 1 8 Programmer Ramp Segment Decimal Rates 11 18 Ramp level 1 8 Programmer Ramp Segment Decimal Target setpoints t1 t8 Dwell time 1 8 Programmer Dwell Segment Decimal durations Hb Holdback value Programmer Holdback Decimal Le Loop count Programmer Cycles remaining Decimal RR Ramp Rate Loop Setpoint Rate Limit Value Decimal HO Max Heat Loop Output High Limit Decimal LO Max Cool Loop Output Low Limit Decimal RH Remote Heat Limit Loop Remote Output High Limit Decimal RE Remote Cool Limit Loop Remote Output Low Limit Decimal HS Setpoint 1 maximum Loop Setpoint Hi Decimal ES Setpoint 1 minimum Loop Setpoint Lo Decimal H2 TH Setpoint 2 maximum UserVals UserVal2 Decimal L2 TL Setpoint 2 minimum UserVals UserVal3 Decimal H3 Local setpoint maximum UserVals UserVal4 Decimal L3 Local setpoint minimum UserVals UserVal5 Decimal 2H Remote Max Scalar UserVals UserVal6 Decimal Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 377 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 818
190. Level Modbus destination The Modbus address where the selected parameter Not Used Conf will appear in the SCADA table area Range is 0 to 16111 A value of 1 indicates not used Source Source parameter The parameter that will be mapped into the Conf Destination Modbus address Note that setting this parameter via iTools will allow sources that are unavailable to the HMI If sucha setting is subsequently examined using the front panel it cannot be edited only deleted Native Native data format The data format in which the source parameter will Integer Conf be presented at the destination address O Integer causes a scaled integer representation of the value to appear at the modbus address 1 Native causes the native format of the value to appear at the modbus address Note that if a 32 bit value is returned it will use two adjacent 16 bit modbus addresses ReadOnly Read only This parameter may be used to override the normal Conf Read write only if alterability rule for the parameter and force it to be source is R W Read Only Setting this value to ReadWrite enables the normal alterability rule s O ReadWrite Allow the value s normal alterability rule to be applied at the selected Modbus address 1 Read Only Overrides the parameter s normal alterability rule to present it as read only at the selected Modbus address Minutes Time parameter This allows for Time parameters to be presented in Seconds Conf resolution alternate reso
191. Lp OP Ch2 Output Lp OP Lp OP im O NO 00 Ch2 Target SP Prog Edit Sync All 22 ADS Ch2 TravelT Lp OP ZAG Is Ch2HIdBk Value Prog Edit Sync All 22 TA Ch2PVStart Prog Edit Sync All 22 y Ch2Seg Prog Edit Sync Start 22 17 2 Cal State Lgc IO 8 2 Channel Program Setup 22 16 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 397 N L 00 Cal Active 24 6 Cal Band 24 6 Cal Enable 24 6 N NO NO gt O1 gt User Manual 3500 series Controllers CJC Type PV Input D RTClock 15 4 1 d CleanFreq Default GW 1 CleanProb Default GW 2 2 DelayedStart Program Setup 16 DewPoint 16 2 i ales od Comms Stack eer ead Disp Lo Company ID ENS Disp Stack Free Config Code Access DryT 16 2 Comrat Page pt 2 Duration Single Program Edit i Control2Page Page Inst Dis 9 E CaL DiagAlms 12 6 14 4 y No No No gt N IS DS Os 8 2 10 3 9 2 7 2 00 N 10 3 i ena Nn Nn 3 Y Hjo O N N N O N N _ _ o N _ _ Cool Type Lp OP 21 8 1 E Cont DiagAlms 12 6 E Lin DiagAlms 12 6 15 11 sil DiagAlms eo 12 6 71 3 D ca on N O Cust1 Name No Z 7 e S D NO N Emiss PV Input 7 2 O O Cc 3 U1 A GiszNamene Enable a Esa Ad End of Seg Program Setup 22 16 al EndofSeg Single Program Edit 2 19 1 End of Seg Single Program Edit 22 AG Cr time Mod End Type Single Program Edit
192. Manual 16 3 16 3 1 16 3 2 16 3 3 16 3 4 16 3 5 16 3 6 16 3 7 Zirconia Carbon Potential Control A 3500 controller may be supplied to control carbon potential order code ZC The controller is often a programmer which generates carbon potential profiles In this section it is assumed that a programmer is used Calculation of PV The Process Variable can be Carbon Potential Dewpoint or Oxygen concentration The PV is derived from the probe temperature input the probe mV input and remote gas reference input values Various probe makes are supported In the 3500 Carbon Potential and Dewpoint can be displayed together The following definitions may be useful Temperature Control The sensor input of the temperature loop may come from the zirconia probe but it is common for a separate thermocouple to be used The controller provides a heating output which may be connected to gas burners or thyristors to control electrical heating elements In some applications a cooling output may also be connected to a circulation fan or exhaust damper Carbon Potential Control The zirconia probe generates a millivolt signal based on the ratio of oxygen concentrations on the reference side of the probe outside the furnace to the amount of oxygen in the furnace The controller uses the temperature and carbon potential signals to calculate the actual percentage of carbon in the furnace This second loop generally has two outputs One
193. Manual 3500 series Controllers List Header Mstrcomms Sub header 1 to 12 Parameter Description Value and Description Default Access Level Press to select parameters Press D or to change values Factor Data factor Full float R W in L3 Data Factor and Offset parameter ange below have a different effect depending upon the Function code being used Read The value read from the slave is first divided by the value of the Data Factor then the Data Offset is added before being placed in the SlvDataN float parameter Write The SlvDataN float value first has the Data Offset added then the result is mu tiplied by the Data Factor before being sent to the slave and conf These Offset Data teen Full float See teen Data Factor above range Exception Last Modbus ne code Oto 255 This value is reset to O by the rising Code edge of the Block Enable parameter parameters are not Transact A transaction count available for bit functions the Pack and Unpack Function Blocks may be used here R O in L3 and conf Count This is the count of all transactions started whether the outcome is successful or not R O in L3 and conf R O in L3 and conf Error Message error count The value will be reset by the rising Count This is the count of message errors it includes crc syntax and timeout errors edge of the Block Enable parameter Exception Exception Count Count This is the count of Modbus excepti
194. Modbus register value by means of multiplier and offset parameters There is also the ability to select signed a whole number between 32768 and 32767 or unsigned a whole number between 0 and 65535 representation in the Modbus register data When enabled Master Communications will run in levels 1 2 and 3 but not in Configuration level 14 9 1 Wiring connections A 3500 Modbus master can be connected to up to 12 slaves This limit is applied by the number of Master Comms function blocks available in the 3500 master Any Modbus Master block however can be configured to broadcast write its parameters The number of slaves then supported is only limited by signalling considerations as in section 14 8 1 Note the warning shown in section 14 8 applies 3500 Master Wiring connections for Modbus Master Communications is the same as shown in the previous section 14 8 2 and may use ElA232 EIA485 3 Wire or ElA422 5 Wire 14 9 2 Modbus Master Parameters If Protocol is set MBUS_M the following parameters are available under the Comms list header List Header Comms Sub header H only Parameter Description Value and Description Default Access Level Press to select parameters Press 2 or a to change values Ident Identifies that the comms module is None No module fitted R O in L3 and fitted Comms Communications module fitted conf Digital communications protocol MBUSM M o Ri in conf Conf Timeout Mast
195. No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 18 5 6 Multi Operator Parameters List Header MultOp Multi Input Operators Sub headers 1 to 2 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access D or to ch Level to select Press or to change values 2 Number of inputs selectedtouse 1t08 2 Cof Casc Num In Number of cascaded inputs from the 0 255 previous block Casc In The cascaded input from the 99999 to 99999 previous block IN TA S O ACE input ping tpt pins input ping pt E E S i CA E EE CA Units None Selected units for the I O None Abs Temp V mV A mA pH mmHg psi Bar mBar RH mmWg inWg inWW Ohms psig 02 PPM CO2 SCP sec RelTemp Vacuum sec min hrs Res n Selected resolution of the outputs XXXXX XXXX X XXX XX XXXXX X XXXX Out Hi Limit Upper limit of the outputs Between Out Lo Limit and maximum 99999 display Out Lo Limit Lower limit of the outputs Between Out Hi Limit and minimum 227997 display Fallback The state of the Output and Status Clip Bad Descriptions see section parameters in case of a fault Clip Good condition This parameter could be Fail Bad used in conjunction with Fallback Val Fall Good Conf Fallback Val Conf Value to be output depending on Input Status and fallback type selected Num Valid In Number of inputs used in the calculated outputs E MERO min Oe SEE In Status Status of the inputs
196. None 0 Event 3 9 Loop P Ack Alarm Acknowledge 10250 A Programmer Block Alarm Blocking Mode Enable 10246 A Program 4 Priority Priority 10245 Low 1 High 3 Diag 4 Delay Delay Time 10248 z 0 500h Alarm 1 12 parameters 2 hidden 3 Browse a Note Fixed SCADA addresses are displayed for those parameters that are included in the SCADA table by default For all other parameters nothing is displayed See also Appendix A COM1 IDDO1 3504 Level 2 Engineer 3504 v E2 32 COM1 ID001 3504 Parameter Explorer Alarm 1 Figure 27 2 Parameters in the Alarm 1 Folder The example above shows how to configure Alarm 1 as an Absolute High with a threshold of 7 00 units Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 309 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 27 6 Device Panel Press E Device Panal for this feature The Panel displays the active instrument panel This can be used for remote viewing diagnostics or Training Tools can be used OFF LINE to configure the product The panel view gives an indication of how the instrument will appear when the configuration is downloaded Figure 27 3 Instrument Display Simulation The front panel control buttons shown in the Device Panel display are active and clicking on them with the mouse will cause the display to behave as a real instrument Clicking on the Page button with Ctrl pressed emulates pressing the page and scroll b
197. O Module Humidity List 3 Polynomial Zirconia List Mod3A List Poly List Chapter 16 Chapter 10 Chapter 19 Alarm s l I O Module Ras AnAlm List 4 9 Pe Chapter 12 To from Lgc IO List Mod4A List plant Chapter 8 Chapter 10 devices Timer Clock Counter Totaliser e npu Chapter 15 I O Module BCDIn List 5 cS Modb5A List Digital Alarms Chapter 10 Switchover eee a SwOver List a O Module Chapter 23 Logic Operators Mod6A List Transducer Scaling Lgc8 List Chapter 10 Txdr List A Chapter 24 Maths Rolas RIyAA List IO Expander Math1 2 3 List One Chapter 11 EIA232 Digital Comms Or User Values COMMS List EIA485 UsrVal List Chapter 25 Chapter 14 Figure 5 1 Controller Example Function blocks are wired in software using the Quick Start mode and or full configuration mode In the controller example here the Process Variable PV is measured by the sensor and compared with a Setpoint SP set by the user The purpose of the control block is to reduce the difference between SP and PV the error signal to zero by providing a compensating output to the plant via the output driver blocks The timer programmer and alarms blocks may be made to operate on a number of parameters within the controller and digital communications provides an interface to data collection and control The controller can be customised to suit a particular process by soft wiring between function blocks The procedure is described in the following secti
198. O OM iN O I0N O0O O O11 BI W N OM so 147 152 153 155 156 181 182 183 184 185 199 201 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 202 Ox00ca PV MeasuredVal MODBUS ox00d0 209 0x007 0x009 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 231 Alarm 1 Delay Alarm 2 Delay Txdr 1 ScaleLow 233 0009 234 236 239 ON 1 Yes 241 242 243 244 245 246 258 260 261 263 Txdr 1 CalAdjust Txdr 2 CalAdjust Loop 1 Diag SBrk 0 Off 1 On AlmSummary NewAlarm O No 1 Yes AlmSummary AnyAlarm O No 1 Yes Loop 1 Diag LoopBreakAlarm O No 1 Yes Txdr 2 InHigh 268 0x010c Loop 1 Main Inhibit O No 1 Yes Loop 1 Tune Stage O reset 1 none 2 monitor 3 current SP 4 269 0x010d newSP 5 toSP 6 max 7 min 8 store 9 coolT 10 PID 11 abort 12 complete 270 030108 274 279 SwitchOverSwitchHigh A 0011 SwitchOver Switchiow Sd O O 288 0x0120 SwitchOver Selectln O Input 1 has been selected 1 Input 2 has been selected 2 Both inputs are used to calculate the input 290 00122 Mod APY be ee 313 0x0139 Recipe RecipeSelect O None 1 Set 1 2 Set 2 3 Set 3 4 Set 4 5 Set 5 6 Set 6 7 Set 7 8 Set 8 OJO OIOIOIOIOJO OIOIOIOIOIOJIJOIOIOIOIOIOJIJOIOIOIOIOIOJIJOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOJO O o o Z x X x x x x 1x x x x 1K IK TK IK TK LK TK LK TK LK XX X xk X x x 1k x IK IK ITxK X Ix X x X X I o o O jJjojojo o O O joOo ojo O O O O O O O O JO O O O O O joOo jo jo O O O JO O O O o o p
199. OM Le BCHL Output and to scroll to the parameter in this example Ch1 Output in the Lp OP page This copies the parameter to be wired Ler FROM 6 Press B Chi Qubeut i GDE 7 Press 5 Asinetnicted to This pastes the parameter to PV confirm BA again to go back to the display above Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 63 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 5 1 3 To Remove a Wire Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 Select the wired parameter eg gt a LgclO PV in the above ee Tt Tuk example r This locates the parameter you want to wire TO Wi reF r m Lp echi Dutruk 2 Press ROS 3 Press Ack to clear the TE This is the quick way to select no wire WireFrom display Whi ee room You can also select this by pressing repeatedly 5 Press to OK 64 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 5 1 4 Wiring a Parameter to Multiple Inputs You can repeat the procedure given in section 5 1 2 but it is also possible to Copy and Paste a parameter In configuration level the RUN HOLD button becomes a copy function The following example wires Ch1 Output to both LA and LB PV inputs Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 Select Ch1 Output 2 Press RUN HOLD This copies channel 1 output 3 Select the parameter to wire to In this case LgclO LA PV hire rom
200. Oo auto Oo auto off 1 channel 2 channel 2 off auto 1 set 1 2 set 2 3 set 3 4 set 4 5 set 5 6 set ojo olo lo o O a no 1 yes off Oo auto auto O o O S ao O auto off off 1 on Oo no 1 yes Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual MODBUS MODBUS Parameter Enumerations Hex 0x050c Loop 2 Main Inhibit O no 1 yes 0x050d Loop 2 Tune Stage O reset 1 none 2 monitor 3 currentSP 4 NewSP 5 ToSP 6 max 7 min 8 store 9 1292 1293 coolT 10 PID 11 abort 12 complete Ox050e Loop 2 Tune AutotuneEnable 0 off 1 on 1294 1297 1300 1301 1313 1341 1342 1343 1374 1509 1536 1537 1548 1550 1551 1552 1556 1574 1577 1580 1589 4750 4751 4752 4753 4754 4755 4756 4757 4758 4759 4760 4761 4762 4763 4764 4765 4766 4767 4768 4769 4770 4771 4772 4773 4774 4775 4776 4777 4778 4779 4780 4781 4782 4783 0051 O auto T man 0x0515 Ono 1yes 0x052 010538 TAE 0x0600 0 off 1 on off 2 PID 3 VPU 4 VPB O Linear 1 Oil 2 Water 3 Fan 0 off Ton 0 off Ton 0 off Ton O no 1 remote 258 3 PY O SbrkOP 1 hold O track 1 step 3 lastMOP O track 1 step 3 lastMOP O 0 off 1 on off 2 PID 3 VPU 4 VPB 1288 1281 1290 1297 1292 1203 1294 1295 0x129 1297 1298 O ojo 11296 129b 129c 129d 129e O x129f Math2 6 Out O x12a0 Math2 7 In1 x12a1 Math2 7 In2 O 1292
201. Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 331 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 27 12 Program Editor ITools provides a convenient method of entering and editing programs directly in the controller Setpoint programs can be created graphically stored and downloaded into the controller 27 12 1 Analog View l S 2 3 4 5 Press HI Programmer to edit a program For a dual programmer shown below select the egment Parameters tab The other tabs display program parameters for each program Select a program number using Program E Click MEEL and enter a name for the program Press amp in the Programmer Editor to add a segment Select SegType from the drop down and enter the segment details The event outputs are displayed using dots in the EventOuts row Hold the mouse pointer over the EventOuts cell and a tooltip pops up showing the number name and value of each of the events 6 Entera name for the Target SP if required 7 Repeat for all required segments 8 To inserta segment click in the segment number where it is to be inserted then press in the Programmer Editor Alternatively right click in the segment to show a pop up 133 com1 1D001 3504 Programmer Editor i Ioj x Gd Program Ja AAA ee xX A es a Programmer 1 Parameters Programmer 2 Parameters Program Parameters Segment Parameters Program Name 300 250 Select a PSP Trace 200 150 r J 100 50
202. Pos feedback potentiometer loop 2 Range Type Thermocouple J K L R B N T S PL2 C RTD Pt100 Not shown if analogue IP Linear 0 50mvV 0 5V 1 5V 0 10V 2 10V 0 function not used 20mA 4 20mA Display High 100 0 These parameters only appear for Pot Input function Not Used Module fitted but not Ch1VlvPos Ch2VlvP configured os only appear if the LP1 AltSP Loop 1 Alternative setpoint lalo aid Remote SP does not LP1 OPH Loop 1 output power appear if the maximum programmer option Potentiometer Input VU LP1 OPL Loop 1 output power is supplied minimum LP2 does not LP2 AltSP Loop 2 Alternative setpoint 2PPear if loop 2 is not configured LP2 OPH Loop 2 output power maximum LP2 OPL Loop 2 output power minimum LP1 V1Pos To read valve position from LP1 V2Pos the feedback potentiometer loop 1 LP2 V1Pos LP2 V2Pos To read valve position from the feedback potentiometer loop 2 Transducer Power TdcrPSU function 5 Volts Always if the Supply G3 10 Volts module is fitted Transmitter power No parameters Used to show the ID of the module if fitted supply MS 36 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 2 1 2 2 Alarms Alarm 1 to 8 Abs High Abs High Absolute high Absolute high Alarm 1 to 8 PV Input Connected to current process variable does not PV Input and ModX lp appear if Alarm Type Deviation do not appear if Type Deviation LP1 PV Connected to
203. Press to scroll to Disp Lo Then press W or D to 2 5 Press to scroll to Range Hi Then press or Dto 20 0 Press to scroll to Range Lo Then Press W or Dto 4 00 Press to scroll to Offset Then Press or to adjust the offset in a positive or negative direction as required Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 10 4 2 Two Point Offset A two point offset applies to Analogue Input Modules in the same way as the PV Input The procedure is described in section 7 2 8 10 4 3 Relay Logic or Triac Output Scaling If the output is configured for time proportioning control it can be scaled such that a lower and upper level of PID demand signal can limit the operation of the output value By default the output will be fully off for 0 power demand fully on for 100 power demand and equal on off times at 50 power demand You can change these limits to suit the process It is important to note however that these limits are set to safe values for the process For example for a heating process it may be required to maintain a minimum level of temperature This can be achieved by applying an offset at 0 power demand which will maintain the output on for a period of time Care must be taken to ensure that this minimum on period does not cause the process to overheat If Range Hi is set to a value lt 100 the time proportioning output will switch at a rate depend
204. Ratings Logic inputs lt 5V OFF gt 10 8V ON Limits 3V 30V Typical Usage Events e g Program Run Reset Hold Isolated output 240Vac CATI Hardware Code TK Input Ratings Logic inputs gt 28KQ OFF lt 100Q ON Typical Usage Events e g Program Run Reset Hold Isolated output 240Vac CATII Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 1 7 11 24V Transmitter Supply e Hardware Code MS A x A e Output Rating 24Vdc 20mA Transmitter 11 e Typical Usage To power an external B transmitter e Isolated output 240Vac CATII 1 7 12 Potentiometer input Hardware Code VU 0 5V 6 A e Rating 1002 to 15KQ x B e Typical Usage Valve position feedback Remote setpoint a E e Isolated output 240Vac CATII EN p 1 7 13 Transducer Power Supply Transducer with Internal Calibration Resistor e Hardware Code G3 e Rating Configurable 5V or 10Vdc Minimum pci load resistance 300Q switcn to connect e Typical Usage Strain Gauge transducer Real power and measurement e Isolated output 240Vac CATII mV Input c Go _ Input if an analogue input module is used in the appropriate slot Dx A Transducer with External Calibration Resistor Controller Transducer ia
205. SI xAccucarb 12 Accucarb xDrayton 11 Drayton xAACC 10 AACC xMMICarb 0 MMI Carbon Resol n Resolution of the calculated result GasRet Reference value for the hydrogen 9999 9 to 9999 9 20 concentration of the atmosphere 9999 9 to 9999 9 W 72 0 RemGasEn Allows the remote gas measurement to be No Internal O enabled by an external stimuli Ves External i 0 RemGasRef Remote reference value for the hydrogen concentration of the atmosphere so that the hydrogen concentration may be read from an external source WrkGas Working reference gas value 20 0 MinCalcTp Minimum temperature at which the 99999 to 99999 calculation will be valid Tolerance Tolerance of the sooting 9999 9 to 9999 9 L L L L L ak Oo L ProcFact Process factor 1 0 to 999 0 140 0 Only shown if ProbeTyp xMMICarb CleanFreq The interval between cleaning cycles of the 0 00 00 to 99 59 59 or 100 00 to 4 00 00 L probe 500 00 CleanTime Sets the duration of the clean 0 00 00 to 99 59 59 or 100 00 to 0 00 00 L 500 00 MinRcvTim Minimum recovery time after purging 0 00 00 to 99 59 59 or 100 00to 0 00 00 L 500 00 MaxRcvTim Maximum recovery time after purging 0 00 00 to 99 59 59 or 100 00to 0 10 00 L 500 00 i L L L L ProbelP 99999 to 99999 ProbeOffs 99999 to 99999 d a 3 3 R O 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 CarbonPot Calculated carbon potential Not if R O ProbeType xZircoDew R O
206. Step the manual output does not track and on transition to manual the target output will step from its current value to the ForcedOP value ForcedOP Manual Startup Manual start up mode Off On Power feedforward enable This adjusts the output signal to compensate for changes in voltage to the controller supply See also section 21 8 6 Yes Linear Oil a Selects the type of cooling channel characterisation to be used Can be configured as water oil or fan cooling See also section 21 8 7 Cool Type FF Type 232 Feedforward type The following four parameters appear if FF Type None See also section 21 8 8 tes Da Qc change values The output will be the value configured by Sbrk OP the next parameter Freeze the current output level at the point when sensor break occurs Clipped between Output Hi and between Output Hi and 100 0 to 100 0 No signal fed forward Remote A remote signal fed forward Setpoint fed forward PV fed forward 3500 series Controllers MER A A NA ey Access Level SbrkOP Sub header OP In auto the manual output tracks the control output such that a change to manual mode will not result in a bump in the output On transition to manual the output becomes the ForcedOP On transition to manual the output will be the manual op value as last set by the operator Between Output Hi and Output Lo Cont
207. Suitable outputs are the Logic IO Relay Logic or Triac Output Module The calibration of the VP output is described in section 8 2 4 If a feedback potentiometer is being used the calibration of this is performed in the Potentiometer Input Module and is described in section 10 4 5 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 305 User Manual 26 6 306 3500 series Controllers DC Output and Retransmission Calibration Voltmeter ES eS E Controller 1A Copper cable Figure 26 7 Calibration of DC Output Module The following procedure is particularly relevant to retransmission outputs where the absolute value of the output must correspond with the device such as a chart recorder being used to monitor the retransmitted value Connect a voltmeter to the output to be calibrated The example shown in Figure 26 7 shows position 1 fitted with a DC Output module Select Configuration level 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Press to select the list header for the module to be calibrated In this example Mod 1A Press to scroll to Cal State Press 4 or to select Lo to calibrate the low point Then Confirm then Go Trim will be shown Press again to scroll to Cal Trim Press or to adjust the value read by the voltmeter to 1 00V The value shown on the controller display is arbitrary and has the range 32768 to 32767
208. The level in which the Summary Pages are shown may also be defined using iTools If Auto tune is enabled an alternating message is tigaci n PE shown on this display showing the loop being tuned and the stage of tuning eg Loop1 Auto Press A Tune ToSP At each press a new display will be shown 2 8 1 1 Loop Summary If two loops are configured the display shown in section 2 3 is shown Press to display a summary for Loop1 and again for Loop 2 The horizontal bar graph shows output power demand for the loop For heat cool the bar graph is bi directional 100 as shown For valve position control the user interface will display either heat only or heat cool summary pages A timeout to the dual loop overview may be changed in configuration level see parameter Home Timeout in section 6 5 1 2 8 1 2 Program Status This display is only shown if the Programmer option has been enabled 3504 3508 SyncAll and single programmers gt SyncStart programmer gt 2 8 1 3 Program Edit Allows the program to be created or edited SyncAll and single programmers gt SyncStart programmer gt A full list of parameters is given in section 2 8 3 Note For a SyncStart programmer it is possible to select between Channel 1 and Channel 2 44 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 2 8 1 4 Alarm Summary Press to scroll through the alarms A N
209. This is the cycling time for a time proportioning output and should be set correctly before tuning is started Input Filter Time Constant The parameter Filter Time is found in the PV Input List Output Rate limit Output rate limit is active during tuning and may affect the tuning results The parameter Rate is found in the Loop OP List Valve Travel Time If the output is a motor valve positioner the Ch1 TravelT and Ch2 TravelT Loop OP List should be set as described in section 21 8 1 Other Considerations e fa process includes adjacent interactive zones each zone should be tuned independently e tis always better to start a tune when the PV and setpoint are far apart This allows start up conditions to be measured and cutback values to be calculated more accurately e Ifthe two loops in a 3500 controller are connected for cascade control the inner loop may tuned automatically but the outer should be tuned manually e Inaprogrammer controller tuning should only be attempted during dwell periods and not during ramp stages If a programmer controller is tuned automatically put the controller into Hold during each dwell period whilst autotune is active It may be worth noting that tuning carried out in dwell periods which are at different extremes of temperature may give different results owing to non linearity of heating or cooling This may provide a convenient way to establish values for Gain Scheduling see secti
210. TxtOff to EO8UsrTxtOff Programmer 1 to 2 programmer section 22 4 On EO1UsrTxtOn to EO8UsrTxtOn Programmer PV Event Outputs 1 to 8 Off PVEOUsrTxtOff Programmer 1 to 2 see programmer section 22 4 1 On PVEOUsrTxtOfn 2 Eight user text blocks are available in which user defined text can be applied to both Boolean and Analogue parameters Boolean parameters not listed in 1 above may be wired to Two Input Logic Operator blocks when user text blocks are in full use The parameter list for the User Text block is as follows Parameter Upper Lower Availability Description Limit Limit Input 32767 32766 iTools configuration package or read only in Input to be the controller display but can be wired through enumerated the controller Output 8 iTools configuration package or read only in String from custom characters the controller display but can be wired through list with a value field the controller interface that matches the current input Custom list 100 Comma separated list of values and strings Configured by iTools characters Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 337 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 27 16 To Enable User Text This may be done in configuration level see section 6 3 1 It may also be done in iTools as described below The controller must be placed in configuration level by pressing 200855 2 Tools File Device Explorer View Options Window Help al B e El h A Lg Sd el Mew File Open Fil
211. V 1 5V 0 10V 2 10V 0 20mA 4 20mA Thermocpl RTD Pyrometer mV40 mV80 mA Volts HIZVolts Log10 Depends on Range type selected Default 1372 200 PID VPU VPB Off OnOff 33 User Manual 3500 series Controllers Control Channel 2 Sets the control PID VPU VPB Off OnOff Always ses type for channel 2 normally Cool Source None FixedPV Module1 to 6 Available only Ifa dual loop PV or Defines where the PV input is wired if an analogue input module is fitted controller to for Loop 2 The LP1 parameters listed above are repeated for LP2 if the LP2 PV Input is configured Init Logic function input or Not Used Lp1 Ch1 Lp1 Ch2 Lp2 Ch1 Lp2 Note 1 LgclO LA output Ch2 Alarm 1 to 8 Any Alarm New Alarm Note 2 The LA Logic I O port OSA to 8 LP1SBrkOP LP2SBrkOP LP2 and LPs both loops only can be an output or an LPsSBrk outputs shown if the second loop is input This parameter is LP1 A M LP1 SPsel LP2 A M LP2 SPsel configured used to select its AlarmAck ProgRun ProgReset ProgHold Programmer options only available function Inputs p A if the controller is a programmer controller Init Min On Time Auto Note 2 LgclO LA This applies to both LA 0 01 to 150 00 Note 3 and LB inputs The above two parameters are repeated for the LB Logic I O LgclO LB Init Relay function Not Used Lp1 Ch1 Lp1 Ch2 Lp2 Ch1 Lp2 Always RlyOP AA This relay is always Ch2 Alarm 1 to 8 A
212. Volts input 3V to 10V and HZ Volts input 1 5 to 2V SBrk Impedance High 20KQ SBrk Impedance Low 5KQ 7 2 5 Fallback A Fallback strategy may be used to configure the default value for the PV in case of an error condition The error may be due an out of range value a sensor break lack of calibration or a saturated input The Status parameter would indicate the error condition and could be used to diagnose the problem Fallback has several modes and may be associated with the Fallback PV parameter The Fallback PV may be used to configure the value assigned to the PV in case of an error condition The Fallback parameter should be configured accordingly The fallback parameter may be configured so as to force a Good or Bad status when in operation This in turn allows the user to choose to override or allow error conditions to affect the process 84 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 7 2 6 PV Input Scaling PV input scaling applies to the linear mV input range only This is set by configuring the lO Type parameter to 40mV 80mV mA Volts or HZVolts Using an external burden resistor of 2 49Q the controller can be made to accept 4 20mA from a current source Scaling of the PV input will match the displayed reading to the electrical input levels from the transducer PV input scaling can only be adjusted in configuration level and is not provided for direct thermocouple pyrometer or RT
213. When the Deviation between the setpoint and PV is greater than the holdback value HBk Val the setpoint ramp will pause until the deviation returns to within the band The next segment will not start until the deviation between Setpoint and PV is less than the holdback value Four types of Holdback are available None Holdback is disabled for this segment High Holdback is entered when the PV is greater than the Setpoint plus HBk Val Low Holdback is entered when the PV is lower than the Setpoint minus HBk Val Band Holdback is entered when the PV is either greater than the Setpoint plus HBk Val or lower than the Setpoint minus HBk Val Guaranteed Soak Guaranteed Soak guaranteed time work piece stays at SP within a specified tolerance is achieved in the previous single programmer version by using Holdback Band during a dwell segment Since only one holdback value per program is available this imposes a limitation where different tolerance values are required to guarantee the soak In the software version 2 programmer Including single channel Holdback Type in Dwell segments is replaced by a Guaranteed Soak Type G Soak which can be set as Off Lo Hi or Band A Guaranteed Soak Value G Soak Val is available in Dwell segments and this provides the ability to set different values in any Dwell segment Dwell starts when PV Dwell held if PV falls Dwell extended by reaches correct value beyond limits t1 t2 I t2 I SP PV gt
214. You can leave bits out but if they appear they must be in the order shown E g 1m 30s is acceptable but 30s 1m is not If you select and copy spreadsheet cells they are put on the clipboard as tab separated values which can be pasted into Microsoft Excel 27 12 3 Event Outputs These may be set in the previous Analog View by clicking the ellipsis in the relevant segment then ticking the required digital output in the pop up view o Alternatively use Digital View as follows 1 Press to select the digital events view 2 Right click in the blank area to Add Segment 3 Use the pull downs to turn the digital event On or Off in the selected segment 2151 x File Device Programmer View Options Window Help B os E 6 FT XxX A Q a i New File Open File Load Save Print Scan Add Remove Access Views Info ES Graphical Wiring E Parameter Explorer Es Device Panel TE Terminal Wiring H Device Recipe EJ Watch Recipe Programmer te User Pages de OPC Scope 10 x we ME k Program Gs RX mA es a gt j Programmer 1 Parameters Programmer 2 Parameters Program Parameters Segment Parameters FRY com 10001 350 0 Program Name W Access 1 e A Qu a lt irsrs S ss Se PERES AS qe Program 1 23 Instrument gt A Ee AS Penn De H 10 Se ee A IT MA AlmSummary 4 pes E a Alarm il i fee AL A H Comms 6 ae OOREEN
215. ad 62 Max Wire Limit reached Using Quick Start the maximum number of wires has been reached 78 Corrupted User Page A corruption of one or more configured user pages has been detected Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 79 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 7 Chapter 7 Process Input The process input list characterises and ranges the signal from the input sensor The Process Input parameters provide the following features Input Type and Thermocouple TC and 3 wire resistance thermometer RTD temperature linearisation detectors Volts mV or mA input through external shunt or voltage divider available with linear square root or custom linearisation See the table in section 7 2 1 for the list of input types available Display units and The change of display units and resolution will apply to all the parameters related resolution to the process variable Input filter First order filter to provide damping of the input signal This may be necessary to prevent the effects of excessive process noise on the PV input from causing poor control and indication More typically used with linear process inputs Fault detection Sensor break is indicated by an alarm message Sbr For thermocouple it detects when the impedance is greater than pre defined levels for RTD when the resistance is less than 12Q User calibration Either by simple offset or by slope and gain See section 7 2 6 for further details Over Under When the input sign
216. addresses from 2404 Slave 1 instrument address 2 The parameters start at parameter address 1 using Function Code 3 read 16 words from the slave Address SlvData5 is Working SP Address 5 SlvData Proportional band set 1 Address 6 Further Modbus addresses for 2404 series instruments may be found in 2000 series Communications Manual HA026230 which may be downloaded from www eurotherm com or from Tools CUM 2 10001 3308 Parameter Explorer Mstrcomms 1 Description Block Mode Master Comores Block Erable Tes 1 7 Uat al E Va Marbe Corners Pot H 0 SispendLouni False Court Baloe Suspen 5 Sia pends ces Suspend Lount Exceeded Mo 0 SispendAety Suspend Asiy Irterval 350 Slave Instrument Mode Addr 2 Modbus Funcion Code Func 3 Parameter Address Mera Court Slave Data 1 Slave Data 2 Slave Dala 3 Slave Data 4 Slave Data 5 SD alas Slave Dala 6 ShvD ata Slave Data 7 SD ated Sieve Dala J ShDatag Slave Data 3 ShvDatalO Slave Data 10 SheDatal 1 Slave Data 11 ShvDhatal 2 Slave Dala 12 ShvDatal 3 Slave Data 13 ShDatal 4 Sieve Dala 14 ShvDatal 5 Slave Data 15 SieDatal6 sieve Data 16 Format Cala Formal Factor Data Factor Ottset Data Offset ExceptionCode Last Modbus Exception Cod TransactCount Total Transaction Count i Te Meticomme 6 34 parameters Note In some cases it may be required to access a number of contiguous parameters from the slave An ex
217. ahrenheit ranges section 7 2 1 Add Calibration procedure for DC outputs Issue 10 applies to firmware version 2 90 includes new sections Modbus Master Communications section 14 9 Packbit and Unpackbit section 14 10 Master Communications Configuration Example in iTools section 27 20 Cycle Time and Minimum On Time parameters section 8 2 2 changes to Broadcast Communications section 14 8 additional description of ImmSP section 6 4 additional description of Nudge Raise lower section 21 8 9 Issue 11 makes the following changes Section 1 3 Dual 4 20mA TxPSU added to order code Dual triac codes changed from _VT to _VH and _VR to _VC Section 14 3 2 1 Changes to final paragraph Section 16 1 1 Corrections to connections for humidity control Section 16 5 Power supply removed from connection diagram and a note added Technical Specification Correct calibration resistor value in Transducer Power Supply module to 30 1KQ Section 18 4 2 improved description of Fallback Issue 12 makes the following changes Section 27 20 Change the wording in the note to say the master comms block is disabled when in configuration mode and not needs to be disabled Section 35 Update Declaration of Conformity Issue 13 applies to firmware version 3 30 Parameter Tune RG2 is added to the Tune list program cycles increased to 9999 counter direction alterable in L3 Issue 13 also includes a further description of Profibus in section
218. al 22 3 7 22 3 8 Call A CALL segment is only available when single programmer mode is configured Call segments may only be selected in instruments offering multiple program storage The Call segment allows programs to be nested within each other To prevent re entrant programs from being specified only higher number programs may be called from a lower program i e program 1 may call programs 2 through 50 but program 49 may only call program 50 When a CALL segment is selected the operator may specify how many cycles the called program will execute The number of cycles is specified in the calling program Ifa called program has a number of cycles specified locally they will be ignored A CALL segment will not have a duration a CALL segment will immediately transfer execution to the called program and execute the first segment of that program Called programs do not require any modification the calling program treats any END segments as return instructions Prog1 gt lt Prog50 gt Prog1 The example shows Prog 50 Ramp Dwell Ramp inserted in place of segment 3 Program1 Prog 50 can be made to repeat using the Cycles parameter Prog50 jseg1 Prog1 Segl Seg2 Seg3 Seg4 Seg5 Seg Seg2 feg3 End A program may contain one End segment This allows the program to be truncated to the number of segments required The end segment can be configured to have an indefini
219. al exceeds the input span by more than 5 the PV is shown as range HHHHH or LLLLL The check is executed twice before and after user calibration and offset adjustments The same indications apply when the display is not able to show the PV for example when the input is greater than 9999 9 C with one decimal point 7 1 To select PV Input Select Level 3 or Configuration level as described in Chapter 3 Then press as many times as necessary until the header PVInput is displayed 7 2 Process Input Parameters List Header PV Input Sub headers None Name Parameter Description Value Default Access O to select or a to change Level PV input type ThermoCpl Thermocouple Conf oe and range HZ Volts High impedance voltage input typically used for zirconia probes Lin Type Input linearisation see section Conf 72 1 R O L3 Units Display units used for see section Conf units conversion la Res n Resolution XXXXX to Conf X XXXX CJC Type To select the cold Internal See description in section 7 2 2 for Internal Conf junction compensation 0 C further details method 45 C Only appears if IO Type 50 C Thermocouple Camal SBrk Type Sensor break type Sensor break will be detected when Conf its impedance is greater than a low value 80 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual List Header PV Input Sub headers None Name Parameter Description
220. al which can be used in the Range segment Only appears if configured Using iTools configuration package it is possible to give this parameter an 8 character name PID Set To select the PID set most relevant to the segment Set1 Set2 Set3 Only appears if configured Event Outs Defines the state of up to eight digital outputs 1 to 8 can be OOOOOOOO to MAMMA configured e TOOOOOOO to SERRE T Time event O event off E event on Duration Time for a Dwell or Time segment 0 00 00 to 500 00 secs mins or hours GSoak Type Applies a guaranteed soak in a Dwell segment See also sections 22 5 1 22 17 2 and 22 17 4 If configured this parar is followed by a G Soak Value E Continue at current SP Go to a defined level Reset to start of prog 0 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 End Type Defines the action to be taken at the end of the program al 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Parameter Description Wait For Only appears if the segment is set as Wait Defines the Prgln1 The first four condition that the program should wait for parameters are digital values which can be Prgln2 wired to suitable Prginin2 ias Prgin1or2 PVWaitlP Analogue wait value Ch2Sync A Ch2 segment input PV Wait Only appears if PVWaitIP is configured and defines the type of None pam which can AS applied o Abs Hi Absalne high If this parameter is configured it is followed by Wait Val which allows the trip level
221. alibration involves calibrating the temperature offset of the CJC sensor only Other aspects of thermocouple calibration are also included in mV calibration e Resistance Thermometer This is also carried out at two fixed points 150Q and 400Q 26 3 Precautions Observe the precautions stated in section 26 1 1 26 3 1 To Calibrate mV Range Calibration of the mV range is carried out using a 50 milli volt source connected as shown in the diagram below mA calibration is included in this procedure Controller VI 50 mV Source For best results OmV should be calibrated by disconnecting the copper wires from the mV source and short circuiting the input to the controller Figure 26 4 Connections for mV Calibration To calibrate the PV Input Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes This may be PVInput or a DC Input module 1 From any display press O as many times as necessary to select the input to be calibrated 2 Press O to select Cal State 3 Set mV source for OmV or apply a short circuit as indicated 4 Press a or M to choose Lo OmV Confirm will automatically be requested 300 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes O D The controller will automatically perform the gt Ab id to select calibration procedure O The calibration can be aborted at an
222. alogue Alarm Messages a Double click on the Alarm folder to display the Parameter Explorer With the controller in configuration mode enter a name for the alarm in the Message value in this case Too Hot b Ifthe alarm has not been set up then with the controller in configuration level double click on Type and select the alarm type from the pull down menu c Repeat for all other parameters Parameters shown in blue in iTools are not alterable in the current operating level of the instrument d Inthe User Page Editor Text Only Style select the parameter Message form the Alarm page This text will be displayed on the controller when the alarm occurs This is shown in the simulation below 5 x iTools File Device Pages View Options Window Help a D amp h fF X 90 New File Open File Load Save Print Scan Add Remove Access Views Y comi 1001 3504 Message Popup Message Y Access Type Alarm Type 10240 AbsHi 1 a Instrument 2 in Alarm Input 0 00 a e 10 Reference Reference Value 10243 0 00 H E AlmSummary Threshold Threshold 10241 0 00 E ROCSecom ROC Time Base in Seconds i Out Output 10249 Inhibit Alarm Inhibit 10247 Hysteresis Alarm Hysteresis 10242 Latch Latching Mode 10244 P Ack Alarm Acknowledge 10250 M1 1D001 3504 2 Block Alarm Blocking Mode Enable 10246 i Priority Priority 10245 El C Page 2 38 4 Delay Delay Time H E BCDImput H E Comms Alarm 1 14 pa
223. als must not exceed 264Vac e relay output to logic dc or sensor connections e any connection to ground The controller must not be wired to a three phase supply with an unearthed star connection Under fault conditions such a supply could rise above 264Vac with respect to ground and the product would not be safe Conductive pollution Electrically conductive pollution must be excluded from the cabinet in which the controller is mounted For example carbon dust is a form of electrically conductive pollution To secure a suitable atmosphere install an air filter to the air intake of the cabinet Where condensation is likely for example at low temperatures include a thermostatically controlled heater in the cabinet This product has been designed to conform to BSEN61010 installation category II pollution degree 2 These are defined as follows Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 387 User Manual 3500 series Controllers Installation Category Il The rated impulse voltage for equipment on nominal 230V supply is 2500V Pollution Degree 2 Normally only non conductive pollution occurs Occasionally however a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected Grounding of the temperature sensor shield In some installations it is common practice to replace the temperature sensor while the controller is still powered up Under these conditions as additional protection against electric shock we recommend that the
224. alue for SPInput Loop SP AItSP Loop SP Sensor Break The programmer holds in AltSPSelect sensor break Conf SP Input The programmer needs to know the working SP Input is normally wired from setpoint of the loop it is trying to control The the loop Track SP parameter as SP input is used in servo to setpoint start the PV input Servo The transfer of program setpoint to PV Input See also section normally the Loop PV or the SP Input 22 10 normally the Loop setpoint Power fail recovery strategy See section 22 11 Sync Input The synchronise input is a way of This will normally be synchronising programs At the end of a wired to the End of segment the programmer will inspect the Seg parameter as sync input if it is True 1 then the programmer will advance to the next segment It is typically wired from the end of segment output of another programmer Only appears if SyncMode Yes Max Events Sets the maximum number of output events 1to 3 required for the program This is for convenience to avoid having to scroll through unwanted events in every segment SyncMode Allows multiple controllers to be Sync output synchronised at the end of each segment disabled Sync output enabled shown in section 27 10 Flag showing reset state No Yes Can be wired to logic inputs to reJ eee polio provide remote Prog Hold Flag showing hold state No Yes Flags showing event states No Yes End of Seg Flag showing end of
225. ample might be the 4 alarm setpoints from the slave If the slave is 3500 series the alarm threshold addresses are 10241 10256 10273 and 10289 respectively For 3500 series instruments these may be set up in the Comms Indirection Table as described in sections 14 7 and 30 Other slaves may not support this feature Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 345 User Manual 3500 series Controllers Tab 7 Master Comms Block 7 The master is set up to read data from 16 consecutive Modbus parameter addresses from 2704 Slave 2 instrument address 3 The parameters start at parameter address 1 using Function Code 3 read 16 words from the slave BF COM2 100001 3508 Parameter Explorer Metrcomms Plaster Comme Block Enable Yes 1 Urval Val Master Comme Por H 101 it Fade Count Before Suspern Slave Instrument Mode Addr Modbus Funcion Code Parameter Address Item Court Slave Data 1 Slave Data 2 slave Data 3 Slave Data 4 Slave Data 5 Slawe Data E Slawe Data 7 Slawe Data 8 Slave Data 9 Slave Data 10 Slave Data 11 Slawe Data 12 Slawe Data 13 Slave Data 14 slave Data 15 Slave Data 16 Data Format Data Factor Data Olfset Last Modbus Exception Code Total Tranzacton Count Successful Transaction Cour Message Ema Count 346 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 28 Chapter 28 OEM Security 28 1 Introduction OEM security
226. an the desired number of inputs as any unused inputs are seen as valid inputs zero value by default Num Casc In and Casc In will always be available 18 5 2 Input Status Input Status gives an indication of the status of the inputs in priority order Casc in has the highest priority In1 the next highest up to In8 the lowest Should more than one input be bad then the input with the highest priority is shown as bad When the highest priority bad status is cleared the next highest priority bad status is shown When all inputs are OK a status of OK is shown 18 5 3 Number of Valid Inputs Num Valid Ins provides a count of the number of inputs used to perform the calculation within the block This is required for cascaded operation as detailed below Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 191 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 18 5 4 Cascaded Operation The two Multiple Input Operator blocks can be cascade to allow up to 16 inputs The diagram shows how the two blocks are configured to find the average of more than eight inputs Num Valid Inputs Num Casc In Num Valid Inputs Casc In Sum ni Multi Operator 1 Min Multi Operator 1 Min In2 Max Max Average Average Input Status Input Status Figure 18 6 Cascaded Multi Input Operators If Casc In has Good status and NumCascln is not equal to zero it is assumed that the block is in cascade and these values are used for calculations wi
227. ane vane vane vane vane vane vane E A AA O A E 337 ZING Ko Enable User A saci sacecacucacbruececaosssceatounatesteaciastcestvacdseatsectsawsentesectceats 338 27 17 EOOD NAMN nana 339 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 7 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 27 18 Example 1 To Configure Lgc2 Operator Unicorn cis 340 272167 Examples Contiqure User Text BO Ck lua dd 340 ZING TOName a User WI 341 27 20 Master Communications Configuration Example moooccnooocoononononanonnnaconancnnonaconaccnnoncnonocanons 342 28 CHAPTER 29 QEM SECURI Minsa 347 28 1 o o A A A ET eee a eee ee 347 28 2 Using OEM SeCUWnity iano henna nnn nena e 347 28 3 Step T View iTools OPC Severus tit 348 28 4 Step 2 Create Custom PAGS scvnacinacisscicecsvassieniesade E aan 349 28 5 Step 3 Activate OEM Security sccccscccsstesscssssectcwsssusacusssvsncecdeesnsdstsvsnseaasesadccsvesssoaatensdausioesiassteseseese 351 28 6 step 4 Deactivate QEM SeCUnity a ssscscccsisctisssisstincscdesencsubesnsuspuswsnsnesinonseagsniesndatwspinsusnaveasnsnanenioys 352 28 7 Erasing MEMO nai di Aaaa aiaa aiaeei ai aeiaai 352 29 CHAPTER 29 USER SWITCHES cua 353 29 1 User SWC EPa Me ers aAa a a 353 29 2 To Contigure Yser SWILCNES iii 353 30 CHAPTER 30 MODBUS SCADA TABLE seeeecocsssseeccccccssssseeccccossseeeeccosssseeeeecosssseeeee 354 30 1 COMMIS T DIE 2 o 354 30 2 SCADA Addresses eare ES 354 30 3 SCADA Table and Profibus Tag Addresses csscccsssscssssccssse
228. anel keys None Conf active This protects the instrument from active accidental edits during normal operation All Edits and To restore access to the keyboard from Navigation are operator levels power up the instrument prevented with the a and O buttons pressed This will take you directly to the configuration level password entry Standb Set to Yes to select standby mode In No Conf y y standby all control outputs are set to zero Y The controller automatically enters standby mode when it is in Configuration level or during the first few seconds after switch on Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 55 User Manual 3500 series Controllers ListHeader Access ______ Sub headers None Header Access Sub headers None Parameter Description Name Parameter Description Value Default Access Do to change Level Clear Memory This parameter only appears if Config me peed Disabled Conf Code 0 Controller memory It must be used with care When selected racer Gurcorime it initialises the controller to default values and lin tables retained LinTables Custom linearisation tables are deleted InitComms Communications ports reset to default configuration Clears all wiring all Clears all wiring AllMemory Initialises all memory except linearisation tables after firmware upgrade Clears all programs all Clears all programs These parameters allow keys to be wired Shows the current for example
229. ange Hi Lo Electrical output high low 0 00 to demand signal from the PID loop L3 100 00 See also section 10 4 3 Meas Value The current status of the digital 0 On unless Invert Yes L3 output 1 Off unless Invert Yes R O L3 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 101 A gt A User Manual 3500 series Controllers 10 3 3 DC Control Dual DC Control or DC Retransmission Output The DC output module is used as a control output to interface with an analogue actuator such as valve driver or thyristor unit The dual DC control output uses two channels xA and xC The DC retransmission module is used to provide an analogue output signal proportional to the value which is being measured It may be used for chart recording or retransmit a signal to another controller This function is often performed through digital communications where greater accuracy is required List Header Mod Sub headers xA DC Control and DC Retransmission xA and xC Dual DC Control x the number of the slot in which the module is fitted Access Name Parameter Description Value Default to select Press D or to change values Level Ident Channel type DC Out DC Output single or dual output L3 R O DCRetran DC retransmission lO Type To configure the output Volts Volts de As order Conf L3 drive signal Set the lO Type to Volts to use the code R O Dual DC Output as a transducer power supply milli amps de Display resolution XXXXX
230. ard Feedforward is a value which is scaled and added to the PID output before any limiting It can be used for the implementation of cascade loops or constant head control Feedforward is implemented such that the PID output is limited to trim limits and acts as a trim on a FF value The FF value is derived either from the PV or setpoint by scaling the PV or SP by the FF Gain and FF Offset Alternatively a remote value may be used for the FF value this is not subject to any scaling The resultant FF value is added to the limited PID OP and becomes the PID output as far as the output algorithm is concerned The feedback value then generated must then have the FF contribution removed before being used again by the PID algorithm The diagram below shows how feedforward is implemented FF Gain FF Offset Remote FF Type FF Type SP gt O PV a AS 4 Feedback SP 1 Output Algorithm PV TrimLo Figure 21 15 Implementation of Feedforward Nudge Raise Lower These parameters may be wired to digital inputs for example a pushbutton to allow the valve to be manually nudged open or closed The duration of the nudge is determined by the value of the parameter Min OnTime which will be found in the fixed relay output list AA section 9 2 but more appropriately for valve postion outputs in the Dual Relay or Triac output modules section 10 3 1 The minimum on off time should be set large enough to overcome the ine
231. are found in the Loop OP list section 21 8 For a heat only controller the default values are O and 100 For a heat cool controller the defaults are 100 and 100 Although it is expected that most processes will be designed to work between these limits there may be instances where it is desirable to limit the power delivered to the process For example if driving a 220V heater from a 240V source the heat limit may be set 80 to ensure that the heater does not dissipate more than its maximum power Remote Output Limits RemOPL and RemOPHIi Loop OP List If these parameters are used they should be set within the Heat Cool Limits above 214 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Heat Cool Deadband In controllers fitted with a second cool channel a parameter Ch2 DeadB is also available in the Loop OP list section 21 8 which sets the distance between the heat and cool proportional bands The default value is 0 which means that heating will turn off at the same time as cooling turns on The deadband may be set to ensure that there is no possibility of the heat and cool channels being on together particularly when cycling output stages are installed Minimum On Time If either or both of the output channels is fitted with a relay triac or logic output the parameter Min OnTime will appear in the relevant output list Logic lO List AA Relay Output List or Relay Triac or Logic Output Module List
232. arth terminal at one point only y Figure 1 11 Example of Devicenet Wiring Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 27 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 1 8 4 1 8 4 1 1 8 4 2 28 Profibus A description of Profibus is given in section 14 5 Please also refer to the Profibus Communications Handbook Part No HA026290 which can be downloaded from www eurotherm co uk RS485 is the transmission technology used in 3500 series controllers Controllers ordered with digital communications option PD are supplied with a D type connector fitted to terminals HB to HF as shown in Figure 1 14 Standard Profibus cables have a special 9 pin male connector which allow one or two cables to be connected into them so that nodes eg controllers or third party devices may be daisy chained Controller Terminal Connections Controller Terminal D type pin Designation Function HB 1 Shield RF Ground for cable shielding HC 6 VP 5Vdc Voltage connection for termination network only HD 3 B B RXD TXD positive HE 8 A A RXD TXD negative HF 5 D Gnd 0 Volts connection for termination network only Example Profibus Wiring Connections daisy chained to other instruments Terminating resistors are required at both ends of the chain Twisted pairs R1 a fi R2 R3 o m 0 a RI R2 R allas Intermediate BIAS 37900 2200 3900 Ale HE AIDC MRTA al
233. as Locked and its address as 16116 then press OK Repeat for the Lock and Unlock Code addresses ae E Ei tere fs F E E g PECETE LEENE FHES i T r i r DE g L ii A Sada oa A Sar fee mr rl rd del Locas D a DA Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 349 User Manual 3500 series Controllers When all three Tags are created you will see the following Ma Ek ij Mamri bss uk Yau cara UTE p i EUF iji b i u E E i r fil EEE i TE ze i Pieri rhe Tcl Der are lee see la eerie Lobos 10 1 Da 4 AA e A A A A gt at a AS Cu Paga haa 0 Pd edi leg Minimise do not close the OPC server to the taskbar and return to iTools You can now select CustTags on the connected 3500 by double clicking on the folder when in the browse tab dd 251 350 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 28 5 Step 3 Activate OEM Security At the same time as viewing the CustTag parameters double click on another folder and position it show that you can see parameters from both vana Espiner jcc Lack borat a Fae oe G a Dede cate ahs Ler ns Enter a numerical code for the parameter Lock Code and notice that the Locked parameter now shows true 1 and the parameters in the other folder now show question marks indicating that iTools i
234. as inputs to analogue wiring they will be cast to 0 0 or 1 0 as appropriate Values lt 0 5 or gt 1 5 will not be wired This provides a way to stop a Boolean updating Analogue wiring whether simple re routing or involving calculations will always output a real type result whether the inputs were booleans integers or reals Note The numerical value is the value of the enumeration Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 187 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 18 3 2 Math Operator Parameters List Header Math2 2 Input Operators Sub headers 1 to 24 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press O or a to change values Level Scale Input2 Scale Output Units Units applicable to the output value Output Resin Low Limit High Limit To apply a high limit to the output Fallback The state of the Output and Status parameters in case of a fault condition This parameter could be used in conjunction with fallback value Fallback Val Defines in accordance with Fallback the output value during fault conditions Input Value Input 1 value normally wired to an input source could be a User Value Input2 Value Input 2 value normally wired to an input source could be a User Value Output Value Status This parameter is used in conjunction with Fallback to indicate the status of the operation Typically status is used to flag fault conditions and ma
235. ast point defined and the Input Hi Output Hi point If the input source has a bad status sensor break or over range then the output value will also have a bad status 194 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 1 Ifthe input value is outside the translated range then the output status will indicate Out Low Bad and the value will be limited to the nearest output limit Note E Out L gt Out 2 The units and resolution S High 5 parameters will be used for the output values The input values resolution and units will be specified by the source of the wire 3 Ifthe Out Low is higher than the Out High then the translation will be inverted First non Ignored monotonic data data point points OOOO Terminated NN search NS Out High E gt o l In Low In High Figure 19 2 How an Inverted Curve will Terminate its search when it detects non monatonic data 19 1 1 Compensation for Sensor Non Linearities The custom linearisation feature can also be used to compensate for errors in the sensor or measurement system The intermediate points are therefore available in Level 1 so that known discontinuities in the curve can be calibrated out The diagram below shows an example of the type of discontinuity which can occur in the linearisation of a temperature sensor Output Hi O O TE eg 1000 C Cal Point 6 Cal Point 5 UIE
236. at the input spends above the trigger value is higher than the alarm setpoint Normal operation time above setpoint exceeded Resets the Max and Min values and resets the time above threshold to zero Normal operation Reset values Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 181 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 18 Chapter 18 Logic Maths and multi Operators 18 1 18 1 1 182 Logic Operators Logic Operators allow the controller to perform logical calculations on two input values These values can be sourced from any available parameter including Analogue Values User Values and Digital Values The parameters to use the type of calculation to be performed input value inversion and fallback value are determined in Configuration level In levels 1 to 3 you can view the values of each input and read the result of the calculation The Logic Operators page is only available if the operators have been enabled in Inst page sub header Opt It is possible to enable any one of 24 separate calculations they do not have to be in sequence In the Inst Opts page they are shown in three sets of 8 labelled Lgc2 En1 enable operator set 1 to 8 Lgc2 En enable operator set 9 to 16 and Lgc2 En3 enable operator set 17 to 24 Lgc2 denotes a two input logic operator When logic operators are enabled a page headed Lgc2 can be found using the button This page contains up to twenty four
237. at which Automatic tuning is performed Tune Control Point is designed to operate just below the setpoint at which the process is normally expected to operate Target Setpoint This is to ensure that the process is not significantly overheated or overcooled The Tune Control Point is calculated as follows Tune Control Point Initial PV 0 75 Target Setpoint Initial PV The Initial PV is the PV measured at B after a 1 minute settling period Examples If Target Setpoint 500 C and Initial PV 20 C then the Tune Control Point will be 3906 If Target Setpoint 500 C and Initial PV 400 C then the Tune Control Point will be 475 C This is because the overshoot is likely to be less as the process temperature is already getting close to the target setpoint The sequence of operation for a tune from below setpoint for a heat cool control loop is described below Target Setpoint First Peak overshoot Tune Control Point A A A e O LN a O A ES Hysteresis High Output a TI a bay 4 S Sy beet eet ge ee oes he wee hee em i Zero Output Ni ome me eee A gt pq mofa o o 2 tt EER EN A E A EE ETETEA pE A ue sia es E Low Output C D E F G H A B 1min t A Start of H End of Autotune Autotune Figure 21 7 Autotune Heat Cool Process Period Action A Start of Autotune Ato B Both heating and cooling power remains off for a period of 1 minute to allow the algorithm
238. ation resistor gt interfacing to EIA485 This a LES HC Or JC unit is also used to buffer JE HD or JD Com an EIA485 network when it is required to communicate HE or JE Rx with more than 32 LLS HF or JF Tx instruments on the same bus and may also be used Twisted Digital to bridge 3 wire EIA485 to l Pate communications 5 wire ElA422 ElA232 ElA 485 2 wire module isolated communications 240Vac CATII converter Figure 1 9 ElA485 3 Wire Connections Daisy Chain to further ElA485 5 Wire Connections 2200 termination controllers 26 resistor on last controller in the line The 261 or KD485 XJ HA or JA communications converter HB or JB Rx is recommended for Interfacing 5 wire to 3 wire HC Or JCRx connections HD or JD Com To buffer an EIA422 485 network when more than HE or JE Tx 32 instruments on the same LIA HF or JF Tx bus are required To bridge 3 wire ElA485 to Screen EIA 232 to EIA 2200 Twisted Diai 5 wire ElA422 e igital 422 ElA485 4 wire termination pairs er tone eras communications lee module isolated converts 240Vac CATII Figure 1 10 ElA485 5 Wire Connections Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 1 8 2 DeviceNet Wiring It is not within the scope of this manual to describe the DeviceNet standard For this please refer to the DeviceNet specification which may be found at www odva org In practice it is envisaged that 3500 series
239. ault 4 the same as the configuration level passcode If an incorrect code is entered the display reverts to the Quick Start view section 2 1 It is then possible to repeat the quick configuration as described previously The Quick Start view shown in section 2 1 now contains an additional parameter Cancel This is now always available after a power up and if selected will take you into normal operating mode section 2 3 Power up After a Full Configuration Repeat 1 2 and 3 above Full configuration allows a greater number of parameters to be configured in a deeper level of access This is described later in this manual If the controller has been re configured in this level a WARNING message Delete config No or Yes will be displayed If No is selected the display drops back to the GoTo screen 1 Use a or M to select Yes 2 Press to confirm or to cancel If no button is pressed for about 10 seconds the display returns to the WARNING message If Yes is selected the Quick start defaults will be re instated All the Quick start parameters must be reset Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 2 3 2 3 1 Normal Operation Switch on the controller Following a brief self test sequence the controller will start up in AUTO mode see AUTO MAN section 2 6 and Operator Level 2 following Quick Start If the c
240. be edited to change the data mapping view Details of the GSD editor may be be found in section 14 5 5 It is not within the scope of this document to describe the Profibus standard in detail This may be found by reference to www profibus com 14 5 1 Profibus Parameters If Protocol is set to Profibus in configuration level the following parameters are available List Header Comms Sub header H only Name Parameter Description Value Default Access O to select Hess 0 ar oe change values Level Identifies that a comms Comms Communications module fitted R O module is fitted None None is shown if no comms module is fitted or is subsequenlty removed Protocol Digital communications Profibus Conf protocol R O in L3 10 126 Network Comms network status Running Network connected and R O operational Init Network initialising Ready Network ready to accept connection Offline Network offline Bad Network status bad GSD Wdog Flag On Off Wdog Action See section 14 3 for further ManRec AutoRec Con Wdog Timeout details 0 0 to 60 0 seconds 00o R O in WdogRecy 0 0 to Wdog Timeout 00 L3 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 137 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 14 5 2 1 0 Data Exchange The process of reading the inputs and writing to the outputs is known as an I O data exchange Typically the parameters from each slave device will be mapped to an area of PLC input and output registers or a single function bl
241. be Cleaning sama in EE E EO EA 171 16 3 5 Endothermmie Gas COrrector n aE nan EE ae E EEA 171 16 3 6 Cleon WO DE sree sage aetna eater N RN 171 1637 gol Se Stale O E o A cake ct ad cache ia be caacnn la arteaarciemae tac 171 16 4 Zirconia Parameters iii i 172 16 5 Example of Carbon Potential Control Connections oooocononononononnnacononacononononaconacaconnanononocons 179 17 CHAPTER 17 INPUT MONITOR sisas coins Sewsvelessvesaucbeceustevaveverseanscauetaee 180 17 1 Maximum Detectar amatista airan ie a 180 17 2 Minimum Deter A aeaea peas ssuvonusestseonssstgeceseacsasear cuits 180 17 3 TimeAboveThresh ld nsona decodes ds sedccadezedensdacedecedesosesedecedezedetovssacstedezedssndecadeevetososeeeeeneccine 180 17 4 Input Monitor Parameters ini 181 18 CHAPTER 18 LOGIC MATHS AND MULTI OPERATORS oooocccccccccccccconococicionococccccccccccoo 182 18 1 L gic Operators cxisitaticeed ei rousieelccsersiereduct iaticsccissaastesus ch aeanaeceueasseceesianssnsdanansecsseneseneietsnveenseeatoines 182 18 1 1 LOCO olaa 182 18 1 2 EA a EE EET E eter Cen EE eer ee 183 18 1 3 ogie Operator Fara Me tersar Trana NR 184 18 2 Eight Input Logic Operat Serea EAA 185 18 2 1 EightInpatkogiec Oprator rata metas 185 18 3 Maths Operators sien eet e ee eee ENNE 186 18 3 1 MELIA A AEAEE ene luniaaaurneenae duane aman aparece 187 18 3 2 Math Operator Parets 188 18 3 3 Sampean ONC COS Ote 189 18 4 Eight Input Analog MUIti Plex 6rsiisssscasesscocsdessessaveco
242. be generated and limit the function code to Write Function codes 5 6 15 16 R W in Conf R O in L3 R W in conf R O in L3 O 154 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers List Header Mstrcomms Parameter Description Press to select parameters Function Modbus function code as defined by the Modbus standard O to 65535 Full float range Slave instrument parameter address SivData1 to SlvData16 Part No HA027988 Item count Data to from the slave When set to read the slave this parameter will contain the data received When set to write to the slave this parameter will contain the data to be written For bit based function codes 1 2 5 and 15 all data is transferred through SlvData1 Data format The 16 bit data to from the slave is interpreted as signed or unsigned according to the setting of this parameter This parameter is not available for bit functions where all values are treated as Unsigned Issue 15 Jun 13 Value and Description Press D or to change values User Manual Sub header 1 to 12 Access Level Default R W in conf R O in L3 Read coil status Read up to 16 bits from the slave The SlvData1 parameter will contain the value received from the slave Read input status Read up to 16 bits from the slave The SlvData1 parameter will contain the value received from the slave Read holding register Read up to 16
243. be turned off and on without the need to adjust the Rate parameter between Off and a value If the PV is in sensor break the rate limit is susoended and the working setpoint takes the value of 0 On sensor break being released the working setpoint goes from 0 to the selected setpoint value at the rate limit 228 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 21 7 4 Setpoint Tracking The setpoint used by the controller may be derived from a number of sources For example 1 Local setpoints SP1 and SP2 These may be selected through the front panel using the parameter SP Select through digital communications or by configuring a digital input which selects either SP1 or SP2 This might be used for example to switch between normal running conditions and standby conditions If Rate Limit is switched off the new setpoint value is adopted immediately when the switch is changed 2 Aprogrammer generating a setpoint which varies over time see Chapter 22 When the programmer is running the TrackSP and TrackPV parameters update continuously so that the programmer can perform its own servo see also section 22 10 This is sometimes referred to as Program Tracking 3 From a Remote analogue source The source could be an external analogue input into an analogue input module wired to the Alt SP parameter or a User Value wired to the Alt SP parameter The remote setpoint is used when th
244. ble in some applications such as display crystal growing to eliminate this delay This Yes Enabled In option also provides compatibility with other operator level instruments such as the 818 or the 902 series the New setpoint Is The effect is seen on Summary Pages User entered Pages when WSP is promoted and in Program continuously Status Page when changing PSP in Hold and hss flash of the display is Note If the working setpoint is derived from snow the programmer then the parameter ImmPSP is shown in the programmer Run list in iTools only This parameter can be hidden by disabling the parameter EnablelmmPSP which is shown in the programmer Setup list in iTools These parameters are not shown in the user interface of 3500 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 73 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 6 5 Display Formatting The display which will be shown in Operator levels 1 to 3 may be customised This is achieved in the Inst configuration list using the sub header Dis 6 5 1 To Customise the Display The controller must be in Configuration level Then Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes If a parameter from say the previous display is being shown then it will be 1 Press O as many times as necessary until Inst is displayed necessary to press to return to the top 2 Press O or O to select Dis of the list amp Pre
245. ce value for the CO concentration of 0 1 to 100 0 the atmosphere CO_Remote Remote reference value for the CO 0 1 to 100 0 concentration of the atmosphere so that the CO concentration may be read from an external source CO_RemEn CO Remote Enable Allows the remote gas Not enabled measurement to be enabled by an external Da Enabled stimulus CO_Inuse The CO gas measurement value currently being used H2_Local Reference value for the hydrogen 0 1 to 100 0 concentration of the atmosphere H2_Remote Remote reference value for the hydrogen 0 1 to 100 0 concentration of the atmosphere so that the hydrogen concentration may be read from an external source H2_RemEn Hydrogen Remote Enable Allows the remote Not enabled gas measurement to be enabled by an external Enabled stimulus H2_InUse The hydrogen gas measurement value currently being used Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 177 User Manual Clean only shown for Probe Types NOT prefixed by x List Header Zirconia Name Parameter Description to select CleanFreq Probe clean frequency The interval between cleaning cycles of the probe CleanTime Probe clean time The time for which the zirconia probe is cleaned Minimum recovery time after a purge 0 00 00 to 500 00 0 00 01 Maximum recovery time after a purge 0 00 00 to 500 00 0 01 30 MaxRcvTim CleanValv Enable the clean valve Output which enables the probe cleaning valve CleanProb Initiate prob
246. cen Ganesh eae cn ante RRA a CAS nee E Sie GaAs 323 ZIV Senes SOOO SSIS nao sah d odtcasg tagiinayh nag ctvgn ceaceueiles uiwaeiiege dah eqiuivan dendanesiayoensteeaschdeicaneas epee ated 324 VARO E O o A taeerneteaaea ow maaec onan tae oidacaute ues see E 325 ZI MOT SAG COMMITS Si Na 326 LS A id 327 27109 Downloading To Seres 3000 IM Stm Sl Scania nets Ras 327 27 10 10 SOLE CUNAS a E E a nr seny ae 327 27 10 11 O pas 328 27 11 Diagram Context Mena A A 328 27AN Omer Examples or Grap meal AN rd 329 2712 Program Edito NRE 332 2AN ANOV IEN Sa N A A A AES 332 2722 The Spreads Ne SE at causa sas eves E E aN Sag an aga ay Rag aaa 333 DIN EVO COUT OUNS baaa 333 ZI ANZA Menu Entiesand Tool Buttons ala asada 333 ala o Me come telde 333 2o Namna PrO a a E E E E E eee 334 LIAA EMS A OO AAA a 334 2ISIZO Makma GRADGES tora Frog Mr a A caes 334 LANZA SADO OSOS e 334 LRENZ AD Moving Programs OUNAE 334 27 12 11 PUTA FT o ets er 334 27 12 12 TO COPADO cee post hoc sg pons vee ARi 335 27 12 13 VCO Oy a canet ora PrO anas a ociosa 335 27 12 14 A es A EE A N 335 ZIV AEON G eE O 336 PE E O SS A TO 536 Die VOCS a NeW OOM occa int te cu cncas abasic uminadean ibis Gen caasana aera taaun onebnc aie stan 336 24133 TOClone Directly from One Controllerto Am Otel air r E ENE E OOT 336 27 14 Cloneof Comms Port SIMS as hee ate hawt ie shinee eE NEE EENE edadenadeseleadeneciostaae 337 27 15 WISER TEN 552555 san chupcouwsBusSsnueyavavanavasavane vasa v
247. cesscccsssccessccesssceessscessscsssseseesees 355 30 4 Dual Programmers via SCADA Comms and Profibus Tag Addreses ooccooocncnoncnoononononocons 370 30 4 1 Bere Neel ae kel eck E ec cette PEN gt eee TUE Ne AE N MO Le E E en 370 30 4 2 Example Programmer 1 2 Setup Parameters vna iia tit 371 30 4 3 Programmer Seg ment AGOress Ass NS Milano la cas 372 30 4 4 Parameters Available in Every Segment of a PrograrmmMe c ecceccessessessesseeseeseeseeseeseeseceeceeeeseeaeeaeeaeeaeeeenees 374 30 4 5 Example Programmer 12 Segment I Para mete instando din 374 30 5 Synchronous PODAIS ena 375 30 6 ASYNCHIONOUS PODIAS cis cocesicscscosvessesnendotsasessdncscoasdoessoassacesnastosesnsstoasesussosnensedesscoandecaceneceves 376 31 CHAPTER 31 El BISYNCH PARAMETER Sui s 377 31 1 1 CSW Sta tle WV OC A tates erste aes gir Pet erica brian aU acti Me pinta Bac Us Nal aie Uc hans Bales 379 Bele CS Optional SEARS WOT ia ei a ici A a Ne Ia dae Nhe 379 SENS AS eos ple e Status Woren n AA AN 380 31 1 4 Digital Oumut Status Word O Tseri a a a a a 380 31 15 Digital Cutput status loto Uleila 381 31 1 6 Digital OQutp t Status W rd TDdi 381 Siles Digital Output Stratus VV OPO O atari padre ai 381 31 1 8 Digtal Onmtput status Word TIOS kusana E E AN 381 al Pee PIG Mal OUTOUT Status VOTO et ei 382 SO sRaoitional mMemoOnies typically ronm 2400 nr a ii tines 382 32 APPENDIX A SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION ccccccsssssssssceccccceesssssc
248. connection then at least 10 minutes must elapse from the time of restoring this connection before RTD calibration can take place e The instrument should be powered up for at least 10 minutes Before using or verifying RTD calibration e The mV range must be calibrated first Decade Box Controller VI Do This Additional Notes 1 This example is for PV Input configured as a Pt100 RTD 2 With Cal State selected press a or Mito select Lo 1500hm 3 Press a or O to choose Go The controller automatically calibrates to the injected 150 00Q input As it does this the display will show Busy then Pass assuming a successful calibration If it is not successful then Failed will be displayed This may be due to an incorrect input resistance rei 4 The calibration data can be saved or you a can return to Factory Calibration as described in sections 26 3 2 and 26 3 3 4 Repeat the procedure for mH Hi 4000hm sat ma Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 303 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 26 4 Calibration Parameters The following table lists the parameters available in the Calibration List List Header PV Input Sub headers None Name Parameter Value Default Access to select See iptien Press or Dto change values Level Cal State Calibration Idle Normal operation Conf per ane Lo Omv Low input calibration for mV ranges ANO Hi 50mV High inpu
249. controllers will be added to an existing DeviceNet network This section therefore is designed to provide general guidelines to connect 3500 series controllers to this network Further information is also available in the DeviceNet Communications Handbook Part No HA027506 which can be downloaded from www eurotherm com According to the DeviceNet standard two types of cable may be used These are known as Thick Trunk and Thin Trunk For long trunk lines it is normal to use Thick trunk cable For drop lines thin trunk cable is generally more convenient being easier to install The table below shows the relationship between cable type length and baud rate Network length Varies with speed Up to 400m possible with repeaters Baud Rate Mb s 125 250 500 Thick trunk 500m 1 640ft 200m 656ft 75m 246ft Thin trunk 100m 328ft 100m 328ft 100m 328ft This table shows standard cable connections Terminal CAN Color Description Reference Label Chip HA V DeviceNet network power positive terminal Connect the red wire of the DeviceNet cable here If the DeviceNet network does not supply the power connect to the positive terminal of an external 11 25 Vdc power supply CAN_H DeviceNet CAN_H data bus terminal Connect the white wire of the DeviceNet cable here HC SHIELD None Shield Drain wire connection Connect the DeviceNet cable shield here To prevent ground loops the DeviceNet network should be grounded in only one location HD CAN_L Blue Dev
250. ction Block Page Header Main PV Parameters Parameters SP SPTrim Figure 4 1 Example of a Function Block In the controller parameters are organised in simple lists The top of the list shows the list header This corresponds to the name of the function block and is generally presented in alphabetical order This name describes the generic function of the parameters within the list For example the list header AnAlm contains parameters which enable you to set up analogue alarm conditions In this manual the parameters are listed in tables similar to that shown in section 3 4 The tables include all possible parameters available in the selected block but in the controller only those available for a particular configuration are shown Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 57 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 4 1 To Access a Function Block Press the Page button until the name of the function block is shown in the page header Access List Header Instrument List Header PV Inoput List Header Keep pressing O to select further list headers The list is continuous Figure 4 2 Parameter List Headings 4 1 1 Sub Lists or Instances In some cases the list is broken down into a Sub header number of sub headers to provide a more This may be text e g OPT Options comprehensive list of parameters An example of this is shown above for the Instrument List
251. ctly into the chamber The humidify output of the controller turns on or off a solenoid valve Dehumidification may be accomplished by using the same compressor used for cooling the chamber The dehumidify output from the controller may control a separate control valve connected to a set of heat exchanger coils 16 2 Humidity Parameters List Header Humidity Sub headers None Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select O or Ga to change Level Resolution of the relative humidity NN The psychrometric constant at a given 0 0 to 10 0 L3 pressure 6 66E 4 at standard atmospheric pressure The value is dependent on the speed of air flow across the wet bulb and hence the rate of evaporation 6 66E 4 is for the ASSMANN ventilated Psychrometer Pressure Atmospheric Pressure 0 0 to 2000 0 1013 0 Wet Bulb Temperature Range units units WetOffs Wet bulb temperature offset 100 0 to 100 0 me RelHumid Relative Humidity is the ratio of actual 0 0 to 100 0 water vapour pressure AVP to the saturated water vapour pressure SVP at a particular temperature and pressure DewPoint The dew point is the temperature to 297 7 to 779 2 which air would need to cool at constant pressure and water vapour content in order to reach saturation SBreak Indicates that one of the probes is No sensor break broken detection Sensor break detection enabled 170 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User
252. curs it is indicated as follows The red alarm ALM beacon in the top left of the display flashes Alarm number is indicated together with the flashing amp A default or pre programmed message appears showing the source of the alarm Invitation to acknowledge the new alarm 2 7 1 To Acknowledge an Alarm Press and Ack together The action which now takes place will depend on the type of latching which has been configured Non Latched Alarms If the alarm condition is present when the alarm is acknowledged the alarm beacon will be continuously lit This state will continue for as long as the alarm condition remains When the alarm condition disappears the indication will also disappear If a relay has been attached to the alarm output it will de energise when the alarm condition occurs and remain in this condition until the alarm is acknowledged AND it is no longer present If the alarm condition disappears before it is acknowledged the alarm indication disappears as soon as the condition disappears Automatic Latched Alarms The alarm continues to be active until both the alarm condition is removed AND the alarm is acknowledged The acknowledgement can occur BEFORE the condition causing the alarm is removed Manual Latched Alarms The alarm continues to be active until both the alarm condition is removed AND the alarm is acknowledged The acknowledgement can only occur AFTER the condition causing the
253. d No part of this document may be reproduced modified or transmitted in any form by any means neither may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the 1 W ep 5S q S document relates without the prior written permission of Invensys Eurotherm Limited Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement The specifications in this document may therefore be changed without notice The information in this document is given in good faith but is intended for guidance only O p era t ions M ana q emen t Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document HA027988 15 CN29429 3500 User Manual
254. d simulation this is the power requested of the load This can be used as the cool demand Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 199 User Manual 3500 series Controllers List Header Load List Header Load Load Sub headers 1 and 2 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press or a to change values Level Noise Added to PV Off The amount of noise is This is used to make the PV of the load 1 to specitied in appear noisy and hence more like a real engines ningun measurement Offset Process offset Used to configure an offset in the process In a temperature application this could represent the ambient operating temperature of the plant 200 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 21 Chapter 21 Control Loop Set Up Software version 1 contains one loop of control From version 2 onwards two loops are available Each loop contains two outputs Channel 1 and Channel 2 each of which can be configured for PID On Off or Valve Position bounded or unbounded control In a temperature control loop Channel 1 is normally configured for heating and Channel 2 for cooling Descriptions given in this chapter mainly refer to temperature control but generally also apply to other process loops 21 1 What is a Control Loop An example of a heat only temperature control loop is shown below Control Control Process Algorithm Output der PID OnOff VP OP control
255. d Find 2 StateUsrTxtOn User Text to replace On for Switch State On 3 Instrument E 10 3 AlmSummary 3 Comms C Commstab 3 Loop 3 Programmer J Program 3 Switch E ay a 2 gt i emne _ _ i Switch 1 4 parameters Er Ee ee ee EF eh TS EUROTHERM COM1 1ID001 3504 Level 2 Engineer 3504 y 2 70 Load device parameters from file Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 341 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 27 20 Master Communications Configuration Example Master Communications is described in section 14 9 This example uses typical features of the Master Comms function blocks to create an application using a single master controller type 3508 communicating with 5 slaves as follows Slave 1 2404 address 2 Slave 2 2704 address 3 Slave 3 ePower address 4 Slave 4 3216 address 5 Slave 5 3504 address 6 The master in this example uses port H to communicate with the slaves and port J to communicate with iTools The screen shots shown in this section are taken from iTools and show the complete lists of parameters for each instrument The wiring may be EIA485 422 as appropriate See section 14 8 2 Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave 5 2404 2704 3504 Tab 1 Master Comms Block 1 342 Each tab in the iTools view corresponds to a Master Comms block In Tab 1 the Master is set up to continuously write Target Setpoint parameter address 2 to 2404 Slave 1 at instrum
256. d SP from the Master to SP in a Slave Wire the setpoint in the master to Bcast Val The procedure for this is shown in section 5 1 or using Tools section 27 10 Set Dest Addr in the master to 2 2 is the modbus value for Target SP The value of the master setpoint will be shown in the lower display on the slave assuming the slave has been configured for SP in the lower display e See Appendix A for the full address list Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 14 9 Modbus Master Communications The Modbus Master function block has been added from firmware versions 2 90 on controllers supplied after March 2010 It extends the Broadcast Communications feature described in the previous section by allowing Modbus master communications to be generated from the instrument The standard instrument contains one Modbus Master function block but up to twelve blocks are orderable Each block can access up to sixteen consecutive parameters which may be read or written to slaves The function block can be configured on either the H or J communications slots but each needs to be set up separately for Master Communications Note that unlike Broadcast Communications described in the previous section the Modbus Master function block does NOT allow concurrent use of the communications port with iTools The data items are held in the function block as float values and are converted to the 16 bit
257. d an instrument without contiguration will be supplied Q CustomCurve e Loop 2 Loop 2 Loop 2 Loop 2 Loop 2 Loop 2 Units Function PV Range Lo Range Hi Loop 2 Units Centigrade x a o Na Single Chan On Off N Thermocouple Loop 2 Range Low Loop 2 Function Loop 2 PV X x lt Enter value with decimal point Single Loop Only ingle Chan PID ingle Chan VP with Feedback K Thermocouple Single Chan VP without T Thermocouple Unconfigured u N J Thermocouple n Mm L Thermocouple Loop 2 Range High Zz X Enter value with decimal point 2 it 2 Dual Chan PID E R Thermocouple PN Dual Chan PID OnOff S Thermocouple A Dual Chan VP with Feedback B BThermocouple Dual Chan VP without ES Platinell Il Feedback C Thermocouple PF Dual Chan PID VP with Pt 100 Feedback Poo S O Dual Chan PID VP without pe Eee NA 0 20mA Linear 0 5Vdc Linear 1 5Vdc Linear 0 10Vdc Linear ME Customcuve 2 fC or F units are selected they must be the same for both loops If C or Fare not selected for Loop 1 they cannot be selected for Loop 2 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 13 User Manual 3500 series Controllers Alarms and Input Outputs Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Eolo ilo Logic Relay I O Slot I O Slot I O Slot 1 O Slot I O Slot I O Slot 1 2 3 4 LA LB AA 1 2 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 Pe W E Se eT Alarm 1 Alarm 3 Logic LA Logic LB Relay AA FB Sensor Break LB SensorBreak
258. d as heat cool Following an autotune R2G is always limited to between 0 1 and 10 Ifthe calculated value is outside this limit a Tune Fail alarm is given In software releases up to and including 2 30 if the calculated value is outside this limit R2G remains at its previous value but all other tuning parameters are changed Loop Break Time LBT Following an autotune LBT is set to 2 Ti assuming the integral time is not set to OFF If Ti is set to OFF then LBT is set to 12 Td The autotune sequence for different conditions is described in sections 21 6 10 to 21 6 12 21 6 4 Loop Parameters Auto Tune A summary of the Autotune parameters is listed in the following table List Header Lp1 or Lp2 Sub header Tune Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select jes Da Cie change values Level Tune R2G Defines the type of Standard Tunes the relative cooling gain of the Standard relative cooling gain loop using the standard R2G tuning Note R2G tuning for the loop algorithm applies only R2GPD If the process is heavily lagged this to Ch1 Ch For further information setting should be used heat cool e R2G is not calculated automatically control 5 ee LO Enter the value manually as described pote Wis in section 21 6 16 To start auto tune Auto tune not running If Off is selected during a tune tuning will stop Auto tunerunning sd tune Auto tunerunning sd High Output Set h
259. d by the next available source SP1 SP2 Alternative Setpoint 2 Allow edits to all segments 3 Return all controlled outputs to the configured reset state 22 14 3 Hold A programmer may only be placed in Hold from the Run or Holdback state In hold the setpoint is frozen at the current programmer setpoint and the time remaining parameter frozen at its last value In this state you can make temporary changes to program parameters such as a target setpoint ramp rates and times These changes will only remain effective until the end of the currently running segment when they will be overwritten by the stored program values 22 14 4 Skip Segment This is a parameter found in the Program Setup List section 22 16 It moves immediately to the next segment and starts the segment from the current setpoint value 22 14 5 Advance Segment This is a parameter found in the Program Setup List section 22 16 It sets the program setpoint equal to the target setpoint and moves to the next segment 22 14 6 Fast Executes the program at 10x the normal speed It is provided so that programs can be tested but the process should not be run in this state Fast is only available in Level 3 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 253 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 22 14 7 Run Hold Reset Digital Inputs The dual programmer and the single programmer available in version 1 software can have Run Hold and Reset wired for example to three digital inp
260. d segment Not used Spare 31 1 6 Digital Output Status Word1 03 DigOpStat1 03 31 1 7 818 902 3 4 Function Clear Set Ramp 1 to Output 4 Dwell 1 to Output 4 Ramp 2 to Output 4 Dwell 2 to Output 4 Ramp 3 to Output 4 Dwell 3 to Output 4 Ramp 4 to Output 4 Dwell 4 to Output 4 Ramp 5 to Output 4 Dwell 5 to Output 4 Ramp 6 to Output 4 Dwell 6 to Output 4 Ramp 7 to Output 4 Dwell 7 to Output 4 Ramp 8 to Output 4 Dwell 8 to Output 4 818 902 3 4 Function Clear Set End to output 4 Not used Spare 31 1 8 Digital Output Status Word1 05 Bit oO SO CO N O ASJA N Part No HA027988 Issue 15 818 902 3 4 Function Clear Set Ramp 1 to Output 2 Dwell 1 to Output 2 Ramp 2 to Output 2 Dwell 2 to Output 2 Ramp 3 to Output 2 Dwell 3 to Output 2 Ramp 4 to Output 2 Dwell 4 to Output 2 Ramp 5 to Output 2 Dwell 5 to Output 2 Ramp 6 to Output 2 Dwell 6 to Output 2 Ramp 7 to Output 2 Dwell 7 to Output 2 Ramp 8 to Output 2 Dwell 8 to Output 2 Jun 13 3500 Support Digital Event bit 4 for segment 1 ramp 1 Digital Event bit 4 for segment 2 dwell 1 Digital Event bit 4 for segment 3 ramp 2 Digital Event bit 4 for segment 4 dwell 2 Digital Event bit 4 for segment 5 Digital Event bit 4 for segment 6 dwell 3 Digital Event bit 4 for segment 7 ramp 4 Digital Event bit 4 for segment 8 dwell 4 ramp 3 Digital Event bit 4 for segment 9 ramp 5 Digital Eve
261. d simply turns heating power on when the PV is below setpoint and off when it is above setpoint As a consequence On Off control leads to oscillation of the process variable This oscillation can affect the quality of the final product and may be used on non critical processes A degree of hysteresis must be set in On Off control if the operation of the switching device is to be reduced and relay chatter is to be avoided If cooling is used cooling power is turned on when the PV is above setpoint and off when it is below It is suitable for controlling switching devices such as relays contactors triacs or digital logic devices PID Control PID also referred to as Three Term Control is an algorithm which continuously adjusts the output according to a set of rules to compensate for changes in the process variable It provides more stable control but the parameters need to be set up to match the characteristics of the process under control The three terms are P Proportional band Integral time D Derivative time The output from the controller is the sum of the contributions from these three terms The combined output is a function ofthe magnitude and duration of the error signal and the rate of change of the process value It is possible to turn off integral and derivative terms and control on proportional only P proportional plus integral Pl or proportional plus derivative PD PI control might be used for exampl
262. daries which define the switching points between the two devices The higher boundary 2 to 3 is normally set towards the top end of the thermocouple range and this is determined by the Switch Hi parameter The lower boundary 1 to 2 is set towards the lower end of the pyrometer or second thermocouple range using the parameter Switch Lo The controller calculates a smooth transition between the two devices Input 1 Low temperature thermocouple 3500 Temperature controller Input 2 a High temperature thermocouple or pyrometer t T Controller operates entirely Temperature on the higher temperature device Boundary 2 3 lt Controller operates on a Boundary 1 2 combination of both devices Controller operates entirely on the lower temperature device y Time gt Figure 23 1 Thermocouple to Pyrometer Switching 23 1 1 Example To Set the Switch Over Levels Select Level 3 or configuration level 1 Press as many times as necessary to display the SwOver header Press to scroll to Switch Hi Press or UD to a value which is suitable for the pyrometer or high temperature thermocouple to take over the control of the process 4 Press O to scroll to Switch Lo Press 4 or Dto a value which is suitable for the low temperature thermocouple to control the process Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 279 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 23 1 2 Switch O
263. dditional Notes 1 From any display press Tedre i In this example transducer 1 is being used as many times as necessary to select the Transducer to be calibrated Mal Toupee Load Cell Configure Cal Type Load Cell Cal Enable Yes Cal Enable Yes this enables cal parameters and calibration may be done in operator levels Set Range Max and Range Min to the range of the transducer 0 to 2000 grams It is not necessary to set Input Hi and Input Lo or Scale Hi and Scale Lo 2 Press O to select further parameters Txdr The controller takes a number of measurements to determine when the calibration should take scale Lo place Cal Band sets the allowed difference Cal Band 1 E between two consecutive averages If set to 1 0 Cal Active Off the average must be within 1 0 before calibration takes place A lower setting requires the controller to settle for a longer period Calibration accuracy is not necessarily affected other than extreme settings 24 4 4 Load Cell Calibration Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 Remove all load from the load cell 5 Press O to seolbadero This starts the low calibration point Start Cal and a or a to Yes A pop up message will appear for 1 5 seconds showing that calibration has commenced If successful a pop up will be displayed for 1 5 seconds If calibration fails an acknowledge pop up will appear T
264. ding bits within the Output such that In1 goes to bit0 In2 to bit1 In16 goes to bit 15 Status The block Status parameter reflects the status of the Output parameter ifany Bad Input is BAD this Status will be set according to the Fallback Type Fall Type Fallback Type FallGood If any Input status is BAD set R O The Output status and Status the Output status and Status R W in Conf parameter if one of the inputs is bad parameter GOOD and set the Output value as set by the FallBack parameter FallBad If any Input status is BAD set the Output status and Status parameter BAD and set the Output value as set by the FallBack parameter Fallback Fallback value O to The value applied to the Output 65535 parameter when any Input is BAD Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 157 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 14 11 Unpackbit Unpackbit consists of four blocks and were added at the same time as the Master Communications block from firmware versions 2 90 Unpackbit is the opposite of packbit and allows a 16 bit integer to be unpacked into 16 individual bits 14 11 1 Unpackbit Parameters List Header unpackbit Sub header 1 2 3 4 Parameter Description Value and Description Default Access Level Press to select parameters Press SL or to change values Input R O The Input bit positions are unpacked to the outputs as follows Bit O to Out1 Bit1 to Out2 Bit 15 to Out16 Out1 to Out Output 1 to Ou
265. dless of the H port set up These are ModBus protocol Instrument address 255 Baud rate 19K2 No parity IR Clip An IR Clip available from Eurotherm clips to the front of the controller as shown It is enabled disabled via the IR Mode parameter within the Access page of the instrument When enabled the IR communications override all standard H port communications None of the standard communications detailed above will be responded to while IR Mode is enabled H port activities will not interfere with IR Clip communications LURGI HEM Fitting of the CFG clip is the only communications mechanism that overrides IR clip communications CFG Clip A configuration clip is also available from Eurotherm which interfaces directly with the main printed circuit board in the controller It can be clipped into position with the controller in or out of its sleeve The CFG Clip is automatically detected y viseti when connected but should not be used while H port communications are active Note The CFG clip must be powered externally to ensure detection and may be used to power the instrument or while the instrument is already powered The Ethernet and DeviceNet communications module should not be fitted while using the CFG Clip as communications conflicts will occur This is because both the DeviceNet and Ethernet Communications Modules maintain constant messaging between themselves and the instrument even when no
266. dow To add a parameter to the PROFIBUS DP Input Data simply drag it from the Device Parameter list using the mouse and drop it into the Inputs list Similarly drop a parameter into the Outputs list to set PROFIBUS DP Output Data Alternatively double click on a parameter name to add it to the currently selected window select the list by clicking on it or use the arrow button to the left of the input and output lists The order of the parameters in the Input and Output List may be changed by dragging and dropping between them Parameters may be deleted or the list cleared using the buttons on the right hand side of the I O lists or by pressing the right mouse button when the cursor is over a parameter name whereupon a pop up menu will be displayed Parameters are found in feature related lists in a similar way to the parameter lists in the instrument The lists are chosen alphabetically using the drop down box under Device Parameters or by using the tabs below the window V Eurotherm Profibus GSD File Editor AE File Help Device Parameters Values to be read from device Loop 1 Main Loop 1 Working Setpoint Loop 1 Control Irihibit Delete Loop 1 Pr Variable Loop 1 Process variable Loop 1 Target Setpoint Clear Loop 1 Working Output Loop 1 Working Setpoint Loop 1 Control Inhibit Loop 1 Auto M anual Mode Loop 1 Process Variable Number of Input Words Values to be written to device Loop 1 4ubo M anual Mode Delete When a
267. ds 2 Match the calibration of the controller to an individual transducer or sensor 3 To compensate for known offsets in process measurements Analogue Input Scaling and Offset Scaling of the analogue input uses the same procedure as described for the PV Input Chapter 7 and applies to linear process inputs only eg linearised transducers where it is necessary to match the displayed reading to the electrical input levels from the transducer PV input scaling is not provided for direct thermocouple or RTD inputs Figure 10 2 shows an example of input scaling where an electrical input of 4 20mA requires the display to read 2 5 to 200 0 units Offset has the effect of moving the whole curve shown in Figure 10 2 up or down about a central point The Offset parameter is found in the Mod page under the number of the slot position in which the Analogue Input module is fitted Display Reading a Display Hi linia A sic Loe Offset negative eg 200 0 A Y Offset positive Y Display Lo ERARE ESET Citi APPT eg 2 5 f Electrical Input Range Lo eg 4 mA Range Hi eg 20 mA Figure 10 2 Input Scaling Standard IO To scale a mA analogue input as shown in the above example This also applies to V or mV input types Select Conf as described in Chapter 3 Then press to select the page header in which the analogue input module is fitted Press to scroll to Disp Hi Then press or Dto 200 0
268. e Conf Res n Display resolution Nene to No A points to four decimal pe X XXKX points SBrk type Allows one of three Sensor break will be detected when Conf strategies to be configured its impedance is greater than a low if potentiometer break is value tiles Gs Simens i Sensor break will be detected when Conf analogue input ae its impedance is greater than a high value or Weseworbeak A CT SBrk Alarm To configure the alarm No sensor break alarm action should the ee Non latching sensor break alarm CE become ManLatch Manual latching sensor break alarm disconnected Fallback Condition to be adopted if Clip Bad See section 0 for further Conf the Status parameter OK Clip Good explanation Fall Bad Fall Good Upscale DownScale Filter Time To adjust the input filter Off or 0 00 1 to 500 00 time constant to reduce the effect of noise on the input signal Meas Value The current value in engineering units PV Requested output current input signal level after linearisation where applicable SBrk Value Used for diagnostics only and displays the sensor break trip value Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 107 User Manual 3500 series Controllers List Header Mod Sub headers xA x the number of the slot in which the module is fitted Parameter Description Value Default Access Press D or to change values Level Cal State This parameter allows the Non calibrating state Conf minimum positions of
269. e Bulb current Input impedance 100mV Range Range Resolution uV Effective resolution Linearity error Calibration error Drift with temperature Common mode rejection Series mode rejection Input leakage current Input impedance 2V Range Range Resolution uV Effective resolution Linearity error Calibration error Drift with temperature Common mode rejection Series mode rejection Input leakage current Input impedance 10V Range Range Resolution uV Effective resolution Linearity error Calibration error Drift with temperature Common mode rejection Series mode rejection Input impedance 392 3 modules can be fitted 6 modules can be fitted 0 2 of reading 1LSD 9Hz 110ms 264Vac double insulation Off to 59 9s Default 1 6s User adjustable over full range 2 point gain amp offset Includes process input remote setpoint power limit 100mV to 100mV 3500 series Controllers K J N R S B L T C PL2 custom Resolution uV lt 3 3uV E 1 6s filter time 15 9 bits lt 0 2 of reading gt 25 1 rejection of ambient change External reference of 0 C 45 C and 50 C lt 1 C at 25 C ambient 0 400 200 C to 850 C 3 wire Pt100 DIN 43760 lt 0 08 C with 1 6sec filter 13 7 bits lt 0 033 best fit straight line lt 0 4 C 0 15 of reading in C lt 0 015 C 0 005 of reading in C per C lt 0 000085 C V maximum of 264Vrms lt 0 240 C V maximum of 280mV pk
270. e 0x131f x1320 0x1321 0x1322 0x1323 Ege2 7 Out Lgc2 8 1n1 Lgc2 8 In2 Lgc2 8 Out Lgc2 9 In1 Lgc2 9 In2 Lgc2 9 Out Lgc2 10 In1 Lgc2 10 In2 Lgc2 10 Out Lgc2 11 In1 Lgc2 11 ln2 Lgc2 11 Out Lge2 12 1n1 Lge2 12 In2 Lgc2 12 Out Lgc2 13 In1 Lgc2 13 In2 Ege2 13 Out Lgc2 14 In1 Lgc2 14 In2 Lgc2 14 Out Lgc2 15 In1 Lgc2 15 In2 Lgc2 15 Out Lgc2 16 In1 Lgc2 16 In2 Lgc2 16 Out Lge2 17 1n1 Lgc2 17 ln2 Lgc2 17 Out Lgc2 18 In1 Lgc2 18 In2 Lgc2 18 Out Lgc2 19 In1 Lgc2 19 In2 Lgc2 19 Out Lgc2 20 In1 Lgc2 20 In2 Lgc2 20 Out Lgc2 21 In1 Lgc2 21 In2 Lgc2 21 Out Lgc2 22 ln1 Lgc2 22 ln2 Lgc2 22 Out Lgc2 23 ln1 Lgc2 23 ln2 Lgc2 23 Out Lgc2 24 ln1 Lgc2 24 ln2 Lgc2 24 Out Lgc8 1 In1 Lgc8 1 In2 Lgc8 1 In3 Lgc8 1 In4 Lgc8 1 In5 Lgc8 1 In 6 O off 1 on O O O off 1 on O O O off 1 on oOoj joj o O off 1 on olojo O off 1 on O O Oo off 1 on O O Oo off 1 on olojo O off 1 on olojo O off 1 on O O Oo off 1 on O O Oo off 1 on O O O off 1 on ojo O off 1 on O O O Oo off 1 on O O off 1 on olojo O off 1 on oOjojo O off 1 on ojo O off 1 on O off 1 on O off 1 on O off 1 on O off 1 on O off 1 on O off 1 on O O ted D 2 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 363 User Manual 3500 series Controllers MODBUS MODBUS Parameter Hex Enumerations 4900 0x1324 0 off 1 on 4901 0x1325 0 of
271. e 99999 to 99999 720 calculation will be valid 0 Tolerance of the sooting 9999 9 to 9999 9 1 ProcFact Process factor 1 0 to 999 0 Only shown if ProbeTyp AIIMMI OxygenExp The exponent units of the log oxygen 24 to 24 2 type calculation Only shown for O2 probes Templnput Zirconia probe temperature input Temp range value TempOffs Sets a temperature offset for the 99999 to 99999 rn probe ProbelP Zirconia probe mV input 99999 to 99999 ProbeOffs Zirconia probe mV offset 99999 to 99999 172 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers List Header Zirconia Name Parameter Description to select CarbonPot Calculated carbon potential Not if ProbeType xZircoDew DewPoint Zirconia control process value The O2 or dew point value derived from temperature and remote gas reference inputs Calculated oxygen Only shown for O2 probe types Probe sooting alarm output Not if ProbeType xZircoDew This is a Boolean which freezes the PV during a purging cycle It may have been wired for example to disable Oxygen SootAlm PVFrozen control output during purging ProbeStat Indicates the status of the probe Ballnt when a step change in the output PID control loop aC_CO_O2 PrbState be being updated Oxygenlyp Oxygen Type Selects the oxygen algorithm to be used Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 Balance Integral This output goes true occurs which w
272. e when the sensor measuring an oven temperature is susceptible to noise or other electrical interference where derivative action could cause the heater power to fluctuate wildly PD control may be used for example on servo mechanisms In addition to the three terms described above there are other parameters which determine how well the control loop performs These include Cutback terms Relative Cool Gain Manual Reset and are described in the following sections Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 21 4 1 3 Motorised Valve Control This algorithm is designed specifically for positioning motorised valves It operates in boundless sometimes called Valve Positioning Unbounded or bounded mode Boundless VP control VPU does not require a position feedback potentiometer to operate It isa velocity mode algorithm which directly controls the direction and velocity of the movement of the valve in order to minimise the error between the setpoint and the PV It uses triac or relay outputs to drive the valve motor a potentiometer may be used with boundless mode but it is used solely for indication of the actual valve position and is not used as part of the control algorithm Bounded VP VPB control requires a feedback potentiometer as part of the control algorithm The control is performed by delivering a raise pulse a lower pulse or no pulse in response to the control demand signal via rela
273. e Cal Enable Birji and calibration may be done in operator levels kanae Maxs Set Range Max and Range Min to the range of the transducer 0 to 3000 psi Scale Hi should be set to 80 of the maximum 2 Press to select Scale range of the transducer In this case 2400 0 Hi Tct Scale Hi scale Lo Mal Hare The controller takes a number of measurements to determine when the calibration should take place Cal Band sets the allowed difference between two consecutive averages If set to 0 5 the averages must be within 0 5 before calibration takes place A lower setting requires the controller to settle for a longer period Calibration accuracy is not necessarily affected other than setting at extremes a ml mM T ul A 24 3 3 5 Internal Soft Wiring Assuming the PV input on terminals V and V are used internally wire transducer Input Value from PVInput PV In configuration level Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes This locates the parameter you want to wire TO 1 From any display press Teci to select Txdr page ShuritSitate Cal Active 2 Press to scroll to the Ireut Ua ie parameter to Input Value js Indicates parameter selected llireFrom In configuration mode the A MAN button is the pao oy Wire button 3 Press eA to display See se WireFrom 4 Press to navigate to Wi rer ron the PVInp
274. e HF HE HD HC HB HA AFAR Further Controllers etc Figure 1 12 Profibus Wiring D Type Connector for rear terminal mounting if digital communications options code PD is ordered 7 aa HA Not used HB Shield Pin 1 Shield HC 5V Pin 3 Tx Rx ve Pin 5 Ground HD Tx Rx ve A Pin 6 5V 9 Pin connector Plastic Rear terminal Pin 8 Tx Rx ve HE Tx Rx ve assembly spacer block Pin 9 Spare HF Ground a The connector assembly may be ordered separately Part No PROF9PIND Figure 1 13 Profibus Connector Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 1 8 5 Ethernet ModBus TCP When the controller is supplied with the Ethernet communications option a special cable assembly is also supplied This cable must be used since the magnetic coupling is contained within the RJ45 connector It consists of an RJ45 connector socket and a termination assembly which must be connected to terminals HA to HF View of cable which may also be ordered separately as Part No SUB3500 COMMS EA Cable connected to B n _ Activity and y terminals HA to HF transmit data lt LED indicators Figure 1 14 Ethernet Cable Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 29 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 1 8 6 I O Expander An I O expander Model No 200010 can be used with 3500 series controllers to allow the number of I O points to be increased by up to a further 20 digital inpu
275. e Load Save Print Scan Add Remove Access Views Help EE Graphical Wiring EBParameter Explorer ElDevice Panel MM Terminal wiring BlrDevice Recipe amp abwatch Recipe HlProgrammer E com 11001 3504 COM1 1D001 3504 Parameter Explorer Instrument Enables E OX Name Description r Value P MatheEns Maths Operator Block Enable Flags T Access A MultiOperEn Multi Input Operator Enable Flags Instrument E MuxBEn Input analog multiplexor Block Enable Flags PolyEn Polynomial linearisation Block Enable Flags Progen Programmer Block Enable Flags RTClockEn Real Time Clack Block Enable Flags SwOverEn switthover Block Enable Flags Instinfo TimerEn Timer Block Enable Flags Diagnostics TotaliseEn Totaliser Block Enable Flags a lo TrScaleEn Transducer Scaling Block Enable Flags AlmSummary UserTextEn User Text Block Enable Flags 239 comme UsrvalEnt User Value Enable Flags Comrmetab UsrealEn ser Value Enable Flags Loc ZirconiaEn Zirconia blacks enable flag a Display Options i Cor oO NA Aaaa Aa aAA woo O d Laca ri E Browse Instrument Enables 29 parameters 3 hidden Level 2 Engineer 3504 v E2 30 Select Instrument Enables Each user text block can be enabled by entering the decimal number corresponding to the bit map shown in the table The table shows how to select any one of the first 4 blocks individually followed by all 4 5 6 7 and 8 blocks 1 o ojofjo o ojijo 2 o ofojofofofiji
276. e Modbus SCADA table El Bisynch compatibility with 818 and 900 series controllers Default custom page templates Two point calibration on fixed and analogue input modules Multi input function block Summary screens for loop 1 loop2 both loops programmer Parameter promotion to summary screen Issue 5 applies to software versions 2 30 and includes Dual Analogue Output module Profibus D type connector option ImmSP parameter added to the Options list User Text and Loop Naming Issue 6 also applies to software versions 2 30 and includes Changes to Technical Specification Electromagnetic compatibility section when Devicenet module fitted Addition of calibration check to Chapter 26 Improved descriptions of Strain Gauge Calibration Chapter 24 Improved descriptions of autotuning and parameters in PID Chapter 21 Issue 7 applies to firmware versions 2 60 and includes Addition of Chapter 28 OEM Security Correction to Cal State parameter section 10 3 9 Repeat for minimum should read Repeat for maximum Issue 8 applies to firmware version 2 70 and includes new function block User Switches High Resloution Retransmission module and additional parameters Cycle time Wdog Flag Wdog Action Wdog Timeout Wdog Recy Servo to PV Manual Startup Issue 9 applies to firmware version 2 80 with the following changes Add more Zirconia block parameters Clarify wording of Power Feedback in Diagnostics section 6 7 Correct F
277. e as 2400 series instruments It is the same as 26 2700 series For 2 wire this is a local link 1 6 1 3 Linear Input V mV and High Impedance V e mV range 40mV or 80mV 80mV e High level range O 10V 0 2V High Impedance mid level range 0 2V 0O 10V 9 P 9 cas e Aline resistance for voltage inputs may cause measurement errors 1 6 1 4 Linear Input mA e Connect the supplied load resistor equal to 2 49Q for mA input The resistor supplied is 1 accuracy 50ppm A resistor 0 1 accuracy 15ppm resistor can be ordered as a separate item 18 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 1 6 2 Digital I O These terminals may be configured as logic inputs contact inputs or logic outputs in any combination It is possible to have one input and one output on either channel AN The Digital IO is not isolated from the PV input 1 6 2 1 Logic Inputs e Voltage level logic inputs 12V 5 40mA Active gt 10 8V Input Inactive lt 7 3V Common 4 Input 1 OOG 1 6 2 2 Contact Closure Inputs eny a C 12009 B e Input 2 s ontact open gt O Common e Contact closed lt 4800 1 6 3 Digital Logic Outputs Output 1 e The logic outputs are capable of driving SSR or thyristors up to 9mA 4 Owtput 2 18V Caine It is possible to parallel the two outputs to supply 18mA 18V desa e Note The Digital lO ter
278. e been made available within this instrument The bits within these words are used to read write to particular parameters within the instrument As the status words are used to write to many parameters simultaneously no errors are reported if a particular bit fails the write operation When changing parameters using the status words the status word should be read back to check the required changes occurred Please see the appendix for details of the status word bits Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 133 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 14 4 Ethernet Protocol If Protocol is set Ethernet the following parameters are available 14 4 1 Ethernet Parameters List Header Comms Sub header H only Name Parameter Description Value module is fitted Comms Communications module fitted protocol 110253 On Of See section 14 3 for an ManRec AutoRec explanation 0 0 to 60 0 seconds 0 0 to Wdog Timeout Unit Ident Unit Identifier Strict See section 14 4 10 for further enable disable Loose explanation Instr DHCP enable See section 14 4 4 See section 14 4 2 See section 14 4 8 Network Status of network Running Network connected and working Offline Network not connected or working 14 4 2 Instrument setup Note1 It is recommended that you setup the communications settings for each instrument before connecting it to any Ethernet network This is not essential but network conflicts may occur if the default settings int
279. e clean A rising edge on this input initiates probe cleaning independant of the cleaning cycle Time2Cln Time to next clean Calculated from the Clean Freq value and the time elapsed since last clean Enable Probe Clean Probe cleaning is inhibited unless this input is set to Yes ClnEnabl ClnMaxT Maximum Temperature For Cleaning If the probe temperature exceeds this limit when cleaning is in progress then the clean is aborted Abort Clean Cycle A rising edge of this input causes the clean to be aborted Last Clean Recovery Time The time the probe mV took to recover to 95 of its original value following the last clean If the last clean did not recover within the maximum clean recovery time then this value will be set to 0 ClnAbort ClnRcovT LastCln mV at end of last clean completed ClnMsgRt Clear Cleaning Status A rising edge on this input clears the cleaning related alarms and the probe warning ProbeFlt Probe Clean Recovery Warning The probe failed to recover to 95 of its original reading following a probe clean cycle CantClean Cant clean status from starting This status can be reset using the ClnMsgRt parameter CleanAbort A clean cycle was aborted This status can be reset using the ClnMsgRt parameter CleanTemp A clean cycle was aborted by the temperature rising above Clean Max Temp This status can be reset using the ClnMsgRt parameter 78 The input fro
280. e if it is used for control it may be wired to the control loop output Ch1 Output as shown in the example in section 5 1 1 Standby action The output will drive to electrical low Off Conf Determines the value regardless of the Invert parameter R O L3 If it is used for an alarm it may be wired to the Output parameter in an alarm list 94 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 9 2 1 Example To Wire the AA Relay to an Alarm In this example the relay will be made to operate when analogue alarm 1 occurs AnAlm 1 Output Select configuration level as described in section 3 3 Then Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 10 From any display press a Set IO Typ to OnOff until the RlyAA page is E Set Invert to Yes Rage reached Fess Lal 5 This locates the parameter to be wired MAL 11 Press O to scroll to PV to If the parameter is already wired the ae WireF rom display shown below is shown WireFrom TA eee This selects Analogue Alarm 1 The relay can also be wired to operate on Hee lin one or more alarms Guha 13 Press 5 as instructed as Lape ron many times as necessary to select the AnAlm page 14 Press a or to select 1 15 Press to scroll to Output This copies the parameter to be wired from 16 Press A MAN AA rd This pastes the parameter
281. e is something underneath it This menu entry is enabled when the mouse is over an input or output parameter When selected it creates a parameter edit dialog so the value of that parameter can be changed Selecting this entry brings up the parameter properties window The parameter properties window is updated as the mouse is moved over the parameters shown on the function block Selecting this entry brings up the help window The help window is updated as the mouse is moved over the parameters shown on the function block When the mouse is not over a parameter name the help for the block is shown Hovering over different parts of the block will bring up tooltips describing the part of the block beneath the mouse If you hover over the parameter values in the block type information a tooltip showing the parameter description it s OPC name and if downloaded it s value will be shown A similar tooltip will be shown when hovering over inputs and outputs Issue 15 Jun 13 323 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 27 10 5 Series 3000 Instruments cams Alarm 1 The blocks in a series 3000 instrument are enabled by dragging the block onto Hut oie cig the diagram wiring it up and downloading it to the instrument _ _ Nore 0 Tsar When the block is initially dropped onto the diagram it is drawn with dashed input SARU lines Threshold When in this state the parameter list for the block is enabled but the block itself is rel
282. e lags 1 12 of the Furnace load The time constant has units of seconds The time constant of lag 2 3 of the Oven load and master lags 13 18 of the furnace load Atten Attenuation Between PV1 and PV2 Stages L3 Furnace load Used in the advanced furnace load and only defines an attenuation factor between the slave and master lags Ch 2 Gain Defines the relative gain when cooling is L3 requested applied to the input power when the power requested is lt 0 PVFault The load function block provides 2 PV None L3 outputs Sensor fault can be used to lo generate a fault condition on these PV s such that the bad status is passed along a Fault on the first output wire to be consumed by another block slave such as the loop The sensor fault can be PVOut2 Fault onthe second configured as gt output master A fault on first and second outputs master No a a conditions and slave PV Out1 First Process Value L3 R O The PV in Process Value an Oven load or the Slave PV in a furnace load PV Out2 Second Process Value L3 R O Furnace load Second process value lagged from only PVOut1 used as a cascade master input The Master PV in the Furnace load LoopOP CH1 Loop output channel 1 input The output of the loop as wired to the load simulation this is the power requested of the load This can be used as the heat demand LoopOP CH2 Loop output channel 2 input The output of the loop as wired to the loa
283. e loop controlling Inhibit disabled If enabled the loop will stop control Inhibit enabled and the output of the loop will be set to the Safe output value Safe is a parameter found in the Lp1 or2 OP list If output rate limit is set the output will go to Safe at the rate limit On exit from inhibit the transfer will be bumpless If tracking is configured see sections 21 7 4 and 21 7 5 Inhibit will override tracking Inhibit may be wired to an external source WSP The current value of the setpoint Between setpoint limits being used by the control loop It may come from a number of different sources such as internal SP and Remote SP The working setpoint is always read only as it is derived from other sources Work OP The actual output of the loop before it is split into the channel 1 and channel 2 outputs IntHold Freeze the integral term at its Integral hold disabled current value Integral hold enabled See also section 21 5 8 Target SP The value of setpoint at which the Between setpoint limits L3 control loop is aiming It may come from a number of different sources such as internal SP and remote SP aa ai 202 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 21 3 2 Auto Manual If On Off control is configured the output power may be edited by the user but will only allow the power to be set to 100 0 or 100 This equates to heat ON cool OFF heat OFF cool OFF heat OFF
284. e number of litres since reset based on a flow rate in litres per minute There are two totaliser function blocks in 3500 controllers A totaliser can by soft wiring be connected to any measured value The outputs from the totaliser are its integrated value and an alarm state The user may set a setpoint which causes the alarm to activate once the integration exceeds the setpoint The totaliser has the following attributes Run Hold Reset In Run the totaliser will integrate its input and continuously test against an alarm setpoint The higher the value of the input the faster the integrator will run In Hold the totaliser will stop integrating its input but will continue to test for alarm conditions In Reset the totaliser will be zeroed and alarms will be reset Alarm Setpoint If the setpoint is a positive number the alarm will activate when the total is greater than the setpoint If the setpoint is a negative number the alarm will activate when the total is lower more negative than the setpoint If the totaliser alarm setpoint is set to 0 0 the alarm will be off It will not detect values above or below The alarm output is a single state output lt may be cleared by resetting the totaliser stopping the Run condition or by changing the alarm setpoint The total is limited to a maximum of 99999 and a minimum of 99999 4 The totaliser ensures that resolution is maintained when integrating small values onto a large total
285. e parameter Alt SP En is set to Yes Setpoint tracking sometimes referred to as Remote Tracking ensures that the Local setpoint adopts the Remote setpoint value when switching from Local to Remote to maintain bumpless transfer from Remote to Local Bumpless transfer does not take place when changing from Local to Remote Note that if Rate Limit is applied the setpoint will change at the rate set when changing from Local to Remote 21 7 5 Manual Tracking When the controller is operating in manual mode the currently selected SP SP1 or SP2 tracks the PV When the controller resumes automatic control there will be no step change in the resolved SP Manual tracking does not apply to the remote setpoint or programmer setpoint Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 229 User Manual 21 8 Output Function Block 3500 series Controllers The output function block performs the loop output control algorithms It selects the correct output sources to be used determines whether to heat or cool and then applies limits Power feed forward and non linear cooling are also applied It is this block that manages the output in exception conditions such as start up and sensor break The outputs Ch1 Output and Ch2 Output are normally connected to an output module where they are converted into an analogue or time proportioned signal for electrical heating cooling or valve movement 21 8 1 Loop Parameters Output A summary o
286. e particular application When this has been verified the polarising key may be adjusted with a screwdriver to point in the down direction 2 High or low voltage versions are orderable Ensure you have the correct version Wire Sizes The screw terminals accept wire sizes from 0 5 to 1 5 mm 16 to 22AWG Hinged covers prevent hands or metal making accidental contact with live wires The rear terminal screws should be tightened to 0 4Nm 3 5lb in Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 17 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 1 6 Standard Connections These are connections which are common to all instruments in the range 1 6 1 PV Input Measuring Input Notes Do not run input wires together with power cables 2 When shielded cable is used it should be grounded at one point only 3 Any external components such as zener barriers etc connected between sensor and input terminals may cause errors in measurement due to excessive and or un balanced line resistance or possible leakage currents 4 Not isolated from logic I O A and logic I O B 1 6 1 1 Thermocouple or Pyrometer Input e Use the correct type of thermocouple compensating cable preferably shielded to extend wiring gt T C e It is not recommended to connect two or more instruments to one thermocouple 1 6 1 2 RTD Input e The resistance of the three wires must be the same The line resistance may cause errors if it is greater than 22Q Note the RTD wiring is not the sam
287. e rate limit direction and increment will be calculated on every execution of the rate limit Therefore if the rate limit is changed during execution the new rate of change will take immediate effect If the output is changed whilst rate limiting is taking place the new value will take immediate effect on the direction of the rate limit and in determining whether the rate limit has completed The rate limiter is self correcting such that if the increment is small and is lost in the floating point resolution the increment will be accumulated until it takes effect The output rate limit will remain active even if the loop is in manual mode Sensor Break Mode Sensor break is detected by the measurement system and a flag is passed to the control block which indicates sensor failure On the loop being informed that a sensor break has occurred it may be configured using Sbrk Mode to respond in one of two ways The output may go to a pre set level or remain at its current value The pre set value is defined by the parameter SbrkOP If rate limit is not configured the output will step to this value otherwise it will ramp to this value at the rate limit If configured as Hold the output of the loop will stay at its last good value If Output Rate Limit Rate has been configured a small step may be seen as the working output will limit to the 2 second old value On exit from sensor break the transfer is bumpless the power output wi
288. e width of the proportional band determines the magnitude of the response to the error If it too narrow high gain the system oscillates by being over responsive If it is too wide low gain the control is sluggish The ideal situation is when the proportional band is as narrow as possible without causing oscillation Output Temperature P Proportional band P gt wide l gt narrow4 Setpoint 1009 Increasingly narrower proportional band 50 Access List Header 0 Time 7 Setpoint Figure 21 2 Proportional Action Figure 21 2 also shows the effect of narrowing proportional band to the point of oscillation A wide proportional band results in straight line control but with an appreciable initial error between setpoint and actual temperature As the band is narrowed the temperature gets closer to setpoint until finally becoming unstable The proportional band may be set in engineering units or as a percentage of the controller range Integral Term In a proportional only controller an error between setpoint and PV must exist for the controller to deliver power Integral is used to achieve zero steady state control error The integral term slowly shifts the output level as a result of an error between setpoint and measured value If the measured value is below setpoint the integral action gradually increases the output in an attempt to correct the error If it is above setpoint integral action gradually decr
289. eases the output or increases the cooling power to correct the error Figure 21 3 shows the result of introducing integral action Temperature Setpoint Proportional Integral control Proportional only control Figure 21 3 Proportional Integral Control The units for the integral term are measured in time 1 to 99999 seconds in 3500 controllers The longer the integral time constant the more slowly the output is shifted and results in a sluggish response Too small an integral time will cause the process to overshoot and even oscillate The integral action may be disabled by setting its value to Off Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 209 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 21 5 4 21 5 5 210 Derivative Term Derivative action or rate provides a sudden shift in output as a result of a rapid change in error whether or not this is caused by PV alone derivative on PV or on SP changes as well derivative on error selection see also section 21 4 2 If the measured value falls quickly derivative provides a large change in output in an attempt to correct the perturbation before it goes too far It is most beneficial in recovering from small perturbations Temperature Temperature Response with derivative action included Proportional Integral response Time Time Figure 21 4 Proportional Integral Derivative Action The derivative modifies the output to reduce
290. eating cooling alarm program event valve raise valve lower Isolated output 240Vac CATII Hardware Code R4 Relay Rating 2A 264Vac max or 1mA 1V min Typical usage Heating cooling alarm program event valve raise valve lower Isolated output 240Vac CATII 1 7 3 Triple Logic and Single Isolated Logic Output Output A SSR or Output B thyristor unit Output C 1 e t ala Common 1 7 4 Triac and Dual Triac ae First triac aise EE A YA Motorised 0 B valve ES c Lower Ie D A Second triac Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 Hardware Code TP and LO Outputs Rating Single 12Vdc at 24mA max Outputs Rating Triple 12Vdc at 9mA max Typical usage Heating cooling program events No channel isolation 264Vac insulation from other modules and system Single Logic Output connections are D Common A Logic Output Hardware Code T2 and TT Combined Output Rating 0 7A 30 to 264Vac Typical usage Heating cooling valve raise valve lower Isolated output 240Vac CATI Dual relay modules may be used in place of dual triac The combined current rating for the two triacs must not exceed 0 7A 21 User Manual 1 7 5 1 7 6 1 7 7 1 7 8 1 7 9 1 7 1410 Triple Contact Input 22 Output 1 Output 2 DC Control Ac
291. ection then press A MAN If loop 1 overview is being displayed press the A MAN button to toggle loop 1 between Auto and Manual If loop 2 overview is being displayed press the A MAN button to toggle loop 2 between Auto and Manual If any other overview is being displayed the first press of the A MAN button will select the dual loop overview and the action is as described above Summary pages may be disabled see section 6 5 e For a dual loop controller Auto Manual cannot be selected e If loop 1 is enabled and loop 2 disabled pressing A MAN toggles Auto Manual for loop 1 e If loop 2 is enabled and loop 1 disabled pressing A MAN toggles Auto Manual for loop 2 Fora single loop controller Auto Manual will apply regardless of whether summary pages are enabled or not Ifthe controller is switched off in either Auto or Manual operation it will resume the same mode when powered up again 2 6 1 Bumpless Transfer When changing from Auto to Manual the power output will remain at the level it was prior to the change The power output can then be ramped up or down as described above When changing form Manual to Auto there will be no immediate change in the power output due the Integral De Bump feature see section 21 5 9 The power output will then slowly ramp to the level demanded by the controller 42 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 2 7 Alarm Indication lf an alarm oc
292. ecurity code to take you to configuration level 54 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 3 4 Access Parameter List The following table summarises the parameters available under the Access list header List Header Access Sub headers None Parameter Description Value Default Access Dor Dio change Level Goto To select different levels of access Operator mode level Lev 1 L1 Passcodes prevent accidental edit 1 Operator mode level 2 Operator mode level a Configuration level Level2 Code To customise the passcode to access level Oto 9999 2 Level3 Code To customise the passcode to access level O to 9999 3 Customer ID To set an identification number for the 0 to 9999 Conf controller A Man Func This enables or disables the front panel On Enabled Conf A MAN button Off Disabled Run Hold This enables or disables the front panel On Enabled Conf Func RUN HOLD button Off Disabled All No es Config Code To customise the passcode to access 0 to 9999 configuration level IR Mode To activate de activate the front panel Off Inactive Off InfraRed port This is normally deactivated On Active The IR port is used to link the instrument to a PC and may be used for configuring the instrument using Tools when a digital comms link is not available lt requires an IR clip available from Eurotherm to link your Instrument to a PC Keylock When set to All no front panel key is None Front p
293. ed Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press or to change values Level Ident Channel type Relay Any relay output L3 R O Logic Out Logic output Triac Triac or dual triac output To configure the function of the relay o R O L3 ValvRais Motor valve position raise See note 1 The following shows a summary of parameters which follow lO Type for different configurations of the Output 98 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Explanation of Relay Logic Triac Output Module Parameters List Header Mod Sub headers xA triac changeover or 2 pin relay xA and xC dual relay dual triac xA xB xC triple logic x the number of the slot in which the module is fitted Name Parameter Description Value Default Access O to select Press O or a to change values Level To change the normal No Relay de energised when output Conf operating state of the relay demand off and energised when E R O L3 output demand on Off Conf R O L3 This only applies if the output is configured as OnOff Normal setting if the relay is used for control Yes Relay energised when output demand off and de energised when output demand on Normal setting if the relay is used for an alarm SbyAct Standby action Determines Off the output action when the instrument is in Standby Mode The output will drive to electrical low value regardless of the
294. ed non oscillatory manner Over Damped In this situation the loop responds in a controlled but sluggish manner which will result in a loop performance which is non ideal and unnecessarily slow The balancing of the P and D terms depends totally upon the nature of the process to be controlled In a plastics extruder for example a barrel zone will have a different response to a die casting roll drive loop thickness control loop or pressure loop In order to achieve the best performance from an extrusion line all loop tuning parameters must be set to their optimum values Gain scheduling is provided to allow specific PID settings to be applied at the different operating points of the process 21 6 2 Initial Settings In addition to the tuning parameters listed in section 21 6 above there are a number of other parameters which can have an effect on the way in which the loop responds Ensure that these are set before either manual or automatic tuning is initiated Parameters include but are not limited to Setpoint Before starting a tune the loop conditions should be set as closely as practicable to the actual conditions which will be met in normal operation For example in a furnace or oven application a representative load should be included an extruder should be running etc Heat Cool Limits The minimum and maximum power delivered to the process may be limited by the parameters Output Lo and Output Hi both of which
295. ed Parameter Tag Address Readrequest 0 1 1 1 o fo foj 1jo0opojofoj 1 1po0 Error 28672 dec tag address 270 dec 28942 dec 7000 10E 710E hex Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 147 User Manual 3500 series Controllers Worked example 3 Uploading Program Data 3500 series controllers may be configured as ramp dwell programmers see Chapter 22 It is often the case that specific ramp dwell sequences need to be downloaded to an instrument as saved recipes Because of the amount of data involved it would be impossible if only standard Profibus DP input and output frames were to be used Use of the demand data protocol is the only way this operation may be performed An example of a simple program is shown below where Segment 1 ramps the temperature up to a target value and Segment 2 holds it there for a period of time T Temperature Time gt Segment Type Tag5376 Ramp Type Tag 5308 Dwell Ramp Rate Tag 5381 10 C min Duration Tag 5412 30min Step 1 and Step 2 Clear any previous demand data requests See previous examples Step 3 Write to Segment 1 of Program 1 The first parameter is the Segment Type at tag address 5376 1500 hex The command code for an extended write address is 4000 The extended write tag is 4000 hex parameter address 1500 hex 5500 hex and puts 0101 0101 0000 0000 into Word 1 Word 1 is an extended write request Tene a ajaja ws 7 TeT gt Bema eres
296. ed and they then become alterable Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 275 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 22 19 Appendix to Chapter 22 Single Programmer Earlier Versions Software versions 1 XX contained a single control loop and a single programmer block For reference this section lists the parameters which were available in these versions 22 19 1 Creating or Editing a Single Program Press as many times as necessary to select the Program page or in configuration level press the PROG button and this will select the first sub header All This allows you to configure and view parameters common to all programs in the controller The following is a list of the parameters List Header Program Sub header All only available in configuration level Parameter Description Value Default Access Press D or to change Level values PV Input The programmer uses the PV input for a The PV Input is normally wired Conf number of functions from the loop TrackPV parameter In holdback the PV is monitored against the Note This input is automatically setpoint and if a deviation occurs the wired when the programmer and program is paused loop are enabled and there are The programmer can be configured to start no existing wires to track interface its profile from the current PV value servo to Parameters PV Track interface parameters are Programmer Setup PVInput The programmer monitors the PV v
297. ed true and RippleCarry is returned false When configured as a down counter Clock events decrement Count until it reaches zero On reaching zero RippleCarry is set true At the next clock pulse Count returns to the Target count Overflow is latched true and RippleCarry is reset false Counter blocks can be cascaded as shown in the diagram below Direction Direction EsSbl Enable Count Count Counter Counter Clock Function Overflow Clock Function Overflow Target on Target eae ippleC RippleCarry PIES Reset Clear Overflow Reset Clear Overflow Figure 15 2 Cascading Counters The RippleCarry output of one counter acts as an enabling input for the next counter In this respect the next counter in sequence can only detect a clock edge if it was enabled on the previous clock edge This means that the Carry output from a counter must lead its Overflow output by one clock cycle The Carry output is therefore called a RippleCarry as it is NOT generated on an Overflow i e Count gt Target but rather when the count reaches the target i e Count Target The timing diagram below illustrates the principle for the Up Counter Count Count Target 1 Target Count 0 Clock ag RippleCarry Overflow Figure 15 3 Timing Diagram for an Up Counter Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 159 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 15 1 1 Counter Parameters List Header Coun
298. el 2 This is carried out as follows Press and hold until the display shows Press 4 to select Level 2 Press 4 again to enter a security code This is defaulted to 2 If an incorrect code is entered the display reverts to that shown in 1 above If the default of 2 is not accepted this means that the code has been changed on your particular controller Pass is displayed momentarily You are now in Level 2 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 2 8 3 Program Status Page Provided it has been ordered and enabled the 3500 series controllers can program the rate of change of setpoint Two program channels are available which can be run as two separate programmers or as a pair Up to 50 programs and up to a maximum of 500 segments can be stored and run Setpoint programming is explained in more detail in Chapter 22 2 8 3 1 To Select a Parameter Press to scroll through a list of parameters On the Programmer Summary shown here the list of parameters which can be selected are Parameter Description Default Available in Level Program Program number and name if this has 1 to max number of L1 Alterable been configured programs when prog in reset Segment Segment number and type on 3504 1 to max number of 1 L1 Only appears when the programmer is segments running Seg Time Left Segment Time Left hrs mins secs Read L1 Only appears when the programmer is only runni
299. en the PV exceeds a set low threshold Deviation High an alarm occurs when the PV is higher than the setpoint by a set threshold Deviation Low an alarm occurs when the PV is lower than the setpoint by a set threshold Deviation Band an alarm occurs when the PV is higher or lower than the setpoint by a set threshold These are shown graphically below for changes in PV plotted against time Hysteresis set to zero Alarm Type PV Abs ign SSS S6 S22 id ee ee ae eR eee Process Variable PV Dev High A Setpoint SP 1 Dev Low Abs Low Output State Dev Low On On U D lt T Q 3 O L L 1 1 L I L L L L L L L I L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L I L l L I I Dev Bnd On On On Abs High On LL O Figure 12 1 Alarm Output Status for Different Alarm Types 116 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 12 3 12 3 1 12 3 2 Digital Alarms Dig ital alarms operate on Boolean variables They can be soft wired to any suitable Boolean parameter such as digital inputs or outputs When the state of the variable changes an alarm message is shown on the display This message can be customised as described in Chapter 27 Digital Alarm Types Pos Edge The alarm will trigger when the input changes from a low to high condition Neg Edge The ala
300. end of this guide before proceeding and refer to the EMC Booklet part number HA025464 for further information This and other relevant manuals may be downloaded from www eurotherm co uk 1 4 1 Dimensions 150mm 5 91in Panel retaining clips Panel retaining clips i L 7 Latching ears Figure 1 1 Controller Dimensions Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 15 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 1 4 2 2 1 4 3 16 dl 2 Insert the controller through To Install the Controller Panel Cut out Prepare the panel cut out to the size shown in the diagram Ze am OOS AS imi 00020 3 62 in 0 00 0 03 1 77 in 0 00 0 02 the cut out G 3 Spring the panel retaining clips into place Secure the 92mm controller in position by 0 0 0 8 holding it level and pushing 3504 3508 both retaining clips forward e 4 Peel off the protective cover 0 00 0 03 from the display Figure 1 2 Panel Cut out Dimensions Recommended Minimum Spacing The recommended minimum spacing between controllers shown here should not be reduced to allow sufficient natural air flow 10mm 38mm 0 4 in 1 5 in Figure 1 3 Minimum Spacing Between Controllers Unplugging the Controller The controller can be unplugged from its sleeve by easing the latching ears outwards and pulling it forward out of the sleeve When plugging it back into its sleeve ensure that the latching ears clic
301. ent address 2 using Function Code 6 The Target Setpoint in this example is wired to the Programmer 1 PSP so that defined slaves follow a program set up in the master This data appears in parameter Slave Data 1 Function code 6 Write a Single Word is used and the Count parameter is not relevant and is therefore not shown Note The Master Comms Block is disabled when in configuration mode to allow it to be set up This is regardless of the setting of the parameter Enable However to enable the block when exiting from configuration mode set Enable Yes COM 10001 35908 Parameter Explorer Mstrcormms A 2 3 1 5 E T E 9 10 11 12 Hare Gescnphon Addiest Value Wied Fron Mode Block Mode In this example if 5 Se Enable Master Comma Block Enable Yes 1 Laia Wa consecutive failures Poil Master Corra Poil H 10 should occur during SuspendCourt Fabra Court Before Suspen 5 operation master Suspends aceec Suspend Court Exceeded Ho U a communications will umera Superd Asty Inierval ails be suspended A Node Siasa rehmet Node Addr J retry will occur after F Func Modbus Function Code Funct El 30 seconds Address Pasmebe Address P P ShDatal Slave Data 1 59 620 Programmer 1 Run PSP Format Data Foomat Say 0 Factor Data Factor 1 000 Diipa Data Olea 0 000 ExcapionCode Last Modbus Exception Cod 0 Tiareactlourt Total Trarcacton Court 45 060 SuccestCounmt Succestlul Tiancachon Cour 406060
302. er display or as a message over digital communications 260 Range units Sensor a 2 Empty Program Due to sensor break itis not possible to run the program Source of the sensor break is the PV Input to the Programmer block Program currently selected for execution has no segments Program currently selected for execution contains setpoints that reside outside the loop setpoint limits Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 22 17 Program Edit To set up or edit a program use the parameters in the Program Edit lists Parameters are similar for each programmer type but are listed individually here for clarity Use of by button will provide a short cut to the Program Status page in operator levels and Program Setup page in configuration level 22 17 1 To Edit a SyncAll Programmer Select the program number to be created or edited Press followed by or O Programs can be created and edited in all levels This gives access to parameters which allow you to set up each segment of the selected program The following table lists these parameters List Header Program Edit Sync All Sub header 1 to 50 These may also have user defined program names Name Parameter Description Value Default Access Level to select Press or to change values Program Program number or program name 1 to 50 L3 configured Segments This value automatically
303. er Comms Timeout The time that Settable between 200mS to 5 seconds 00 R W in L3 and the master comms will allow for the Conf slave to respond This parameter is only shown when Protocol MBUS_M Note R W Read and Write R O Read only Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 153 User Manual 3500 series Controllers All subsequent parameters are within the Master Comms Function Block list header Mstrcomms Up to 12 Master Comms blocks can be configured List Header Mstrcomms Sub header 1 to 12 Default Access Level Parameter Description Value and Description Press gt a parameters Press D or Dto change values Mode Block mode Sets the transmission Cont Continuous Master Comms R W in Conf mode of the block transactions will be continuous after R O in 13 Alterable only if the block is not the Block Enable parameter rising running Enable No edge while the value remains true OneShot One shot One Master Comms transaction will be triggered for each rising edge seen on the Block Enable parameter Retries on failure will be attempted as normal This might be used for example to trigger a transaction from a wired event Cont Demand Demand write This is the same as OneShot but also triggers a one shot transaction when any of the SlvData values change Following a power cycle a transaction will not take place until a change is seen in the slave data Enable To run the Master Comms Block Y
304. er Manual 12 4 1 Example To Configure Alarm 1 Enter configuration level as described Then Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 Press Das many times as necessary to select AnAlm Up to 8 alarms can be selected using or provided they have been enabled in the Inst Opt page l Press O mo select Type Alarm Type choices are 2 Press O or mM to select the required alarm type None Alarm not configured Abs Hi Full Scale High Abs Lo Full Scale Low Dev Hi Deviation High Dev Lo Deviation Low Dv Bnd Deviation Band 3 Prass O to sel at This is the alarm threshold setting for Threshold 4 Press a or M to set the alarm trip level In this example the high alarm will be detected when the measured value exceeds 100 00 The current measured value is 50 00 as measured by the Input parameter This parameter will normally be wired to an internal source such as the PV ae oe In this example the alarm will cancel imen red tf when the measured value decreases 2 Potter units below the trip level at 98 units 5 Press to select Hyst 6 Press a or M to set the hysteresis Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 121 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 125 Digital Alarm Parameters Eight digital alarms are available Parameters do not appear if the Alarm Type None The following table shows the parameters to set up and
305. ered 12 High 13 Low 11332 0x2c44 DigAlarm 5 Latch 11333 0x2c45 DigAlarm 5 Priority 11334 0x2c46 DigAlarm 5 Block 11335 0x2c47 DigAlarm 5 Inhibit 11336 0x2c48 DigAlarm 5 Delay PERA 11337 0x2c49 DigAlarm 5 Out 11338 Ox2c4a DigAlarm 5 Ack 11344 0x2c50 DigAlarm 6 Type 8 None 9 Positive edge 10 Negative edge 11 Edge triggered 12 High 13 Low ae olo olololo oO Z x x x x x x lx Xx T NO NIN NINININ No D O aolo alalalo 00 x on olololo Y Y ol Ololuuic J 11348 0x2c54 DigAlarm 6 Latch 11349 Ox2c55 DigAlarm 6 Priority 11350 0x2c56 DigAlarm 6 Block MES DigAlarm 6 Inhibit 11352 0x2c58 DigAlarm 6 Delay AN 11353 Ox2c59 DigAlarm 6 Out 11354 Ox2c5a DigAlarm 6 Ack O No 1 Yes Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 OO On Y User Manual MODBUS 11360 11364 11365 11366 11367 11368 11369 11370 11376 11380 11381 11382 11383 11384 11385 11386 12707 0x31a3 ModIDs Mod1ldent 12771 Ox31e3 ModIDs Mod2Ident 12835 0x3223 ModIDs Mod3ldent 12899 0x3263 ModIDs Mod4ldent 12963 0x32a3 ModIDs Mod5ldent 13027 0x32e3 ModIDs Mod ldent 13248 13249 368 3500 series Controllers MODBUS Parameter Enumerations Hex 0x2c60 DigAlarm 7 Type 0x2c64 DigAlarm 7 Latch 8 None 9 Positive edge 10 Negative edge 11 Edge triggered 12 High 13 Low O none 1 Auto 2 Manual 3 Event 0x2c65 DigAlarm 7 Priority O Low 2 Medium 3 High Ox2c66 DigAlarm 7 Block O No 1 Yes 0x2c69 DigAlarm 7 Out 0 Off 1
306. erefore if the output is at limit and the PV has not moved by 0 1 SPAN in the loop break time a loop break will occur If the loop break time is O off the loop break time is not set If the output is in saturation and the PV has not moved by gt 0 5 Pb in the loop break time a loop break condition is considered to have occurred Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 21 5 11 Gain Scheduling In some processes the tuned PID set may be very different at low temperatures from that at high temperatures particularly in control systems where the response to the cooling power is significantly different from that of the heating power Gain scheduling allows a number of PID sets to be stored and provides automatic transfer of control between one set of PID values and another In the case of the 3500 the maximum number of sets is three which means that two boundaries are provided to select when the next PID set is used When a boundary is exceeded the next PID set is selected bumplessly Hysteresis is used to stop scheduling oscillation at the boundaries Gain scheduling is basically a look up table which can be selected using different strategies or types Auto tune will tune to the active scheduled PID set The following Gain Scheduled types are offered using the parameter Sched Type Set The PID set can be selected by the operator It is possible to use soft wiring to control the selection of the gain sets T
307. erfere with equipment already on the network By default the instruments are set to a fixed IP address of 192 168 111 222 with a default SubNet Mask setting of 255 255 255 0 Note2 IP Addresses are usually presented in the form xxx xxx xxx xxx Within the instrument each e ement of the IP Address is shown and configured separately IP address 1 relates to the first set of three digits IP address 2 to the second set of three digits and so on This also applies to the SubNet Mask Default Gateway and Preferred master IP Address 134 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 14 4 3 MAC address display Each Ethernet module contains a unique MAC address normally presented as a 12 digit hexadecimal number in the format aa bb cc dd ee ff In the 3500 instruments MAC addresses are shown as 6 separate hexadecimal values in the COMMS page MAC1 shows the first pair of digits example OxAA MAC2 shows the second pair of digits and so on The MAC address can be found by powering up the instrument and navigating to the COMMS page At the bottom of the COMMS page you will find a Show Mac parameter Set this parameter to Yes and the MAC address of the Ethernet communications card fitted will appear in the list 14 4 4 DHCP Settings You need to consult with your network administrator to determine if the IP Addresses for the instruments should be fixed or Dynamically allocated by a DHCP server If the IP
308. ernal Calibration Resistor Set Shunt Internal Controller Transducer 10Vdc power supply 30 1KQ To check calibration connect a 30 1KQ resistor across terminals V and C Internal switch to connect Real V mV Input Figure 24 3 Strain Gauge Wiring Diagram Internal Calibration Resistor Connect the transducer as shown above Configuration of input and soft wiring is the same as described in the Configuration Examples section 24 3 3 Mod ES OK E F birra Set the transducer power supply Shunt parameter to Internal Mi The calibration procedure is the same as described in the previous section Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 287 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 24 4 24 4 1 Load Cell A load cell provides an analogue output which can be in Volts milli Volts or milli Amps This may be connected to the PV Input or Analogue Input The method of calibration is performed on load cells using the transducer power supply module The unloaded cell is first measured to establish a zero reference A known reference weight is then placed on the load cell and a high end calibration is performed In practice there may be a residual output from the load cell and this can be offset in the controller Controller under Calibration Reference Weight LUBROTHERE A LonF Terie a ee Figure 24 4 Load Cell To
309. erno meten T 23 1 7 13 Tanon er Rower UDPIY O A 23 1 7 14 Amalogue MEUT C RTD VINA AN oer ea E E T 24 TAIS Analogue Input ziicona Froe NA AA TE 24 1 7 16 Zena Probe C ONS TUCHO a n A a s 25 LAZ Zirconia Probe Screening CONE Ses 25 1 8 Digital Communications Connections iii ic 26 1 8 1 Modbus H or J Module ElBisynch Broadcast and Modbus MasteT ooooooncccooncoccnonconccononnnonncnnnonncnnnonncnononnos 26 EA DeviceNet Winog iiae A A Re A 27 183 Example DeviceNet Wind Dag aN ypres E lia 27 TEA o E E AE R 28 eS Ethernet CIV OGLE 1S IE Pat loo 29 ds DAS O A A E A ne MER TNS ere HTM ITI 30 Lo AO EXDEMOST Conner 30 188 Example Wining DOM A donde se A vue alee wed ese elem nde vam a 31 iPS css o 31 2 CHAPTER Z GETTING STARTED orriren iE E c lit 32 2 1 Quick Start New Controller Unconfigured sscccsssccsssscccsssscccssssccessssecesssccessseseessesessnseees 32 Aik To Contigure Parameters in QUICK StatMode sa dsd ade 33 AS A an P aa E a 33 22 ToR enter Quick Start Mode xises cesscesccsstssceversvecssssssnsssessceastesvesscassesesecsuesstospies vexsucrvessssncsaeereensnene 38 220 Power up Atera Quick Stark Cont GUlall OM isese eein ari N EEA NEEE E TEE simu 38 Za Power Up Fite a Full COTO Oia tl ON ereraa AA 38 23 _ Normal OCU IO acs O 39 23 1 Beacon Display and DESC Oleh sala caia 39 2 4 The Operator BU ONS radiata 40 2 5 To Set the Required Temperature Setpoint ommoooommomommmmemem 41 2 6 To Select A
310. es Controllers 17 Chapter 17 Input Monitor The input monitor may be wired to any variable in the controller It then provides three functions 1 Maximum detect 2 Minimum detect 3 Time above threshold 17 1 Maximum Detect This function continuously monitors the input value Ifthe value is higher than the previously recorded maximum it becomes the new maximum This value is retained following a power fail 17 2 Minimum Detect This function continuously monitors the input value If the value is lower than the previously recorded minimum it becomes the new minimum This value is retained following a power fail 17 3 Time Above Threshold This function increments a timer whenever the input is above a threshold value If the timer exceeds 24 hours per day a counter is incremented The maximum number of days is limited to 255 A timer alarm can be set on the timer so that once the input has been above a threshold for a period an alarm output is given Applications include e Service interval alarms This sets an output when the system has been running for a number of days up to 90 years e Material stress alarms if the process cannot tolerate being above a level for a period This is a style of policeman for processes where the high operating point degrades the life of the machine e In internal wiring applications in the controller 180 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual
311. es Controllers 22 3 1 ies 243 22 3 2 Dl li 243 2233 A A O 243 22 3 4 TI a dsiads 243 22 3 o E 243 22 3 6 VO ESE ESA ASA SS A ASA Ad 244 223 7 Koa r tanita temsea cuteness toesace scence asonute A 245 22 3 8 A aces ana ete cee nassau asta tease neea retard ua E cae as ast N 245 22 4 EVENT OUDOT S Sissi aS 246 22 4 1 O 246 22 4 2 A eT T CT eee me nett ee eee a A eee 246 22 4 3 US daa 248 22 5 o AE 249 22 5 1 E A E E A E A A AE A lanenedeuranelceunaprides 249 22 6 PID Solo NR 250 22 7 Sync Pomt Goback Interaction sssrinin unene r RNE EOT RENAS 250 22 8 Prolin kand Prgin Z scan E E EE 251 22 9 Program Cycles api its 251 BONO SC Oda aaa Dada iba tata aa 251 22 11 Power Fall Recon ooo sion 252 2211 Ramp ack Power Tall CURINGHOWEIL SSO INS tasa 252 22 11 2 Ramp back power fail during Ramp segments cado cai 252 22 12 Ramp back power fail during Time to target segments sssccsesrcssccesseecscseeesseseseeeeees 252 2213 Sensor Break Recovely siesrsicsrecssressrousen tersera oere e n E EEEa a Kis 252 2214 Operatinga PLOGK AIM wesssciscadssccsccssecscscsossscudsccnscetescaacsdsasounssacduacedasduadsiescesostmesuacotesssadessnavebagaddvebuss 253 22 14 1 CE 253 DON ROC eee eee ee eee 253 LA lo 233 22d OKR ENEN ri liado 253 DZ VAIS PONIES 5 COICO M Garrat O 253 DI o is as 253 224 RUN AO Reese DIG Ia WIN OUNS ads AAA NS 254 22 15 GaN ao A A 255 22 15 11 sExXample gt To Run Hola OF Reseta Prod Muda 256 22 16 Program Set Us
312. es Each rising edge seen on this parameter will start Master Comms transactions according to the setting of the Mode parameter and reset diagnostic parameter counts No The block will not generate any Master Comms traffic If the parameter values and addresses are dynamic it is necessary to set the Enable to No when setting up master comms parameters The selected port will need to be instrument H port set up as a Modbus Master in the y Comms list set Protocol The master transactions use the Suspend Failure Count Before Suspend Oto250 A value of O means that master Count The number of consecutive errors comms is never suspended by before a Node is assumed to have consecutive failures failed instrument J port Suspend _ Suspend count exceeded Yes If the number of consecutive Exceed This parameter is only shown when No message failures exceeds the Suspend Count 0 SuspendCount value this status will R W in L3 and Conf R W in conf R O in L3 R O when Enable Yes R W in cont R O in L3 R O be set to Yes and the Block will stop running Susp Retry Suspend retry interval Time period before automatically This parameter is only shown when attempting to restart master comms Suspend Count 0 to a suspended node A value of 0 means that no automatic retry will be attempted Node Slave instrument node address Oto 255 A value of 0 will cause a broadcast message to
313. ese addresses should be used when accessing parameters over comms If a parameter has no address the CommsTab feature can be used to map the parameter to a modbus address however it should be noted that the address field will not be updated The following Modbus addresses have been reserved for use with the CommsTab Function Block by default they have no associated parameter ModBus Range Modbus Range HEX 15360 to 15615 0x3C00 to Ox3CFF 354 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 30 3 SCADA Table and Profibus Tag Addresses The following table lists the parameters along with their limits and resolution which have assigned Modbus addresses They are available in scaled integer format The MODBUS address is the same as the tag address for Profibus see also section 14 5 Wherever possible use an OPC client with the iTools OPCserver as the server In this arrangement the parameters are all referenced by name and the values are floating point so the decimal point for all parameters is inherited Some parameters have more than one address for example Alarm1 Block The lower number is to maintain a compatibility with earlier instruments Either address may be used although the higher number is specific to 3000 series of o 1 Setpoint 1 1 Setpoint 2 Of Oo Loop 1 PID RelCh2Gain Loop 1 OP Ch1TravelTime NIN AJ Loop 1 SP SP1 NIN al Loop 1 SP SPTrim Loop 1 PID ManualReset Ww
314. ese bits to 0 and extended 0 use the SECOND word to define the address address Write of 1 Must be extended 0 address Note Reading and writing can be done successively in any order but if no further action is needed for a time then it is desirable to set the command code to 0 This will prevent continuous writing to the slave As an example of why this is undesirable continuous writing of a setpoint will prevent local control of the setpoint using the control panel of the slave Request Word 2 The 11 bits available for the parameter tag only allow tag numbers up to 2047 to be coded into Word 1 For tag numbers higher than this the Extended Read and Extended Write commands are coded into the high nibble of Word 1 and the parameter tag is put into Word 2 This allows tags up to 65535 IC aa re Se eee er 8000 4000 2000 1000 400 200 100 80 40 20 10 Funcion Set all these bits to 0 if the target parameter Reserved is less than 2048 Decimal 800 oa set bits O to 15 to match the parameter address Request Word 3 Word 3 is reserved and not used CACA AER vi 32768 16384 8192 4096 an i En 256 128 64 32 16 8000 4000 2000 1000 400 200 100 80 40 20 10 Function Command code A Parameter Tag Address Reserved All of these bits must L Reserved set to 0 Request Word 4 Word 4 contains the parameter value if the command is a write otherwise it is unimportant The parameter value is
315. etafile if there is no selection the whole diagram is copied to the clipboard as a Windows metafile Paste into your favourite documentation tool to document your application Some programs render metafiles better than others the diagram may look messy on screen but it should print well Same as Copy Graphic but saves to a metafile rather than putting it on the clipboard Select all wires then Centre The graphical view will be centred in the iTools window Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 27 11 1 Other Examples of Graphical Wiring Simulated Load This may be useful as a test to show the action of a closed loop PID controller Wire Up then edit parameters Ti POLeDnOcds ML ba Drag across to add a monitor Hut Move mouse to right hand corner and click chain icon Ti o TE ia 0 LU J g 4 O g i O a O 0555 Move mouse to the parameter whose value you wish to monitor Es Fade repre erg al DU le fee rr fee ees eee Ep F E a6 Sle J 40 ds el pE Em E OF tuum ria om Loh ky T Te EEI EH ERE EF AE HHA de s EW E pEi LO H E A F rE Di Feki pores la m abe h an oer ers D Low HS ae A ee A A AP BA Ra Ti L ih dl Ll re A A a ar ee epi OR Lori G TPMonitor TE Mux8 SwitchOver D Total D BCDInput DH Trd DD ATClock Counter D Usival OP ManualMode D Lace OP ManualOP D Loc2 TE Humidity Recipe
316. etransmission LP1 PwrTx Loop 1 output retransmission LP2 SP Tx Loop 2 setpoint retransmission LP2 PV Tx Loop 2 PV retransmission LP2 PwrTx Loop 2 output retransmission Range Type 0 5V 1 5V 1 10V 2 10V 0 29mA 4 20mA Display High 100 0 Triple Logic Input TL Logic In function Module fitted but not configured A function can only Triple Contact Input LP1 A M Loop 1 Auto manual be allocated to one TK input eg if LP1 SPsel Loop 1 SP select AlarmAckis LP1 AltSP Loop 1 Alternative SP select configured on X A it is not offered for LP2 A M Loop 2 Auto manual the other inputs LP2 SPsel Loop 2 SP select is the module LP2 AltSP Loop 2 Alternative SP select number LP2 does not AlarmAck Alarm acknowledge appearifloop 2 is ProgHold Programmer hold Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 35 User Manual 3500 series Controllers Analogue Input AM Analogue IP Module fitted but not configured LP1 V1Pos and LP1 OD LP1 AltSP Loop 1 alternative setpoint o ony appeal if the control LP1 OPH Loop 1 remote OP power max channel 1 or control LP1 OPL Loop 1 remote OP power min es d a LP2 AltSP Loop 2 alternative setpoint Remote SPdose not LP2 OPH Loop 2 remote OP power max appear if the programmer option LP2Z OPL Loop 2 remote OP power min is supplied LP1 V1Pos To read valve position from the LP2 does not LP1 V2Pos feedback potentiometer loop 1 appear if loop 2 is t confi oF LP2 V1Pos To read valve position from the aoe gee ern LP2 V2
317. evel 3 Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 Press Das many times as necessary to select Comms Up to 254 can be chosen but note that no more than 31 instruments should be connected to a single ElA485 link 2 Press O to scroll to Address 3 Press a or M to select Parity lore For further information see 2000 Series the address for the particular MH SSS wi Communications Handbook Part No controller HA026230 available on www eurotherm co uk 14 3 6 Comms Delay In some systems it is necessary to introduce a delay between the instrument receiving a message and its reply This is sometimes caused by communications converter boxes which require a period of silence on the transmission to switch over the direction of their drivers 132 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 14 3 7 14 3 7 1 14 3 7 2 14 3 8 818 902 3 4 Style Programmer Mnemonics have also been included within the protocol to support 818 902 3 4 style programs The functionality of these mnemonics is only assured for use with the programmer when it is configured for 818 style programs These consist of 8 x Ramp Dwell pairs 16 segments Ramp Dwell Ramp Dwell etc The mnemonics 1 I8 are used to read set the target set points for the first 8 ramp segments Mnemonics r1 r8 are used to read set the ramp rates for the first 8 ramp segments and the mnemonics t1 t8 are used to
318. ew Alarm occurs when any new alarm becomes active This parameter may be used to activate a relay output to provide external audible or visual indication 2 8 1 5 Alarm Settings All configured alarms up to eight will be listed Press to scroll through the alarms Press 4 or to set the threshold values 2 8 1 6 Control To set parameters which define the operation of the loops A full list of parameters is given in section 2 8 4 2 8 1 7 Transducer This display is only shown if the Transducer option has been enabled For further details see Chapter 24 A further eight customised pages can be configured using Tools configuration package See chapter 27 for further details Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 45 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 2 8 2 46 How to Edit Parameters In the above summary pages press to scroll to further parameters where applicable Press D or to change the value of the parameter selected Any parameter preceded by is alterable provided the system is in a safe state to allow the parameter to be changed For example Program Number cannot be changed if the program is running it must be in Reset or Hold mode If an attempt is made to alter the parameter its value is momentarily replaced by and no value is entered Some parameters are protected under a higher level of security Level 2 In these cases it will be necessary to select Access Lev
319. f 1 on 4902 0x1326 0 off 1 on 4903 0x1327 0 off 1 on 4904 0x1328 0 off 1 on 4905 0x1329 0 off 1 on 4906 0x132a 0 off 1 on 4907 0x132b 0 off 1 on 2908 0132c O off Ton 4909 0x132d 0 off 1 on a910 Oxi32e igg2me otto 4911 0x132f Lgc8 2 0ut Ooff 1on a915 oxt333 a916 0x1334 a917 0x1335 a918 0x1336 2919 ox1337 2920 01338 a921 0x1339 2922 Ox133a 2923 0x133b 2924 01330 a925 ox13ad 2926 0x133 a927 0x13 962 0x1362 2963 ox1363 2964 ox1364 4965 0x1365 UsrVal 4 Val 4966 0x1366 UsrVal 5 Val 4967 0x1367 UsrVal 6 Val 4968 0x1368 J 4969 0x1369 UsrVal 8 Val 4970 0x136a UsrVal 9 Val 4971 0x136b UsrVal 10 Val 4972 0x136c UsrVal 11 Val 4973 0x136d UsrVal 12 Val 4974 0x136e UsrVal 13 Val 4975 0x136f UsrVal 14 Val 4976 0x1370 UsrVal 15 Val 4977 0x1371 UsrVal 16 Val 4994 0x1382 Timer 1 Time 4995 0x1383 Timer 1 ElapsedTime 4996 0x1384 Timer 1 Out 4997 0x1385 Timer 2 Time 4998 0x1386 Timer 2 ElapsedTime 4999 0x1387 Timer 2 Out 5000 0x1388 Timer 3 Time 5001 0x1389 Timer 3 ElapsedTime 5002 0x138A Timer 3 0Out 5003 0x138B Timer 4 Time 5004 0x138C Timer 4 ElapsedTime 5005 0x138D Timer 4 Out 5006 0x138e MultiOper 1 In1 5007 0x138f MultiOper 1 In2 5008 0x1390 MultiOper 1 In3 5009 0x1391 MultiOper 1 In4 5010 0x1392 MultiOper 1 In5 off 1 On Oo off 1 On Oo off 1 On O off 1 On Cc D lt v N4 lt v O 364 Part No HA027988 Issue
320. f the parameters used to configure output are listed in the following table List Header Lp1 or Lp2 Name Parameter Description to select Output Hi Maximum output power delivered by channels 1 and 2 By reducing the high power limit it is possible to reduce the rate of change of the process however care should be taken as reducing the power limit will reduce the controllers ability to react to disturbance Minimum or maximum negative output power delivered by channels 1 and 2 Ch1 Output Ch2 Output Channel 1 Heat output The Ch1 output is the positive power values 0 to Output Hi used by the heat output Typically this is wired to the control output time proportioning or DC output The Ch2 output is negative portion of the control output 0 Output Lo for heat cool applications It is inverted to be a positive number so that it can be wired into one of the outputs time proportioning or DC outputs Ch1 Ch2 Deadband is a gap in percent between output 1 going off and output 2 coming on and vice versa For on off control this is taken as a percentage of the hysteresis Ch2 DeadB Sub header OP Value Default Access thee ar Suc change values Level Between Output Lo and 100 0 100 0 Between Output Hi and 100 0 0 0 or L3 100 0 Between Output Hi and Output Lo E L3 R O A i Between Output Hi and Output Lo Off to 100 0 The following four parameters only appear if Ch1 2 are confi
321. fferent levels of access IR Mode Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Configuration 3 Press a or mM to enter the correct code for the level chosen The default codes are If an incorrect code is entered the display reverts to the previous view Press to scroll through the list headers in the chosen level starting with Access List The full list of headers is shown in the Navigation Diagram section 4 2 4 The controller is now in configuration level in this example It is not necessary to enter a code when going from 5 To return to a lower level a higher level to a lower level press and hold if necessary to return to the Access POT A When Level 1 is selected the display reverts to the Page HOME display Do not power down while the controller is 2 Peace A op to cies changing levels If a power down does occur an level error message ELanF will appear see also section 12 6 Diagnostic Alarms A special case exists if a security code has been configured as 0 If this has been done it is not necessary to enter a code and the controller will enter the chosen level immediately When the controller is in configuration level the ACCESS list header can be selected from any view by pressing and together An alternative way to access configuration level is to power up the instrument with and buttons pressed You will then be asked to enter the s
322. first be enabled Select the Programmer Setup page followed by EnablelmmSP Tools Be Demie Explorer Yew ptim Window Heb DE Dd B amp B h GS a Mew Ale Open Ale Load Seve Pint Scam Add Pomor ames Wewe Miraptica wine ElParsmeter Explorer Bites Pod Wema irrg eeke pape EPAgrhtecpe AErogrammer Mes Pages m j Fo a a Sompo A AE Sap un aaa a Orm Erer addrese vaa Low mi agh Uniad Fam Does Ul Sera Servo Acton 5198 Pm Py 00 Se ili E Fermat dF PowerPack Acton on Peer Feelure bmp Aeepal Conc aK MF beens Meca ram Humber of Event J EneabkP VE vane Es blke PY Ewan Mo ii Jasco F Ensblolkorel Enable Programme User vs No 1 gt F mite ErabeOeevedSten Enable Delayod Stet Ho mi PA d ErablPOSchsd Enable Progremmer PIO Set Nom E omita FE reblel mm Po Enable muediala PSP re iT grm Progra at Program Flac PSS iea 1 Loop Pogan Psogram Fur Ze Hom UU Programme a Progen Program bfigkd 2 Nom ej ae ProgSundold Program Aun Hold ispu fee Ho agua Program Fun Pisa inca ir Ho Aiha Schone Seynin al Mo ii A pag Ship Egari 1E Hom E j a gi B iremm a y 350 v E2 32 Figure 27 5 To Enable Immediate Programmer Setpoint To Promote to a User Page 1 Select Programmer Run page Tools DoK File Device Pages View Options Window Help D a 4 l h x Ne alse New File Open File Load Save Print Scan Add Remove Access Views Help
323. from above or below SP 21 6 7 Autotune and Sensor Break When the controller is autotuning and sensor break occurs the autotune will abort and the controller will output the sensor break output power Sbrk OP set up in the OP List Autotune must be re started when the sensor break condition is no longer present 21 6 8 Autotune and Inhibit or Manual If the Loop Inhibit is asserted or the controller is put into Manual Mode any tune in progress will be aborted and will need to be re started once the condition has been removed Note that it is not possible to start an autotune sequence if the loop is inhibited or in Manual control 21 6 9 Autotune and Gain Scheduling When gain scheduling is enabled and an autotune is performed the calculated PID values will be written into the PID set that is active on completion of the tune Therefore the user may tune within the boundaries of a set and the values will be written into the appropriate PID set However if the boundaries are close since the range of the loop is not large then at the completion of the tune it cannot be guaranteed that the PID values will be written to the correct set particularly if the schedule type is PV or OP In this situation the scheduler Sched Type should be switched to Set and the Active Set chosen manually Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 217 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 21 6 10 Autotune from Below SP Heat Cool The point
324. from any view When the programmer is running the controller overview may and together WSP is the Working Setpoint and is the current setpoint derived from the programmer To change the value of WSP the be displayed by pressing programmer must be put into Hold then it can be adjusted using WSF the buttons or By default the new value is entered after Lase the button is released and is indicated by a brief flash of the value a Out 38 3 Log However it is possible to select an option where the value is entered continuously as the raise or lower button is depressed This option ImmSP is selected in configuration level as described in section 6 4 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 49 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 2 8 3 3 Program Edit Page A program can be edited in any level A summary of the Edit Page is given here but for a full description refer to Chapter 22 A program may be only edited when it is in Reset or Hold Press until the Program Edit page is shown Then press to scroll through a list of parameters shown in the following table parameters only appear in this table if the relevant option has been configured Program Program number and name if this has been configured 1 to max number of programs Segments Displays the number of segments in the program This value 1 to max number of segments Used automatically increments each time a new segment i
325. fset je Last Modbus Exception Codi Total Traneaction Court Successlul Tianeaction Cour Message Eat Count Exceckontounl Exception Count Tab 5 Master Comms Block 5 3504 Slave 5 is set up in Tab 5 The Master is continuously writing Target Setpoint parameter address 2 to Slave 5 at instrument address 6 using Function Code 6 The Target Setpoint for slave 5 is wired to the programmer PSP Programmer 1 Run PSP 344 zE COM ID001 3508 E SuspendCourt pa en Block Enable Master Comms Part Failure Court Belore Suspen SuspendExcesc Suspend Count Exceeded Ca ain ei Suspend Rety Imerval Slave Insinament Node Addi Madbus Function Code Parameter Addes Slave Data 1 Dita Foma Data Factor Data Offset Last Modbus Exception Cock t Total Transaction Count Successhul Transaction Cour Message Emor Count ExceptionCount Excephon Court Yes 11 Univeld Val H 0 5 No 0 Se ice AN Func 6 2 3500 series Controllers 59620 Programme 1 Aun FSF Linsign 1 1 000 0 000 D 466349 406349 0 Parameter Explorer Metrcommes 100 Usa 5 Val H 0 E No 0 a Funes 6 2 59 620 Programmer 1 Aun PSP Sign 0 1 000 0 000 466392 A6632 0 0 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Tab 6 Master Comms Block 6 The master is set up to read data from 16 consecutive Modbus parameter
326. g Relative Cool Gain lf the controller is fitted with a cool channel this should be enabled before the PID values calculated from the table in section 21 6 15 are entered Observe the oscillation waveform and adjust R2G until a symmetrical waveform is observed Then enter the values from the table Temperature Setpoint R2G is correct R2G is too large R2G is too small Time Figure 21 10 Setting Relative Cool Gain Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 223 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 21 6 17 Manually Setting the Cutback Values 224 Enter the PID terms calculated from the table in section 21 6 15 before setting cutback values The above procedure sets up the parameters for optimum steady state control If unacceptable levels of overshoot or undershoot occur during start up or for large step changes in PV then manually set the cutback parameters Proceed as follows Initially set the cutback values to one proportional bandwidth converted into display units This can be calculated by taking the value in percentage that has been installed into the parameter PB and entering it into the following formula PB 100 Span of controller Cutback High and Cutback Low For example if PB 10 and the span of the controller is O 1 200 C then Cutback High and Low 10 100 1200 120 If overshoot is observed following the correct settings of the PID terms increase the value of C
327. grammer 1 2 Tag Parameter Tag Parameter Address Address 5386 6986 a 1 Synchronise to Channel 2 5398 6998 Segment 1 PV Wait Event 5387 6987 Segment 1 Goback Segment 5399 6999 Segment 1 Wait Value 374 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 30 5 Synchronous Programmers Programmer 1 setup Syncin Setup Sync 1 Setup Syncin Run PSP Setup Progkeset Run PSP Setup Frani Fun PWEventOP Setup ProgRun Rui PYWEventOP Setup Frana etup ProgHold gt etup FY Event Setup ProgRunHold i Seip ProgRunResel setup Prin etup Prolnz eto PWEventP Run Lure rag i 0 In this configuration Programmer2 is a slave to Programmer1 A program will have two profiles Channel1 run by Programmer and Channel2 run by Programmer2 The program only needs to be loaded into the master programmer To edit the program and to configure the programmers the following procedure should be followed 22 Write the program number which is to be edited to the Comms ProgramNumber parameter located in the master programmers general data area in this case the master programmer is Programmer and hence the address to be written to is Programmer Program General Data Start address 5184 Comms ProgNum Offset 0 5184 23 It is then possible to configure the other Programmer Program parameters for example the address to write to change the value of the PowerFailAct is Programmer Program General Data Start address 51
328. gt PV lags SP Holdback stops the ramp until SP catches up Mo SPassetinthe program Set Holdback Type to low x SP as modified by holdback follows the rate at which the process is capable Time Figure 22 4 Effect of Guaranteed Soak Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 249 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 22 6 22 7 250 PID Select It is possible to set up three sets of PID values see Chapter 21 Any one of these sets may be activated in any segment of the program except if the segment is configured as Wait Goback or End There are two parameters to configure In the Program Setup page configure the parameter PID Set to Yes In the Program Edit page configure PID Set to the most suitable set for the chosen segment If PID Set No in the Program Setup page the choice of PID sets is not given in the segments The last PID set in the program SET1 by default will be applied during these segments When reset the usual PID strategy for the loop takes over Sync Point Goback Interaction Sync points cause a segment in channel 1 to wait for a segment in Channel 2 and visa versa To configure a Sync Point the Wait For parameter is set to Ch2Sync Several scenarios are possible which require clarification 1 Channel 2 does not have a valid corresponding Go Back Channel 1 repeats segments 1 and 2 11 times the first time prior to Go Back
329. gured for valve position control Ch1 2 Control VPU VPB in Lp Setup page Ch1 TravelT Ch2 TravelT Valve travel time for the channel 1 valve to travel from 0 closed to 100 open one is connected to both a Raise and a Lower output In a Heat Cool application Channel 1 is the heat valve Travel time for Channel 2 valve to travel from 0 closed to 100 open In a Heat Cool application Channel 2 is the cool valve 230 In a Valve positioner application Channel 0 0 to 1000 0 seconds 0 0 to 1000 0 seconds Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual List Header Lp1 or Lp2 Parameter Description Value Default Access a op O change values Level Name to select Nudge Raise Nudge Lower Sub header OP Causes the valve to move by one L3 minimum on time towards the CH1 open position See also section 21 8 9 Causes the valve to move by one minimum on time towards the CH1 close position See also section 21 8 9 The following six pot feedback parameters appear if Ch1 2 are configured for VPB valve position bounded mode PotCal Ch1 Pot Pos Ch1 Pot Brk Ch2 Pot Pos Ch2 Pot Brk PotBrk Mode Rate Ch1 OnOff Hyst Ch2 OnOff Hyst Part No HA027988 Conf See section 10 3 9 and 8 2 4 for details on pot calibration Starts the potentiometer calibration by Off Pot cal disabled selecting which potentiometer to CH1 Calibrate cha
330. h 2 Abs Low 3 Dev High 4 Dev low 5 Dev Band 6 Rising rate of change 7 Falling rate of change 10257 0x2811 Alarm 2 Threshold AN 10258 0x2812 Alarm 2 Hysteresis A 10259 0x2813 Alarm 2 Reference PE 10260 0x2814 Alarm 2 Latch 10261 Aare ZP 10262 0x2816 Alarm 2 Block 10263 Alarm 2 Inhibit 10264 0x2818 Alarm 2 Delay E a 10265 0x2819 Alarm 2 Out 10266 ox281a Alarm 2 Ack 10272 0x2820 Alarm 3 Type 0 None 1 Abs High 2 Abs Low 3 Dev High 4 Dev low 5 Dev Band 6 Rising rate of change 7 Falling rate of change 10273 0x2821 Alarm 3 Threshold FA 10274 0x2822 Alarm 3 Hysteresis PI 10275 0x2823 Alarm 3 Reference VIE AE A 10276 0x2824 Alarm 3 Latch 10277 0x2825 Alarm 3 Priority 10278 0x2826 Alarm 3 Block 10279 0x2827 Alarm 3 Inhibit 10280 0x2828 Alarm 3 Delay A Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 365 User Manual 3500 series Controllers MODBUS MODBUS Parameter Enumerations Hex 10281 0x2829 Alarm 3 Out 0 Off 1 On 10282 0x282a Alarm 3 Ack O No 1 Yes 10288 0x2830 Alarm 4 Type 0 None 1 Abs High 2 Abs Low 3 Dev High 4 Dev low 5 Dev Band 6 Rising rate 10289 0x2831 Alarm 4 Threshold AS 10290 Alarm Hysteresis NN 10291 Alarm Reference AA 10292 Alarm Latch 10293 Alarm 4Prioriy 10294 Alarm Block 10295 Alartnd inhib 10296 Alarm 4 Delay Pe 10297 Alarm4 Qu 10298 Alarm 4 Ack 10304 0x2840 Alarm 5 Type 0 None 1 Abs High 2 Abs Low 3 Dev 10305 Alarm Threshold EA 10306 Alarm 5 Hysteresis AS
331. h as those above then R2GPD should be selected This algorithm extends the autotune period by putting the controller into proportional plus derivative mode PD and uses the output power demand value during this period to determine the Relative Cool Gain Off The automatic calculation of Relative Cool Gain can be turned off and the value entered manually as described in section 21 6 16 21 6 14 1 When Tune R2G R2GPD Autotune from below setpoint is described below 222 Target Setpoint First Peak overshoot to Peak y AN Va Tune Control Point LL L So A N AER AAAA Hysteresis E JE ivi i High Output a eee ee 7 A PA ee ele hae pies AT Zero Output na enn a Anes O renee hkl ff p Dox E OPss Low Output Si A A SS pee eel pig eek He gt C D E F G A A B 1 min A Start of H End of Autotune Autotune Periods A F are largely unchanged from the Standard algorithm section 21 6 10 with the following exception e Changing the Target Setpoint during period A B will not change the tuning setpoint Period F H is replaced as follows FtoG Heat is applied for a period F G of half the last heat cycle D E to compensate for the last cool cycle GtoH This is a period in which the controller is put into PD control The values of proportional term and derivative time for this period of PD control are determined by the algorithm H OPss is the output demand value at the end of this
332. han one instrument Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers 1 7 Plug in I O Module Connections User Manual Plug in I O modules can be fitted in three positions in the 3508 and six positions in 3504 The positions are marked Module 1 2 3 4 5 6 With the exception of the Analogue Input module any other module listed in this section can be fitted in any of these positions To find out which modules are fitted check the ordering code printed on a label on the side of the instrument If modules have been added removed or changed it is recommended that this is recorded on the instrument code label The function of the connections varies depending on the type of module fitted in each position and this is shown below All modules are isolated Note The order code and terminal number is pre fixed by the module number For example Module 1 is connected to terminals 1A 1B 1C 1D module 2 to 2A 2B 2C 2D etc 1 7 1 Relay 2 pin and Dual Relay Module Contactor First relay Relay Panel lamp W gt LJ LA etc Voltage supply alla Contactor Relay Panel D lamp te Second relay dual relay only 1 7 2 Change Over Relay Contactor Relay Panel lamp etc Voltage supply q dla Ly Hardware Code R2 and RR Relays Rating 2A 264Vac max or 1mA 1V min Typical usage H
333. hannel 1 and 2 outputs respectively when any Summary Page section 2 8 is displayed unless the Summary Page is Loop 2 If the Summary Page is Loop 2 then OP1 and OP2 operate on loop 2 channel outputs These parameters may also be soft wired see parameters OP1 Beacon and OP2 Beacon in Inst Dis table in section 6 5 lluminates when manual mode active If the HOME display is showing the dual loop overview MAN illuminates if Loop 1 is in manual If the Loop 1 or Loop 2 overviews are being displayed MAN applies to the loop being displayed Iluminates when remote setpoint active If an alarm occurs the red alarm beacon flashes This is accompanied by a message showing the source of the alarm for example Boiler overheating To acknowledge press and e The message disappears If the alarm condition is still present the beacon lights continuously When cleared it will extinguish Section 2 7 describes alarm operation Flashes when infra red communications active OP1 OP2 REM Illuminates when alternative setpoint active H R In general throughout this handbook instrument views will use the 3504 The displayed information is similar for the 3508 but in some cases is shortened due to display limitations Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 39 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 2 4 The Operator Buttons Page Scroll Lower Raise A MAN Toggles the selected loop between Auto and Manual o
334. he DeviceNet module must have the part no AH027179U003 126 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 14 1 Serial Communications ModBus and El Bisynch use ElA232 and ElA485 2 wire serial communications The wiring connections for these and the other protocols are given in Chapter Error Reference source not found 14 1 1 ElA232 EIA232 uses a three wire cable Tx Rx Gnd The signals are single ended i e there is a single wire for transmit and another for receive This makes EIA232 less immune to noise in industrial applications EIA232 can only be used with one instrument To use EIA232 the PC will be equipped with an ElA232 port usually referred to as COM 1 To construct a cable for EIA232 operation use a three core screened cable The terminals used for EIA232 digital communications are listed in the table below Some PC s use a 25 way connector although the 9 way is more common Standard Cable PC socket pin no PC Function Instrument Instrument Terminal Colour Function pes sf fonos far Conmnon Link together Rec d line sig detect Data terminal ready se Data set ready Link together Request to send Clear to send Screen UE A Ground e These are the functions normally assigned to socket pins Please check your PC manual to confirm 14 1 2 ElA485 The ElA485 standard allows one or more instruments to be connected multi dropped using a two wire connection with cable length of
335. he diagram above or ona Falling PV as shown below depending on type of profile being run Initial PV PV1 Falling PV PVI SS Falling PV Falling PV PV3 WMA A ee es op ee eS M am When PV Start is used the program always servos to PV i e servo to SP will be ignored Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 User Manual In a SyncAll programmer PVStart is only configurable in channel 1 Channel 2 will also servo to PV in the segment determined for PVStart by channel 1 In such cases Channel 1 PSP and Channel 2 PSP may reach the end of segment at different times but Sync will take place prior to execution of the next segment 255 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 22 15 1 Example To Run Hold or Reset a Program 256 When the controller is ordered as a programmer a Programmer Summary screen is available in operator mode which allows quick access to the programmer The example below uses this screen Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes From any display press O until the Programmer User Display is shown In this example Program Number 2 is chosen and has been given a user defined name Press to Program Press a or M to choose the program number to be run In the 3504 Program names can be entered using the off line programming package Tools RUN is displayed in the indicator beacons Press RUN HOLD button or se
336. he progress of Idle No calibration in progress L1 R O calibration Active Calibration in progress 2 Passed Calibration Passed 3 Failed Calibration Failed 24 6 1 Parameter Notes Enable Cal This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch If not wired then the value may be changed When enabled the transducer parameters may be altered as described in the previous sections When the parameter has been turned On it will remain on until turned off manually even if the controller is power cycled Start Tare This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch If not wired then the value may be changed Start Cal This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch If not wired then the value may be changed It starts the calibration procedure for Shunt Calibration The low point for Load Cell Calibration The low point for Comparison Calibration Start Hi Cal This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch If not wired then the value may be changed It starts The high point for Load Cell Calibration The high point for Comparison Calibration Clear Cal This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch If not wired then the value may be changed When enabled the input will reset to default values A new calibration will overwrite the previous calibration values if Clear Cal is not enabled between calibrations 296 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers U
337. hecksum error The checksum of the NVol RAM has failed The NVol is considered currupt and the instrument configuration may be incorrect 20 Resistive identifier error An error occured when reading the identifier from an I O module The module may be damaged 21 Fixed PV ident has been changed This may be due to installation of new Power Supply Board 22 Module 1 changed for one of a different type The configuration may now be incorrect 23 Module 2 changed for one of a different type The configuration may now be incorrect 24 Module 3 changed for one of a different type The configuration may now be incorrect 25 Module 4 changed for one of a different type The configuration may now be incorrect 26 Module 5 changed for one of a different type The configuration may now be incorrect 27 Module 6 changed for one of a different type The configuration may now be incorrect 28 H Module changed for one of a different type The configuration may now be incorrect 29 J Module changed for one of a different type The configuration may now be incorrect 43 Invalid custom linearisation table One of the custom linearisation tables is invalid Either it has failed checksum tests or the table downloaded to the instrument is invalid 55 Instrument wiring invalid or corrupt 56 Non Vol write to volatile An attempt was made to perform a checksummed Non Vol write to a non checksummed address 58 Recipe load failure The selected recipe failed to lo
338. high high Control Ch2 OP Ch2 OP SB Sensor Break E ny loop A e ee Saat T Active Acknowledge All A a ma T Ea Alarm 2 OP Full scale high Full scale high P_ Programmer P R Prg E t1 R P Full scale low Fullscalelow R en _DH Deviation _DH Deviation kiah Prg Event 2 high 9 Prg Event 2 Pro Chi Event Deviation Deviation Prg Ch1 Event 2 band band 3 VO slots 4 5 and 6 are only available on the 3504 Slot Functions 1 6 CH1 Heat CH2 Cool Unconfigured Ch1 OP for loops 1 amp 2 Triple Logic OP Loop 1 CCX Ch2 OP for loops 1 amp 2 S Remote SP Select function SBR Sensor Break both VF VP Feedback Ch1 below for each channel VG VP Feedback Ch2 i 3 7 Unconfigured Triple Logic Input Loop 1 Ch1 OP Select function below for each channel Loop 1 Ch2 OP Unconfigured Loop 2 Ch1 OP Loop 1 Manual Loop 2 Control Ch2 OP Loop 2 Manual A Alarm 1 OP Loop 2 Changeover Relay _H Control Ch1 OP Control Ch2 OP ensor Break 2 Pin Relay _H Control Ch1 OP Control Ch2 OP ensor Break Ifi o O n sla re Dual Triac Chir OP amp Ch2 VP Ch1 VP Ch2 Prg Ch1 Event 1 amp 2 P34 Prg Ch1 Event 3 amp 3 P56 Prg Ch1 Event5 amp 6 P78 Prg Ch1 Event 7 amp 8 A12 Alarm 1 amp 2 OP A34 Alarm 3 amp 4 OP HHX h1 OP for loops 1 amp 2 CCX Ch2 OP for loops 1 amp 2 DC Control _H h1 OP C h2 OP DC Retransmission T S Analogue Input x lt W O A Fl lt
339. his could be linked to the programmer segment changing the PID settings for individual segments or it could be wired to a digital input so that the working PID set can be set remotely SP The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the SP PV The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the PV Error The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the error OP The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the OP demand Rem A remote parameter may be wired into the Scheduler the PID set is then selected based on the value of this input An example might be to automatically change feedforward trim limits in a cascade loop The 3500 controller has a maximum of three sets of PID values The parameter Num Sets allows the number of sets to be limited to one two or three Plant Dynamics e g PV 2 3 Boundary 1 2 Boundary Plant Operating Position o PID Set 1 PID Set 2 PID Set 3 Figure 21 6 Gain Scheduling over a Wide range of Operating Variable Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 213 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 21 6 Tuning Function Block Tuning involves setting the following parameters Proportional Band PB Integral Time Ti Derivative Time Td Cutback High CBH Cutback Low CBL and Relative Cool Gain R2G applicable to heat cool systems only The controller is shipped with these parameters
340. his might happen for example if low calibration is done with the full load applied The controller repeats the same procedure as for 4 Press O to scroll to Start Txdr A Hi Cal and a or a to Yes Start Tare Start Cal Start Hi Cal rres Tdr During calibration Cal Active On Sersale Lo Input Value is the PV before scaling Cal Band bCal Active Output Value is the output from the transducer scaling block Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 291 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 24 4 4 1 Offsets It is possible that a residual output from the transducer exists which means that there is an error in the span and or zero reading The residual output is likely to occur under the no load condition in which case it can be compensated for by applying a simple offset as follows Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 Inthe PV Input list scroll to Configure IO Type to 40mV Lin Type to Linear Offset and adjust until the no PU Input and Units as required load conditi ds 0 0 BOFF set oaa condition reads Lo Point Offset is also described in section 7 2 7 If a different error occurs at both high and low points a two point offset can be applied as follows Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes Lo Point should be set to 0 to correspond to the 1 Inthe PV Input list scroll to PUIn Put transducer range Lo Offset and adjust until the no load condition reads 0 0 OF ft set Lo Point Glo
341. i not executed by the instrument Colt es O o Once the download button is pressed the block is added to the instrument function block execution list and it is drawn with solid lines input Output Threshold inhibi Atk If a block which has been downloaded is deleted it is shown on the diagram in a ghosted form until the download button is pressed This is because it and any wires to from it are still being executed in the instrument On download it will be removed from the instrument execution list and the diagram A ghosted block can be undeleted using the context menu When a dashed block is deleted it is removed immediately 324 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers 27 10 6 Using Wires User Manual 27 10 6 1 Making A Wire Between Two Blocks LE T Loop a pe Main T AutoMan PV H inhib 40 gt TangetSP 4 WokingsP 40 gt AchweDP T Setup 4D gt CH1 Cort had SA OU arint E DE laal 2 27 10 6 2 Wire Context Menu Drag two blocks onto the diagram from the function block tree Start a wire by either clicking on a recommended output or clicking on the icon at the bottom right corner of the block to bring up the connection dialog The connection dialog shows all the connectable parameters for the block ifthe block has sub lists the parameters are shown in atree If you wish to wire a parameter which is not currently available click the red button at the bottom of the connection
342. i e the PV Input or Analogue Input fitted in one of the module slots These can be wired in configuration level to the above inputs Four types of calibration are explained in this chapter in Level 3 or configuration levels e Auto tare e Shunt Calibration e Load Cell Calibration e Comparison Calibration 24 1 Auto Tare Calibration The auto tare function is used for example when it is required to weigh the contents of a container but not the container itself The procedure is to place the empty container on the weigh bridge and zero the controller Since it is likely that following containers may have different tare weights the auto tare feature can be made available in all operator access levels by configuring the parameter Cal Enable to Yes The procedure to enter a tare offset is described in section 24 2 1 and is the same in all access levels Tare calibration may be carried out no matter what type of transducer is in use Part No HA027988 New Scale High Scale High Tare value PV at tare point New Scale Low Scale Low A cea eneie a E eS a IC e AA es offset New Scaling 7 Original Scaling Input Low Input at auto Input High tare point Figure 24 1 Effect of Auto Tare Issue 15 Jun 13 281 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 24 2 Transducer Summary Page If the Transducer function block has been enabled then a transducer summary page is available in operator level
343. iceNet CAN_L data bus terminal Connect the blue wire of the DeviceNet cable here HE V Black DeviceNet network power negative terminal Connect the black wire of the DeviceNet cable here If the DeviceNet network does not supply the power connect to the negative terminal of an external 11 25 Vdc power supply HRT Connect to instrument earth 1 8 3 Example DeviceNet Wiring Diagram DeviceNet Trunk Cable V Shield V q 1 x 1210 1 1 4W terminating resistor must be connected across the blue and white wires at each end of the DeviceNet trunk cable Note this resistor is sometimes included in the master or other devices but should only be switched into circuit on the last device on the trunk cable MASTER Note The DeviceNet network is powered by an external independent 24V supply which is separate from the internal powering of the individual controllers Note Power taps are recommended to connect the DC power supply to the DeviceNet trunk line Power taps include A Schottky Diode to connect the power supply V and allows for multiple power supplies to be connected DeviceNet Power Supply 24Vdc 1 2 fuses or circuit breakers to protect the bus from excessive current which could damage the 250mV p p Ripple cable and connectors max The earth connection HF to be connected to Further Devices i the main supply e
344. ies of power available to heat as opposed to that available to cool a process For example water cooling applications might require a relative cool gain of 0 25 because cooling is 4 times greater than the heating process at the operating temperature This parameter is normally set automatically when an Autotune is performed Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 21 5 6 21 5 7 21 5 8 High and Low Cutback Cutback high CBH and Cutback low CBL are values that modify the amount of overshoot or undershoot that occurs during large step changes in PV for example under start up conditions They are independent of the PID terms which means that the PID terms can be set for optimal steady state response and the cutback parameters used to modify any overshoot which may be present Cutback involves moving the proportional band towards the cutback point nearest the measured value whenever the latter is outside the proportional band and the power is saturated at 0 or 100 for a heat only controller The proportional band moves downscale to the lower cutback point and waits for the measured value to enter it It then escorts the measured value with full PID control to the setpoint In some cases it can cause a dip in the measured value as it approaches setpoint as shown in Figure 21 5 but generally decreases the time to needed to bring the process into operation The action described above is reve
345. ifies that the comms No module fitted As R O module is fitted in the H or J lO expander J slot only ordered slot Communications module See section 14 3 1 fitted Protocol Digital communications MODBUS Modbus MODBUS protocol MBUS_M Modbus Master Firmware See section 14 3 2 versions 2 90 and above EIBISYNCH Profibus Not available DeviceNet in J slot Ethernet EIBISYNCH Profibus DeviceNet Ethernet Baud Rate Communications baud rate Modbus El Devicenet 9600 El Bi Conf Not applicable to Profibus or Bisynch 125K 19K2 Mod L3R O Ethernet 4800 250K 125K Dnet See section 0 9600 500K 19 200 Parity Communications parity No parity None Conf not applicable to Devicenet or Even parity Even L3 R O Profibus See section 14 3 4 Odd parity EIBisynch 1 to 254 Modbus El Bisynch O to 126 Profibus O to 63 Devicenet Full Full Full Integer Integer Profibus or DeviceNet Network connected and Address Instrument address See section 14 3 5 Resolution Comms resolution Modbus only Conf E Network Network Status Profibus and Ready DeviceNet only Displays status of the network and connection working Offline Network not connected Running Ethernet connected Init Profibus or DeviceNet Initialising Comms Rx Tx delay time Delay not applicable to Devicenet or Profibus See section 14 3 6 H Activity Comms activity in H or J Oor 1 module No Yes O to 32767 being written to slaves eg to A N write to power output
346. igh and low limits Between Output Hi and Output Lo overall limits set in to be imposed when the OP block Max and Min limits 100 to 100 auto tune is running a Y Running Complete Timeout Tl_Limit Error conditions see section 21 6 13 Low Output State Reads the progress of auto tune R2G_Limit Progress of auto tune Settling Off To Wait Wait Timeout TI Limit See section 21 6 13 A D w o lt R2G Limit Stage Time Time in current tune 0 to 99999 L3 R O stage Tuning diagnostics This parameter is for internal use This parameter is for internal use only eee Ga 216 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 21 6 5 To Auto Tune a Loop Initial Settings Set parameters listed in section 21 6 2 Output Hi and Output Lo OP List section 21 8 1 set the overall output limits These limits apply at all times during tuning and during normal operation Set High Output and Low Output Tune list section 21 6 4 These parameters set the output power limits during Autotune The tighter power limit will always apply For example if High Output is set to 80 and Output Hi is set to 70 then the output power will be limited to 70 The measured value mustoscillate to some degree for the tuner to be able to calculate values The limits must be set to allow oscillation about the setpoint 21 6 6 To Start Autotune a Select ope
347. ill require an integral re balance if the readings are used in a Carbon Activity Between CO and O2 The carbon activity for the surface gas reaction between CO and Oxygen Probe State The current state of the probe measurement system If this is not Measure then the outputs will not User Manual Sub headers Value Default Access Do Dio change Level R O No alarm output In alarm No Yes No Yes OK O S R O R O R O R O mVSbr Probe input in sensor break TempSbr Temperature input in sensor break MinCalcT Probe deteriorating N Ye Measure R O R O Clean Clean Recovery Testimpedance ImpedanceRecovery Not Ready Nernst Nernst MO B E Nernst 3 Nernst Bosch NernstCP Ferronova NernstBo NernstCP Ferronova Q O E 173 User Manual 3500 series Controllers Zirconia Table 2 Probe Type equations shown in Table 2 are no longer recommended and are included for compatibility with existing installations Table 2 does not include Oxygen only probes List Header Zirconia Sub headers Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select O or O to change Level Probe Type Configures the type of probe to be used xBarberC 21 Barber Colman Values shown here prefixed by x are no xBoschCrb 20 Bosch Carbon longer used but are included for backwards e xProbeMV 19 Probe mV compatibility xZircDew 18 Dewpoint xMacDhui 14 MacDhui xSSI 13 S
348. ime is pressed 4 Continue setting up the parameters If you wish to scroll around the parameters presented until the Finished view is again do not select Yes but continue to displayed press l 5 Ifall parameters are set up as required When you are satisfied with the selections press or to Yes select Yes shown The HOME display section 2 3 is then The following table summarises all the parameters which can be set up by the above procedure 2 1 2 LP1 PV Input LP1 PV Input LP1 PV Input LP1 PV Input LP1 PV Input LP1 Loop Part No HA027988 Quick Start Parameters Parameters shown in Bold are defaults Units Used to select the engineering units for the PV C F K options also change the displayed units Resolution Used to select the required decimal point position for the PV Range Type Used to select the linearisation algorithm required and the input sensor IO Type Only shown if custom curve is selected Range High Low Configures the maximum minimum display range and SP limits Control Channel 1 Sets the control type for channel 1 normally Heat Issue 15 Jun 13 C F K V mV A mA pH mmHg psi Bar mBar RH mmWG inWG inWW Ohms PSIG 02 PPM CO2 CP sec mBar Pa T sec min hrs None XXXXX XXXX X XXX XX XX XXX X XXXX Thermocouple J K L R B N T S PL2 C CustC1 2 amp 3 RTD Pt100 Linear 0 50mV 0 5
349. ina iones Ena AA AAA 257 2217 Program oro ad 261 To e Mo crass ress daia vance ehinanlstr aids ede datisotiadga ee Sasa emacs aataiteaa 261 Za de TO Ed oy CStant P odan E a aro oa 265 22 17 3 Summary of Parameters which appear for different Segment Types ococcoiccicnnonconcononcconcnnnonnnnncnonncnncnnnns 269 ZONT A TON a onde Channel Producido 270 22 17 5 Examples Showing How to Set up and Run Dual Programmers s ssssssssssssssessssisesresisssresesrsristssssesresesrssees 273 22 18 Alternative Ways to Edit a Progress ote canoa 275 22 19 Appendix to Chapter 22 Single Programmer Earlier Versions sccsssscsssssecsssceessseees 276 PANGAN Cresta OF Edna SINGE Proa Miss ls llo dl ii 276 E SO E A EE TEET os ae Gu ke at TOE TEENETE ET 278 23 CHAPTER 23 SWITCHOVER cerae aae a ra a ee E Ea EEEa eses 279 a fe el Example rd ere SWVC OVER LEV E Su Osa 279 23 12 Swi ten Over Para metera e oa E A A A A 280 24 CHAPTER 24 TRANSDUCER SCALING wiicccccesis cocccthcccccsaas sessetbecoasends n eieaa aE ire 281 24 1 Auto Tare Calibration sesessesicectscxicesitacsussssectcaxscavesszssouet oesueesuvenatsstausconssascoeeatevosneesh ERREEN E EEUE ENNES 281 24 2 Transaticer SUMMA Page uan AA 282 24 2 1 A om Ors A AN 282 24 3 o deaccacedecatecsonestacecacs aa a 283 24 3 1 Calibration Using the Calibration Resistor Mounted in the TransQucer cceceeseeceeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneens 283 24 3 2 Configure Parameters for Strain Gauge Calla 284 24 3 3 COntgu
350. increments when 1 to 50 Used another segment is added Ch1PVStart PV Start determines the starting point for A wio See also section 22 15 Falling Ch2PVStart PV Start determines the starting point for ET S dol Risings See also section 22 15 Ch1HIdBk Channel 1 holdback value Sets the deviation Minimum setting 0 Value between SP and PV at which holdback is applied to programmer channel 1 This value applies to the whole program This parameter only appears if Ch2HIdBk Channel 2 holdback value Sets the deviation Minimum setting 0 Value between SP and PV at which holdback is applied to programmer channel 2 This value applies to the whole program Cycles Number of times the whole program repeats Cont Repeats 1 to 9999 continuously Program executes once to 9999 times Segment To define the type of segment Last segment in the Type See also section 22 3 program Time Time duration of the segment Wait Wait for event before progressing to the next segment GoBack Go back to a previous segment and repeat See section 22 3 5 If Segment Type Time the following parameters are shown Segment Type Time the following parameters are shown Ch1 Target SP The setpoint value required in program Within the setpoint limits channel 1 at the end of the selected segment Ch2 Target SP The setpoint value required in program Within the setpoint limits channel 2 at the end of the selected segme
351. ing Txdr Input If an analogue input module is used see example section 24 3 3 5 Value from wire the Txdr Input to the PV of the PVInput PV module TransPSU PV The operation for Shunt calibration is from Txdr made fully automatic when this wire ShuntState is made 284 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 24 3 3 Configuration Examples The following sections show examples of how these parameters are configured Skip this section if this explanation is not required or if the calibration is being carried out in access levels 1 or 2 24 3 3 1 Enable a Transducer Function Block In configuration level Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes O U Both transducer inputs disabled EE Both transducer inputs enabled 1 Press O as many times as necessary to select the rest Ento Inst Enb page Totalise En oo j BTirScale En i _ Press O to scroll to Usar Tert Em OOOO TrScale En and 4 or to enable 24 3 3 2 Configure the Input Set input to 33 3mV where OmV reading of 0 0 and 33 3 mV reading of 3000 0 In configuration level Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes Configure IO Type to 40mV Lin Type to Linear and Units as required 1 Press O as many times as necessary to select the PLT rieut input to be calibrated 410 Tore Lin re Configure Disp Hi and Disp Lo to correspond 2 Use
352. ing on the value it will not switch fully on Similarly if Range Lo is set to a value gt 0 it will not switch fully off PID Demand signal Disp Hi eg 100 Disp Lo eg 0 Output state Range Lo 0 Range Hi 100 Output permanently off Output permanently on gt Figure 10 3 Time Proportioning Output The procedure for adjusting these parameters is the same as that given in the previous section 10 4 4 Analogue Output Scaling Analogue control or retransmission outputs are scaled in exactly the same way as above except that Range Lo and Hi corresponds to the electrical output 0 to 10V 4 to 20mA etc For an analogue retransmission output Disp Lo and Hi correspond to the reading on the display and for an analogue control output Disp Lo and Hi corresponds to the PID demand output signal from the control block Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 111 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 10 4 5 112 Potentiometer Input Scaling When using the controller in bounded valve position mode it is necessary to calibrate the feedback potentiometer to correctly read the position of the valve The minimum position of the potentiometer corresponds to a measured value reading of 0 and the maximum position corresponds to 100 This may be carried out in Access level 3 Adjust the potentiometer for the minimum required position This may not necessarily be on the end stop Press to scroll to Cal State Then press or
353. ing parts that may be electrically live the controller must be installed in an enclosure Caution Live sensors The controller is designed to operate with the temperature sensor connected directly to an electrical heating element However you must ensure that service personnel do not touch connections to these inputs while they are live With a live sensor all cables connectors and switches for connecting the sensor must be mains rated The logic IO is not isolated from the PV inputs Wiring It is important to connect the controller in accordance with the wiring data given in this guide Take particular care not to connect AC supplies to the low voltage sensor input or other low level inputs and outputs Only use copper conductors for connections except thermocouple inputs and ensure that the wiring of installations comply with all local wiring regulations For example in the UK use the latest version of the IEE wiring regulations BS7671 In the USA use NEC Class 1 wiring methods Power Isolation The installation must include a power isolating switch or circuit breaker The device should be mounted in close proximity to the controller within easy reach of the operator and marked as the disconnecting device for the instrument Overcurrent protection The power supply to the system should be fused appropriately to protect the cabling to the units Voltage rating The maximum continuous voltage applied between any of the following termin
354. instances which are selected using the or buttons Logic input 1 Invert Logic operator Output Value Logic input 2 Oper result of calculation Invert Figure 18 1 2 Input Logic Operators Logic Operators are found under the page header Lgc2 Logic 8 Logic 8 operators can perform logic calculations on up to eight inputs The calculations are limited to AND OR XOR Up to two 8 input operators can be enabled in Inst page sub header Opt They are labelled Lgc8 to denote eight input logic operators When Lgc8 operators are enabled a page headed Lgc8 can be found using the button This page contains up to two instances which are selected using the or buttons Logic input 1 gt Invert Logic input 2 lo Invert Logic input 3 pe Invert Logic input 4 ES Logic operator Output Value Invert Oper gt result of calculation Logic input 5 La isa Invert Logic input 6 ES Invert Logic input 7 do Invert Logic input 8 lo Invert Figure 18 2 8 Input Logic Operators Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual None Off Off Off On Off On On Off Off On On Off On Off Off On Off On Off On Off On Off Off Off Off On Off On On Off On On Off On On 18 1 2 Logic Operations The following calculations can be performed Oper Operator description Input 1 0 OFF The selected logic operator is turned off The
355. int 2 CJC based on external junctions kept at 45C Hot Box 3 CJC based on external junctions kept at 50C Hot Box 4 CJC based on independent external measurement 5 CJC switched off Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 83 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 7 2 3 Display Units None Abs Temp C F K V mV A mA PH mmHg psi Bar mBar RH mmWG inWG inWW Ohms PSIG 02 PPM CO2 CP sec RelTemp C F K rel Vacuum sec min hrs e RelTemp Relative Temperature may be used when measuring differential temperatures It informs the controller not to add or subtract 32 when changing between C and F 7 2 4 Sensor Break Value The controller continuously monitors the impedance of a transducer or sensor connected to any analogue input including plug in modules This impedance expressed as a percentage of the impedance which causes the sensor break flag to trip is a parameter called SBrk Trip Imp and is available in the parameter lists associated with both Standard and Module inputs of an analogue nature The table below shows the typical impedance which causes sensor break to trip for various types of input and high and low SBrk Impedance parameter settings The impedance values are only approximate 25 as they are not factory calibrated PV Input Also applies to the Analogue Input module mV input 40mV or 80mV Volts 10V SBrk Impedance High 12KQ SBrk Impedance Low 3KQ
356. ion stored 26 Factory calibration stored 30 Calibration point for factory rough calibration 31 Idle 32 Low calibration point for the mV range 33 High calibration point for the mV range 34 Calibration restored to factory default values 35 User calibration stored 36 Factory calibration stored 304 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 41 42 43 44 45 46 SE 52 54 DD S 200 201 202 210 ZIA 213 220 221 222 223 26 5 Val Cali Idle Low calibration point for RTD calibration 150 ohms Low calibration point for RTD calibration 400 ohms Calibration restored to factory default values User calibration stored Factory calibration stored Idle CJC calibration used in conjunction with Term Temp parameter Calibration restored to factory default values User calibration stored Factory calibration stored Confirmation of request to calibrate Used to start the calibration procedure Used to abort the calibration procedure Calibration point for factory rough calibration Indication that calibration is in progress Used to abort the calibration procedure Indication that calibration completed successfully Calibration accepted but not stored Used to abort the calibration procedure Indication that calibration failed ve Position Output Calibration bration of the VP output is associated with whichever digital output has been configured to drive the valve
357. ires which connect one type to another cause a type conversion to occur The values wired may also be rejected or clipped depending on type and limits BOOLEANS including Edges Any value greater than or equal to 0 5 wired to a boolean or edge is considered true When wired to other values booleans will be considered as 0 or 1 INTEGER Values outside the limits of the integer will be clipped to the limits ENUMERATED INTEGER Values which are outside the limits of an enumerated parameter or do not have a defined enumeration will not be written BINARY INTEGER PIANO KEYS A value which exceeds the number of bits used by the parameter will be rejected FLOAT Values outside the limits of a float parameter will be clipped to the limits Wiring from a float to any other type will be rounded to the nearest integer Where the value falls half way between two integers it will be rounded towards the higher absolute value l e 3 5 rounds to 4 and 3 5 rounds to 4 TIME Times can only be wired to or from other times or floats When wired to or from floats the float value is in seconds STRING String values can not be wired NOTE In 3500 Firmware V1 12 and before floats were truncated rather than rounded and booleans rejected any value but 0 or 1 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 69 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 6 Chapter 6 Instrument Configuration 6 1 What Is Instrument Configuration Instrument configuration
358. is Only if configured and for On Off 0 0 to 200 0 Hyst control Ch2 DeadB Channel 2 deadband To set the period in which there is Off to 100 0 no output from either channel This does not appear if channel 2 is not configured Lev 1 alterable in Lev2 Ch1 TravelT Motor travel time if valve control output on channel 1 0 0 to 1000 0 sec Ch1 TravelT Motor travel time if valve control output on channel 1 0 0 to 1000 0 sec Safe OP To set an output level under sensor break conditions 100 0 to 100 0 52 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 3 GChapter3 Access to Further Parameters Parameters are available under different levels of security defined as Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 and Configuration Level Level 1 has no security password since it contains a minimal set of parameters generally sufficient to run the process on a daily basis Level 2 allows parameters such as those used in commissioning a controller to be adjusted Level 3 and Configuration level parameters are also available as follows 3 1 Level 3 Level 3 makes all operating parameters available and alterable if not read only Examples are Range limits setting alarm levels communications address The instrument will continue to control when in Levels 1 2 or 3 3 2 Configuration Level This level makes available all parameters including the operating parameters so that there is no need to switch between configuration and operati
359. is between blocks which are a long way apart then rather than drawing the wire the name of the wired to from parameter can be shown in a tag next to the block This menu entry toggles this wire between drawing the whole wire and drawing it as tags Finds the start of the wire Finds the end of the wire For series 3000 instruments if the wire is downloaded mark it for delete otherwise delete it immediately This menu entry is enabled if the wire is marked for delete and unmarks it for delete Bring the wire to the front of the diagram Moving a wire will also bring it to the front Push the wire to the back of the diagram Jun 13 Re Route Wire Lise Tags Find Start Find End Delete Del Undelete Bring To Front Push To Back 325 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 27 10 6 3 Wire Colours Wires can be the following colours Black Normal functioning wire Red The wire is connected to an input which is not alterable when the instrument is in operator mode and so values which travel along that wire will be rejected by the receiving block Blue The mouse is hovering over the wire or the block to which it is connected it selected Useful for tracing densely packed wires Purple The mouse is hovering over a red wire 27 10 6 4 Routing Wires When a wire is placed it is auto routed The auto routing algorithm searches for a clear path between the two blocks A wire can be auto routed again using the contex
360. is used to compensate for the different reflectivity produced by different type of surface PV The current value of the PV input in Instrument range L3 R O engineering units Offset Single offset value applied to the input Instrument range L3 see section 7 2 7 Allows a two point offset to be applied to the Instrument range LS controller to compensate for sensor or connection errors between sensor and the Hi Point input to the controller See section 7 2 8 for further details Hi Offset CJC Temp Reads the temperature of the rear terminals at Conf the thermocouple connection R O SBrk Value Used for diagnostics only and displays the L3 R O sensor break trip value The measured lead resistance on the RTD LT L3 R O Ld Cal State Calibration state Conf E calibrate a Passed Calibration OK Failed Calibration bad Accept To store the new values Normal operation G Start calibration Abort Abort calibration Busy Automatically calibrating Status The current status for the section 10 3 1 L3 R O Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 105 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 10 3 6 Input Types and Ranges Input Type Min Max Min Range Max Units Range Range Range Thermocouple type J 1200 Thermocouple type K Thermocouple type L Thermocouple type R 7 ar 2s ze fas e 2e e E s ha E se p f emesso E fio re a F Trermocouplewoes 50 ve e F a Themocouple Pinel fo e e F e Thermocounieypec NO Linear mv
361. ist see Chapter 14 It should be noted that when this module is fitted in the J comms slot the remaining parameters in the Comms J list are not used ly 10 20 Inputs JF gt El JE E IO Expander 3508 or 3504 Controller 10 20 Outputs Relays It is recommended that a cable length of 10 metres is not exceeded however no shielding or twisted pair cable is required Figure 11 1 IO Expander Data Transfer Wiring connections and further details of the lO Expander are given in the lO Expander Handbook Part No HA026893 When this unit is connected to the controller it is necessary to set up parameters to determine its operation These parameters can be set up in Level 3 or configuration level The IO Expander is enabled in Inst Options Page see Chapter 6 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 113 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 11 1 To Configure the lO Expander Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 18 From any display press until the IOExp page is reached This configured an lo Expander for 10 inputs and 10 outputs A further choice is 20 In200 ut Press to scroll to Type 19 Press a or M to select 10In100ut Remaining parameters in the Analogue Operators list are accessed and adjusted in the same way The list of parameters available is shown in the following table U 11 1 1 1O Expander Parameters List
362. it this comment Edit Unlink If the comment is linked to a block or wire this will unlink it Lir ink ELi Delete For series 3000 instruments if the comment is downloaded mark it for delete otherwise delete it immediately Delete Undelete This menu entry is enabled if the comment is marked for delete and unmarks it for delete Bring To Bring the comment to the front of the diagram Moving a Bring To Front Front comment will also bring it to the front Push To Back Push To Push the comment to the back of the diagram Useful if there is Back something underneath it Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 27 10 8 27 10 8 1 27 10 9 Using Monitors Drag a monitor onto the diagram and connect it to a block input or output or a wire as described in Using Comments The current value updated at the iTools parameter list update rate will be shown in the monitor By default the name of the parameter is shown double click or use the context menu to not show the parameter name Monitor Context Menu The monitor context menu has the following entries on it Show Names Show parameter names as well as values Unlink If the monitor is linked to a block or wire this will unlink it Delete For series 3000 instruments if the monitor is downloaded mark it for delete otherwise delete it immediately Undelete This menu entry is enabled if the monitor is marked for delete and unmarks it for delete Bring To Front B
363. ital Input 1 Off On Jun 13 User Manual 3500 Support Both message format modes supported Loop sensor break Not Supported Ignored N A N A Not Supported Ignored N A N A Alarm 2 state N A Alarm 1 state N A Alarm 1 OR Alarm 2 Loop Active Setpoint Select Loop Alternate Setpoint Enable Loop Auto Manual 3500 Support Supported as described May be cleared over comms but not set Supported as described Supported as described Not Supported Ignored always returns zero Shows segment number 1 8 read only Not supported Ignored always returns zero Relay AA status Fixed Digital I O 2 Fixed Digital I O 1 379 User Manual 818 902 3 4 Function Clear Set Self Tune Off On Adaptive Tune Off On PID Control SP PID PID Independ t Active PID set PID1 PID2 Digital OP 0 OP2 Off On This Nibble bits 8 11 represent program number Valve positioners Values are as follows O Outputs Off 1 Lower Output on 2 Raise Output on 3 Lower Nudge 4 Raise Nudge 31 1 3 XS Extended Status Word Extended Status word XS Spare Spare Spare 31 1 4 DigOpStat1 01 380 Digital Output Status Word1 01 818 902 3 4 Function Clear Set Ramp 1 to Output 3 Dwell 1 to Output 3 Ramp 2 to Output 3 Dwell 2 to Output 3 Ramp 3 to Output 3 Dwell 3 to Output 3 Ramp 4 to Output 3 Dwell 4 to Output 3 Ramp 5 to Output 3 Dwell 5 to Output 3 Ramp 6 to Output 3
364. k back into place to maintain the IP65 sealing Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 1 5 1 5 1 Electrical Connections 3508 i Live or 24V Power 2 Supply a Neutral or 24V O g Ground 2 Logic I O A ee Logic I O B i q Inputs Outputs Logic I O Com MODULE 2 y Fixed Relay A form C yj T C RID mV mA PV Input MODULE 3 COMMS MODULE 1 Polarising Keys 1 One per module Figure 1 4 Rear Terminal View 3508 Controller 3504 a Live or 24V ES x es Power E Neutral or 24V Supply A Q Fail Ground O ha gt I Logic I O A Digital E Logic OB Input Outputs E 1 Logic I O Com MODULE 5 MODULE 2 Fixed Relay form C a u o D O O gt N O O MODULE 6 MODULE 3 T C RTD mV mA Polarising Keys 1 PV Input One per module Figure 1 5 Rear Terminal View 3504 Controller 1 Polarising keys are intended to prevent modules which are not supported in this controller from being fitted into the controller An example might be an unisolated module coloured red from a 2400 controller series When pointing towards the top as shown the key prevents a controller fitted with an unsupported module from being plugged into a sleeve which has been previously wired for isolated modules If an unisolated module is to be fitted it is the users responsibility to ensure that it is safe to install the controller in th
365. klash This parameter compensates 0 0 to 9999 9 secs for any backlash which may be present in the linkages Cal State Calibration state See also section 26 4 for further L3 i details Status Module status OK Normal operation R O See note 2 Note 1 A triple logic output a dual relay output or a dual triac output module may be used for a valve position output If Valve Raise is configured on channel output A then Valve Lower is automatically allocated to channel output C Channel output B triple logic output is only available as an on off or time proportioning output Valve raise lower is not available on a single isolated logic output Note 2 Status appeared in some earlier controllers and displays a message giving the current operating condition of the module These may be O Normal operation 8 Channel 1 not calibrated T Initial startup mode 7 Channel 2 not calibrated 2 Channel 1 sensor break 20 Latched up 3 Channel 2 sensor break 21 Channel 1 open circuit 4 Channel 1 out of range 22 Channel 2 open circuit 5i Channel 2 out of range 23 Channel 1 short circuit 6 Channel 1 saturated input 24 Channel 2 short circuit T Channel 2 saturated input 25 No Module The number is the enumeration of the status 100 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 10 3 2 Single Isolated Logic Output This provides isolation from other IO and should be used for example in applications where the se
366. large This could also occur if the controller is configured for heat cool but the cooling medium is turned off or not working correctly It could similarly occur if the cooling medium is on but heating is off or not working correctly Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 221 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 21 6 14 Relative Cool Gain in Well Lagged Processes In the majority of processes Relative Cool Gain R2G is calculated by the autotune algorithm as described in the previous sections section 21 6 10 in particular There are occasions however where an alternative algorithm may be preferred These are processes which are heavily lagged where the heat loss to ambient is very small so that natural cooling is extremely slow and certain high order plants those that need derivative Td This algorithm is known as R2GPD algorithm and has been added to controllers from firmware version V3 30 The type of algorithm is selected using the parameter Tune R2G found in the Auto Tune list section 21 6 4 The choices are Standard This is the default as described in section 21 6 10 and is suitable for use on most processes The benefit of this algorithm is that it is relatively quick However in the type of process described in the previous paragraph it can produce values which are not ideal These values are generally identified by R2G equal to or very close to 0 1 R2GPD If the process is known to be heavily lagged or produces values suc
367. le of how the channel 1 heat output from the PID block might be wired to the logic output connected to terminals LA LC Loop function block Output list Lp OP To make this connection see the following example Inputs Outputs Ch1 Output Man OP Settings Logic IO function block Lgc IO LA Output High Output Low Rate SBrk Mode Safe OP Man Mode Figure 5 2 Function Block Wiring Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 5 1 2 Wiring Through the Operator Interface The example shown in the previous section will be used Select configuration level as described in section 3 3 Then Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes sima TY This locates the parameter you want to da saa 3 wire TO 1 From any display press O to locate the page in which the parameter is to be found In this example LgclO page 2 Press or O if necessary to select a sub header In this example LA amp Pes O tro Moiite Indicates parameter selected parameter to be wired TO In this example PV i i Mi a In configuration mode the A MAN button is the Wire button 4 Press Be to display f WireFrom 5 Press as instructed to ldireFrom You will also need to use a or M navigate to the list header to select a sub header if appropriate which contains parameter you want to wire FR
368. lean To select the required sub header press D or Older Probe Type equations are prefixed by x and if one of these is chosen the two extra sub headers are not available These types are for backward compatibility and are not recommended for new applications The parameters applicable to these probes are shown in Zirconia Tables 2 and 3 Note If the Probe Type is then changed back to a newer type then it is necessary to press O to reveal on the top line and access to the sub headers In all tables parameters are available in Level 3 and Configuration level R O Read Only parameters in both levels Zirconia Table 1 For new installations the Probe Types shown in the following table should be used List Header Zirconia Sub headers Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select O or to change Level Probe Type Configures the type of probe to be Eurotherm 35 Eurotherm Eurotherm ES ee AllPrbMv 34 Probe mV AllFerono 33 Feronova Note enumerations shown in AllBarber 32 Barber Colman brackets are not displayed on the AllBosch 31 Bosch Oxygen controller user interface However if Tools is used to configure the AllMacD 30 MacDhui controller then the eumerations are AlISSI 29 Ss shown in iTools AllAccu 28 Accucarb AllDrayton 27 Drayton AIIAACC 26 AACC AIIMMI 25 MMI Carbon L3 Resolution of the calculated result MinCalcTp Minimum temperature at which th
369. lect Status and set this to Run A pop up is displayed where the program number may be selected prior to run section of the main display The view shown here shows current working setpoint program being run current segment number and time left to complete this segment Press RUN HOLD button again to To Hold a program press continue the program RUN HOLD butt UN HO button When the program is complete RUN will flash RUN will extinguish and the controller will To Reset a program press return to the HOME display shown in RUN HOLD button for at section 2 3 least 3 seconds Notes 1 An alternative way to run hold or reset the program from this screen is to scroll to Program Status using and select Run Hold or Reset using w or O 2 Ifthe program number has been previously selected the program can be run held or reset just by pressing the RUN HOLD button Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 22 16 Program Set Up Parameters in the Program Setup page allow you to configure and view parameters common to all programs for both program channels 1 and 2 This page of parameters is only available in configuration level Press as many times as necessary to select the Program Setup page The following table lists parameters available List Header Program Setup Sub header Ch1 or Ch2 Name Parameter Descrip
370. lect the required switch number using or Shows the state of the switch Switch off It is normal to wire this Switch on parameter to a digital function within the controller such as a programmer event The state of the switch is then determined by the event If it is not wired then the state may changed here The text associated with the switch may be configured in iTools so that it displays a more meaningfull message Examples are Open Closed Up Down etc See section 27 19 for further details To Configure User Switches Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes Swi tok Repeat 3 to select State The state may be 3 Press O to select switch cuit h J changed if not wired Type and a or M to select AutoReset or manReset Tape State Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 353 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 30 Chapter 30 MODBUS SCADA TABLE The SCADA table provides fixed single register Modbus values for use with Third Party Modbus masters in SCADA packages or pics If parameters are not available in this table they can be added from an indirection table using their Modbus addresses Scaling of the parameters has to be configured the Modbus master scaling has to match the 3500 parameter resolution to ensure the decimal point is in the correct position This facility is intended for use by suitably qualified personnel responsible for developing SCADA or plc interfaces 30 1
371. lised Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 77 User Manual 3500 series Controllers O 7 Instrument Diagnostics This list provides fault finding diagnostic information as follows List Header Sub header Dia Inst Name Parameter Description to select CPU Free This is the amount of free CPU Time left It shows the percentage of the tasks ticks that are idle CPU Min A benchmark of the lowest reached value of the CPU free percentage This is the number of ticks that have elapsed while the instrument was performing the control Task Max Con Tick A benchmark of the maximum number of ticks that have elapsed while the instrument was performing the control Task UI Ticks This is the number of ticks that have elapsed while the instrument was performing the user interface Task Max UI Ticks A benchmark of the maximum number of ticks that have elapsed while the instrument was performing the user interface Task Clear Stats Resets the instrument performance bench marks Power FF The measurement of the instrument line voltage Power feedforward can be enabled by setting the parameter Pff En in the Loop Output list section 21 8 1 to Yes This sets the control loop PFF Value parameter such that the control algorithm can compensate for mains voltage fluctuations when the instrument is connected to the same phase as the heater A Man Key The purpose of these parameters is to allow the functions to be wired to for exa
372. ll ramp from its pre set value to the control value Forced Output This feature enables the user to specify what the output of the loop should do when moving from automatic control to manual control The default is that the output power will be maintained and is then editable by the user If forced manual is enabled two modes of operation can be configured The forced manual step setting means the user can set a manual output power value and on transition to manual the output will be forced to that value If TrackEn is enabled the output steps to the forced manual output and then subsequent edits to the output power are tracked back into the manual output value The parameters associated with this feature are ForcedOP and Man Mode Step Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 235 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 21 8 6 21 8 7 21 8 7 1 21 8 7 2 21 8 7 3 236 Power Feed Forward Power feedforward is used when driving a heating element It monitors the line voltage and compensates for fluctuations before they affect the process temperature The use of this will give better steady state performance when the line voltage is not stable It is mainly used for digital type outputs which drive contactors or solid state relays Because it only has value in this type of application it can be switched off using the parameter Pff En It should also be disabled for any non electric heating process It is generall
373. llow external devices to be operated when an alarm occurs Alarms can be divided into two main types These are Analogue and Digital Alarms Analogue alarms operate by monitoring an analogue variable such as the process variable and comparing it with a set threshold Digital alarms operate when the state of a boolean variable changes for example sensor break Number of Alarms UP to eight analogue and eight digital alarms may be configured Any alarm can be enabled in the Inst Enb list as described in Chapter 6 12 1 Further Alarm Definitions Soft Alarms are indication only and do not operate an output Events are indication only but can operate an output They can also be configured using the editing tool iTools to provide text messages on the display For the purpose of the configuration of this controller alarms and events can be considered the same Hysteresis is the difference between the point at which the alarm switches ON and the point at which it switches OFF It is used to provide a definite indication of the alarm condition and to prevent alarm relay chatter Latching Alarm used to hold the alarm condition once an alarm has been detected It may be configured as None Non latching A non latching alarm will reset itself when the alarm condition is removed Auto Automatic An auto latching alarm requires acknowledgement before it is reset The acknowledgement can occur BEFORE the condition cau
374. low two or more single loop controller programmers to by synchronised together This means that the start of each segment excluding the first will begin at the same time Two or more instruments may be synchronised by wiring the end of segment and sync input parameters between units see diagram below Set SyncMode to Yes Note SyncMode is no longer available in the dual programmer Wire instruments as follows Instrument 1 Instrument 2 Instrument 3 Sync Input Sync Input Sync Input End Of Seg End Of Segment End Of Segment D At the end of a segment the program will be put into a temporary hold state program status will continue to show that the program is running the hold beacon will flash the end_of_segment parameter will be true Once all segments have completed the Synclnput goes high and the next segment is started If the SyncMode is disabled the End_Of_Segment parameter is guaranteed to be true for 1 tick at the end of every segment 278 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 23 Chapter 23 Switch Over This facility is commonly used in temperature applications which operate of a wide range of temperature A thermocouple may be used to control at lower temperatures and a pyrometer then controls at very high temperatures Alternatively two thermocouples of different types may be used The diagram below shows a process heating over time with boun
375. ltaneous masters preferred master Slot H only 500KB lt 0 1 of reading 1LSD 1 9Hz 110ms 264Vac double insulation from the PSU and communication Off to 59 9s Default 1 6s User adjustable over full range 2 point gain amp offset Uses 40mV and 80mV ranges dependent on type K J N R S B L T C PL2 custom download 2 16 bits lt 0 2 of reading gt 40 1 rejection of ambient change External reference of 0 C 45 C and 50 C lt 1 C at 25 C ambient 0 400 200 C to 850 C 3 wire Pt100 DIN 43760 lt 0 050 C with 1 6sec filter 16 bits lt 0 033 best fit straight line lt 0 310 C C 0 023 of measurement at 25 C Drift with temperature lt 0 010 C C 25ppm C of measurement from 25 C lt 0 000085 C V maximum of 264Vrms lt 0 240 C V maximum of 280mV pk pk O to 22 matched lead resistance 100MQ 200u4A 40mV to 40mV lt 1 0uV with 1 6sec filter 16 bits lt 0 033 best fit straight line lt 4 6uV 0 053 of measurement at 25 C lt 0 2uV C 28ppm C of measurement from 25 C gt 175dB maximum of 264Vrms gt 101dB maximum of 280mV pk pk Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers Input leakage current Input impedance 80mV Range Range Resolution uV Resolution Linearity error Calibration error Drift with temperature Common mode rejection Series mode rejection Input leakage current Input impedance 2V Range Range Resolution mV
376. lts 1 Units Value The BCD value taken from the first four bits range 0 9 2 Tens Value The BCD value taken from the second four bits range 0 9 3 BCD Value The combined BCD value taken from all 8 bits range 0 99 4 Decimal Value The decimal numeric equivalent of Hexadecimal bits range 0 255 The following table shows how the input bits combine to make the output values Units value 0 9 BCD value 0 99 Decimal value 0 255 Tens value O 9 Since the inputs cannot all be guaranteed to change simultaneously the output will only update after all the inputs have been stable for two samples BCD Parameters List Header BCDIn Sub headers 1 and 2 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press or a to change values Level Digital Input 1 Alterable from the ae operator interface if not Decimal value of the inputs 0 255 See examples below O L3 R O BCD Value Reads the value in BCD of See examples below the switch as it appears on the digital inputs Units Units value of the first See examples below L3 R O switch Tens Units value of the second See examples below L3 R O switch ehhh b Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 13 1 1 Example To wire a BCD Input The BCD digital input parameters may be wired to digital input terminals of the controller There are two standard digital input terminals which may be used LA and LB but it
377. lue will be set to BAD such that any function block using this measurement can operate its own fallback strategy For example the control loop may hold its output to the current value 5 Down Scale The measurement will be forced to adopt its low limit This is like having a resistive pull down on an input circuit In addition the status of the measured value will be set to BAD such that any function block using this measurement can operate its own fallback strategy For example the control loop may hold its output to the current value Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 67 User Manual 3500 series Controllers dol 68 Edge Wires If the Loop Main AutoMan parameter was wired from a logic input in the conventional manner it would be impossible to put the instrument into manual from the front panel of the instrument Other parameters need to be controlled by wiring but also need to be able to change under other circumstances e g Alarm Acknowledgements for this reason some Boolean parameters are wired in an alternative way These are listed as follows SET DOMINANT When the wired in value is 1 the parameter is always updated This will have the effect of overriding any changes through the front panel or through digital communications When the wired in value changes to 0 the parameter is initially changed to 0 but is not continuously updated This permits the value to be changed through the front panel or through digital c
378. lutions for example 1 10th of minutes or 1 10th of seconds O Seconds the Time parameter will be presented as SSS S 1 Minutes the Time parameter will be presented as mmm m 150 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 14 8 Broadcast Communications Broadcast communications allows 3500 series controllers to send a single value from a master to a number of slave instruments using the broadcast address 0 with Modbus broadcast function code 6 Write single value This allows the 3500 to link through digital communications with other products without the need for a supervisory PC to create a small system solution Example applications include multi zone profiling applications or cascade control using a second controller The facility provides a simple and precise alternative to analogue retransmission A Warning When using broadcast communications bear in mind that updated values are sent many times a second Before using this facility check that the instrument to which you wish to send values can accept continuous writes Note that in common with many third party lower cost units the Eurotherm 2200 series and the 3200 series prior to version V1 10 do not accept continuous writes to the temperature setpoint Damage to the internal non volatile memory could result from the use of this function If in any doubt contact the manufacturer of the device in question for advice When using the 3200 series fitted
379. ly processes Target Setpoint Tune Control Point KH High Output as Zero Output y A Start of Autotune First overshoot t ctoD calculate CBL Peak to Peak PV ZANI re or 1 E F MAY gt Hysteresis D E F to to F calculate PID F End of Autotune Figure 21 8 Autotune from below SP Heat Only For a tune from below setpoint CBL is calculated on the basis of the size of the overshoot assuming it was not set to Auto in the initial conditions CBH is then set to the same value as CBL Note As with the heat cool case Autotune can also occur when the initial PV is above SP The sequence is the same as tuning from below setpoint except that the sequence starts with natural cooling applied at B after the first one minute settling time In this case CBH is calculated CBL is then set to the same value as CBH Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 219 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 21 6 12 Autotune at Setpoint Heat Cool It is sometimes necessary to tune at the actual setpoint being used This is allowable in 3500 series controllers and the sequence of operation is described below Target Setpoint High Output fF Zero Output Low Output I i i i Period A Ato B C to G G to H Pkto Pk Hysteresis a ee b ca ames e e oe fi N e e So j gt e ee le e o cs A Start of
380. m PA da Ar Aem t Threshold Value mal 2 arm 2 Tiesto Value mal 13 arm Tire vae O mal pe arma Tires Valae JO mal As Jam 5 Tire Value JO mal ho arm ThresholdValie JO mal Ar arm 7 Tiesto Value mal 0 heme Tire Value PO mal write Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Moons A DN Honda OR loa Output imita pem Ro loa Serpa Rate Lim Disable em Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 383 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 384 E s mocie2 Comet Vales em ps moi cremes vae peer O Module 1 Channel 1 Offset Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Mnemonic 3500 parameter Details Notes Hex decimal xm Module 3 Sensor Break Decimal xn Module 4 Sensor Break Decimal XO Module 5 Sensor Break Decimal xp Module 6 Sensor Break Decimal xq Std PV Sensor Break Decimal xr Analogue Alarms Summary Byte Decimal Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 385 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 32 Appendix A Safety and EMC Information This controller is manufactured in the UK by Eurotherm Controls Ltd Please read this section carefully before installing the controller This controller is intended for industrial temperature and process control applications when it will meet the requirements of the European Directives on Safety and EMC If the instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual the safety or EMC protection provided by the instrument
381. m the probe when the last clean Conditions exist that prevented a clean cycle 3500 series Controllers Sub headers Clean Access Level Value Do Dio change 0 00 00 to 500 00 0 00 00 to 500 00 No R O Yes Yes No 0 00 00 to 500 00 No Yes 99999 to 99999 1100 R O Z O No No Yes o l SS o No No Yes No R O Yes Off R O On Off R O On Off R O On Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers 16 5 Example of Carbon Potential Control Connections In this example the following modules are assumed Module 1 Dual relay or logic output Module 3 Analogue Input set to HZ Volts 0 2V input Module 4 Triple Logic Output Probe clean digital input is on the LB logic input The sooting alarm is operated by the AA Relay The temperature is measured on the fixed PV input Motorised Valve Power supply for valve drive Cooling Solenoid Enrichment Gas Sooting Alarm A Zirconia probe User Manual Probe Clean Demand Ig _ thermocouple Ensure that the current output of the triple logic module is not exceeded see specification section 33 Electronically driven solenoids may be used or alternatively use relay outputs in place of the triple logic module Zirconia Volt Source Figure 16 2 Example of Carbon Potential Controller Connections Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 179 User Manual 3500 seri
382. mber Module Part No SUB part number Order Code Displayed of As Channels No Module No module fitted Change over relay 2 pin relay Dual relay e DualRelay Triac DualTriac Triple logic output AH025735U002 SUB35 TP AH025735U003 SUB35 LO Isolated single logic output Triac AH025253U002 SUB35 T2 AH025409U002 SUB35 TT Dual triac DC Output DC control AH025728U003 SUB35 D4 AHO25728U002 SUB35 D DC retransmission Analogue input module DCInput a AHO25686U004 SUB35 AM Triple logic input TriLogIP AHO25317U002 SUB35 TL Triple contact input TriConlP AH025861U002 SUB35 TK TXPSU MN AHO25862U002 SUB35 MS TP LO T2 TT D4 AM TL TK Potentiometer input VU 24V transmitter MS supply 5V or 10VdcTransducer power supply Dual DC control output O AA I 09 A N A AHO25864U002 SUB35 VU Trane AH026306U002 SUB35 G3 DualDCOut AHO27249 U002 SUB35 DO HR HFDCOut MA AHO27249 U003 SUB35 HR Table 10 I O Modules COvrRelay 1 AHO25408U002 SUB35 R4 Form A AHO25245U002 SUB35 R2 Relay AH025246U002 SUB35 RR 2 1 2 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 2 High resolution DC output If an incorrect module is fitted for example from a 2000 series controller Bad Ident will be displayed Parameters for the above modules such as input output limits filter times and scaling of the lO can be adjusted in the Module IO pages 96 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 35
383. me Time Elapsed Time Triggered JJ LJ This diagram shows how the Input can be used to gate the Timer as a type of hold Input Jo LILilLj Le Time Edited gt gt gt A B C D Time e gt utput A B C D Figure 15 6 One Shot Timer Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 163 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 15 2 5 Compressor or Minimum On Timer Mode This type of timer may also be known as an Off Delay function where the output goes on when the input goes active and remains on for a specified period after the input goes inactive It may be used for example to ensure that a compressor is not cycled excessively e The output will be set to On when the Input changes from Off to On e When the Input changes from On to Off the elapsed time will start incrementing towards the set Time e The Output will remain On until the elapsed time has reached the set Time The Output will then switch Off e Ifthe Input signal returns to On while the Output is On the elapsed time will reset to 0 ready to begin incrementing when the Input switches Off e The Triggered variable will be set while the elapsed time is gt 0 It will indicate that the timer is counting The diagram illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different input conditions Output S Time 2 Time Elapsed Time Triggered A Jl LI L Figure 15 7 Minimum On Timer Under Different Input Conditions 164 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15
384. me algorithm will run If set to Auto the minimum on time will be 110mS If the logic is used to control an external relay Min OnTime should be set to a minimum of say 10 seconds to prevent the relay from switching too rapidly 7 m Co hal R O L3 No decimal points One decimal point Two decimal points Three decimal points Four decimal points These parameters allow high and low limits to be applied to the output against a set limit of the output demand signal from the PID loop See also section 10 4 3 for further information The output will drive to electrical low value regardless of the Invert parameter The output will drive to electrical high value regardless of the Invert parameter Cont The output will assume a status according to how it is driven For motor valve outputs the options are Frz Freeze only shown if the output is configured for valve position control Cont Continue only shown if the output is configured for valve position control On unless Invert Yes Off unless Invert Yes Valve Rais The following parameters are additional if IO TEF Inertia Set this parameter to match the inertia if any of the motor 0 0 to 9999 9 secs oo la Backlash Compensates for any backlash which may be presentinthe 0 0 to 9999 9 secs E linkages Cal State Calibration status See also section 8 2 4 This is only applicable to valve position output
385. mer 1 Run PSP COMZ 10001 3508 Parameter Explorer Metrcommes All Block Mode a Enable Master Comme Block Enable Yes fil Usa 3 Val Pot Masher Comma Port H 0 4 SuspendCount Falwe Court Beloee Suspan 5 Suspende xceec Suspend Count Exceeded Ho 0 va Suspender Suspend Retry Interval Xie a Node Slave Instrument Mode Addn 4 Fune Modbus Function Code FuncOb 6 Address Parameher Addiest 1294 E ShDotal Slave Daba 1 59 620 Programmer 1 Run PSP E Foma Data Formal Sin 0 Factor Data Facto 1 000 Disa Data Dilpe 0 000 ExcephonLode Las Modbus Exception Cod 0 TrarsaciCount Total Transaction Cour 4553065 SucceseCourt Suececelul Transaction Cour 496306 ErorCotunt Message E mor Count 0 Excephonlount Exception Court 0 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 343 User Manual Tab 4 Master Comms Block 4 3216 Slave 4 is set up in Tab 4 The Master is continuously writing Target Setpoint parameter address 2 to Slave 4 at instrument address 5 using Function Code 6 The Target Setpoint for slave 4 is wired to the programmer PSP Programmer 1 Run PSP 33 COM 2 10001 3508 Parameter Explorer Mstroomms a ra La suspendH etry Master Comme Block Enable Mies ber Comme Part Foie Court Belore Suspen Suspende BEEE Suspend Loum Exceeded Suspend Rety Interval Slave Iretrument Node Aidi Modbus Function Code Parameter Addiers Slawe Data 1 Data Format Data Factor Data Of
386. methods for tracking are available such that the transfer between setpoints and between operational modes will not cause a bump in the setpoint Programmer SP Enable Rem SP Por _ 7 PSP2 PSP3 Range Max Local Pamot Target SP SP High Limit Range Min SP Low Limit SP2 Enab SP1 Enab Trim High Local SP RemoteTrim Trim Low Remote SP Remote only Remote Type Remote Local Trim Local Trim Range Other inputs PV oe Ramp rate Servo SP changed Ramp Status Figure 21 12 Setpoint Function Block Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 225 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 21 7 1 Loop Parameters Setpoint A summary of the parameters used to configure the setpoints are listed in the following table List Header Lp1 or Lp2 Sub header SP Name Parameter Description Value Default Access Level to select r Da Drie change values Range Hi The Range limits provide a set of 79999 to 99999 absolute maximums and minimums for nen Conf setpoints within the control loop Any derived setpoints are ultimately clipped to be within the Range limits If the Proportional Band is configured as of Span the span is derived from the Range limits SP Select Select local or alternate setpoint SP1 Setpoint 1 SP1 L3 SP2 Setpoint 2 Range Lo Primary setpoint for the controller Between SP high and SP low limits SP1 N
387. minals are not isolated from the PV The fixed digital logic outputs may be used to power remote 2 wire transmitters The fixed digital I O are however not isolated from the PV input circuit so this does not allow the use of 3 or 4 wire transmitters An isolated module must be used for the 3 and 4 wire types 1 6 4 Digital Logic Outputs used to power a remote 2 wire transmitter Output 1 Output 2 e The parallel logic outputs supply gt 20mA 18V e Note The Digital lO terminals are not isolated from the PV e Connect the supplied load resistor equal to 2 49Q for mA input 4 20mA 1 6 5 Digital Logic Outputs used to power a remote 3 wire transmitter 3 we lsolated Transmitter Transmitter Option module 24V gt 20mA 1 6 6 Digital Logic Outputs used to power a remote 4 wire transmitter 4 Wire Isolated Transmitter Transmitter Option module 24V gt 20mA Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 19 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 1 6 7 1 6 7 1 1 6 8 20 Relay Output AA e Relay rating min 1V ImAdc Max 264Vac 2A resistive e Relay shown in de energised state ad e lsolated output 240Vac CATII General Note About Inductive Loads High voltage transients may occur when switching inductive loads such as some contactors or solenoid valves For this type of load it is recommended that a snubber is connected across
388. mple a digital input so that the function can be controlled from an external source Prog Key Run Hold Key Error Count The number of errors logged since the last Clear Log Note If an error occurs multiple times only the first occurrence will be logged but each event will increment the count Error 1 to The first 8 errors to occur See Note 1 below for options Error 8 Clear Log Clears the error log entries and count String Count Number of User Strings Defined String Space Space Available For User Strings Segments Left Number of Available Program Segments Gives the number of unused program segments Each time a segment is allocated to a program this value is reduced by one Ctl Stack Free Control Stack Free Space words The number of words of un used stack for the control task Comms Stack Comms Stack Free Space words Free The number of words of un used stack for the comms task UI Stack Free HMI Stack Free Space words The number of words of un used stack for the HMI task Idle Stack Idle Stack Free Space words Free The number of words of un used stack for the idle background task Max Inst Segs Displays the maximum number of program segments 500 read only Segs Per Prog Displays the maximum number of segments available in any program 50 read only Cntr1 Overrun This is a flag which is set if the tick rate exceeds 110ms Pwr Fail Count This counts the number of times that the controller has
389. mple the UsrTxt1 Input is wired to the LA logic input When the logic input is true 1 the user text will display Large When it is false 0 it will call up Small These values may be promoted to a user page Select El ser Pages in iTools Use the Style Value only Split Row Single Row Dual Row or Triple Row 340 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 27 19 To Name a User Switch The User Switch function block has been added to 3500 series controllers from software version 2 70 Refer to chapter 29 for further information By default the controller will display On or Off when the User Switch is operated A customised name up to eight characters may be applied the switch 1 Inthe browser select the Switch number 2 Highlight the StateUsrTxtOff parameter and type in the appropriate text 3 Repeat for StateUsrTxtOn iTools COM1 1ID001 3504 Parameter Explorer Switch 1 E File Device Explorer View Options Window Help r a Y h oP x a f Graphical Wiring E Parameter Explorer E Device Panel IE Terminal Wiring Aa Device Recipe LS Watch Recipe Fe Programmer ts User Pages de OPC Scope w New File Open File Load Save Print Scan Add Remove Views Help Wom 10001 3504 eos it ae al Name Description Wired From Type Switch Type State Switch State Closed 0 Y StateUsrTxtOff User Text to replace Off for Switch State Closed ad Browse S
390. n instead of being used to force the Status it will indicate the status of the value as inherited form the wired connection to Value Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 297 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 26 Chapter 26 Calibration The controller is calibrated during manufacture using traceable standards for every input range It is therefore not necessary to calibrate the controller when changing ranges Furthermore the use of a continuous automatic zero correction of the input ensures that the calibration of the instrument is optimised during normal operation To comply with statutory procedures such as the Heat Treatment Specification AMS2750 the calibration of the instrument can be verified and re calibrated if considered necessary in accordance with the instructions given in this chapter For example AMS2750 states Instructions for calibration and recalibration of field test instrumentation and control monitoring and recording instrumentation as defined by the NADCAP Aerospace Material Specification for pyrometry AMS2750D clause 3 2 5 3 2 5 3 and sub clauses Including Instruction for the application and removal of offsets defined in clause 3 2 4 26 1 To Check Input Calibration The PV Input may be configured as mV mA thermocouple or platinum resistance thermometer 26 1 1 Precautions Before checking or starting any calibration procedure the following precautions should be taken e When calibrating mV input
391. n aenea E E sseceresesecesseecsueceiets 17 E e A NOOA A I AE I E E EE E EEOAE T ET AEE ueeineanae 17 to Standard CONMCCUONS siine EE SENES E E E A E E 18 Ok PYinputiMe asun PU does 18 Le O e tod des 19 tes DIC ita Loge Output a E E 19 1 6 4 Digital Logic Outputs used to power a remote 2 wire transMitteT oooonccnncninnicninnncnconconcnncnncnncnncnn nono ncnncnncnno 19 1 6 5 Digital Logic Outputs used to power a remote 3 wire transmitter ss ssssssessssssisssisistsriststsrisestesesesreseeee 19 1 6 6 Digital Logic Outputs used to power a remote 4 wire transMitteT oooonconicnciicnnnnnonconconcnncnnnnncnn cnn non ncnncnnnancnno 19 LOr Rely OPUS 20 OS POWEESUODIV Connec IONS enian E E 20 t Plugin O Module Connections enasna A Ai 21 E Relyizpinjand Dual Relay Modulo 21 LAS Change OVER Clay aa A a aa E N 21 1 7 3 Wipe Logic and Single Isolated Logic OUTPUT isa capac AEE EE as 21 kA aean Duaa e enor tastes RR RS O 21 o Ge Gio chige ameter ete N eer rier ee erent ernece err er rete eer naMenr ence eT err en rma A 22 thos DEBES Mal SS ION ada 22 O exexats nE AAT sauanvece shun itiar ounces deeton tie eiuavactetawaiddnicnvadeuvennier T 22 1 7 8 High Resolution DC Retransmission amp Transmitter Power Supply eeeeeceecesceseeseeseeneeeeeeseeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeenes 22 A Toe ko gjenom a A A de iaun enuaairenianistaeamnnuransaTele 22 1 7 10 TONE Contacta oda aaa loa 22 1 7 11 DONG Tr MES ace eae AAA ARA T ETE 23 1 7 12 Et
392. n the iTools Handbook 27 13 141 Save to File The configuration of the controller made in the previous sections may be saved as a clone file This file can then be used to download the configuration to further instruments From the File menu use Save to File or use the Save button on the Toolbar 27 13 1 1 Loading a Clone File Using the IR amp Config Clips When iTools is communicating with the instrument via the IR or Config Clips and a clone file is loaded ALL parameters are cloned including communications parameters This is possible as the actual communications mechanism will not be altered by changing these parameters The communication mechanism will be fixed within the instrument by the use of these clips see above 27 13 2 To Clone a New Controller Connect the new controller to iTools and Scan to find this instrument as described at the beginning of this chapter From the File menu select Load Values From File or select Load from the toolbar Choose the required file and follow the instruction The new instrument will be configured to this file 27 13 3 To Clone Directly from One Controller to Another Connect the second controller to iTools and scan for the new instrument From the File menu select Send to Device Select the controller to be cloned and follow the instructions The old instrument will be configured the same as the new one 336 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Co
393. ne Backscroll When in a list of parameters press followed by OJ With held down continue to press a to scroll parameters backwards With O still pressed you can press O to page forward This action is the same as pressing alone Jump to the HOME display Alarm Ack reset Press and when the HOME screen is being displayed to jump to the Acknowledge All alarms page Pressing acknowledges all alarms if it can see section 2 7 1 Pressing cancels the operation 40 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 2 5 To Set the Required Temperature Setpoint A parameter value can be changed if it is preceded by In the example shown below this is SP1 the setpoint for loop 1 To change the value press Mor The output level shown in the HOME display will change to indicate the source of the setpoint while either of the buttons is pressed in this example SP 1 3504 View 3508 View Q O When the D or 4 a When the pS Loop 1 button is pressed the Loop 1 button is pressed the Setpoint setpoint source is Setpoint setpoint source is Value shown e g SP1 Value h e g SP1 mo al lt gt Press and hold O Press and hold Press and hold O Press and hold to lower the setpoint to raise the setpoint to lower the setpoint to raise the setpoint Figure 2 3 Temperature Setti
394. ng Delayed Start Program will run after a set time has 0 00 to 499 99 ee L1 if configured elapsed Status Program Status Prog ended te Prog Hold running Holdback Prog held In holdback Ch1 PSP or PSP Profile setpoint value channel 1 Can be ae in Hold rn TC ae Ch2 PSP Profile setpoint value channel 2 Can be changed in Hold OOOO S Fast Run This allows the program to be run ata No Yes No fast rate and may be used for testing the program It can only be selected before the program is run Rst UsrVal User value to be used in reset state Defines the value for UsrValOP In segments that specify PVEvent UsrValOP is set to this value Only appears when the program is in reset mode Ch1 Seg Target Requested setpoint at end of segment or Segment Target Ch2 Seg Target Seg Duration or Segment time Time to Target Segment Rate programmer Rate of change of SP Ramp Rate programmer Cur Seg Type Single programmer only A E Cycles Left Number of repeat cycles left to run 1 to maximum number of L1 R O in Run Can only be changed in Hold or Reset cycles set Events State of the event outputs when the evant inactive or program is running or when in reset E l Event active Rst Events PrgTimeLeft Time remaining to end of selected hrs mins secs L1 program GoBackCyclesLeft The number of cycles left if Go Back is 1 to maximum number of configured and active cycles set Part No HA027988 Issue
395. ng To change Loop 2 setpoint press Loop 2 SP value is preceded by Y Press O or as above to change the value The action is then the same as for loop 1 A momentary press of either button will show the setpoint in use eg SP1 By default the new setpoint is accepted when the button is released and is indicated by a brief flash of the setpoint display The setpoint may be made to operate continuously by enabling the parameter ImmSP see section 6 4 If a single loop is configured or the individual loop summary is selected see section 2 8 1 pressing or will change the setpoint in the same way as described above Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 41 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 2 6 To Select Auto Manual Operation Press A MAN button If two loops are enabled and the dual loop overview is being 3504 3508 View displayed pressing the A MAN button will toggle loop 1 between Auto and Manual The The MAN beacon SVEcTHSH A EUROTHERM Murias d illuminates gt i beacon MAN will light and the The SP line indication of output power is gt changes to show _ AS y output demand preceded by Y Press and hold M or a to decrease or increase the output power The output power will change continuously while either Dor U is pressed Figure 2 4 Auto Manual Selection To switch loop 2 between Auto and Manual Muh ES Ed press to scroll into the loop 2 s
396. ng overshoot Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 211 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 21 5 9 21 5 10 212 Integral De bump This is a feature included in the controller which is not accessible to the user When changing from Manual to Auto control the integral component is forced to the output value the proportional component the derivative component OP P D This ensures that no change occurs in output at the point of switch over and is termed Bumpless Transfer The output power will then gradually change in accordance with the demand from the PID algorithm Bumpless transfer also occurs when changing from Auto to Manual control At the point of changeover the output power remains the same as the demand in the auto state It can then be raised or lowered by the operator from this level Loop Break The loop is considered to be broken if the PV does not respond to a change in the output in a given time Since the time of response will vary from process to process the Loop Break Time LBT PID list parameter allows a time to be set before a Loop Break Alarm Lp Break Diag list is initiated The Loop Break Alarm attempts to detect loss of restoring action in the control loop by checking the control output the process value and its rate of change This is not to be confused with Load Failure and Partial Load Failure The loop break algorithm is purely software detection Occurrence of a loop break causes the
397. ng with ramp rate at tag address 5381 as shown in the diagram above 148 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 14 6 DeviceNet Protocol DeviceNet has been designed as a low level network for communication between Programmable Logic Controllers PLCs and devices such as switches and IO devices Each device and or controller is anode on the network 3500 series controllers can be included in a DeviceNet installation using the DeviceNet interface module plugged into communications slot H For further information regarding configuration of 3500 series controllers for a DeviceNet network refer to the DeviceNet Communications Handbook HA027506 which may be downloaded from www eurotherm com It is not within the scope of this manual to describe the DeviceNet standard and for this you should refer to the DeviceNet specification which may be found at www odva org 14 6 1 Devicenet Parameters If Protocol is set Devicenet the following parameters are available List Header Comms Sub header H only Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press 2 or a to change values Level module is fitted Comms Communications module fitted Digital communications Devicenet m C protocol Communications baud rate 125K 250K 500K Network connected and operational Network initialising Network ready to accept connection Network offline E Status Comms network status Running Init Ready
398. ngineering units or The proportional term in display units 7999 9 or delivers an output which is 0 0 is proportional to the size of the error nota signal practical See also section 21 5 2 setting NO M oO Ti Ti2 Ti3 Integral time constant Set1 Set2 Set3 Units seconds 360 Removes steady state control offsets by Off Integral action ramping the output up or down in disabled proportion to the amplitude and duration of the error signal See also section 21 5 3 Derivative time constant Set1 Set2 Set3 Units seconds Determines how strongly the controller Off Derivative action will react to the rate of change in the disabled measured value Itis used to control overshoot and undershoot and to restore the PV rapidly if there is a sudden change in demand Td Td2 Td3 See also section 21 5 4 m m Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 207 User Manual 3500 series Controllers List Header Lp1 or Lp2 Sub header PID Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select es 2 op Ge change values Level R2G R2G2 Relative cool gain Set1 Set2 Set3 0 1 to R2G3 Only present if cooling has been 10 0 configured Sets the cooling proportional band which compensates for differences between heating power gain and cooling power gain See also section 21 5 5 CBH CBH2 Cutback high Set1 Set2 Set3 Auto 3 PB CBH3 The number of display units above setpoint at which the controller outpu
399. ngle character requires 8 bits of data plus start stop and optional parity up to 11 bits per byte may be transmitted 9600 baud equates approximately to 1000 Bytes per second 4800 baud is half the speed approx 500 Bytes per second In calculating the soeed of communications in your system it is often the Latency between a message being sent and a reply being started that dominates the speed of the network For example if a message consists of 10 characters 10msec at 9600 Baud and the reply consists of 10 characters then the transmission time would be 20 msec However if the Latency is 20msec then the transmission time has become 40msec 14 3 4 Parity Parity is a method of ensuring that the data transferred between devices has not been corrupted Parity is the lowest form of integrity in the message It ensures that a single byte contains either an even or an odd number of ones or zero in the data In industrial protocols there are usually layers of checking to ensure that the first byte transmitted is good Modbus applies a CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check to the data to ensure that the package is correct 14 3 5 Communication Address On a network of instruments an address is used to specify a particular instrument Each instrument on a network should have a unique address Address 255 and address 244 when using Ethernet is reserved for factory use 14 3 5 1 Example To Set Up Instrument Address This can be done in operator l
400. nnel 1 calibrate e g if a valve is used to control CH2 Calibrate channel 2 the cooling of a process then the ch2 potentiometer must be calibrated Note Potentiometer input modules must be fitted and wired directly to the loops Ch1 or Ch2 pot position parameters E OO The position of the channel 1 actuator as measured by a pot position feedback This is used by the bounded VP control algorithm as the PV of the positional loop Note PotCal can be used to automatically calibrate the potentiometer feedback Indicates the Channel 1 pot is broken Off This parameter requires that the pot On position is wired from an input channel This value is taken from the wire E OO m m m m O The position of the channel 2 actuator as measured by a pot position feedback This is used by the bounded VP control algorithm as the PV of the positional loop Indicates the Channel 2 pot is broken Off Off This value is taken from the wire and is On provided by the pot input module Defines the action which takes place if The valve is opened the feedback potentiometer becomes Thevalveie closed open circuit ER P o Rest The valve remains in its An alarm message is given whenever the current position pec Model The controller tracks the actual position of the valve and sets up a model of the system so that it continues to control when the potentiometer becomes faulty Limits the rate at which the output from Off to 9999 9
401. nsor and the output device may be at supply potential It is only available as a time proportioning or on off output List Header Mod Sub headers xA Name Parameter Description Value Default Access O to Press D or to change values Level select lO Type To configure the function of the OnOff On off output Conf R O relay ES Time Prop Time proportioning output Invert Sets the sense of the logic output This only applies ifthe output is configured as OnOff Non inverted Output off logic 0 Conf R O when PID demand off For control this L3 is when PV gt SP Output on logic 1 when PID demand off For control this is when PV lt SP This is the normal setting for control O Yes Inverted Output off logic 0 For an alarm this is when the alarm is active Output on logic 1 For an alarm this is when the alarm is in active This is the normal setting for alarms SbyAct Standby action Determines the The output will drive to electrical low Conf output action when the value regardless of the Invert R O L3 See also instrument is in Standby Mode parameter section 8 2 1 O 3 The output will drive to electrical high value regardless of the Invert parameter Cont The output will assume a status according to how it is driven Off if Invert No On if Invert No Output off if Invert No L3 R O Meas Value Current state of the outp
402. nstrument The program name is also written to the instrument To enter a name either double click the trace label or click the small grey button on it You can enter up to 16 characters as the name Entering a Program You can connect to a device or load a clone file as you normally would and then select the programmer view using the view button on the toolbar or the context menu for the device To create a new program create a new clone file and start the programmer editor using that clone Note that if you need to be able to put the device simulation into configuration mode this can only be done within iTools Making Changes to a Program There are three tabs along the bottom of the editor the last one shows the segment data in a graph and a grid The others show standard Tools lists which are used to set up programmer related parameters for the whole instrument and for the current program You will only see the parameters that set up instrument wide program parameters if the instrument is in configuration mode The Segment Parameters tab is the default and the one where the program itself is edited To change a numeric value click in the tab type the new number and enter To change an enumerated value click on the down arrow button and choose the new value The segment values are edited in place whereas the Tools parameter lists popup a dialog to change the value If you are connected to a device the changes will be written to
403. nt Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 261 E ww E Ww m m m User Manual 3500 series Controllers List Header Program Edit Sync All Sub header 1 to 50 These may also have user defined program names Parameter Description Value Default Access Press D or to change Level values Duration Sets the time to execute the segment 0 00 00 to 500 00 L3 1 sec to 500 hours Ch1 Hldbck Sets the type of holdback applicable to the Off No holdback ES Type selected segment in program channel 1 applied Ch2 Hldbck Sets the type of holdback applicable to the Deviation high L3 Type selected segment in program channel 2 L3 Band Deviation high and E ESO Ch1 PV Event PV Event provides an alarm facility on the None No PV event in this None main PV in Ch1 segment Each segment may be configured with an Abe l Eventis triggered independent threshold value and alarm type when the PV PVEventOP is set accordingly in each becomes greater segment to indicate the state of the PV Event than theahrechold See also section 22 4 re ml ES becomes less than the threshold Dev Hi Event is triggered when the PV becomes higher than the program setpoint by the amount of the threshold Dev Lo Event is triggered when the PV becomes lower than the program setpoint by the amount of the threshold Event is triggered when the PV differs from the program setpoint by the amount of the threshold Ch1 PV Channel 1 PV th
404. nt bit 4 for segment 10 dwell 5 Digital Event bit 4 for segment 11 ramp 6 Digital Event bit 4 for segment 12 dwell 6 Digital Event bit 4 for segment 13 Digital Event bit 4 for segment 14 dwell 7 ramp 7 Digital Event bit 4 for segment 15 ramp 8 Digital Event bit 4 for segment 16 dwell 8 3500 Support Digital Event bit 4 for End segment Not used Spare 3500 Support Digital Event bit 2 for segment 1 ramp 1 Digital Event bit 2 for segment 2 dwell 1 Digital Event bit 2 for segment 3 ramp 2 Digital Event bit 2 for segment 4 dwell 2 Digital Event bit 2 for segment 5 ramp 3 Digital Event bit 2 for segment 6 dwell 3 Digital Event bit 2 for segment 7 ramp 4 Digital Event bit 2 for segment 8 dwell 4 Digital Event bit 2 for segment 9 ramp 5 Digital Event bit 2 for segment 10 dwell 5 Digital Event bit 2 for segment 11 ramp 6 Digital Event bit 2 for segment 12 dwell 6 Digital Event bit 2 for segment 13 Digital Event bit 2 for segment 14 dwell 7 ramp 7 Digital Event bit 2 for segment 15 ramp 8 Digital Event bit 2 for segment 16 dwell 8 381 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 31 1 9 Digital Output Status Word2 06 Bt 818 902 3 4 Function Clear Set 3500 Support AN End to output 2 Digital Event bit 2 for End segment Not used Spare Not used Spare 31 1 10 Additional mnemonics typically from 2400 38 N pri p
405. ntrollers 356 MODBUS MODBUS Parameter Enumerations Hex 0x0047 Alarm 4 Hysteresis 0x0048 Loop 1 PID ActiveSet 1 set 1 2 set 2 3 set 3 4 set 4 5 set 5 6 set 6 auto 030065 0x0067 0 0068 0 0069 Ox006a Instrument Display HomePage O access page 1 loop summary 2 program summary 3 custom page 1 4 custom page Y N ojo N 00 OO Oo OIO O JO O Se 00 00 NO 00 CO N G N Oo1 amp OO Z 101 103 104 105 106 a O a 2 5 custom page 3 6 custom page 4 7 custom page 5 8 custom page 9 custom age 7 10 custom page 8 Pag Pag Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 107 111 112 116 117 118 121 122 123 124 126 127 128 131 133 134 138 139 140 141 0x008b 0 08 0x0070 0 0074 030075 010076 030079 0x007a 0 3508 13504 0x007b 0x007 0 off Tor 0x0085 008a 0x008b 0x008 0 No Yes 0 008d Ox 0088 0x0093 Access Goto O Level 1 1 Level 2 3 Level 3 4 Configuration 00093 0 0099 OF Of O Ojoj jOo OoO O O JO O O O Oj ojo o Oj ojo o jojo o jo o oO jO jJO jO O XIXIxXxI x x x x x X x lt x X x X X 1X 1K XIXI XIJ K KL xK LK kK KK X Oojoj jo o OoO O JO O O O olojo o O O O 1O O O0 O0 0 0 0O O 0O 0O O Ojojo OoO oO O JO O O O Ojojo o oOoj jojoj ojojoj jojo o o jO jO jOoO O QAQAI IO O O O O O O oO 00 CO COO WI N Os OO OO O amp O OT OT C1 O11 O1 C1 O17 C1 BY HB O N OlaolN aA ayo lo Os w o gt o
406. ntrollers User Manual 27 14 Clone of Comms Port Settings Assuming that the PC is connected to the H port on the controller then the settings on this port are not cloned since this would then prevent communications to the controller and hence prevent cloning of other parameters However the J port settings will be cloned Similarly if the PC is connected to the J port of the controller then the H port setting will be cloned but not J If the PC is connected through the IR port or via the RJ45 clip then both H and J port settings will be cloned 27 15 User Text User defined text can be applied to selected parameters in controllers from software versions 2 30 User text is particularly useful when used in conjunction with User Pages section 27 7 It is configured using Tools configuration package it cannot be configured through the controller user interface and is implemented in two ways 1 Afixed set of boolean parameters shown in the table below have dedicated user strings The Value of these parameters may be customised and it will then be shown as such in the enumeration of that parameter Function block Default Text Dedicated User String Tools Browser Browser Two Input Logic Operators see logic OutUsrTxtOff a 1 to 24 operators section 18 1 OutUsrTxtOn Eight Inout Logic Operators see logic OutUsrTxtOff Lgc8 1 to 2 operators section 18 1 1 A OutUsrTxtOn Programmer Event Outputs 1 to 8 see Off EO1Usr
407. nue The valve outputs will assume a status according to how they are driven e If locally wired the output will continue to be driven by the wire e If not wired or driven by communications the output will maintain the last state written to it If not wired but written to by communications the output will continue to be controlled by the communications messages In this case care should be taken to allow for the loss of communications 8 2 2 Cycle Time and Minimum OnTime Algorithms The Cycle Time algorithm has been added from firmware version 2 70 The Cycle Time algorithm and the Min OnTime algorithm are mutually exclusive and provide compatibility with existing controller systems Both algorithms apply to time proportioning outputs only and are not shown for on off control The Min OnTime parameter is only displayed when the Cycle Time is set to Off A fixed cycle time allows the output to switch on and off within the time period set by the parameter For example for a cycle time of 20 seconds 25 power demand would turn the output on for 5 seconds and off for 15 seconds 50 power demand would turn the output on and off for 10 seconds for 75 power demand the output is on for 15 seconds and off for 5 seconds Fixed cycle time may be preferred when driving mechanical devices such as refrigeration compressors The Min OnTime algorithm allows a limit to be applied to the switching device so that it
408. nues to be active until both the alarm condition is removed AND the alarm is acknowledged The acknowledgement can occur BEFORE the condition causing the alarm is removed Manual Latched Alarms The alarm continues to be active until both the alarm condition is removed AND the alarm is acknowledged The acknowledgement can only occur AFTER the condition causing the alarm is removed 118 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers 12 4 Analogue Alarm Parameters User Manual Eight analogue alarms are available Parameters do not appear if the Alarm Type None The following table shows the parameters to set up and configure analogue alarms List Header Name to select AnAlm Sub headers 1 to 8 Default Access Level Parameter Description Value Press M or Dto change values Input Reference Threshold Output Inhibit Hyst Latch lt O D Ack Block Priority Part No HA027988 Selects the type of alarm This is the parameter that will be monitored and compared against the threshold value to see if an alarm condition has occurred The reference value is used in deviation alarms and the threshold is measured from this reference and not from its absolute value The threshold is the value that the input is compared against to determine if an alarm has occurred The output indicates whether the alarm is on or off depending on the alarm condition latching and
409. ny Alarm New Alarm Note 4 fitted ProgEvnt1 to 8 LP1SBrkOP LP2SBrkOP LPsSBrk Programmer options only available if the controller is a programmer controller Init Min On Time Auto Note 2 RIyOP AA 0 01 to 150 00 Note 3 Note 1 Parameters only appear if the function has been turned on eg If Control Channel 1 Off Chan 1 does not appear in this list When a control channel is configured for valve positioning LgclO LA and LgclO LB act as a complementary pair If for example Chan 1 is connected to LgclO LA valve raise then LgclO LB is automatically set to Chan 1 valve lower This ensures the valve is never raised and lowered simultaneously The same complementary behaviour also applies to dual output modules and channels A and C of triple output modules Note 2 If any input function for example Chan 1 is connected to another input it will not appear in this list Note 3 Is available if the Control Channel is not On Off and is allocated to the LA LB or AA output as applicable Note 4 For valve position control Chan 1 or Chan 2 will not appear in this list Valve position outputs can only be dual outputs such as LA and LB or dual relay triac output modules 34 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 2 1 2 1 Modules The following parameters configure the plug in I O modules I O Modules can be fitted in any available slot in the instrument 6 slots in 3504 3 slots in 3
410. o load a recipe file into the instrument Used to save the current recipe configuration into a file Used to assign a parameter to a Tag Parameters can also be assigned by drag and drop from the Tools parameter list Used to delete an assigned parameter from the recipes Used to edit the current value of the assigned parameter Allows the user to rename the Tag of the associated parameter This tag is used on the instrument to identify assigned parameters default Value Value24 Used to find the properties and help information of the selected parameter Used to copy the currently selected parameter Used to assign a previously copied parameter to the selected Tag Used to hide show the Description and Comment Columns Used to configure the lowest access level in which the selected recipe is allowed to load Permitted to load when the instrument is in any of the access levels Permitted to load when the instrument is in Level2 Level3 or Config access levels Permitted to load when the instrument is in Level3 or Config access levels Permitted to load when the instrument is in the Config access level Never permitted to load Note Over comms whilst the instrument is in operator mode recipes that have been configured to load in Levels 1 2 and 3 can be loaded Whilst the instrument is in Config mode all recipes can be loaded Edit Data Set Value Clear Data Set Value Rename Data Set Clear Data Set Snapshot Values w Copy Data
411. ock so that the controlling ladder logic or program interfaces with the device as if it were an internally fitted module PLC I O Mapping v Ladder Program y ff fi i gt gt Physical 1 O Output Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave 3 Slave 4 14 5 3 Network Configuration The master PLC or PC based supervisory package must be configured to set up the parameters that it will be able to read and write to This is known as network configuration For Profibus DP the characteristic features of an instrument are stored in an ASCII device data file called the GSD file GSD files are used by Profibus configuration tools to enable a master Profibus scanner module for example a PLC or PC to know what slave devices are to be communicated to their node address what parameters can be read and written to and more In addition to standard GSD files Eurotherm Profibus products are supported by the unique Eurotherm Profibus GSD file editor that provides a simple way of mapping device parameters into the input output registers of a plc or supervisory package master This 32 bit Windows based software allows drag and drop of instrument parameters from a tabbed list into input and output windows for automatic generation of the GSD file 138 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers 14 5 4 To Install the Eurotherm GSD Editor This software is available from the CD sup
412. odule so that a limit may applied through some external strategy If these parameters are not wired 100 limit is applied every time the instrument is powered up e The tightest set between Remote and PID is connected to the output where an overall limit is applied using parameters Output Hi and Output Lo settable in Level 3 e WrkOPHIi and Wrk OPHLo found in the Diagnostics list are read only parameters showing the overall working output limits The tune limits are a separate part of the algorithm and are applied to the output during the tuning process The overall limits Output Hi and Output Lo always have priority 234 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 21 8 3 21 8 4 21 8 5 Output Rate Limit The output rate limiter is a simple rate of change limiter which will prevent the control algorithm demanding step changes in output power It may be set in percent per minute The rate limit is performed by determining the direction in which the output is changing and then incrementing or decrementing the Working Output Work OP in the Main list until Work OP the required output Target OP The amount by which to increment or decrement will be calculated based on the sampling rate of the algorithm i e 110ms and the rate limit that has been set If the change in output is less than the rate limit increment the change will take effect immediately Th
413. ogram Edit Sync Start Sub header 1 to 50 These may also have user defined program names Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press or to change Level values The following parameter is shown if Wait For Ch2Sync Ch2Seg Defines the channel 2 segment to wait for Ch2Seg values must be consecutive in any program e g if Ch1Seg1 is set to wait for Ch2Seg3 followed by a further wait in Ch1Seg2 then the segment to wait for in Ch2 must be gt 3 The following parameter is shown if the Segment Type End Only shown if Segment Type End The program will Defines the action to be taken at the end of remain at last SP the program indefinitely SateOP The output value goes to a predefined level The value is set in the list LP OP see chapter 21 The program will return to controller Event Outs To define the state of up to eight event Off outputs in the selected segment On OOOOOOOO to SEER or will be shown in the TOOOOOOO to ME fieteventonly T Time event when Time Event O event off W event on Event 1 See section 22 4 2 Time event This Note 1 When setting up segments in Ch1 and Ch2 you may either set up the same segment first in Ch1 then Pa in Ch2 in which case use i switch between the two programmer channels Alternatively you may wish to set up all segments in Ch1 then all segments in Ch2 268 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13
414. om the analyser it can be fed into the 3500 to automatically adjust the calculated carbon reading Alternatively this value can be entered manually Clean Probe As these sensors are used in furnace environments they require regular cleaning Cleaning Burn Off is performed by forcing compressed air through the probe Cleaning can be initiated either manually or automatically using a timed period During cleaning the PV output is frozen Probe Status After cleaning an alarm output MinCalcT is generated if the PV does not return to 95 of its previous value within a specified time This indicates that the probe is deteriorating and should be replaced Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 171 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 16 4 Zirconia Parameters From firmware versions V2 81 onwards the Zirconia block contains Probe Types which should be used in new installations and for backwards compatibility Probe Types which are already in use in existing installations A new controller defaults to a newer Probe Type e g Eurotherm With the newer probe types two additional sub headers GasRefs and Clean each containing further parameters are available The three headers are shown as 1 Zirconia For clarity in this manual parameter tables shown below in this sub header are split by probe types as Table 1 Table 2 and Table 3 although the controller shows them as a single list 2 Zirconia GasRefs 3 Zirconia C
415. ommand code and Tag are encoded into Register 1 as follows Because only 11 bits are available for the Parameter Tag the maximum tag allowable for standard demand data operations is 2048 The 3500 series controller allows tag values greater than this therefore extended tags have been provided using register 2 This is particularly important if ramp dwell programs or configuration information is to be transferred over PROFIBUS DP Fields in a request output registers should be set as follows WB Eurotherm Extensions are printed in bold italic text Command Hex Request Master to Slave Parameter Tag Extended Value Parameter Tag No Command Read Request Tag to Read Write Request Tag to Write Value to write Extended Read Request Must be Zero Tag to Read Extended Write Request Must be Zero Tag to Write Value to Write Valid responses to a given command are as follows Command Command Returned Value Field in request Field in response input register 4 output register input register Acknowledge No Command Tag Read Successfully Value Read Tag Read Not Successful Error Code see below Tag Written Successfully Tag Write Not Successful Write Request Extended Tag Read Successfully Value Read Extended Tag Read Not Successful Error Code see below Extended Tag Written Successfully Extended Tag Write Not Successful Error Code see below The command field in the response message either e Confirms that no
416. ommunications Loop Main AutoMan Programmer Setup ProgHold Access StandBy RISING EDGE When the wired in value changes from O to 1 a 1 is written to the parameter At all other times the parameter is not updated by the wire This type of wiring is used for parameters which start an action and when once completed the block clears the parameter When wired to these parameters can still be operated from the front panel or through digital communications Loop Tune AutotuneEnable Programmer Setup ProgRun Programmer Setup AdvSeg Programmer Setup SkipSeg Alarm Ack AlmSummary GlobalAck DigAlarm Ack Txdr ClearCal Txdr StartCal Txdr StartHighCal Txdr StartTare IPMonitor Reset Instrument Diagnostics ClearStats BOTH EDGE This type of edge is used for parameters which may need to be controlled by wiring or but should also be able to be controlled from the front panel or through digital communications If the wired in value changes then the new value is written to the parameter by the wire At all other times the parameter is free to be edited from the front panel or through digital communications Loop SP RateDisable Loop OP RateDisable Comms BroadcastEnabled Programmer Setup RunHold Programmer Setup RunReset Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 5 1 8 5 1 8 1 Operation of Booleans and Rounding Mixed Type Wiring Parameters of function blocks are one of the following types shown below W
417. on 25AT Ifan auto tune is initiated there are two further parameters which need to be set These are High Output and Low Output These are found in the Tune List see also section 21 6 4 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 215 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 21 6 3 Automatic Tuning Auto Tune is a tool which is used to set the control terms as close as possible to match the characteristics of the process It uses the one shot tuner which works by switching the output on and off to induce an oscillation in the process value For this reason the auto tune process should be done off line but using load conditions as close as possible to those to be found in practice From the amplitude and period of the oscillation it calculates the control parameter values listed in the table below Proportional Band PB Integral Time Ti If Ti and or Td is set to OFF because you wish to use Pl PD or P only control Derivative Time Td these terms will remain off after an autotune Cutback High CBH If CBH and or CBL is set to Auto these terms will remain at Auto after an Cutback Low CBL autotune i e 3 PB For autotune to set the cutback values CBH and CBL must be set to a value other than Auto before autotune is started Autotune will never return cutback values which are less than 1 6 PB Relative Cool Gain R2G R2G is only calculated if the controller is configure
418. on condensing Storage 5 to 95 RH non condensing IP65 Nema 4X EN61010 2g peak 10 to 150Hz lt 2000 metres Not suitable for use in explosive or corrosive atmosphere EN61326 1 2006 Class B EN61010 1 2001 Suitable for domestic commercial and light industrial as well as heavy industrial Domestic light Class B emissions Industrial Class A environmental immunity emissions With Ethernet or DeviceNet module fitted the product is only suitable for Industrial Class A emissions EN61010 Installation cat Il Pollution degree 2 The rate impulse voltage for equipment on nominal 230V mains is 2500V Normally only non conductive pollution occurs Occasionally however a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected 3508 1 8 DIN 3504 1 4DIN 3508 48W x 96H x 150D mm 400g 3504 96W x 96H x 150D mm 600g 3508 45Wx92Hmm 0 6kg 3504 92Wx92Hmm 0 4kg STN LCD with backlight 3508 4 1 2 digits green 3504 5 digits green 3508 8 character header and 3 lines of 10 characters 3504 16 character header and 3 lines of 20 characters Units outputs alarms program status program events active setpoint manual remote SP 3 operator plus config Password protected 8 64 total Text conditional text values bargraph User selectable level 1 2 or 3 Jun 13 389 User Manual Power requirements Supply voltage Inrush current Approvals Communications No of ports Slot allocation Serial
419. on levels during commissioning It is designed for those who may wish to change the fundamental characteristics of the instrument to match the process Examples are Input thermocouple type Alarm type communications type WARNING Configuration level gives access to a wide range of parameters which match the controller to the process Incorrect configuration could result in damage to the process being controlled and or personal injury It is the responsibility of the person commissioning the process to ensure that the configuration is correct In configuration level the controller will not necessarily be controlling the process or providing alarm indication Do not select configuration level on a live process Operating Level Home List Full Configuration Control Operator Level 1 Level 3 Configuration Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 53 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 3 3 To Select Different Levels of Access Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press and After a few seconds the display will show Goto Level 1 hold If no button is pressed for about 2 minutes the display returns to the HOME display This is a view for the 3504 and shows additional parameters in the list The 3508 shows these parameters one ata time In either controller press to scroll through the list of parameters Pp pe me The choices are a 2 Press a or M to choose Gota a di
420. on messages R O in L3 and conf The value will be reset by the rising edge of the Block Enable parameter The value will be reset by the rising R O in L3 edge of the Block Enable parameter and conf Success Successful transaction count The value will be reset by the rising Count This is the count of successful edge of the Block Enable parameter transactions Note that Modbus exception messages are counted as a successful transaction Note R W Read and Write R O Read only 14 9 3 Set Up Example Applications may be set up from the front panel of the controller but it is recommended to use iTools configuration package An example of how to set up an application is therefore given in the iTools section 27 20 156 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 14 10 Packbit Packbit consists of four blocks and were added at the same time as the Master Communications block from firmware versions 2 90 Each block allows 16 individual bits to be packed into a 16 bit integer 14 10 1 Packbit Parameters List Header packbit Sub header 1 2 3 4 Parameter Description Value and Description Default Access Level Press to select parameters Press 2 or a to change values In1 to In16 Input bit 1 to Input bit 16 Full float R W in L3 and All values less than 0 5 will be treated ange cont as FALSE all other values will be treated as TRUE Output Output The inputs are mapped to correspon
421. onfigure and commission a DeviceNet installation is significantly less than other comparable networks Devicenet is an Open Standard and is now used by a wide range of vendors Common definition of simple devices allows interchangeability while making interconnectivity of more complex devices possible In addition to reading the state of discrete devices DeviceNet allows easy access to operating node variables such as process temperatures alarm status as well as system diagnostic status The DeviceNet communication link is based on a broadcast oriented communications protocol the Controller Area Network CAN The minimum revision for DeviceNet communications module software used with the 3500 instruments is revision 1 6 This is identified by the module part no AH027179U003 Profibus DP This fieldbus system allows very high speed digital communications using an enhanced ElA485 wiring technology and has become a de facto standard in factory and process automation The 3500 series controllers use Profibus DP which is designed for fast cyclic transfer of time critical data from intelligent devices such as temperature controllers I O units drives etc to a PLC or PC based controller with a scan time of around 10mS Applications are typically in industrial automation such as extrusion bottling and baking amongst many others El Bisynch Protocol El Bisynch is a proprietary Eurotherm protocol based on the ANSI X3 28 2 5 A4 standard
422. ons Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 61 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 9 1 5 1 1 62 Soft Wiring Soft Wiring sometimes known as User Wiring refers to the connections which are made in software between function blocks Soft wiring which will generally be referred to as Wiring from now on is possible through the operator interface of the instrument This is described in the next section but it is recommended that this method is only used if small changes are required for example when the instrument is being commissioned The preferred method of wiring uses the iTools configuration package since it is quicker and easier Wiring using iTools is described in chapter 27 Wiring Example In general every function block has at least one input and one output Input parameters are used to specify where a function block reads its incoming data the Input Source The input source is usually wired to the output from a preceding function block Output parameters are usually wired to the input source of subsequent function blocks The value of a parameter which is not wired can be adjusted through the front panel of the controller provided it is not Read Only R O and the correct access level is selected All parameters shown in the function block diagrams are also shown in the parameter tables in the relevant chapters in the order in which they appear on the instrument display alphabetical Figure 5 2 shows an examp
423. ontroller is configured as a dual loop instrument the start up view shows a summary of the two loops This is called the HOME display Current access level Units Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 3504 Indicator beacons section 2 3 1 Process Variable PV1 1 Process Variable PV2 gt t _ Setpoint SP2 7 Loop 2 in Auto Loop 2 P B and Output OP2 Press to scroll to parameters on this page including programmer status details If the controller is configured as a single loop the HOME displays will vary as shown below Loop 1 configured Loop 2 configured Figure 2 2 HOME Display Other views may be configured as the HOME display and other summary displays can be selected using button See Message Centre section 2 8 Beacon Display and Description In a single loop controller OP1 and OP2 operate on channel 1 and 2 outputs respectively for the configured loop In a dual loop controller OP1 and OP2 operate on Loop 1 c
424. operation ae A oan Initial startup mode Input in sensor break 7 2 1 Input Types and Ranges Used to select the linearisation algorithm required by the input sensor A selection of default sensor linearisations are provided for thermocouples RTD s and Pyrometers If linearisation type is linear a y mx c relationship is applied between DisplayHigh DisplayLow and RangeHigh RangeLow Three custom tables may be configured by downloading an appropriate table from an extensive library Input Type Max Range Range Thermocouple type J 1200 ae 346 2192 Thermocouple type K 328 Thermocouple type L Thermocouple type R Soo Ko bo R Bo Thermocouple type B Io So PL2 C w 20 50 CE Thermocouple type N 200 Thermocouple type T 200 40 Thermocouple type S oo Platinell 0 La 200 85 Thermocouple type C C Pt100 resistance thermometer mV or mA linear input Square root 4 Customised linearisation table 1 CO Customised linearisation table 2 Gg Customised linearisation table 3 ae 82 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 7 2 2 7 2 2 1 T2232 7 223 7 2 2 4 7 2 2 5 CJC Type A thermocouple measures the temperature difference between the measuring junction and the reference junction The reference junction therefore must either be held at a fixed known temperature or accurate compensation be used for any temperature variations of the junction Measuring Internal Com
425. operation R O See note 2 section 10 3 1 108 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 10 3 11 Transducer Power Supply The transducer power supply may be used to power an external transducer which requires an excitation voltage of 5 or 10V It contains an internal shunt resistor for use when calibrating the transducer The value of this resistor is 30 1KQ 0 25 when calibrating a 350Q bridge x the number of the slot in which the module is fitted oO Parameter Value Default Access Press D or to change values ie oe AA nae idet o Channeltype Channeltype TransPSU Transducer power supply power supply Meas e o The current Requested output current input signal level after linearisation where applicable Normally wired Status The current status for Normal operation R O See note 2 the channel section 10 3 1 Shunt External Select external calibration resistor External Conf Internal Select internal calibration resistor 30 1KQ Voltage To select the output 10 Volts 10 Volts Conf voltage 5 Volts 5 Volts Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 109 User Manual 3500 series Controllers Ty 10 4 10 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 110 Module Scaling The controller is calibrated for life against known reference standards during manufacture but user scaling allows you to offset the permanent factory calibration to either 1 Scale the controller to your reference standar
426. or input enabled Mux8 Multiplexor OO UU alfour multiplexors disabled EENE All four multiplexors enabled Poly Polynomial O U Both polynomials disabled linearisation block EE Both polynomials enabled Progr Programmer UU Programmer 1 2 disabled aa Programmer 1 2 enabled 9 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 Access Level Default Conf Conf Conf Conf Conf Conf Conf Conf Conf Conf Conf Conf As order Conf code As order Conf code As order Conf code Conf Conf Conf Conf N4 User Manual 3500 series Controllers Sub header Enb Enable Parameter Value Description Do Dio Hanes Level Real time clock Ll Realtimedockdisabied Cont A Real time clock enabled fe HOOUOUOUUU All 8 user switches disabled fe PERRET All 8 user switches enabled Switch over block L switch over block disabled Cont a Switch over block enabled fe Timer Timers ou oo Pl sae tinerecdicabled aa Conf code EENE All four timers enabled Both totalisers disabled fe Both totalisers enabled Transducer Both transducer inputs disabled fe scaling Both transducer inputs enabled HOUUUOUUO All 8 user values disabled m PERRET All 8 user values enabled UsrVal En1 Gi al it Ll Lal ell ll Aieuservaluesdisabled fe pean PERRET All 8 user values enabled Zirconia To enable the Ll Zirconia block disabled Conf Zirconia function block This is only a Zirconia block enabled available if ordered Note The left m
427. ork i e over the internet see your network administrator for the required setting 2 The Comms page also includes configuration settings for Preferred Master Setting this IP address to the IP Address of a particular PC will guarantee that one of the 4 available Ethernet sockets will always be reserved for that PC reducing the number of available sockets for anonymous connections to 3 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 135 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 14 4 9 Tools Setup iTools configuration package version V5 60 or later may be used to configure Ethernet communications The following instructions configure Ethernet To include a Host Name Address within the iTools scan E A a so co 10 Ensure Tools is NOT running before taking the following steps Within Windows click Start then Settings then Control Panel In control panel select iTools Within the Tools configuration settings select the TCP IP tab Click the Add button to add a new connection Enter a name for this TCP IP connection Click the Add button to add the host name details from your network administrator or IP address of the instrument in the Host Name Address section Click OK to confirm the new Host Name IP Address you have entered Click OK to confirm the new TCP IP port you have entered The TCP IP port configured within the TCP IP tab of the Tools control panel settings sho
428. ormAlinearinaut 1000 Joo W T To swo sarr NA a Custom Customisedinearsatonbies OO MA 10 3 7 Display Units None Abs Temp C F K V mV A mA PH mmHg psi Bar mBar RH mmWG inWG inWW Ohms PSIG 02 PPM CO2 CP sec RelTemp C F K rel Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 sec min hrs 106 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 10 3 8 Triple Logic Input and Triple Contact Input This module may be used to provide additional logic inputs List Header Mod Sub headers xA xB xC x the number of the slot in which the module is fitted Name Parameter Description Value Default Access O to select Press D or to change values Level Channel type Logic Input or contact input e L3 R O lO E Function of the module RO R O State of the measured input n for output to be off o Demand for output to be on R O L3 Status Module status Normal operation See note 2 section 10 3 1 10 3 9 Potentiometer Input This module may be connected to a feedback potentiometer fitted to a motorized valve driver or to provide a measured value from any other potentiometer input between 100Q and 15KQ The excitation voltage is 0 5Vdc List Header Mod Sub headers xA x the number of the slot in which the module is fitted Name Parameter Description Value Default Access O to select Press or to change values Level Units Units Engineering units units Non
429. osition Communications protocols may be ModBus ElBisynch DeviceNet Profibus or ModBus TCP Note In order to reduce the effects of RF interference the transmission line should be grounded at both ends of the screened cable However if such a course is taken care must be taken to ensure that differences in the earth potentials do not allow circulating currents to flow as these can induce common mode signals in the data lines Where doubt exists it is recommended that the Screen shield be grounded at only one section of the network as shown in all of the following diagrams Note EIA is sometimes referred to as RS eg EIA232 3 Wire and 5 Wire is sometimes referred to as 2 Wire and 4 Wire Modbus H or J Module ElBisynch Broadcast and Modbus Master A further description of ModBus and ElBisynch communications is given in 2000 series Communications Handbook Part No HA026230 which can be downloaded from www eurotherm co uk See also section 14 8 2 for further details when wiring Broadcast and Modbus Master HA or JA EIA232 Connections Screen HB or JB Digital communication BOE s module HD or JD Common isolated HE or JE Rx 240Vac CATII HF or JF Tx Local Ground Figure 1 8 ElA232 Connections Daisy Chain to further ElA485 3 Wire Connections controllers rm 220Q termination resistor on last The KD485 controller in the line HA or JA communications converter HB or JB is recommended for Screen 2200 termin
430. ost flag indicates the first instance e g Alarm 72 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers 6 4 Instrument Options This page allows you to set up options as listed in the following table List Header Inst Sub header Opt Options User Manual Name Parameter Description Value to select O or 4 to change Units Instrument display units Celsius play ProgMode To select the type of programmer Ensure that two programmers are enabled see previous section otherwise only SingleChn can be selected Fahrenheit Kelvin SingleChn SyncAll All segments of two programmer blocks are synchronised Two programmers syncronised at start of run SyncStart Single channel two independent channels Default Access Level PVStart To enable PV Start See Programmer section No Disabled Disabled Conf 2210 Yes Enabled ImmSP When enabled causes changes to the working No Disabled In setpoint WSP to take effect immediately when operator level adjusted using the front panel O or the new buttons Note when adjusted over comms the setpoint Is change always takes place immediately The entered after working setpoint may be derived from SP1 SP2 the raise lower or a programmer setpoint PSP button is released and is Edits to the active setpoint usually take effect indicated by E after the raise lower button is released It may cal Mastin the be desira
431. output is connected to a valve which controls the amount of an enrichment gas supplied to the furnace The second output controls the level of dilution air Sooting Alarm In addition to other alarms which may be detected by the controller the 3500 can trigger an alarm when the atmospheric conditions are such that carbon will be deposited as soot on all surfaces inside the furnace The alarm may be connected to an output e g relay to initiate an external alarm Automatic Probe Cleaning The 3500 has a probe clean and recovery strategy that can be programmed to occur between batches or manually requested At the start of the cleaning process a snapshot of the probe mV is taken and a short blast of compressed air is used to remove any soot and other particles that may have accumulated on the probe A minimum and maximum cleaning time can be set by the user If the probe mV has not recovered to within 5 of the snapshot value within the maximum recovery time set then an alarm is given This indicates that the probe is ageing and replacement or refurbishment is due During the cleaning and recovery cycle the PV is frozen thereby ensuring continuous furnace operation A flag PvFrozen is set which can be used in an individual strategy for example to hold the integral action during cleaning Endothermic Gas Correction A gas analyser may be used to determine the CO concentration of the endothermic gas If a 4 20mA output is available fr
432. output result is ON when both Input 1 and Input 2 are ON The output result is ON when either Input 1 or Input 2 is ON Exclusive OR The output result is true when one and only one input is ON If both inputs are ON the output is OFF Input 1 sets the latch Input 2 resets the latch Equal The output result is ON when Input 1 Input 2 Not equal The output result is ON when Input 1 Input 2 Greater than The output result is ON when Input 1 gt Input 2 Less than The output result is ON when Input 1 lt Input 2 Equal to or Greater than The output result is ON when Input 1 gt Input 2 Less than or Equal to The output result is ON when Input 1 lt Input 2 a 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Note 1 The numerical value is the value ofthe enumeration Note 2 For options 1 to 4 an input value of less than 0 5 is considered false and greater than or equal to 0 5 as true Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 183 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 18 1 3 Logic Operator Parameters List Header Lgc2 2 Input Operators Sub headers 1 to 24 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press or a to change values Level L3 R O Input inputi inputi Normally wired to a logic analogue or user value May be set to a constant value if not Input2 Input 2 wired y Fall Type The fallback state of the output
433. outputs for humidify solenoid valve and I O temperature control SCR Standard PV Input For the dry bulb RTD used for the temperature control and humidity calculation Figure 16 1 Example of Humidity Controller Connections Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 169 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 16 1 2 Temperature Control Of An Environmental Chamber The temperature of an environmental chamber is controlled as a single loop with two control outputs The heating output time proportions electric heaters usually via a solid state relay The cooling output operates a refrigerant valve which introduces cooling into the chamber The controller automatically calculates when heating or cooling is required 16 1 3 Humidity Control Of An Environmental Chamber Humidity in a chamber is controlled by adding or removing water vapour Like the temperature control loop two control outputs are required i e Humidify and Dehumidify To humidify the chamber water vapour may be added by a boiler an evaporating pan or by direct injection of atomised water If a boiler is being used adding steam increases the humidity level The humidify output from the controller regulates the amount of steam from the boiler that is allowed into the chamber An evaporating pan is a pan of water warmed by a heater The humidify output from the controller humidity regulates the temperature of the water An atomisation system uses compressed air to spray water vapour dire
434. p1 or Lp2 Sub header PID Name Parameter Description Value Default Access DM o h Level to select Press or to change values Sched Type To choose the type of gain scheduling Gain scheduling not active Off L3 Set The PID set can be selected by the operator SP The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the setpoint PV The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the process variable Error The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the error The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the output Rem The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the remote input 1 L3 Num Sets Selects the number of PID sets in the 1to3 gain scheduling This allows the lists to be reduced if the process does not require all three PID sets Remote Input This parameter only appears when Range units Sched Type Rem Active Set Currently working set Set Set Set2 Set3 Boundary 1 2 Sets the level at which PID set 1 Range units changes to PID set 2 The Boundary parameter only applies when Sched Type SP PV Error Boundary 2 3 Sets the level at which PID set 2 OP or Ren changes to PID set 3 L OO R O L The above 6 parameters are associated with Gain Scheduling described further in section 21 5 11 PB PB2 PB3 Proportional band Set1 Set2 Set3 0 0 to E
435. pensation junction The controller is provided with a temperature sensing device which gt senses the temperature at the point where the thermocouple is joined to the copper wiring of the instrument and applies a Reference corrective signal junction Where very high accuracy is needed and to accommodate multi thermocouple installations larger reference units are used which can achieve an accuracy of 0 1 C or better These units also allow the cables to the instrumentation to be run in copper The reference units are contained basically under three techniques Ice Point Hot Box and Isothermal The Ice Point There are usually two methods of feeding the EMF from the thermocouple to the measuring instrumentation via the ice point reference The bellows type and the temperature sensor type The bellows type utilises the precise volumetric increase which occurs when a known quantity of ultra pure water changes state from liquid to solid A precision cylinder actuates expansion bellows which control power to a thermoelectric cooling device The temperature sensor type uses a metal block of high thermal conductance and mass which is thermally insulated from ambient temperatures The block temperature is lowered to 0 C by a cooling element and maintained there by a temperature sensing device Special thermometers are obtainable for checking the 0 C reference units and alarm circuits that detect any movement from the zero position can be fitted
436. peration The action of this button is described in ic union section 2 6 can be Manual operation means that the controller output power is adjusted by the user The input sensor is still disabled connected and reading the PV but the control loop is open Auto means that the controller is automatically adjusting the output to maintain control ie the loop is closed If the controller is in manual mode MAN light will be indicated If the controller is powered down in Manual operation it will resume this mode when it is powered up again PROG To select the programmer summary page RUN HOLD Press once to start a program RUN will be indicated This button Press again to hold a program HLD will be indicated can be disabled Press and hold for at least two seconds to reset a program RUN will flash at the end of a program HLD will flash during holdback Programmer operation is fully described in chapter 22 of the User Manual Press to select new PAGE headings Press to select a new parameter in the page O Press to decrease an analogue value or to change the state of a digital value Press to increase an analogue value or to change the state of a digital value Shortcut Key Presses Backpage Press E followed by with held down continue to press A to scroll page headers backwards With still pressed you can press WM to page forward This action is the same as pressing O alo
437. pes ol CORON A OI 204 21 4 2 ESO se ST eao O 206 21 5 PID Function Blokas eenia eaaa aa aaa A A AS aeS a SEANSIE TE 207 21 5 1 LOOD Farane eisa PO aE EEEE E EE EEA E OEE OT OOE 207 213 2 Propornional Bane eomer anaa arr N A 209 SS A arctan en sadeaaumeliosndelsinelansiedalnuinsl cas deci Wuatatelauuibs uanse ds taans 209 21 5 4 DA o oO 210 21 5 5 R E ONG E Sateen a crn eterna tre entree ACC Tre teen TRON fer nten PEN NCEE Te tert ner mt ear rtn tre ee 210 21 5 6 EE Eei e ETEEN E el PAE E EEA A T S A MEAR aR 211 21 5 7 Manual RES A EAN 211 21 5 8 ak ove geo one eeeneonen omen ER N Ter Tener A ae eee 211 21 5 9 tegra Se OC NO erosen aA iS 212 2ko Loop Break raaa E N AE 212 ZV E ene a NNN NN 213 21 6 T ning Function BOCK sscci2eiscccastentccesetecteusecocsstaccansetedoentattoasssevasessiasudencoesesecdscautessncassecapecedenuccesdees 214 21 6 1 LOOP RESPONS sk SE AA N E A O 214 21 6 2 THEI AES anta GS asa N A E E E E E 214 21 6 3 Automate TUNN PA Ue A e y O ETAR 216 21 6 4 LOO Parameters AMO UNS a 216 21 6 5 ToAutoTunea Loop RSS SN 217 21 6 6 Ss O AN 217 21 6 7 POTOT CS and SSNS Ol BR AAN NR Aia 217 21 6 8 Attune and AROMA ia 217 21 6 9 Autotune ano Gain scheduling nn a a a A NO 217 2136210 Autotune trom Bew P leat COG karna NN EN 218 216 11 Autotune Fron Below SP lt Heat QN Y reirei i EERTE AEO TT AAEN 219 2012 Autotune SE SeTO Oil He UC calada 220 Diss A AN OCS Santa sk rein anc pctuetaisneancsat nee yas datene tha tea cans A rasa
438. pk 0 To 22 matched lead resistance 300u4A 100MQ 100mV to 100mV lt 3 3uV with 1 6s filter time 15 9 bits lt 0 033 best fit straight line lt 10uV 0 2 of measurement at 25 C lt 0 2uV 0 004 of reading per C gt 146dB maximum of 264Vrms gt 90dB maximum of 280mV pk pk lt 10nA gt 100MQ 0 2V to 2 0V 30uV with 1 6s filter time 16 2bits lt 0 033 best fit straight line lt 2mV 0 2 of reading lt 0 1mV 0 004 of reading per C gt 155dB maximum of 264Vrms gt 101dB maximum of 4 5V pk pk lt 10nA gt 100MQ 3 0V to 10 0V lt 300uV with 1 6sec filter 15 4 bits lt 0 033 best fit straight line lt 0 4 C 0 15 of reading in C lt 0 1mV 0 02 of reading per C gt 145dB maximum of 264Vrms gt 92dB maximum of 5V pk pk gt 69kQ Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers Potentiometer Input Type Resistance Excitation Isolation Functions Analogue Control Output Type Rating Accuracy Resolution Isolation Analogue Retransmission Output Type Rating Accuracy Resolution Isolation Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Single channel 1000 To 15kQ 0 5Vdc supplied by module 264Vac double insulation Includes valve position and remote setpoint Single channel and dual channel 4 20mA only 0 20mA lt 6000 0 10Vdc gt 500Q 2 5 10 bits 264Vac double insulation Single channel 0 20mA lt 600Q 0 10Vdc gt 500Q
439. plied with iTools or from http www eurotherm co uk profibus EST a Lorie Pro Aa A Fe Pda HL Welcome to thw Eurotherm Profibus GSD File Editor Setup Wizard Dry call rey gl Enri eect aes A Fe ce 1i a pm Cade lo secede Hal poy Cho dl ha pco bebo cora Oil Ha do colas dl Cra ll Set Select a file location and press Next i Selup Eurail PrE rre reli LHI Fik Editar Malba Dompasssis a small bar rri li a os Adora de ret et i onal Cipi Hiu te pau 200 Piy do COn ETA E Contraer CA 2500 200 6 Lace CAP a i ei i 00 herd Te arii ia ie E dede q Select where Setup should place program short cuts then press Next o el ij Lur hee Fral bes Gh ie dig A ade a ridad ei ond dra ba by Ear compi tratallag Fuad Plb Gap File Edito oa pr et gl ii il i eae ho Alar Cog Pla irc Proba ED Fla D d ca up bo Til rd id Press Install Press Finish to exit Setup Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 User Manual Download the file Profibus GSD Editor A version number is generally given e g 3 10 Save the file setup_gsdedit_310 exe to a suitable location and double click it to Run io Setup Lineker Prodifin G50 File Editar Sl lt Le dba ele dd ade Pod A Ele Exa Se rula dr Fe orina lok Nei E poa cad ba Er petaca eed Pride ici ro ge Peral otr Probar io Fie Emi A hal lA a ep dedo pa ed Choose which prod
440. ponse First Inout Word the parameter address BitNo 15 14 13 12 11 10 fe 8 7 fo Ss 4 32 tito Decimal 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Response Reserved Parameter Tag Address Read ae uest Meaning 1 read parameter Parameter address 1 Step 5 Return the Value Fourth Input Word the parameter value wno a aaa ojo e s 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 412 Resne 0 o o o o oj jo o jojo jo i i i i Parameter value is 16 8 4 2 30 dec 10 8 2 1E hex 146 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Worked example 2 Starting an Autotune Enable Loop 1 Autotune Step 1 Clear any previous demand data requests This is the same command as in the previous example Step 2 Wait until the following response message is received This is the same command as in the previous example Step 3 Write 1 to Loop 1 Autotune Enable at tag address 270 dec one E wpe ope e les silo Decimal 32768 16384 8192 409 2048 1024 512 256 128 oa 32 168 4 2 1 Readreque 0 o 1 o o o o ololololi yo Write request 8192 dec tag address 270 dec 8462 dec 2000 10E 210E hex Step 4 Wait for response wn s a e o o o e EE Decima 32768 16384 8192 2096 20
441. pplied Program is held if PV lt SP G Soak Value Program is held if PV gt SP G Soak Value Program is held if PV lt gt SP G Soak Value If Segment Type GoBack Seg GoBack Cycles Part No Part No HA027988 Issue IB Junta Issue 15 Jun 13 This is shown if Segment Type GoBack It defines 1 to the number of the segment to segments defined To set the number of times the section of the program is repeated See section 22 3 5 GoBack the following two parameters are shown E E 271 User Manual 3500 series Controllers List Header Program Edit Sub header 1 to 50 These may also have user defined program names Name Parameter Description to select Value Default Access Press D or to change values Level If Segment Type Wait For Wait For allows you to select the event to become true before proceeding Wait the following parameter is shown Prgln1 Wait for the program L3 event 1 Prgln2 Wait for the program event 2 Prgln1n2 Wait for the program event 1 AND 2 Prgln1or2 Wait for the program event 1 OR 2 PVWaitlP Wait segment concludes when PVWaitIP satisfies criterion specified by ChX PV Wait this option is used to Wait Until a specified value has been reached by PVWaitIP If Wait For PVWaitIP the If Wait For PVWaitIP the following two parameters are shown Z Z gt Z SSS OSOS two parameters are
442. proportioning control it can be scaled such that a lower and upper level of PID demand signal can limit the operation of the output value By default the output will be fully off for 0 power demand fully on for 100 power demand and equal on off times at 50 power demand You can change these limits to suit the process It is important to note however that these limits are set to safe values for the process For example for a heating process it may be required to maintain a minimum level of temperature This can be achieved by applying an offset at 0 power demand which will maintain the output on for a period of time Care must be taken to ensure that this minimum on period does not cause the process to overheat If Range Hi is set to a value lt 100 the time proportioning output will switch at a rate depending on the value it will not switch fully on Similarly if Range Lo is set to a value gt 0 it will not switch fully off PID Demand signal Disp Hi nf eg 100 Disp Lo eg 0 Output state Range Lo 0 Range Hi 100 Output permanently off Output permanently on gt Figure 8 1 Scaling a Logic Output 8 2 6 Example To Scale a Proportioning Logic Output Select level 3 or configuration level as described in section 3 1 3 Then Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From the LgclO page press Lac I0 to scroll to Disp Hi Min OnTine Auto Disp Hi Ba E 2 Press or O to set the tbisP Lo A DA
443. put will drive to electrical high the instrument is in value regardless of the Invert parameter Standby Mode l Cont The output will assume a status according See Section 8 2 1 une to how it is driven Meas Val Status of the digital 0 On unless Invert Yes L3 R O output 1 Off unless Invert Yes PV The current Oto 100 L3 analogue value of R O L3 the output Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 93 User Manual 3500 series Controllers Parameters available if IO Type is configured as OnOff List Header RlyAA No Sub headers o Parameter Value Default Access Or select Description Que or a to change Level To change the normal No Relay de energised when the output Conf operating state of the demand is off R O L3 relay Relay energised when the output demand is on normal setting if the relay is used for control Relay energised when the output demand is off Relay de energised when the output demand is on normal setting if the relay is used for alarm output action when The output will drive to electrical high the instrument is in value regardless of the Invert parameter Standby Mode Cont The output will assume a status according See Section 8 2 1 to how it is driven Meas Val The current value of On unless Invert Yes L3 R O the output demand Off unless Invert Yes signal PV The current digital value of the output ae L3 PV can be wired to the output of a function block For exampl
444. r Ton Toff D co OP Off Event On Time Event Off Error Ton gt Toff Event Output Off 7 A Event OP Off Time Event Off Error Ton gt seg 1 duration kaara i a ae Event Output Off Event OP Off e Ton and Toff are extended by G Soak periods If Ton 0 the output goes hi at the start of the segment but Toff is not decremented while Gsoak Wait is applied Timed event outputs are ona total of Gsoak Wait Toff Ton Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 247 User Manual 3500 series Controllers The following additional features are available in dual programmer versions Segment Time Event On Toff Event Output A Ton 0 Gsoak Wait e When Ton gt 0 Timed event is On after Gsoak Wait Ton This may be seen in the following diagram Segment l Time Event On Toff Event Output Gsoak Wait In the event of a power fail time events timing will be unaffected 22 4 3 User Values User values are general purpose analogue values which may be set up in any Time Rate Dwell or Step segment provided a PV Event is not configured in that segment When the segment is entered the analogue value is transferred to the UserValOP parameter This parameter may be wired to a source within the controller for use in a particular application dependent strategy A different value may be set in each segment in which the UsrVal is called up One example of its use is to set different
445. r Pyrometer input only Off 0 1 to 1 0 to compensate for the different reflectivity produced by different type of surface Meas Value The current electrical value of the PV i input V The current value of the PV input after Instrument range linearisation Offset Used to add a constant offset to the PV Instrument range see section 7 2 7 Lo Point Allows a two point offset to be applied to Instrument range the controller to compensate for sensor or connection errors between sensor and u L L L L Lo Offset the input to the controller Hi Point Hi Offset See section 7 2 8 for further details CJC Temp Reads the temperature of the rear L3 R O terminals at the thermocouple connection Only appears if IO Type Thermocouple 3 3 R O R O 3 3 O Sensor break Value R Used for diagnostics only and displays the sensor break trip value SBrk Value Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 81 User Manual 3500 series Controllers List ListHeader PVInput o List Header PV Input Sub headers None sd Sub headers None O Parameter Description Name Parameter Description Value Default Access Ore Dor to change Level Lead Res The measured lead resistance on the RTD Only appears if IO Type RTD Cal State Calibration state Calibration of the PV Input is described in Chapter 26 Out Of PV outside operating limits Range 3 Uncalibrated channel Calibrated 5 Status PV Status Normal
446. ral purpose user value only available when PV Event is not configured RstUVal this parameter may be givena customised name see section 27 12 14 Note a Reset User Value may be set in the Programmer Status page in operator level To select the PID set for the selected segment PID Set GSoak Type The parameter is only shown if the Segment Type Dwell and Gsoak is enabled in Program SetUp Guaranteed Soak ensures that the work piece remains at the specified dwell setpoint for a minimum of the specified duration Guaranteed Soak continuously monitors the difference between the PV and the programmer setpoint GSoak Type specifies whether the guaranteed soak tests for deviations above or below the setpoint See also section 22 5 1 G Soak Value Press D or to change values 0 00 00 to 500 00 0 00 00 to 500 00 Range limits Resolution for UsrVal is derived from a user value to RstUVal and configure its resolution as required Value used in evaluation of Guaranteed Range units Soak in Dwell segments User Manual Sub header 1 to 50 These may also have user ee ee names Access Level None OO No PV event Absolute high Absolute low Deviation high Deviation low Deviation band E OO E OO m m m m To adjust resolution softwire E OO PID set 1 2 or 3 will be used in the selected segment E OO No guaranteed soak a
447. rameters H E Commstab _ _ __ _ __ 7 3 Counter a DigAlarm drid CEJ aani Threshold ao Lgc2 CA CE H A Lgs 6 4 Lin16 H A Load LQ Loop H A Math2 H E Multioper Selected User Page Selected Promote Parameter H Mux8 Gam Poly Level Level y ltemNr 2 Promote Parameter Totals Style Conditional Text cae Programmer EE Program Usedltems 6 Freeltems 58 ce irr a Access H E Recipe sed Items ree ltems 0 00 0 00 ccess Lev 1 Alterable Level 2 Engineer 3504 v F2 17 EUROTHERM Figure 27 9 To Configure Analogue Alarms 318 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers 27 9 2 Part No HA027988 User Manual Alarm Summary Page Click on the folder AlmSummary A list of alarm states is displayed In the view below the Limits column and Comment column have been opened by right clicking in the parameter list and selecting Columns in the drop down menu To add acomment select Add Parameter Comment from the same drop down and enter the required text iTools File Device Explorer View Options Window Help Fa os BE U 8 wr x H 9 New File Open File Load Save Print Scan Add Remove Access Views 2 Graphical Wiring Ef Parameter Explorer E Device Panel YH Terminal Wiring H device Recipe Ej Watch Recipe Programmer A User Pages PA opc Scope siTe com 10001 3504 lol x New Alarm Notification Any Alarm Notification Yes 1 Global Acknowledge of All Ala
448. rammer 27 10 1 Graphical Wiring Toolbar Download Wiring to Instrument Mouse Select O amp fios Set up IO Modules ae Show Hide Grid Figure 27 14 Detail of the Graphical Wiring Toolbar Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 321 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 27 10 2 Terminology The following terms are used 27 10 2 1 Function Block A Function Block is an algorithm which may be wired to and from other function blocks to make a control strategy The Graphical Re Route Wires Wiring Editor groups the instrument parameters into function blocks Examples are a control loop and a mathematical ES Function Block Yiew Re Route Input Wires calculation Re Route Output vires Each function block has inputs and outputs Any parameter may Show Wires Using Tags be wired from but only parameters that are alterable may we aa wired to A function block includes any parameters that are needed to Copy configure or operate the algorithm 2 Delete Ciel 27 10 2 2 Wire Undelete A wire transfers a value from one parameter to another They are Bring To Front executed by the instrument once per control cycle l l Push To Back Wires are made from an output of a function block to an input of a function block It is possible to create a wiring loop in this case there will be a single execution cycle delay at some point in the loop This point is shown on the diagram by a symbol and it is possible to choose whe
449. ranz setup PYEvantP Run CurProg In this configuration each programmer can be loaded with its own program To edit the separate programs and to configure the programmers the following procedure should be followed 1 Write the program number that is to be edited for Programmer1 to the Comms ProgNumber parameter located in Programmer1 general data area the address to be written to is Programmer Program General Data Start address 5184 Comms ProgNum Offset 0 5184 26 It is then possible to configure the other parameters for Programmer1 Program for example the address to write to change the value of the PowerFailAct is Programmer Program General Data Start address 5184 PowerFailAct Offset 5 5189 27 To edit the programs Segment data use the segment numbers start address plus the parameter offset for example to configure the segment type of Segment the address to be written to is Programmer Segment Data Start address 5376 Segment Type Offset 0 5376 To configure the segment type of Segment2 the address to be written to is Programmer Segment Data Start address 5408 Segment Type Offset 0 5408 28 To configure Programmer2 Program repeat steps 1 through to 3 using Programmer2 addresses for example Step1 this does not affect Programmer1 Program Number Programmer2 Program General Data Start address 5248 Comms ProgNum Offset 0 5248 Step2 Programmer2 Program General Data Start addres
450. rator level 3 Auto tune cannot be performed in Configuration level or when the loop is in Manual mode b Press to select the Lp 1 or Lp2 list header Press or to select the Tune sub header Press to select Enable e Press or to select On A One shot Tune can be performed at any time but normally it is performed only once during the initial commissioning of the process However if the process under control subsequently becomes unstable because its characteristics have changed it may be necessary to tune again for the new conditions The auto tune algorithm reacts in different ways depending on the initial conditions of the plant The explanations given in this section are for the following conditions 1 Initial PV is below the setpoint and therefore approaches the setpoint from below for a heat cool control loop 2 Initial PV is below the setpoint and therefore approaches the setpoint from below for a heat only control loop 3 Initial PV is at the same value as the setpoint That is within 0 3 of the range of the controller if PB Units Setup list is set to Percent or 1 engineering unit 1 in 1000 if the PB Units is set to Eng Range is defined as Range Hi Range Lo for process inputs or the range defined in section 7 2 1 for temperature inputs Ifthe PV is just outside the range stated above the autotune will attempt a tune
451. rchiving and plant diagnostic purposes cloning for saving instrument set ups for future expansion of the plant or to allow you to recover a set up after a fault This product supports the following protocols Protocol For a full description of these protocols please refer to the relevant published standards but further details may be found in MODBUS RTU Series Communications Handbook part no HA026230 Section 14 3 2 and Appendix A of this handbook A full description can be found on www modbus org DeviceNet DeviceNet Communications Handbook part no HA027506 Section 14 3 2 of this handbook Profibus Profibus Communications Handbook part no HAQ26290 Section 14 3 2 of this handbook El Bisynch Series Communications Handbook part no HAQ26230 800 Series Communications Handbook part no HAQ20161 900 Series Communications Handbook part no HAQ23776 Section 14 3 2 and Appendix B of this handbook Modbus TCP Section 14 4 of this handbook A full description of the Modbus TCP protocol can be found EtherNet on www modbus org There are two communications ports available within the instrument these are defined as the H and J ports and act as a communications slave Various communications modules each supporting a different protocol may be fitted to each port as follows Wiring connections for each of these protocols is given in Chapter 1 Note When using DeviceNet with instrument firmware version 1 10 and greater t
452. re are three levels of priority ow medium and high When an alarm is triggered a popup is shown on the instrument display Higher level alarms override lower level ones Issue 15 Jun 13 Alarm not configured Full Scale High Full Scale Low Deviation High Deviation Low Deviation band Instrument range Instrument range Instrument range Alarm output deactivated Alarm output activated Alarm not inhibited Inhibit function active Instrument range None Auto Manual Event No latching is used Automatic Manual Event Not acknowledged Acknowledged No blocking Blocking A medium priority alarm will cause a pop up and supersedes a low priority alarm A high priority alarm supersedes both low and medium alarms m m m m m m Conf L3 R O As order code E OO L3 R O As order 3 code E OO Med E OO _ _ O User Manual 3500 series Controllers List Header AnAlm Sub headers 1 to 8 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access Oe iach Level to select Press or to change values Low A low priority alarm will cause a pop up Delay Delay between sensing the alarm condition 0 00 0 to 500 00 and displaying it If in the time between the mm ss s two the alarm goes safe then no alarm is hh mm ss shown and the delay timer is reset It can be a eres used on systems that are prone to noise l 120 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers Us
453. re that delay will occur E Parameter Help Edit Parameter Value Parameter Properties 27 10 2 3 Block Execution Order The order in which the blocks are executed by the instrument depends on the way in which they are wired The order is automatically worked out so that the blocks execute on the most recent data 27 10 3 Using Function Blocks If a function block is not faded in the tree then it can be dragged onto the diagram The block can be dragged around gp the diagram using the mouse PID 2 A labelled loop block is shown here The label at the top is the Cue id name of the block hair Ao har Wain FH When the block type information iS alterable click on the box Wain Py Main WorkingsP with the arrow in it on the right to edit that value Tune AulotuneEnable OP Ch1Out The inputs and outputs which are considered to be of most use SP SPSelact are always shown In most cases all of these will need to be SP SP1 wired up for the block to perform a useful task There are SP SP2 exceptions to this and the loop is one of those exceptions SP ASP Beket If you wish to wire from a parameter which is not shown as a SPAISP recommended output click on the icon in the bottom right and SP SP Trim a full list of parameters in the block will be shown click on one OP ManualMode of these to start a wire OP Manual utyal To start a wire from a recommended output just click on it q Click Select Output to wire new parameters
454. remains on or off for a set minimum time When set to Auto the minimum pulse time that can be set is 110ms A very low power demand is represented by a short on pulse of 110ms duration followed by a correspondingly long off time As the power demand increases the on pulse becomes longer and the off pulse becomes correspondingly shorter For a 50 power demand the on and off pulse lengths are the same at 220ms on and 220ms off Setting to Auto is suitable for triac or logic outputs not driving a mechanical device If the control device is a relay or contactor the minimum on time should be set greater than 10 seconds for example to prolong relay life By way of illustration for a setting of 10 seconds the relay will switch approximately as shown in the table below Relay ON time seconds Relay OFF time seconds The Minimum OnTime algorithm is often preferred for control of switching devices using triac logic or relay outputs in a temperature control application It also applies to valve position outputs see also section 21 8 9 90 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 8 2 3 Example To Configure a Time Proportioning Logic Output Select configuration level as described in section 3 3 Then Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 6 From any display press O until the LgclO page is reached 7 Press a or M as necessary to select LA or LB
455. reshold This only appears if Thresh Ch1 PV Event None It sets the trip level at which the event is true Time Event The first Event Output may be switched on and off under program control Event 1 See also section 22 4 2 On Time Time at which the Time Event is true Only 0 00 00 to 500 00 appears if Time Event Off See section 22 4 2 for error conditions Off Time Time at which the Time Event is false Only 0 00 00 to 500 00 appears if Time Event Off See section 22 4 2 for error conditions UsrVal General purpose user value only available Range limits when PV Event is not configured Resolution for UsrVal is derived this parameter may be given a customised from RstUVal To adjust name see section 27 12 14 resolution softwire a user value Note a Reset User Value may be set in the to RstUVal and configure its Programmer Status page in operator level resolution as required 262 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 UU aD 5 O OO OO OO OO OO 3500 Series Controllers List Header Program Edit Sync All Event Outs Part No HA027988 Parameter Description PID Set allows automatic selection of the PID Set scheduling used by the loop wired to the programmer for the selected segment The PID parameters for each set are defined by the loop Each segment stores a PIDSet number which is applied to the loop as the program progresses Only
456. ring the monitor to the front of the diagram Moving a monitor will also bring it to the front Push To Back Push the monitor to the back of the diagram Useful if there is something underneath it Downloading To Series 3000 Instruments Series 3000 wires have to be downloaded to the instrument together When the wiring editor is opened the current wiring and diagram layout is read from the instrument No changes are made to the instrument function block execution or wiring until the download button is pressed Any changes made using the instrument front panel after the editor is opened will be lost on download When a block is dropped on the diagram instrument parameters are changed to make the parameters for that block available If changes are made and the editor is closed without saving them there will be a delay while the editor clears these parameters During download the wiring is written to the instrument which then calculates the block execution order and starts executing the blocks The diagram layout including comments and monitors is then written into instrument flash memory along with the current editor settings When the editor is reopened the diagram will be shown positioned the same as when it was last downloaded 27 10 10Selections Wires are shown with small blocks at their corners when selected All other items have a dotted line drawn round them when they are selected 27 10 10 1 Selecting Individual Items Clicking on an i
457. ription or a to change Level Cycle Time Allows the output to Off or When Off is selected the Min OnTime Off L3 be switched on and 0 01 to algorithm will run See also off within the set time 60 00 When set to any other value the CycleTime section 8 2 2 period seconds algorithm will run Min OnTime The minimum time in Auto If set to O Auto the minimum on time will Auto L3 Only available seconds that the 0 01 to be 110mS when Cycle relay is on or off 150 00 For a relay output this should be set greater Time Off seconds than say 10 seconds to prevent the relay from switching too rapidly See also section 8 2 2 Display resolution No decimal points XXXXX Conf This sets the number of decimal One decimal point places displayed by Disp Hi and Two decimal points Disp Lo parameters Three decimal points Four decimal points Disp Hi The maximum displayable reading 0 000 to These parameters allow high 100 00 L3 100 000 and low limits to be applied Disp Lo The minimum displayable reading 0 000 to to the output against a set L3 limit of the output demand a ignal from the PID Range Hi The maximum electrical 0 00 to ee _ H a L3 input output level 100 00 eels On Nee ie further information Range Lo The minimum electrical 0 00 to L3 input output level 100 00 SbyAct Standby action Off The output will drive to electrical low Off Conf Determines the value regardless of the Invert parameter R O L3 output action when On The out
458. rm Parameters amasar iia 122 12 6 Diagnostic Als iaa 123 12 7 To Set UpAlarms SAO ic 123 13 CHAPTER T3 BCD INPUT wccsrtecteccesschedsesessessernctecueteslestuasessucepesasizaaatanseceausbasaaeeentemeaestauncages 124 13 1 BCD Parameters A TOO 124 13 1 1 Example TOWE a CDU E A EEE 1293 14 CHAPTER 14 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS sssscsscccceccccccccccctsssssssssssscceeeeees 126 14 1 AER A E E E 127 14 1 1 ETAZ SD EE E TOE TOT NTO E O TOTA O TAE 127 14 1 2 EAO rair TEET EA ETA 127 14 2 Contigutation Ports soe crs cous aces ccssaceseveseies cassteeeceun coed EEEE EEEE EE E ocd tees e EERS 128 14 2 1 E To EEO E E nS ur ee en A OP a ERO ete en E ene oer enone Snr er more ene Cone Nee 128 14 2 2 BSCE Glare aN et aren Cnet ete een rer T ORE ere ter hymen ee enn nnn eer tonne eee een ae 128 14 2 3 Cloning Or Cont GUratlOm Roseta id sent na ton eagestutiaronontenceess 128 14 3 Digital Communications Parameters scsssccccssssscessssecssssecsssscecessseecesseesssseesesseeesesseeeseees 129 14 3 1 Communications di an 131 14 3 2 A TN 131 14 3 3 Baud Rate raises wpa ai nm ess E 132 14 3 4 e aa AAE A E A E A dildos Altace lites Alea E Multa T lita EAE 132 14 3 5 COMUN CIO MAD OG ESE iaa 132 14 3 6 Comae Dase 132 14 3 7 oTo 20A E a Oko Hee NEE amen A E ent eam NA 133 14 3 8 Sats W Or Sese A A A 133 14 4 Ethemet Protocol reana E E E ORE 134 14 4 1 Emere Paree e E T E EET 134 14 4 2 LUAU TIS CUM renan a A A A A E 134 14 4 3 MAC ada ess EE
459. rm will trigger when the input changes from a high to low condition Edge High Low The alarm will trigger on any change of state of the input signal The alarm will trigger when the input signal is high The alarm will trigger when the input signal is low Alarm Relay Output Alarms can operate a specific output usually a relay Any individual alarm can operate an individual output or any combination of alarms up to four can operate an individual output They are either supplied pre configured in accordance with the ordering code or set up in configuration level Each source may be chosen from No Analogue Alarms 1 to 8 Digital Alarms 1 to 8 Invert Output All alarms Any new alarm Yes Loop break alarm Figure 12 2 Attaching an Alarm to Operate an Output Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 117 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 12 3 3 How Alarms are Indicated e ALM beacon flashing red a new alarm unacknowledged e This is accompanied by an alarm message A typical default message will show the source of the alarm followed by the type of alarm For example AnAlm 1 is the default message for analogue alarm 1 e Using Eurotherm Tools configuration package it is also possible to download customised alarm messages An example might be Process Too Hot for an analogue alarm or Vent open for a digital alarm see section 27 9 e f more than one alarm is present they are listed in the AlmSmry
460. rms No 0 Analogue Alarms Summary Byte 1 New larm ny larm Global ck H Access H E Instrument H E 10 H Alarm J Comms y AlmSummary H BCDInput AndlarmByte Dig larmByte SBrkAlarm Andlarm State AndlarmlAck Andlarm2State Digital Alarms Summary Byte Sensor Break Alarm Summary Analogue Alarm 1 State Analogue Alarm 1 Acknowledge 0 16 On_Ack 5 No 0 Safe 3 Analogue Alarm 2 State Analogue Alarm 2 Acknowledge No 0 Analogue Alarm 3 State Safe 3 Analogue Alarm 3 Acknowledge No 0 Analogue Alarm 4 State Safe 3 Analogue Alarm 4 Acknowledge No 0 H E Commstab H Counter H E DigAlarm 6 3 Humidity IPMonitor H Lac2 Andlarm2Ack Andlarm3State And amp larm34ck Andlarm4State An larm dck LQ Lgc8 y 4 A Sd Find AlmSummary 52 parameters Level 2 Engineer 3504 v F2 17 Figure 27 10 Alarm Summary Page Issue 15 Jun 13 319 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 27 9 3 To Customise Digital Alarm Messages In the DigAlarm folder enter the text which is to appear on the controller display when the digital event becomes true In this example the message is Door Open lx File Device Explorer View Options Window Help Us CIS New File Open File Load Save Print Scan Add Remove Access Views na ml Popup Message Door Open Te Alarm Type 11264 High 12 Ela Commstab Alarm Input On
461. rogram will not re run until Program Run Hold has been set to False and back to True No Yes R O Program Run Reset is an input to the programmer While it is in the True 1 state it runs the program When it is switched from True 1 to False 0 the programmer Resets its program Note Reset and Hold will override this input when in Run state At the end of a program the Program will not re run until Program Run Reset has been set to False and back to True Set the program setpoint equal to the Conf target setpoint and advance to the next segment Yes Go to next segment Yes Go to next segment Skip to the next segment and start the Conf segment at the current program setpoint value R Ss O R O 7 O Q Provides an output for the PV event which can be wired for use in a control strategy Only shown if PVEvent Yes This is a wireable parameter which adopts R O the value set by Usr Val in the Programmer Status list available in operator levels In segments that specify PVEvent UserValOP is set to this value Only shown if UserVal Yes On a Dual Loop Instrument synchronised Conf start is achieved by wiring the Sync1 output from the master Programmer to the SynclP of the slave Programmer see Sync1 for further details The synchronise input may also be used to synchronise programs executed on different instruments At the end of a T segment the p
462. rogrammer will inspect the sync input if it is True 1 then the programmer will advance to the next segment It is typically wired from the end of segment output of another programmer Synchronised start is achieved by wiring the R O Sync1 output from the Master channel P1 to Syncln of the Slave channel P2 Program control is then fully transferred to the Master channel where the program number is selected and Run Hold Reset commands executed This link is shown graphically in section 27 10 By default the 3500 is supplied so that both programs run together Issue 15 Jun 13 259 User Manual 3500 series Controllers List Header ListHeader ProgramSetup Sheader ChtorCh2 Z Z S Setup Sub header Ch1 or Ch2 Prgln1 Prgln2 PVWaitlP These are events called Program Input 1 and 2 and can be wired to any parameter They may be used in a wait segment to prevent the program continuing until the event becomes true PV wait input for a wait segment This analogue input may be used to stop the execution of the next segment This is achieved by using a Wait Segment and selecting PVWaitIP for the Wait For parameter PV Wait may then be configured as appropriate to determine the criterion for waiting see Ch1 Ch2 PV Wait in the Program Edit page for further details Provides messages if an invalid entry is made to a program The message appears in the form of a pop up on the controll
463. rol system to use external slave devices for input output I O or specialised functions thus reducing the processing load on the controlling unit so that its other functions can be carried out more efficiently using less memory The Profibus network uses a high speed version of the EIA485 standard see also section 14 1 2 and permits transmission rates of up to 12M Baud 1 5MB in 3500 between the host and up to 32 Profibus Stations or nodes within a single section of a network The use of repeaters allows the maximum of 127 nodes addresses 0 to 126 to be supported Profibus DP distinguishes between master and slave devices It allows slave devices to be connected on a single bus thus eliminating considerable plant wiring Master devices determine the data communications on the bus A master can send messages without an external request when it holds the bus access rights the token Masters are also called active stations in the Profibus protocol Slave devices are peripheral devices such as I O modules valves temperature controllers indicators and measuring transmitters 3500 units are intelligent slaves which will only respond to a master when requested to do so Profibus DP is based around the idea of cyclical scan of devices on the network during which input and output data for each device is exchanged 3500 series controllers are configured for Profibus communications using gsd files which may
464. roller will power up Conf in automatic or manual R O in mode as set when it was L3 powered down Controller will always power up in manual mode no foses O o oo Enabled a R O in L3 These are set to match the type of cooling medium applicable to the process Conf Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual List Header Lp1 or Lp2 Sub header OP Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press or Dto change values Level FF Gain Defines the gain of the feedforward Conf See also value the feed forward value is section 21 8 8 Multiplied by the gain FF Offset Defines the offset of the feedforward value this is added to the scaled feedforward See also section 21 8 8 FF Trim Lim Feedforward trim limits the effect of the PID output Defines symmetrical limits around the PID output such that this value is applied to the feedforward signal as a trim See also section 21 8 8 FF OP The calculated Feedforward Value See also section 21 8 8 Track OP Output track This is the value for the 100 to 100 loop output to track when OP Track is Enabled Output Track forces the control output to a defined value The PID is kept in AUTO and tracks the output The track value is wireable or user settable This mode is similar to the loop entering manual Track En When enabled the output of the loop will Disabled follow the track output value The loop
465. rom the file menu This may be pasted into the clipboard and placed into a document if required for project documentation It may also be printed directly from the File menu Once the I O data has been specified to your wishes save the GSD file to disk you may use any filename you wish You may then import it into your PROFIBUS DP network configuration tool and use it in an application program It is possible to save several different GSD files for the same basic instrument thereby setting up a library for different applications Once the configuration file has been downloaded the network can be set running If all is well the H beacon on the controller will start to flash indicating that the data exchange is proceeding Input data will then be transferred from the controller to the master and output data will be transferred from the master to the controller If all 3500 controllers are of the same type only one GSD file need be configured 14 5 6 Demand Data The GSD file provides a convenient way to transfer input and output data between the controller and the master PLC or Supervisory Computer It can however be wasteful in comms bandwidth if for example 1 It is used to read or write to occasionally accessed data such as autotune or a three term value 2 Complex read write sequences are performed which require a lot of data exchange such as setting up and running a programmer For these parameters use the Demand Data
466. rs that are available over SCADA comms they also allow the Tag addresses to be calculated for Profibus Program General Data Table Comms ProgramNumber Program HoldbackVal Program RampUnits Program DwellUnits Program Cycles Programmer PowerFailAct Programmer Servo Programmer SyncMode Programmer ResetEventOuts Programmer CurProg Programmer CurSeg Programmer PSP Programmer CyclesLeft Programmer CurSegType Programmer SegTarget Programmer SegRate Programmer ProgTimeLeft Programmer PVIn Programmer SPln Programmer EventOuts Programmer SegTimeLeft o e C Programmer ProgStatus Programmer EndOfSeg Parameter Programmer Syncln Programmer FastRun Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 30 4 2 Example Programmer 1 2 Setup Parameters The following table shows the Tag Addresses for Programmer 1 and Programmer 2 Setup and Run parameters calculated by adding the offsets shown in the previous table to Programmer 1 Number 5184 and Programmer 2 Number 5248 Program General Data Table 5207 5271 Programmer 1 2 Synchronise Input 5216 5280 Programmer 1 2 Ch1 Holdback Value 5217 5281 Programmer 1 2 Ch1 Ramp Units Programmer 1 2 Comms ProgramNumber 5184 5248 5185 5249 5186 5250 5187 5251 5188 5252 5189 5253 5190 5254 5191 5255 5192 5256 Programmer 1 2 Holdback Value Programmer 1 2 Ramp Units Programmer 1 2 Dwell Units Programmer 1 2 Number of Cycles Programmer
467. rsed for falling temperature If cutback is set to Auto the cutback values are automatically configured to 3 PB Temperature Upper cutback point CBH 0 output level _ 100 output level Lower cutback point CBL Time gt Figure 21 5 High and Low Cutback Manual Reset In a full three term controller that is a PID controller the integral term automatically removes the steady state error from the setpoint If the controller is set as a PD controller the integral term will be set to OFF Under these conditions the measured value may not settle precisely at setpoint The Manual Reset parameter MR represents the value of the power output that will be delivered when the error is zero You must set this value manually in order to remove the steady state error Integral Hold If enabled the integral component of the PID calculation will be frozen Hence it will hold at its current value but will not integrate any disturbances in the plant Essentially this is equivalent to switching into PD control with a manual reset value preconfigured It may be used for example in a situation where the loop is expected to open it may be necessary to turn heaters off for a short period or switch into manual at low power In this case it may be an advantage to wire it to a digital input which activates when the heaters are turned off When the heaters are switched on again the integral is at its previous value minimisi
468. rtia of the valve or the slack in the linkage but not so slow that the valve opens and closes too widely which may cause oscillation of the output and consequent changes in the temperature If a relay is used to drive the valve the Min OnTime should be set in the order of seconds so that the relay does not switch too rapidly which may cause premature wear For this reason it is often preferable to switch valve motors using triacs To nudge the valve press the pushbutton momentarily The shortest time that the valve can open or close is 110ms If the pushbutton is depressed for longer than 110ms the valve will open or close for as long as the pushbutton is depressed until it is fully open closed as shown in the diagram below Min OnTime Auto Min OnTime 10 seconds for example On pulse to On pulse to valve valve motor ANGKOR 110ms 10seconds Digital input wired Digital input wired to nudge raise or to nudge raise or nudge lower nudge lower lt 110ms lt 10s On pulse to On pulse to valve valve motor motor Digital input wired Digital input wired to nudge raise or to nudge raise or nudge lower gt 110ms nudge lower gt 10 seconds Note Ifthe digital input signal is held on will drive fully open or closed Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 23 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 21 8 10 Effect of Control Action Hysteresis and Deadband 238 For temperature control Control Act will be set to Rev
469. rved for demand data The control program is responsible for writing values into these first four registers to make requests A Parameter lag Beended ParameterTag id Reseed PT output data defined by the GSD file C varas 5775 7 vta EC TE Write Request from PLC rl Register Number The first four registers are reserved for demand data The control program is responsible for writing values into these first four registers to make Command Code and Parameter Tag AE Extended Parameter Tag 4 Valuer State to be written or State to be written output data defined by the GSD file S VaheorSite Po Y votaste Was taa CC ET 3500 series Controllers Response from Slave to a Read Request from Master PLC Input Input Data Register Number The first four registers are reserved for responses to demand data Command Code and Parameter Tag Extended Parameter Tag Returned value retiro ca registers that follow are used for the fixed input data defined by the GSD file 5 ion trae Value or State Value or State Response to Write Request from Controller PLC Output Output Data Register The first four registers are reserved for responses to demand data Number Command Code and Parameter Tag Extended Parameter Tag output data defined by the GSD file S MaeorStte CONS KATY ETT Tot tae e val ota Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual The C
470. s PV can be wired to the output of a function block For example if it is used for control it may be wired to the control loop output Ch1 Output as shown in the example in section 5 1 1 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 89 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 8 2 1 Output State When the Controller is in Standby The output strategy of all digital outputs may be defined using SbyAct The strategy depends on the use to which the output is configured for example if it is an alarm it may be required to turn the output on or to continue normal operation when the controller is in standby For a control output the strategy may be to turn the output off when in standby There are three possible states Off The output will drive to electrical low value regardless of the Invert parameter On The output will drive to electrical high value regardless of the Invert parameter Continue The output will assume a status according to how it is driven e If locally wired the output will continue to be driven by the wire e If not wired or driven by communications the output will maintain the last state written to it If not wired but written to by communications the output will continue to be controlled by the communications messages In this case care should be taken to allow for the loss of communications For motor valve outputs the options are Freeze The valve outputs will both stop driving in standby Conti
471. s 5248 PowerFailAct Offset 5 5253 Step3 Programmer2 Segment Data Start address 6976 Segment Type Offset 0 6976 Programmer2 Segment2 Data Start address 7008 Segment Type Offset 0 7008 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 31 Chapter 31 El Bisynch Parameters 818 902 3 4 818 902 3 4 Parameter 3500 parameter Hex decimal mnemonic PV Measured Value Loop PV Decimal SP Working Setpoint Loop Working Setpoint Decimal OP Output Loop Manual Output Decimal SW See Status Word Table below See Status Word Table below HEX OS See Optional Status Word Table below See Optional Status Word Table HEX below XS See Extended Status Word Table below See Extended Status Word Table HEX below 01 See Digital output status word 1 below See Digital output status word 1 HEX below 02 See Digital output status word 2 below See Digital output status word 2 HEX below 03 See Digital output status word 3 below See Digital output status word 3 HEX below 04 See Digital output status word 4 below See Digital output status word 4 HEX below 05 See Digital output status word 5 below See Digital output status word 5 HEX below 06 See Digital output status word 6 below See Digital output status word 6 HEX below 1A Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Threshold Decimal 2A Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Threshold Decimal ER Error Loop Diag Error Decimal S
472. s 1 OR 2 is true PVWaitlP Wait until Wait criteria is true Ch2Seg Wait if the specified segment in channel B has not reached its target The above parameters may be wired to configure a Wait strategy Examples of a simple strategy are wait for a digital input or program event to become true or wait for a segment in program channel 1 to reach a defined PV before allowing Ch 2 to proceed to the next segment In a SyncStart programmer synchronization is achieved by selecting Wait For Ch2Sync in the Program Edit menu Wait criteria for PVWaitIP is that this parameter has reached a specified threshold This is set by the parameter WaitVal The following example shows various settings possible Wait For set to PVWaitIP PSP 100 WaitVal 5 Segment will wait until Constraints If Wait on Segment were offered on both channels without restrictions it would be possible to set up a program such that both channels would have to wait for one another An example is illustrated in the diagram below Ch1 Seg 3 is set to wait for Ch2 Seg 1 followed by Ch2 Seg 3 set to wait for Ch1 Seg 2 It will not be possible to set conflicting situations in the controller since the following restrictions are imposed The Ch2Seg option is only offered in Channel 1 The Ch2Seg must be ascending Channel 1 Wait Segment Channel 2 Wait Segment Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manu
473. s ANE A 156 14 10 e A eesti eed 157 TATO aa A O ace ia 157 14 11 O 158 WAAVAST WHA SEKI Faia Mete Spa As 158 15 CHAPTER 15 COUNTERS TIMERS TOTALISERS REAL TIME CLOCK 0 159 15 1 COUN teria da did 159 15 1 1 COUN er ara T SE E A E EN 160 15 2 VIO A RAR RR RA aes ate caus RA A ARA AR AAA 161 15 2 1 TAST TYDE S aiaa ee yee aa E Aral A aca dae eda cant eo anes 161 15 2 2 HS e a 161 19 2 3 On Dels limer MOS O 162 15 2 4 Sui as e 27 etname mee reate fee ee Was eer ee tte i OE nts eR en Ten UE To nrc ee 163 15 23 Compressor or Minimum On Timen VOC Cis add ica 164 15 26 Timer aA CLS amorea r a O aia oon cuapsdus teeta vaeatateals 165 15 3 TW OtANSOMS eua SS 166 15 3 1 Roh cei licrevgl Parane ToN dc metres ear r eaten et EAE E E eee ee ee ee eran ee 167 15 4 SN O E E O O ON 168 15 4 1 A a E aa aut a ia erate ea dve rena adler hPa enelee 168 16 CHAPTER 16 APPLICATION SPECIH Cisuscninssi iii 169 16 1 A Controlee eunero noeeue EE EE occucasveassaeseasussceduevones sasveestecceossveacsesevuncesasveee 169 16 1 1 Example O Humd Controller COMIN SCHON Siamin a tron tiaoa 169 16 1 2 Temperature Control Of An Environmental Chievo 170 16 1 3 Humidity Control Or An Environmental CONDE EE E EE A 170 16 2 ae A A A 170 16 3 Zirconia Carbon Potential Controluiui dn ni ds 171 16 3 1 temperature Controla ada EEE EEE A A ANN 171 16 3 2 Cabon OFS ibe OU OU ani N 171 16 33 SOC INC T EE E A T E E N 171 16 3 4 Atomatic Pro
474. s added Cycles Number of times the whole program repeats Cont Continuous 1 to 999 Segment To select the segment number 1 to 50 Segment Defines the type of segment The type of segment varies Rate Type depending on whether the program is Single SyncAll or Time Time to target SyncStart Repeats 1 to 999 times Rate of change of SP Dwell Soak at constant SP Call only available in single programmer Step Step change to new SP Wait Wait for condition GoBack Call End Final segment Target SP Value of SP required at the end of the segment Range of controller Ramp Rate Rate of change of SP Units sec min or hour Holdback Deviation between SP and PV at which the program is put into No holdback Type a hold condition to wait for the PV to catch up PV lt SP Only appears if configured PV gt SP PV lt gt SP To set the analogue PV event in the selected segment No PV Event If PV Event None it is followed by PV Threshold which sets Absolute high the level at which the event becomes active Absolute low Only appears if configured Dev Hi Deviation high Off Event1 Rate Dwell Step not available in SyncAll programmer Repeat previous segs Insert new program PV Event To allow an On Time and an Off Time to be set in the first program event output If set to Event1 an On time parameter and an Off Time parameter follow Time Event Only appears if configured UsrVal Sets the value of an analogue sign
475. s displayed by Disp Hi and Disp Lo parameters Disp Hi The maximum displayable 0 000 to reading 100 000 Disp Lo The minimum displayable 0 000 to reading 100 000 0 00 to 100 00 Range Hi The maximum electrical input output level Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 OnTime algorithm will run When set to any other value the CycleTime algorithm will run If set to 0 Auto the minimum on Auto L time will be 110mS For a relay output this should be set greater than say 10 seconds to prevent the relay from switching too rapidly No decimal points XXXXX Conf One decimal point Two decimal points Three decimal points Four decimal points These parameters allow high and 100 00 ES low limits to be applied to the output against a set limit of the output demand signal from the PID loop E OO E OO See also section 10 4 3 for further 99 User Manual 3500 series Controllers List Header Mod Sub headers xA triac changeover or 2 pin relay xA and xC dual relay dual triac xA xB xC triple logic x the number of the slot in which the module is fitted Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press Dor to change values Level Range Lo The minimum electrical 0 00 to information input output level 100 00 The following parameters are additional if IO Type Valve Rais Inertia Set this parameter to match 0 0 to 9999 9 secs the inertia if any of the motor Bac
476. s make sure that the calibrating source output is set to less than 250mV before connecting it to the mV terminals If accidentally a large potential is applied even for less than 1 second then at least one hour should elapse before commencing the calibration e RTD and CJC calibration must not be carried out without prior mV calibration e A pre wired jig built using a spare instrument sleeve may help to speed up the calibration procedure especially if a number of instruments are to be calibrated e Power should be turned on only after the controller has been inserted in the sleeve of the pre wired circuit Power should also be turned off before removing the controller from its sleeve e Allow at least 10 minutes for the controller to warm up after switch on 26 1 2 To Check mV Input Calibration The input may have been configured for a process input of mV Volts or mA and scaled in Level 3 as described in section 7 2 6 The example described in section 7 2 6 1 assumes that the display is set up to read 75 0 for an input of 4 000mV and 500 0 for an input of 20 000mV To check this scaling connect a milli volt source traceable to national standards to terminals V and V using copper cable as shown in the diagram below Controller y onl Copper cable cr Q9 Figure 26 1 Connections for mV Calibration Ensure that no offsets see sections 7 2 7 and 7 2 8 have been set in the controller Set the mV source to 4 000mV Check the di
477. s no longer reading them Aer Umpalarar idos Prr rrr s TPIT r m Terri Trlerrr rr a erro TITO Pretec Tarr rTu FErrerias Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 351 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 28 6 28 7 352 Step 4 Deactivate OEM Security Enter the code you used in step 3 into Unlock Code to enable full iTools communication If an incorrect code is entered this parameter will become unavailable for a time period indicated by a warning message Failed to write data to device This time will increase for each failed attempt limited to 1 minute If the correct code is entered while the time delay is in operation it will not be accepted It will be necessary to wait until the time delay is no longer operative up to 1 minute or to power cycle the controller Erasing Memory Since the OEM Lock Unlock code is retained in normal non volatile memory it may be erased by use of the Access ClearMemory Cold Start parameter see section 3 4 Using this parameter to erase AllMemory will not only unlock the OEM Security but it will also erase the application being protected Note that the instrument must be in Config mode to accept the ClearMemory command This process may also be done via the SCADA area The Instrument Mode parameter is already in the SCADA area at address 199 write a value of 2 to set Config mode The Clear Memory parameter will be found at address 16119 Set a value of
478. seeseoees 386 32 1 GENERAL a a a ciclo 386 32 2 SEVICO MA OAA 386 32 3 Installation Safety REGUIreMments RIA A 387 32 4 Installation requirements for EMC iso odesveen vdacedesadecweaceeascess 388 33 APPENDIX B TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION oooooocccccccccccoconocccccccconooonccccconocnoooocccccococonos 389 34 APPENDIX C PARAMETER INDE X coa 397 35 DECLARATION OFCONFORMI ss asa 406 Associated Documents HA030143 Installation and Operation Guide supplied with the controller HA025464 EMC Booklet HA026230 Digital Communications Handbook HA026290 Profibus Communications Handbook HA027506 Devicenet Communications Handbook HA026893 IO Expander HA028838 iTools Help Manual Notes These handbooks may be downloaded from www eurotherm co uk Whenever the symbol appears in this handbook it indicates a helpful hint 8 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Issue Status of this Handbook Issue 3 0 of this manual applies to software version 1 2 Issue 4 of this manual applies to software version 2 The following enhancements now include e Second control loop e Dual programmer with the facility to synchronise the two programmers at the start or at every segment Programmer enhancements including PV events guaranteed soak timed event wait segments Go Back segments PID set selector analogue output values 500 segments SCADA set up for programmer Quick Start changes and Quick Start code Configurabl
479. ser Manual 2 PID OnOff VP Dual VP Linear fan oil water Auto manual forced manual control inhibit High and low cutbacks 3 selectable on PV SP OP On Demand program segment and remote input Supply voltage compensation feedforward output tracking OP power limiting SBR safe output Remote SP with trim SP rate limit 2nd Setpoint tracking modes 50 programs max 500 segments User defined up to 16 characters 2 1 if single loop Full or partially synchronised 8 per channel 8 when fully synchronised 1 timed event 1 PV event Rate dwell time call goback and wait Run Hold Reset RunHold RunReset Adv Seg Skip Seg Process value or setpoint Continue ramp reset Guaranteed soak holdback segment user values wait inputs PV hot start 8 High low devhi devlo devband None auto manual event Delay inhibit blocking display message 3 priority levels 8 PosEdge negEdge edge high low None auto manual event Delay blocking inhibit display message 3 priority levels 1 Carbon potential dewpoint 02 Log02 probe mV Barber Colman Drayton MMICarbon AACC Accucarb SSI MacDhui Bosch02 BoschCarbon Internal or remote analogue input Clean recovery time impedance measurement Automatic or manual Sooting alarm with tolerance setting PV offsets 1 Relative humidity dewpoint Psychrometric wet amp dry inputs Internal or remote analogue input Psychrometric constant adju
480. ser Manual 25 Chapter 25 User Values User values are registers provided for use in calculations They may be used as constants in equations or temporary storage in extended calculations Up to 16 User Values are available provided they have been enabled in the Inst Enb page Chapter 6 in configuration level Each User Value can then be set up in the UserVal page 25 1 User Value Parameters List Header UsrVal Sub headers 1 to 16 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press D or to change values Level Units assigned to the User None Conf Value Abs Temp C F K V mV A mA PH mmHg psi Bar mBar RH mmWG inWG inWW Ohms PSIG 02 PPM CO2 CP sec RelTemp C F K rel Vacuum Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Custom 5 Custom 6 sec min CL a y High Limit The high limit may be set for 79722 each user value to prevent the value being set to an out of bounds value Low Limit The low limit ofthe user value 99999 L3 may be set to prevent the user value from being edited to an illegal value This is important if the user value is to be used as a setpoint Value To set the value within the See note 1 L3 range limits Status Can be used to force a good or Good See note 1 L3 bad status onto a user value Bad This is useful for testing status inheritance and fallback strategies Note 1 If Value is wired into but Status is not the
481. ser No Yes Timer not in reset No L3 Timer in reset Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 167 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 15 4 Real Time Clock A real time clock is used to provide a daily and weekly scheduling facility and provides two corresponding alarms The configuration for an alarm is an On Day and an On Time and an Off Day and an Off Time The day options supported are For example it is possible to configure an alarm to be activated at 07 30 on Monday and deactivated at 17 15 on Friday The output from the Real Time Clock alarms may be used to place the instrument in standby or to sequence a batch process The Real Time Clock function will set clear the alarm outputs only at the time of the alarm Therefore it is possible to manually override the alarms by editing the output to On Off between alarm activations The Real Time Clock does not display date or year 15 4 1 Real Time Clock Parameters List Header RTClock Sub headers None Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press or a to change values Level This parameter can be used to set Running Normal operation Running the clock Edit Allows the clock to be set Stopped Clock stopped saves battery life Displays the day or allows the day See table to be set when in Edit mode above Time Displays the time or allows the 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 time to be set when in Edit mode On Day1 Days when alarm 1 and 2 are See table
482. set the ecan value to 3 the Modbus address 14 8 of the parameter being written to Range of the parameter wired In the case of a Boolean the value will be O or To enable broadcast master communications This is only Broadcast See section 14 8 applicable for Modbus protocol Dest Addr Address of the parameter Bcast Val Value to be sent to instruments See section on the network 14 8 Normally wired to a parameter A within the 3500 master Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 No delay Fixed delay This inserts a delay between Rx and Tx to ensure that the drivers used by intelligent EIA232 EIA485 converters have sufficient time to switch over Not enabled Enabled o l Conf L3 R O No No 129 User Manual List Header Comms Parameter Description Name to select Wdog Flag Wdog Action Wdog Timeout WdogRecy Network Watchdog Flag This flag is ON when the Network communications have stopped addressing the instrument for longer than the Timeout time It will be set by the Watchdog process and may be cleared Automatically or Manually according to the value of the Watchdog Action parameter Network Watchdog Action The Watchdog Flag may be cleared Automatically upon reception of valid messages or Manually by a parameter write or a wired value Network Watchdog Timeout If the Network communications stop addressing the instrument for longer than this val
483. set to default values In many cases the default values will give adequate stable straight line control however the response of the loop may not be ideal Because the process characteristics are fixed by the design of the process it is necessary to adjust the control parameters in the controller to achieve best control To determine the optimum values for any particular loop or process it is necessary to carry out a procedure called loop tuning If significant changes are later made to the process which affect the way in which it responds it may be necessary to retune the loop Users have the choice of tuning the loop automatically or manually Both procedures require the loop to oscillate and both are described in the following sections 21 6 1 Loop Response If we ignore the situation of loop oscillation there are three categories of loop performance Under Damped In this situation the terms are set to prevent oscillation but do lead to an overshoot of the Process Value followed by decaying oscillation to finally settle at the Setpoint This type of response can give a minimum time to Setpoint but overshoot may cause problems in certain situations and the loop may be sensitive to sudden changes in Process Value This will result in further decaying oscillations before settling once again Critically Damped This represents an ideal situation where overshoot to small step changes does not occur and the process responds to changes in a controll
484. shield of the temperature sensor is grounded Do not rely on grounding through the framework of the machine Over Temperature Protection 32 4 When designing any control system it is essential to consider what will happen if any part of the system should fail In temperature control applications the primary danger is that the heating will remain constantly on Apart from spoiling the product this could damage any process machinery being controlled or even cause a fire Reasons why the heating might remain constantly on include the temperature sensor becoming detached from the process thermocouple wiring becoming short circuit the controller failing with its heating output constantly on an external valve or contactor sticking in the heating condition the controller setpoint set too high Where damage or injury is possible we recommend fitting a separate over temperature protection unit with an independent temperature sensor which will isolate the heating circuit Please note that the alarm relays within the controller will not give protection under all failure conditions Installation requirements for EMC To ensure compliance with the European EMC directive certain installation precautions are necessary as follows For general guidance refer to EMC Installation Guide HA025464 When using relay outputs it may be necessary to fit a filter suitable for suppressing the conducted emissions The filter requirements will depend on the
485. shown if the Segment No guaranteed Type Dwell and Gsoak is enabled in the soak applied Program SetUp page Ifthe PV deviates by Picoram ieheldit more than an amount set by the G Soak PV lt SP G Soak Value then the program will be put into hold Value until the deviation becomes less than G Soak Value Program is held if See also section 22 5 1 PV gt SP G Soak Value Program is held if PV lt gt SP G Soak Value G Soak Value Sets the value for the G Soak Value Sets the value for the guaranteed soak Rangeunits soak Part No 266 PartNo HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 Issue 15 Jun 13 OO OO E OO E OO E OO E m OO 3500 Series Controllers User Manual List Header Program Edit Sync Start Sub header 1 to 50 These may also have user defined program names Parameter Description Value Default Access Press D or to change Level values If Segment Type GoBack the following two parameters are shown GoBack Seg This is shown if Segment Type GoBack It 1 to the number of segments L3 defines the segment to go back to defined GoBack To set the number of times the section ofthe 1 to 999 1 ES Cycles program is repeated See section 22 3 5 If Segment Type Wait the following parameter is shown Wait For Only appears if Segment Type Wait It Prgin1 Wait for the L3 allows you to select the e
486. sing the alarm is removed Manual Manual The alarm continues to be active until both the alarm condition is removed AND the alarm is acknowledged The acknowledgement can only occur AFTER the condition causing the alarm is removed Event Event ALM beacon does not light but an output associated with this parameter will activate and a scrolling message will appear if this has been configured Blocking Alarms The alarm may be masked during start up Blocking prevents the alarm from being activated until the process has first achieved a safe state It is used for example to ignore start up conditions which are not representative of running conditions A blocking alarm is re initiated after a setpoint change Delay Applies to analogue alarms A short time can be set for each alarm which prevents the output from going into the alarm state The alarm is still detected as soon as it occurs but if it cancels before the end of the delay period then no output is triggered The timer for the delay is then reset It is also reset if an alarm is changed from being inhibited to uninhibited Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 115 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 12 2 Analogue Alarms Analogue alarms operate on variables such as PV output levels etc They can be soft wired to these variables to suit the process 12 2 1 Analogue Alarm Types Absolute High an alarm occurs when the PV exceeds a set high threshold Absolute Low an alarm occurs wh
487. splay reads 75 0 0 25 1LSD least significant digit Set the mV source to 20 000mV Check the display reads 500 0 0 25 1LSD 298 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 26 1 3 To Check Thermocouple Input Calibration Connect a milli volt source traceable to national standards to terminals V and V as shown in the diagram below The mV source must be capable of simulating the thermocouple cold junction temperature It must be connected to the instrument using the correct type of thermocouple compensating cable for the thermocouple In use Controller on Thermocouple Thermocouple VI Compensating cable simulator set to Figure 26 2 Connections for Thermocouple Calibration Set the mV source to the same thermocouple type as that configured in the controller Adjust the mV source to the minimum range For a type J thermocouple for example the minimum range is 210 C However if it has been restricted using the Range Low parameter then set the mV source to this limit Check that the reading on the display is within 0 25 of reading 1LSD Adjust the mV source for to the maximum range For a type J thermocouple for example the maximum range is 1200 C However if it has been restricted using the Range High parameter then set the mV source to this limit Check that the reading on the display is within 0 25 of reading 1LSD Intermediate points may be similarly checked if required 26
488. sponse Word 3 Word 3 is reserved and not used wno e O E CT IA e o sis 4 Request Response Word 4 Word 4 contains the parameter value if the command was a successful Read It echoes the command data if the command was a successful Write and it contains an error code if the command was unsuccessful Teens efletn fol EC A A E A EI Decimal 32768 16384 6192 4096 2068 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 e a12 ii Dependent These bits contain the read value following a read request and an error code following a write on request Error codes The command field in the response message either e Confirms that no operation has been requested e Indicates that a Read or Write request has been completed successfully e Indicates that a Read or Write has failed Error codes for 3500 instruments in Input Register 4 are ICI OO E Invalid parameter tag Read only parameter Value out of range Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 145 User Manual 3500 series Controllers Worked Example 1 Read Loop 1 Process Value from 3500 Controller The general sequence of operation is as follows Write a null command to the slave To clear down any previous transaction This should be done at the start of any sequence of operations using demand data in order to ensure that the system is properly initialised 2 Wait for a null response from the slave To detect the response to a real command 2 pen a command to the ou
489. ss CG A tei In operator level the instrument by default shows Loop parameters in the HOME parameter Home Page display 4 Press a or O to change the The HOME display may also show selection Program Programmer parameters Custx Up to 8 views may be customised Cust1 will select the first Access Access parameters The following table shows the full list of parameters available to customise the display 74 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers List Header Inst Name Parameter Description to select Home Page Configures which set of parameters are shown in the message display of the HOME view when the controller is in operator level Home In operator level the controller can be Timeout made to revert to the HOME display after a fixed time following selection of other pages Loop Summary section 2 8 1 in the selected operating level Loop 1 A summary of loop 1 parameters Summary O Loop 2 A summary of loop 2 parameters Summary Prog Summary A summary of the Program selected operating level Aux1 Bar Val First auxiliary bar graph value Aux2 Bar Val Second auxiliary bar graph value Language To select the language when available Prog Edit may be edited Control1 Page Summary page in operator levels OP1 Beacon OP2 Beacon be wired to operate on any parameter Txdr1 Page Defines the level in which the Txdr2 Page Defines the level in
490. ssue 15 Jun 13 197 User Manual 3500 series Controllers Note 1 0 Clip Bad The measurement is clipped to the limit it has exceeded and its status is set to BAD such that any function block using this measurement can operate its own fallback strategy For example the control loop may hold its output 1 Clip Good The measurement is clipped to the limit it has exceeded and its status is set to GOOD such that any function block using this measurement may continue to calculate and not employ its own fallback strategy 2 Fallback Bad The measurement will adopt the configured fallback value Which has been set by the user In addition the status of the measured value will be set to BAD such that any function block using this measurement can operate it s own fallback strategy For example the control loop may hold its output 3 Fallback Good The measurement will adopt the configured fallback value Which has been set by the user In addition the status of the measured value will be set to GOOD such that any function block using this measurement may continue to calculate and not employ its own fallback strategy 4 Up Scale The measurement will be forced to adopt its high limit this is like having a resistive pull up on an input circuit In addition the status of the measurement is set to BAD such that any function block using this measurement can operate its own fallback strategy For example the control loop may hold its output
491. ssue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 34 Appendix C Parameter Index Below is an alphabetical index of parameters used in the 3500 series controllers A Man Key 6 7 Cal Trim 10 3 aC_CO_O2 16 4 Call Cycles ONTO 124 Call Cyeles 22 191 Active Set Call program Z2AT Z 18 3 1 Call Program 22 19 1 reer eS 103 Mod Advance Program Setup 22 16 Zirconia 16 4 Alarm OP 1531 16 4 Alarm Page 65 Casc In 5 6 SUS 6 5 CBH CBH2 prb Jaa Min Daye 17 2 CBH3 PipPID 215 1 Alm Out 172 CBL CBL2 fLpPID 21 5 1 Alt SP 2171 Ch 2 Gain 20 1 CHEB Ch1 OnOff Hyst Ch1 Output e E al Ch1 PV Thresh Aux2 Bar Val 5 Chi Target SP Average Out 18 5 6 On Backlash 8 2 Ch1 2 Control 4 od pri Ch1 2 PV Wait l Ch1 2 Wait Val Prog Edit Sync All B 29 09 s gt O o E 5 Y U dd 00 on On 5 mo J N 00 On On On 5 o U NIN N CO IA NO NM Bh 00 CO 22 17 1 NO NO N4 N N N4 N 00 C O a NO NO NO NO NO SS ANS 3 Ch1HIdBk Value Prog Edit Sync All Ch1PVStart Prog Edit Sync All No Nh NM 1h N O LININ oo BCD Value BCDIn sf 12 6 BCDIn En 631 Boundary 1 2 5 1 Boundary 2 3 5 1 d Ch2 Hidbck Type Prog Edit Sync All UU O J 5 NO lt O1 lt NIN N CO N p OP Ch2 OnOff Hyst
492. st 8 24 per recipe 8 Characters HMI comms strategy 395 User Manual Transducer calibration Number Type Other features Communication tables Number Function Data formats Application Blocks Soft wiring 2 Input maths 2 Input logic 8 Input logic 8 Input multiplexor 8 Input multiple input BCD Input Input monitor 16 Point linearisation Polynomial fit Timer blocks Counter blocks Totaliser blocks Real time clock 396 3500 series Controllers 2 Shunt load cell comparison Autotare 250 Modbus remapping indirection Integer IEEE full resolution Orderable options of 30 60 120 or 250 User values 16 real numbers with decimal point 24 blocks add subtract multiply divide absolute difference maximum minimum hot swap sample and hold power square root Log Ln exponential switch 24 blocks AND OR XOR latch equal not equal greater than less than greater than or equal to 2 blocks AND OR XOR 4 blocks 8 sets of 8 values selected by input parameter 3 blocks average min max sum 2 blocks 2 Decades 2 blocks max min time above threshold 2 blocks l6 point linearisation fit 2 blocks characterisation by Poly Fit table Switchover 1 block smooth transition between two values 4 blocks OnPulse OnDelay OneShot MinOn Time 2 blocks Up or down directional flag 2 blocks alarm at threshold value 1 block day amp time 2 time based alarms Part No HA027988 I
493. st the description of the code given in section 1 2 to ensure that you have the correct modules for your application This code also defines the basic functionality of the instrument which may be eo Controller only showing Programmer and controller Retrimeni Control type Standard PID valve Order positioner Code Digital communications type Options Panel Retaining Clips Two clips are required to secure the instrument sleeve in the panel These are supplied fitted to the sleeve Accessories Pack For each input a 2 49Q resistor is supplied for mA measurement This will need to be fitted across the respective input terminals User Guide Issue 6 of the guide applies to instrument software versions V2 3 and explains How to install the controller Physical wiring to the plant devices First switch on out of the box Principle of operation using the front panel buttons Introduction to configuration through iTools PC software Ethernet adaptor if Ethernet communications has been ordered Orderable Accessories The following accessories may be ordered SUB35 ACCESS 249R 1 ITools None 30000IR ITools None 30000CK 2000IO VL 10LR XXXX 2000IO VL 10LR 10LR Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 11 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 1 2 3504 and 3508 Ordering Code The controller may have been ordered in accordance with the hardware code listed below Alternatively it may have been ordered by quoting
494. start Programmer Select the program number to be created or edited Press followed by W or O Programs can be created and edited in all levels This gives access to parameters which allow you to set up each segment of the selected program The following table lists these parameters List Header Program Edit Sync Start Sub header 1 to 50 These may also have user defined program names Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press or to change Level values Prg 1 or2 Program number or program name If L3 configured It is also possible to toggle between Ch1 and Ch2 programs using See note 1 Segments This value automatically increments when 1 to 50 1 R O Used another segment is added PV Start PV Start determines the starting point for Off Off L3 program channel 1 See also section 22 15 Risi ising Falling E ww Holdback Value at which holdback is applied in those Range units Value segments where Holdback Type is configured It is deviation between SP and PV See also section 22 5 Ramp Units Time unit applied to the segment Sec Seconds Min Minutes Hour Hours Number of times the whole program repeats Cont Repeats continuously 1 to 9999 Program executes once to 9999 times To select the segment to set up A segment 1 to 50 number can only be selected for editing after a segment type has been configured End To define the type of segment E Ww Cycles
495. sz gt X lt lt P12 x lt Wi gt x lt Loop 1 Remote SP X lt Alarm 2 OP Alarm 3 OP Loop 1 Setpoint 2 l Alarm 4 OP Loop 2 Setpoint 2 Program Event 1 Acknowledge All Alarms Program Event 2 Program Run Program Event 3 Loop 2 Remote SP Single Logic H Control Ch1 OP X Control Ch2 OP Single Triac Control Ch1 OP _CX Control Ch2 OP Dual Relay Ch1 OP amp Ch2 VP Ch1 VP Ch2 P12 Prg Event 1 amp 2 P34 Prg Event 3 amp 3 Ch1 OP heat loop P56 Prg Event5 amp 6 2PV Loop 2 PV 1 TxPSU EEC Chi OP heat oops i amp 2 Alarm 1 amp 2 OP For range select from Table 1 Both channels TxPSU Alarm 3 amp 4 OP below Table 1 4 20mA Linear 0 20mA Linear 0 5Vdc Linear 1 5Vdc Linear 0 10Vdc Linear esa aE O Q ols Program Reset Program Hold PV Retransmission sel A Ch1 OP heat amp Ch2 l JE O VT VR SP Retransmission OP cool 14 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 1 4 How to Install the Controller This instrument is intended for permanent installation for indoor use only and to be enclosed in an electrical panel Select a location where minimum vibrations are present and the ambient temperature is within O and 50 C 32 and 122 F The instrument can be mounted on a panel up to 15mm thick To assure IP65 and NEMA 4 front protection use a panel with smooth surface texture Please read the safety information at the
496. t The action taken if the selected UseGood 0 Assumes the value of a good UseGood Conf input is BAD input If the currently selected input is BAD the output will assume the value of the other input if it is GOOD ShowBad 1 If selected input is BAD the output is BAD Fall Value Ml Fall Type Selected IP ErrMode Switch PV The process variable produced R O from the 2 input measurements Bad NO 80 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 24 Chapter 24 Transducer Scaling The 3500 controller includes two transducer calibration function blocks which may be enabled in configuration level in the Inst Opt page These are software function blocks which provide a method of offsetting the calibration of the controller input when compared to a known input source This chapter describes the full procedures for setting up fixed parameters and for performing transducer calibration in Level 3 and Configuration access levels Transducer scaling is often performed however as a routine operation on a machine to take out system errors For this reason a limited set of calibration parameters can be made available in operator levels 1 and 2 by configuring the parameter Cal Enable section 24 6 to Yes The relevant calibration parameters are found in the Transducer Summary pages Txdr1 or Txdr2 section 2 8 1 7 Transducer scaling can be applied to any input or derived input
497. t and Status is set to Good If the input signal is within the limits but its status is bad the output is set to the Fallback value Upscale If the input status is bad or if the input signal is above High Limit or below Low Limit the output value is set to the High Limit Downscale Ifthe input status is bad or if the input signal is above High Limit or below Low Limit the output value is set to the Low Limit 190 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 18 5 Multi Input Operator The Multi Input Operator function block performs analogue operations on up to eight inputs The block will simultaneously output the Sum Average Maximum and Minimum values of the valid inputs The outputs may be clipped to user defined limits or be replaced by a fallback value as described in section 18 5 5 An outline of the block is shown below and there are two instances of the block in 3500 series controllers Num Casc In Num Valid Inputs Sum Casc In Multi Operator Min Max In1 In2 In3 In4 Average Input Status In5 In In7 In8 Units Out Hi Limit Out Lo Limit Fallback Val Fallback Type Figure 18 5 Multi Input Operator Function Block 18 5 1 Number of Inputs Num In determines the number of inputs made available for use This is settable by the user and is defaulted to two Take care not to set this number to a value higher th
498. t will be forced to 0 or 100 OP min in order to modify undershoot on cool down See also section 21 5 6 CBL CBL2 Cutback low Set1 Set2 Set3 CBL3 The number of display units below setpoint at which the controller output will be forced to 100 OP max in order to modify overshoot on heat up See also section 21 5 6 MR MR2 MR3 Manual reset Set1 Set2 Set3 0 0 to Used to remove PV offsets from the 100 0 setpoint Manual reset introduces a fixed additional power level to the output This isthe power required to eliminate the steady state error from proportional only control The manual reset is applied in place of the integral component when integral time is set to Off See also section 21 5 7 a Loop break time Set1 Set2 Set3 See also section 21 5 10 OPHi 2 3 Output high limit for each set OPLo 2 3 Output low limit for each set Note If the control type is set to On Off only LBT is shown in the PID list 208 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 21 5 2 21 5 3 Proportional Band The proportional band PB or gain delivers an output which is proportional to the size of the error signal It is the range over which the output power is continuously adjustable in a linear fashion from 0 to 100 for a heat only controller Below the proportional band the output is full on 100 above the proportional band the output is full off 0 as shown in Figure 21 2 Th
499. t Lo and maximum display point Input Lo Sets the scaling input low point Range between Input Hi and minimum display Scale Hi Clear Cal Sets the scaling output high Range between Scale Lo and maximum display point Usually the same as the Input Hi Scale Lo Sets the scaling output low Range between Scale Hi and minimum display point Usually 80 of Input Lo Cal Band The calibration algorithms use 0 0 to 99 999 the threshold to determine if the value has settled When switching in the shunt resistor the algorithm waits for the value to settle to within the threshold before starting the high calibration point Indicates when the internal Off Resistor not switched in shunt calibration resistor is On Resistor switched in switched in Shunt State Only appears if Cal Type Shunt Cal Active Indicates calibration taking Off Inactive place On Active Input Value The input value to be scaled Minimum display Maximum display 9999 9 to 9999 9 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 295 User Manual 3500 series Controllers List Header Txdr Sub headers 1 or 2 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press or to change values Level Output Value The Input Value is scaled by the Range between Scale Hi and Scale Lo L3 block to produce the Output Value Output Status The sensor break fault status of Good Conf the PV output Bad Cal Status Indicates t
500. t Press 5 or a to change values Ident Channel type HiRes Out IO Type To configure the output Volts Volts de Y As order Conf drive signal mA milli amps de code R O in L3 L3 R O Access Level L3 R O Status Working condition of the See note 2 section 10 3 1 module The following additional parameters are shown for lO Type mA Conf Res n Display resolution XXXXX to No decimal points to four decimal X XXXX points Disp Hi The maximum displayable 99999 to 99999 decimal points depend on reading resolution Disp Lo The minimum displayable 99999 to 99999 decimal points depend on reading resolution Range Hi The maximum electrical Between 4 00 and Range Lo normally set to 4 00 input level 20 00mA L OO E L OO E OO Range Lo The minimum electrical Between 4 00 and Range Hi normally set to 4 00 input level 4 00mA Meas Value Displays the current value R O of the output demand signal in electrical units Requested output signal 99999 to 99999 This parameter is normally soft L3 level wired to retransmit a selected parameter such as PV Cal State Allows the module to be Idle Unit not being calibrated Conf calibrated Lo Low calibration point for DC output Confirm Confirm the action Go Start calibration Trim Hi High calibration point for DC output Accept Store user calibration Abort Abort user calibration o Seas fo l E Trim mode It allows a trim to be applied to the calibration points
501. t Sub headers 1 to 2 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press or a to change values Level Enable Counter enable Enabled Counter 1 or 2 is enabled in the Disabled Instrument configuration page but they can also be turned on or off in this list Direction Defines count up or count down Up counter This is not intended for dynamic Down counter operation i e subject to change during counting It can only be set in configuration level Ripple Ripple carry to act as an enabling Carry input to the next counter It is turned On when the counter reaches the target set Overflow Overflow flag is held true Yes when the counter reaches zero Down or passes target Up Clock Tick period to increment or No clock input decrement the count This is Clock input present normally wired to an input source such as a digital input Target Level to which the counter is O to 99999 aiming Count Counts each time a clock input O to 99999 occurs until the target is reached Reset Resets the counter Not in reset Reset Clear Clear overflow Not cleared O flow Cleared 160 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 15 2 Timers Up to four timers can be configured Each one can be configured to a different type and can operate independently of one another 15 2 1 Timer Types Each timer block can be configured to operate in four different modes These modes are explained below
502. t calibration for mV ranges Lo Ov Low input calibration for V Thermocouple ranges Hi 8V High input calibration for V thermocouple ranges Lo Ov Low input calibration for HZ Volts range Hi 1V High input calibration for HZ Volts range Lo 1500hm Low input calibration for RTD range Hi 4000hm High input calibration for RTD range Load Fact Restore factory calibration values Save User Save the new calibration values Confirm To start the calibration procedure when one of the above has been selected Go Starting the automatic calibration procedure Busy Calibration in progress Passed Calibration successful Failed Calibration unsuccessful The above list shows the parameters which appear during a normal calibration procedure The full list of possible values follows the number is the enumeration for the parameter Idle Low calibration point for Volts range High calibration point for Volts range Calibration restored to factory default values Md A Ww N gt User calibration stored 6 Factory calibration stored 11 Idle 12 Low calibration point for HZ input 13 High calibration point for the HZ input 14 Calibration restored to factory default values 15 User calibration stored 16 Factory calibration stored 20 Calibration point for factory rough calibration 21 Idle 22 Low calibration point for the mV range 23 Hi calibration point for the mV range 24 Calibration restored to factory default values 25 User calibrat
503. t configurations or use Eurotherm iTools to make clone copies of fully working instruments This is described in section 27 13 Store this securely as a back up to be used to restore the configuration Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 1 1 1 bia 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 4 1 1 2 Chapter 1 Installation and Operation What Instrument Do I Have Thank you for choosing this Controller The 3508 controller is supplied in the standard 1 8 DIN size 48 x 96mm front panel The 3504 controller is supplied in the standard 1 4 DIN size 96 x 96mm front panel They are intended for indoor use only and for permanent installation in an electrical panel which encloses the rear housing terminals and wiring on the back They are designed to control industrial and laboratory processes via input sensors which measure the process variables and output actuators which adjust the process conditions Contents of Package When unpacking your controller please check that the following items have been included 3508 or 3504 Controller Mounted in its Sleeve The 3504 contains up to six plug in hardware modules the 3508 has up to three Additionally digital communications modules can be fitted in two positions The modules provide an interface to a wide range of plant devices and those fitted are identified by an ordering code printed on a label fixed to the side of the instrument Check this again
504. t finput ia adil ContactCl Contact closure input ae output Time proportioning output ValvRaise Motorised valve position output See Note 1 raise on LA only Note 1 LA and LB work in a complementary manner in Valve Positioning VP applications When LA is set to ValvRais LB is automatically set to ValvLowr lOType for LB is NOT alterable in VP applications Configuration settings applied to LA will be applied to LB automatically Summary of parameters which follow IO Type for different configurations of Input or Output cycle Time SbyAd Min OnTime Min OnTime s Explanation of Logic IO Parameters List Header LgclO Sub header LA and LB Name Parameter Description Value Pee Access to select Press or Dto change values Level When configured as an O to 100 output this is the desired output value When configured as an 0 to 1 input the current state of OnOff the digital input is displayed Invert Sets the sense of the logic Non inverted Conf input or on off output Output off logic 0 when PID demand Does not apply if the IO off For control this is when PV gt SP e mop or Output on logic 1 when PID demand off For control this is when PV lt SP This is the normal setting for control 88 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers List Header LgclO Name Parameter Description to select O The next six parameters are only shown when IO Type Value Press
505. t for that segment This may cause full power to be applied to the process for a short period to heat the process back to its value prior to the power failure Ramp back This will servo the program setpoint to the measured value the PV Input parameter value then return to the target setpoint at the ramp rate set for that segment or the last rate available if in a dwell segment The setpoint is not allowed to step change the program setpoint The outputs will take the state of the segment which was active before power was interrupted Reset The process is aborted by resetting the program All event outputs will take the reset state The display does not warn the operator that a power interruption has occurred Ramp back Power fail during Dwell segments If the interrupted segment was a Dwell then the ramp rate will Seem AOS be determined by the previous ramp segment T1 T2 On achieving the Dwell setpoint the dwell will continue from the point at which the power was interrupted Note If a previous ramp segment does not exist i e the first segment of a program is a dwell then the Dwell will continue at the servo to PV setpoint i i Power Off Time Segn Segn 1 Ramp back power fail during Ramp segments Setpoint If the interrupted segment was a ramp then the programmer will servo the program setpoint to the PV then ramp towards Taget sagon the target setpoint at the previous ramp rate Previous ramp
506. t menus or by double clicking the wire If you click on a wire segment you can drag it to manually route it Once this is done it is marked as a manually routed wire and will retain its current shape If you move the block to which it is connected the end of the wire will be moved but as much of the path as possible of the wire will be preserved If a wire is selected by clicking on it it will be drawn with small boxes on its corners 27 10 6 5 Tooltips 27 10 7 27 10 7 1 326 Hover the mouse over a wire and a tooltip showing the names of the parameters which are wired and if downloaded their current values will also be shown Using Comments Drag a comment onto the diagram and the comment edit dialog will appear Coire ARAF E Type in a comment Use newlines to control the width of the comment it is shown on the diagram as typed into the dialog Click OK and the comment text will appear on the diagram There are no restrictions on the size of acomment Comments are saved to the instrument along with the diagram layout information o cma Comments can be linked to function blocks and wires Hover the mouse over the bottom right of the comment and a chain icon will appear click on that icon and then on a block or a wire A dotted wire will be drawn to the top of the block or the selected wire segment Comment Context Menu The comment context menu has the following entries on it Edit Open the comment edit dialog to ed
507. t the end of remain at last SP the program indefinitely The program will return to controller only mode Only shown if Segment Type Call Up to 50 current program Enter the program number to be inserted in number excluded place of the selected segment Call Program E OO Only shown if Segment Type Call Cont Repeats Defines the number of times the inserted continuously program repeats 1 to 999 Program executes once to 999 times Call Cycles E OO Holdback Type Sets the type of holdback applicable to the No holdback selected segment applied Deviation low Deviation high Deviation high and low Only shown if Segment Type Dwell or 0 00 0 to 500 00 Time 0 1 sec to 500 hours Sets the time to execute the segment E OO Duration E OO Target SP Only shown if Segment Type Rate Time or Step To enter the SP which is to be achieved at the end of the segment E Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 217 User Manual List Header Program Sub header 1 to 50 Parameter Description Value Default Access Level Press D or to change EE 3500 series Controllers Ramp Rate Only shown if Segment Type Rate To enter the rate in units time at which the SP is required to change Event Outs To define the state of up to eight event outputs in the selected segment 00000000 to SERRE 22 19 2 Sync mode This mode will al
508. tIP Wait segment concludes when PVWaitIP satisfies criterion specified by ChX PV Wait this option is used to Wait Until a specified value has been reached by PVWaitlP The following two or four parameters are shown if Wait For PVWaitIPy a The following two or four parameters are shown if Wait For PVWaitlP two or four parameters are shown if Wait For PVWaitIP Ch1 PV Wait Configures the type of analogue event to be None No alarm type None also applied to the PVWaitIP parameter for the applied Ch2 PV Wait E a ania Abs Hi Absolute high See section 22 17 5 2 for an example Abs Lo Absolute low Dev Hi Deviation high Dev Lo Deviation low Dev Band Deviation band Ch1 Wait Val This sets the value at which the Ch1 2 PV Range units also Wait parameter becomes active It is not Ch2 Wait Val shown if Ch1 2 PV Wait None On the next press of the next Segment is selected If Segment Type GoBack the following two parameters are shown GoBack Seg This is shown if Segment Type GoBack It 1 to the number of segments L3 defines the segment to go back to defined GoBack To set the number of times the section of the 1 to 999 1 L3 Cycles program is repeated See section 22 3 5 On the next press of the next Segment is selected 264 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 22 17 2 To Edit a Sync
509. tal output for the duration of a segment An extension of this is the Time Event In this case the first digital event can have a delay On Time and an Off Time specified On Time defines when the digital output will turn on after the beginning of the segment and Off Time defines when the digital output will turn off The reference point for the On and Off times is the start of the segment e Only the first digital event may be configured as a Time Event e Each segment has one Time Event parameter OFF Event e The first piano key is replaced by T if a time event is configured and is not alterable Editing of the Time Events follows a number of simple rules to make programming easier for the operator These are shown in the diagrams below assume On Time Ton Off Time Toff Segment 2 Time Event On Time Event Off Toff 0 Event Output Ton 0 Time Event On Time Event Off Toff 0 Event Output Time Event Off Toff t2 Event Output Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual Segment Time Event On Time Event On Toff gt 0 Toff 0 Event Output Ton 0 Time Event Off Event Output Ton 0 Time Event On Time Event Off Error Toff gt segment 1 duration v Event Output en e To configure an event which straddles two segments configure Ton in Segment n and Toff in segment n 1 Segment 2 Time Event On Time Event Off Erro
510. tation EXE irc all 285 24 3 4 tal calgeca IDA 287 24 3 5 Callbratiom Using me JnternalCallbratlO Res Sto 287 24 4 Load CCW sath oi a a a oust osstaucsasetadesssetadeesetare N a ew al wean 288 24 4 1 Si le More pa Ok Remmi eset ter ant eae A A A A A 288 24 4 2 coni gure A nent moet Ne Tene OT OLE Mert te met er mtn ewes Vi Tener ne 289 24 4 3 Grete UN enh EXAME E Sesu td lo 290 24 4 4 Eec CEDESI o A apf orca casa atonement 291 24 5 COM Pal lSO Misesecevedccrenscsisasevnscnuanuancanadscsscnsssaducuereadeanedandesdcdsnseddadsstenaadnandssedsussdeadeussuaduucdnnddestassdecsauss 293 24 5 1 APNE eM A O EET 293 24 5 2 COn ie all Mn cios 293 24 5 3 Compatisoi Calor OM roo 294 24 6 Transducer SCALING Parameters omoro teriero riroriro i a unnn iEn AE TERATE 295 24 6 1 Fadmneror NOTE Serei A nn AEE NT 296 25 CHAPTER 29 USER VALUES icar E 297 25 1 User Value Parameters ira E A E a EN 297 6 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 26 CHAPTER 26 CALIBRATION isssc 5cc cassssnscsehcredasascesscceussedasescansedetcnasacescnosaceesnedecexesniesoncets 298 26 1 Tie Check Inp t Calibratori cessed coe ecec tendencies E E 298 26 1 1 A O 298 26 1 2 To CHECK IV nputEalradO Nao 298 26 1 3 To Check Thermocouple APURO bles 299 26 1 4 EDC FSC KTV MOIRA SIDO aa 299 26 2 INpubCalbra toni OR 300 26 3 Pre CAUIRLOINS iii 300 26 3 1 To Calbrate ray Rand Sta al aaa diia 300 26 3 2 To SAVE the New Calbrtion Data isa E EEE TS 301 26 3
511. te dwell at the last target setpoint or to reset to the start of the program or to go to a defined level of power output SafeOP This is selectable by the user Ifa number of program cycles are specified for the program then the End segment is not executed until the last cycle has completed Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 245 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 22 4 22 4 1 22 4 2 246 Event Outputs All segments except GoBack Wait and End Segments have configurable events Two types of events are provided namely PV Events and Time Events PV Event PV Events are essentially a simplified analogue alarm per segment based on the programmer PV input The PV Event Output PVEventOP may be used to trigger the required response e Each Segment has one PV Event Type Off Hi Lo Band e Each Segment has one PV Event Threshold User value e Each channel has one PY Event nput for the monitored variable e Each channel has one PV Event OP Off On Band refers to deviation of the PV parameter from Programmer Setpoint i e there is no reference input If PV Event is set to anything other than None then the following parameter will be PV Threshold This sets the level at which the PV Event will be triggered Note if PV Event is activated in a segment then it is not possible to set a User Value in that segment see section 22 4 3 Time Event Digital events can simply be the turning on of a digi
512. te only parameter which will read back as 0 When the instrument is unlocked a value entered here will lock the instrument and defines the code needed to unlock The code and locked status will be saved in non volatile memory 3 Address 16118 Unlock Code this is a write only parameter which will read back as 0 When the instrument is locked a value entered here will be compared with the lock code If it is the same the instrument will be unlocked If the value is different this parameter will become unavailable for a time period This time will increase for each failed attempt These addresses are not available by default in iTools It is therefore necessary to create Custom Tags in iTools to be able to write or read these parameters The following procedure shows how to do this and how to use the OEM security features Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 347 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 28 3 Step 1 View Tools OPC Server With Tools open and connected to the target instrument open the Tools OPC server using Options gt Advanced gt Show Server File Device View Meis Window Help k Bl v Show Labels on Toolbars x K Q New File Open File Panel views Position dd Remove Access Views E Graphical Wiring Cloning Terminal Wiring H Device Recipe EJ watch Recipe Programmer a User Pages las OPC Scope BiTools Secure Update Rates Decimal Places Parameter Availability Settings Parameter List Cursor Op
513. tem on the drawing will select it 27 10 10 2 Multiple Selection Control click an unselected item to add it to the selection doing the same on a selected item unselects it Alternatively hold the mouse down on the background and wipe it to create a rubber band anything which isn t a wire inside the rubber band will be selected Selecting two function blocks also selects any wires which join them This means that if more than one function block is selected using the rubber band method any wires between them will also be selected Pressing Ctrl A selects all blocks and wires Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 327 User Manual 27 10 11 Colours Items on the diagram are coloured as follows 27 11 328 Red Blue Purple 3500 series Controllers Function blocks comments and monitors which partially obscure or are partially obscured by other items are drawn red Ifa large function block like the loop is covering a small one like a math2 the loop will be drawn red to show that it is covering another function block Wires are drawn red when they are connected to an input which is currently unalterable Parameters in function blocks are coloured red if they are unalterable and the mouse pointer is over them Function blocks comments and monitors which are not coloured red are coloured blue when the mouse pointer is over them Wires are coloured blue when a block to which the wire is connected is selected or the mouse pointer
514. ters in an instrument for different batches or processes by simply selecting a particular recipe to load Recipes are important for reducing error in setup and they remove the need for operator instructions fixed to the panel next to the instrument The Recipe Editor is used during configuration to assign the required parameters and to set up the values to be loaded for each recipe 27 8 1 To Set Up a Recipe 1 Press Ely Device Redpe The view shown below will be seen Each tag represents a parameter COM1 1D001 3504 Device Recipe Editor A A Tag List Parameter Description Value Tagl Tage Tag 3 Tag 4 Tag Tag amp Tag Taga Tag 4 Taq 10 lt Figure 27 7 No Recipes Set Up 2 Name the recipe set Right click in the required Set column Select A i Rename Data Set and enter a name for the recipe E rah Vales Cirle Other commands are CA Oan Donde Sat aerated Load Access Level This sets the access level in which the recipe can be Copy Daba Set Citi loaded Snapshot values This selects the currently running parameter values in the selected recipe Clear data set This removes the current values from the selected recipe Copy Data Set Parameter values are copied from the selected set The Paste command becomes available m i P Los Renps THH 3 Select Parameters Select the tag right click or click 1 Select the p are parameter from the browser list The view below shows four recipes named
515. tes 1 Select Level 3 or Conf as PJI ret described in Chapter 3 Then he ee ee press to select PVInput SBrk Alarm MarLatch Filter Time 0 60 4 2 Press to scroll to Offset PUT me ut In this case an offset of 2 0 units is applied Mess Valus 3 Press or to adjust the Pu offset to the reading you GOTT set require 86 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 7 2 8 Two Point Offset A two point offset enables the controller display to be offset by different amounts at the low end of the scale and at the high end of the scale The basic calibration of the controller is unaffected but the two point offset provides a compensation for sensor or inter connection errors The diagrams below show that a line is drawn between the low and high offsets values Any readings above and below the calibration points will be an extension of this line For this reason it is best to calibrate with the two points as far apart as possible Display Display Reading Reading Factory calibration High offset A Factory calibration Low offset Electrical Input Electrical Input Figure 7 3 Two Point Offsets 7 2 8 1 Example To Apply a Two Point Offset For this example it is assumed that an input of 0 0 mV produces a reading of 0 0 and an input of 80 0mV produces a reading of 1000 0 e Connect the input of the controller to the source device which you wish
516. the Quick Code listed in section 1 3 If ordered to the quick code the controller will be configured in the factory If it is not ordered using the quick code then it will be necessary to configure the controller when it is first switched on This is described in Chapter 2 Hardware Coding Number Model Function Supply Voltage Number of Loops Application Programs Recipes Toolkits Fascia Programs Toolkit Wires Model Number Supply Voltage A 3504 Standard 100 230Vac A 3508 Standard 20 29Vac de Function Loops Ai prices Veire bodi Application Recipes rovides Valve Position option in Heat Cool VP included as standard zc EN P a COS Example order code 3504 CC VH 2 XX 50 X S R2 D4 AWXX XX XX A2 XX XX ENG ENG XXXXX XXXXX This code describes a two loop 3504 with 50 programs Additional modules for dual relay analogue control analogue inputand EIA232 communications English language and manuals with silver fascia 1 2 1 Input and Output Modules le le le le le le H J Config Product MENTES Warranty Calibration Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Comms Comms Tools Language Language Certificate 2 2 Slot Slot E AAA IO Slots 1 2 3 4 2 5 2 6 2 H Comms Slot J Comms Slot Manuals Language Al 232 Modbus XXX 25 25 prog 500 segments 50 prog 500 Fascia nanan man minds ME 232 ErBisynch Zire 485 Modbus Dial DC eunt AmA FE 4 wire 485 El Bisynch Standard OP 24Vac Slots 1 2
517. the Sync points are observed and evaluated as specified During the Go Back however as there are no Go Backs specified in channel 2 the Sync points are ignored 3 GoBack Seg1 10x 2 4 Wait Ch2Seg 5 5 2 GoBack in Channel 2 does not cover a sync point In this scenario the first Sync point is never covered during the GoBack cycles in Channel 2 this Sync point will therefore be ignored during the GoBack cycles of Channel 1 The second Sync point is covered for 5 GoBack cycles and therefore constitutes a valid Sync point during the 5 cycles During the remaining GoBack cycles of Channel 1 Sync point 2 will be ignored 3 GoBack Seg1 10x 2 4 Wait Ch2Seg 5 Ch1 6 GoBack Seg4 5x 7 Ch2 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 22 8 22 9 22 10 Prgln1 and Prgln2 These are events called Program Input 1 and 2 which can be wired to any parameter They are used in wait segments to prevent the program continuing until the event becomes true Example 1 in section 22 17 5 shows how these might be used Program Cycles If the Program Cycles parameter is chosen as greater than 1 the program will execute all of its segments including calls to other programs then repeat from the beginning The number of cycles is determined by the parameter value The Program Cycles parameter has a range of 0 to 9999 where 0 is enumerated to Cont
518. the contact of the relay switching the load The snubber typically consists of a 15nF capacitor connected in series with a 100Q resistor and will also prolong the life of the relay contacts A When the relay contact is open and it is connected to a load the snubber passes a current typically 0 6mA at 110Vac and 1 2mA at 240Vac It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that this current does not hold on the power to an electrical load If the load is of this type the snubber should not be connected See also section 1 8 9 Power Supply Connections MD ota 1 Before connecting the instrument to the power line make sure that the line 0 230Vac voltage corresponds to the description on the identification label 18t062Hz 2 Forsupply connections use 16AWG or larger wires rated for at least 75 C 0 3 Use copper conductors only 4 For 24V the polarity is not important 5 Itis the Users responsibility to provide an external fuse or circuit breaker GAH For 24 V ac dc fuse type T rated 4A 250V GA a For 100 240Vac fuse type T rated 1A 250V O Safety requirements for permanently connected equipment state e a switch or circuit breaker shall be included in the building installation e it shall be in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the operator e itshall be marked as the disconnecting device for the equipment Note a single switch or circuit breaker can supply more t
519. the derivative output 553 O SbrkOP 1 hold 554 Tack 1 step Zas MOP 565 no fy of low Dhigh 502 505 F606 507 508 o 00262 00263 0 0264 00265 010266 010267 010268 0 0265 52 623 624 Lin16 Out3 625 0x0271 Lin16 Out4 O O O O Oojojoj ojo jojo jo jo Oo O jojo jo O oOojojo o o O O O O O O O O O x Xx x lt x XIXIXI IxXI x x x x x X x X X X x lt X 1K X 1K IK IKI KIT K LE KL XXX X X O O O O oOojo joj ojo jojo jo jo O Ojojo o O Ojoj jo o o O O O O O O O O O Ba Es a NINININININININININ NINININ NO NMNINININININININININININININ ojo O O NINININININININININ NI Ov O amp Os Os OX O11 A O1 O71 OT O17 OT BI Oo NM nin ojo N P OO O M SO CIN Oa oy A D gt ja Mv O 0 OQ OQ T W O N OIO ro 626 0x0272 Lin16 0utb Loop 2 Main ActiveOut 0x0403 Loop 2 OP ManualOutVal Loop 2 Setup ControlAction reverse 1 direct 00273 629 631 632 634 637 0x040 0x0402 0x0405 0x040 0 0408 of 0x0409 of 0x040 SPT 1 SP2 71040 oxoat0 toop 2 0P chaDeadband 00 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 359 User Manual 360 MODBUS 1041 1042 1043 1045 1048 1049 1051 1052 1054 1055 1058 1059 1061 1063 1070 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1079 1090 1091 1096 1102 1107 1108 1109 1110 1112 1121 1122 1123 1135 1136 1140 1141 1142 1150 1151 1152 1176 1177 1179 1180 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1233 1234 1238 1254
520. the rate of change of error It reacts to changes in the PV by changing the output to remove the transient Increasing the derivative time will reduce the settling time of the loop after a transient change Derivative is often mistakenly associated with overshoot inhibition rather than transient response In fact derivative should not be used to curb overshoot on start up since this will inevitably degrade the steady state performance of the system Overshoot inhibition is best left to the approach control parameters High and Low Cutback section 21 5 6 Derivative is generally used to increase the stability of the loop however there are situations where derivative may be the cause of instability For example if the PV is noisy then derivative can amplify that noise and cause excessive output changes in these situations it is often better to disable the derivative and re tune the loop If set to Off 0 no derivative action will be applied Derivative can be calculated on change of PV or change of Error If configured on error then changes in the setpoint will be transmitted to the output For applications such as furnace temperature control it is common practice to select Derivative on PV to prevent thermal shock caused by a sudden change of output as a result of a change in setpoint Relative Cool Gain The gain of channel 2 control output relative to the channel 1 control output Relative Ch2 Gain compensates for the different quantit
521. thin the block and the value given by NumCascln is added to NumValidIn When in cascade the sum min max and average outputs treat Casc in as an additional input to the block For example if Casc In is greater than any number on the rest of the inputs then its value will be output as the maximum 18 5 5 Fallback Strategy for Multi Input Block The fallback strategy may be selected in configuration mode as follows 18 5 5 1 Clip Good e The status of the outputs is always good e If an output is out of range then it is clipped to limits e If all inputs are Bad all outputs 0 or clipped to limits if O is not within the output range 18 5 5 2 Clip Bad e The status of all outputs is Bad if one or more of the inputs is Bad e If an output is out of range then it is clipped to limits and the status of that output is set to Bad e If all inputs are Bad all outputs O and all status are set to Bad or clipped to limits if O is not within the output range 18 5 5 3 Fall Good e The status of the outputs is always good e If an output is out of range then it is set to the fallback value e If all inputs are Bad all outputs fallback value 18 5 5 4 Fall Bad e The status of the outputs is bad if one or more of the inputs is bad e If an output is out of range then it is set to the fallback value and the status is set to bad e If all inputs are Bad all outputs fallback value and all status are set to bad 192 Part
522. tion Value Default Access Not shown in Single Channel programmer Ao pmd e This parameter will adopt the units of the See display units list section 7 2 3 parameter to which the programmer PVIn Units R O Alterabl e if not wired is wired For example Programmer PVIn could be wired to Loop TrackSP and Loop MainPV wired to PVInput The units will adopt the units set in PVInput list As units the resolution is set by the XXXXX to X XXX X R O parameter it is wired to Alterabl e if not wired The programmer uses the PV input for a The PV Input is normally wired from Conf number of functions the loop TrackPV parameter Resolution PV Input In holdback the PV is monitored against Note This input is automatically the setpoint and ifa deviation occurs the wired when the programmer and program is paused loop are enabled and there are no The programmer can be configured to start existing wires to track interface its profile from the current PV value servo parameters to PV Track interface parameters are The programmer monitors the PV value for Programmer Setup PVInput Sensor Break The programmer holds in SPInput Loop SP AltSP Loop SP sensor break AltSPSelect The PVStart feature uses the PV value to search for the segment in which the program starts The programmer needs to know the SP Input is normally wired from the Conf working setpoint of the loop it is trying to
523. tions Show Parameters in Browse Find view Toolkit Blocks Performance Y Run Wizard For New Clone File Authorization 3 Commstab Advanced Show Server Y Programme Clear Most Recently Used Lists eer C Program a iaa Send Command To Server AN Diag ave Settings Now Save Settings On Exit 3504 v 2 61 Makes the server visible A Level 2 Engineer Click on the OPC Server application on your windows Taskbar to view the server oe ae ee iew Piet ae tthe M com Diagnostics BB 0001 20 coma F CONH OOE coms Tra Harp Cork 1 Shah is a am Command el Pe rl ond d A BOSS Se 05 06 2007 Sen Information Sandra Monk DEL Server po DGS Se 03 05 2007 System Information SA Bee ees e e 11 51 33 302 0 05 2007 System Information Localizabion ID i IMa ka a Se A AAA AAA e Ms e ae a A e SE E z 348 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 28 4 Step 2 Create Custom Tags Expand the connected instrument to show all folders Close to the bottom of the tree you will find a folder called CustTags mrret I ry r4 Tag Icon CustTags Folder Al a A O Arda Deco SEE rra Bee ee As ree a ee deed iS Su COCA s Lae aad ee T E 1 a a 1 PA sT T LIN aem i ewe ia OP a Oin fea O Pkt rd O Click on CustTags then click on the Tag icon on the Toolbar Enter the name of the Tag
524. to No decimal points to four decimal X XXXX points Disp Hi Display high reading 99999 to 99999 decimal points depend on 100 l resolution Disp Lo Display low reading eo e LLLLL out of low range Range Hi O to 10 10 Range Lo Electrical low input level A Meas Value R O l A O O E Cal State Calibration state Non calibrating state Conf Lo Select calibration of the low position Hi Select calibration of the high position Confirm Confirm the position to calibrate Go Start calibration Abort Abort calibration Busy Controller automatically calibrating Passed Calibration OK Failed Calibration bad Accept To store the new values The above 8 parameters are not available on Dual DC Output module when IO Type is set to Volts Conf 7 D Mm 5 L OO OO L L E T Status Working condition of the Normal operation R O See note 2 module section 10 3 1 102 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 10 3 4 High Resolution DC Output This module order code Hk can be fitted in slots 1 2 or 4 It contains two channels The first channel A provides a high resolution 15 bit 4 20mA or 0 10Vdc retransmission signal The second channel C provides 24Vdc 20 to 30Vdc transmitter power supply The module provides full 240Vac isolation Channel A List Header Mod Sub headers 1A 2A or 4A DC Control and DC Retransmission Name Parameter Description Value Default to selec
525. tput 16 Off R O 16 On Status Block Status parameter if any Inputis Good R O BAD this Status will set according to Bad the Fallback Type O Fall Type Fallback Type FallGood If the Input status is BAD or the The Status value if the Input is BAD or value is out of range set the out of range Status parameter GOOD and set the Output values as though the FallBack value was present on the Input FallBad If the Input status is BAD or the value is out of range set the Status parameter BAD and set the Output values as though the FallBack value was present on the Input Fallback Fallback value If the Input is BAD or out of range this value is applied to drive the Outputs as though it was present on the Input 158 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 15 Chapter 15 Counters Timers Totalisers Real Time Clock A series of function blocks are available which are based on time date information These may be used as part of the control process 15 1 Counters Up to two counters are available They provide a synchronous edge triggered event counter Direction Enable Count Counter Clock Function Overflow Block Target RippleCarry Reset Clear Overflow Figure 15 1 Counter Function Block When configured as an Up counter Clock events increment Count until reaching the Target On reaching Target RippleCarry is set true At the next clock pulse Count returns to zero Overflow is latch
526. tput data Combine parameter tag and write command into Word 1 which will trigger a write to the slave 4 Wait for the Slave response The slave must process the command and respond Read the returned data From Word 4 Step 1 Write a null command to clear any previous transaction Teno CI ele IO IO A EI E A Decimal 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 a 2 1 Function Reserved Parameter Tag Address Function request Step 2 Wait for the response Binos 15 14 13 12 a 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ol Decimal 32768 16304 192 2096 2068 1024 512 258 728 68 32 ef aJa 2 i Reserved Parameter Tag Address Read request Step 3 Write acommand to Loop 1 PV at tag address 1 This address is less than 2048 so Extended addressing is not required for this particular example The command code for a standard read puts a 1 into bit 12 of Word 1 1 puts 0000 0001 in the lower 11 bits of Word 1 MECA EAN aaa A A AA re ea E A Decimal 32768 16384 6192 4096 2088 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 a 2 0 Function Command code Reserved Parameter Tag Address Read ME Reserved 1 request The value to be written to the First oe Word will therefore be 4096 1 4397 dec AC40 1 Ac41 hex The values for the other three Output Words should be set to 0 as this is a write Responses Step 4 Wait for a res
527. ts and 20 digital outputs Data transfer is performed serially via a two wire interface module which is fitted in digital communications slot J Data ly _ 20 inputs nputs se GQ lO Expander JF on 20 Outputs 3500 Controller ly Figure 1 15 Data Transfer Between lO Expander and Controller A description of the lO Expander is given in Handbook Part No HA026893 which can be downloaded from www eurotherm co uk The connections for this unit are reproduced below for convenience 1 8 7 IO Expander Connections 24V Supply Comms ac or dc Digital dc polarity Outputs Si 30 10 Inputs not 21 to 30 1 to 10 important o 7 Screen Transmitter 10 IO Expander Board PSU Out Additional IO Expander Board FR EA 32 33 EA 34 e A mo 36 o oe latas bed es Digital Inputs 11 to 20 Digital Outputs Inputs 31 to 40 1 to 10 Outputs 21 to 30 DN lt 37 La D O O D O D O O lO o O D O O O Q OIS SIS SIS SIS SIS SIS SIS SIS SIS Y A C A C A C A C A C A C A C A C A C A C Figure 1 16 IO Expander
528. tuator 0 20mA or 0 10Vdc ala W DC Retransmission To other controllers 0 20mA or 0 10Vdc Dual DC Output Slots 1 2 and 4 only IIA ra 85 4 20mA P gt 3500 series Controllers Hardware Code D4 Output Rating 10Vdc 20mA max Typical Usage Heating cooling e g toa 4 20mA process actuator Isolated output 240Vac CATII Hardware Code D6 Output Rating 10Vdc 20mA max Typical Usage Logging of PV SP output power etc 0 to 10Vdc or 0 to 20mA Isolated output 240Vac CATII Hardware Code DO Output Rating each channel can be 4 20mA or 24Vdc power supply Typical Usage Control output 12 bit resolution High Resolution DC Retransmission amp Transmitter Power Supply Slots 1 2 and 4 only GE Output 1 4 Output 2 A Triple Logic Input Ael L Input 1 Input 2 Lee B Inputs gt x C Common x D External Switches or Relays Input 1 O nput2 RE o x aa nput3 Hardware Code HR Output Rating Channel 1 15 bit 4 20mA Channel 2 24Vdc Typical Usage Retransmission Channel 1 Transmitter power supply Channel 2 Hardware Code TL Input
529. types To set the rate of change of setpoint Units time m OO Ramp Rate This only appears if Segment Type Rate OO Only appears if Segment Type Dwell 0 00 00 to 500 0 or Time It sets the length of the dwell period Duration OO Holdback Type Defines the type of holdback to be No holdback applied to applied to the segment See section the segment 22 9 Holdback is applied when PV lt SP by the Holdback Value Holdback is applied when PV gt SP by the Holdback Value Holdback is applied when PV lt gt SP by the Holdback Value NO N O Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers List Header Program Edit Name Value to select PV Event Parameter Description Only appears if PVEvent in the Program Setup table Yes None Abs Hi Abs Lo Dev Hi Dev Lo Dev Band See also section 22 4 1 PV Threshold Only appears when a PV Event is configured sets the level at which the PV event becomes active To set the type of time event applicable in the selected segment for program channel 2 Time Event e Only appears if TimeEvent in the Program Setup table Yes See also section 22 4 2 On Time Time wrt the start of the segment at which the event is true Only appears if Time Event Off Off Time Time wrt the start of the segment at which the event is false Only appears if Time Event Off UsrVal Gene
530. ucts are to be included in the GSD editor Siu Coral Predio G90 File Editar Select Hiet Mara Falda hta cado Bao plc E parra cc Fr a ell cs de panal haras ir iha loli Gar dara cido Ta cre chk Ad pu eed Me be pil ed cd e eee Further _ T mup asiha Preis GUD Oke Dilija Completing the Eurotherri Profibus G30 File Editor Setup Wizard Sau fen brad rolas Bethe Pete SL Fle Elis de pos torpedo Ts apodo mp Pe lar os cir e riada dl Ceci erp Ps eel Hapa DO Lumb aplicaci n 139 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 14 5 5 Launch the GSD Editor je Eurotherm Profibus GSD File Editor File Help a amp bh PS w Device Parameters Values to be read from device Loop 1 Main Loop 1 Process Variable Loop 1 Target Setpoint Loop 1 Working Output Loop 1 Working Setpoint Loop 1 Control Inhibit Loop 1 Auto M anual Mode Loop 1 Process Variable Number of Input Words Select v2 for controllers fitted with firmware versions 2 and above gt r Loop 1 Main Loop 1 OF Loop1P a Tag 1 00001 Use Demand Data Mumber of Output words Values to be written to device Point the curser at a portion of the Description Eurotherm 3508 3504 Phase2 screen to show a context related hint gt Select Parameters from the device and place them into either the Input or Output windows by dragging and dropping their name Double clicking on a name causes itto be transtered to the curently selected win
531. ue the Watchdog Flag will become active Network Watchdog Recovery This is only shown when the Watchdog Action is set to Auto This timer determines the delay after resumption of communications before the Watchdog Flag is cleared A value of 0 will reset the Watchdog flag upon the first valid message received Other values will wait for at least 2 valid messages to be received within the set time before clearing the Watchdog flag Sub headers H and J Value Off On ManRec AutoRec 0 0 to 60 0 seconds 0 0 to Wdog Timeout cleared manually either by a parameter write or a wired Automatic Recovery The Watchdog Flag will be automatically cleared when the Network Communcations resume according to the value in the Recovery Timer A value of 0 0 disables the watchdog 3500 series Controllers Default Access Press or a to change values Level o Manual Recovery ManRec Conf The Watchdog Flag must be L3 R O value Conf L3 R O Conf L3 R O If Protocol is set to Ethernet refer to section 14 4 1 for available parameters If Protocol is set to Profibus refer to section Error Reference source not found for available parameters If Protocol is set to Devicenet refer to section 14 6 1 for available parameters If Protocol is set to MBUS_M refer to section 14 9 2 for available parameters The watchdog parameters are also included for
532. uld now be seen Tools is now ready to communicate with an instrument at the Host Name IP Address you have configured 14 4 10 Unit Ident Enable 136 The Modbus TCP Specification includes the normal Modbus address as part of the packaged Modbus message where it is called the Unit Identifier If such a message is sent to an Ethernet to Serial gateway the Unit Ident is essential to identify the slave instrument on the serial port When a stand alone Ethernet instrument is addressed however the Unit Ident is not required since the IP address fully identifies the instrument To allow for both situations the Unit Ident Enable parameter is used to enable or disable checking of the Unit Ident received from TCP The enumerations produce the following actions e Instr The received Unit Ident must match the Modbus address in the instrument or there will be no response e Loose The received Unit Ident value is ignored thus causing a reply regardless of the received Unit Ident e Strict The received Unit Ident value must be OxFF or there will be no reply Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 14 5 Profibus Protocol Profibus DP is an industry standard open network used to interconnect instrumentation and control devices in for example a manufacturing or processing plant It is often used to allow a central Programmable Logic Controller PLC or PC based cont
533. un The parameters shown in the following table apply and are as follows List Header Program Edit Sub header 1 to 50 These may also have user defined program names Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press D or to change values Level Program Program number or program name If 1 to 50 L3 configured Segments This value automatically increments 1 to 50 1 R O Used when another segment is added Holdback Allows a value to be entered to activate L3 Value Holdback Time unit applied to the segment Sec Seconds L3 Min Minutes Hour Hours Number of times the whole program Cont Repeats continuously L3 Rega 1 to 9999 Program executes once to 9999 times To select the segment to setup A 1 to 50 segment number can only be selected for editing after a segment type has been configured End To define the type of segment Ramp Units Cycles E OO gt m m m m OO Segment Last segment in the program Segment Type See also section 22 3 Rate of change of SP Time duration of the segment Duration at previous SP Immediate change to new SP Wait for event before progressing to the next segment GoBack Go back to a previous segment and repeat See section 22 3 5 To insert a new program into the current program See section 22 3 OO Target SP To set the desired setpoint value atthe Range units end of the segment This appears for Rate Time or Step segment
534. un 1h 2h 3h Ah 5h 6h 7h 8h Time o j Up to 8 Digital Events Note Event 1 may be a Timed Event as shown above whereby an on and off time can be set in each segment See section 22 4 2 Figure 22 1 Simple Two Profile Setpoint Program 240 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 22 1 Dual Programmer Modes There are three modes in which the dual programmer can be configured These are 22 1 1 SyncStart Programmer In a SyncStart programmer the two profiles will start running together when RUN is initiated It is possible to configure a SyncStart programmer for Ch1 to wait for a segment in Ch2 to catch up and vice versa Wait is described in section 22 3 6 A SyncStart programmer can operate as a Ramp Rate programmer or Time to Target programmer see next section in each segment in the same way as the previous single program version 22 1 2 SyncAll Programmer In a SyncAll programmer the two profiles automatically synchronize at the end of every segment However in order to simplify its operation this programmer is only available as a Time to Target programmer see next section 22 1 3 Single Channel Programmer By default Channel 1 is run and is intended to be used with a single process variable The modes are configured in the Instrument Display Configuration Page Inst Opt described in section 6 4
535. urally Measurements made during this period allow the relative cool gain R2G to be calculated Autotune is turned off and the process is allowed to control at the target setpoint using the new control terms For a tune at setpoint autotune does not calculate cutback since there was no initial start up response to the application of heating or cooling The exception is that the cutback values will never be returned less than 1 6 PB 220 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 21 6 13 Failure Modes The conditions for performing an autotune are monitored by the parameter State If autotune is not successful error conditions are read by this parameter as follows Timeout This will occur if any one stage is not completed within one hour It could be due to the loop being open or not responding to the demands from the controller Very heavily lagged systems may produce a timeout if the cooling rate is very slow TI Limit This will be displayed if Autotune calculates a value for the integral term greater than the maximum allowable integral setting i e 99999 seconds This may indicate that the loop is not responding or that the tune is taking too long R2G Limit The calculated value of R2G is outside the range 0 1 and 10 0 In versions up to and including V2 3 R2G is set to 0 1 but all other PID parameters are updated R2G limit may occur if the gain difference between heating and cooling is too
536. ure control type for each channel of the selected loop 21 4 Tune To set up and run the Auto tune function 21 6 PID To set up 3 term control parameters 21 5 SP To select and adjust different setpoints setpoint limits rate of 21 7 change of setpoint OP To set up output parameters such as limits sensor break 21 8 conditions Diag Diagnostic parameters 21 9 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 201 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 21 3 Main Function Block The Main function block provides an overview of parameters used by the overall control loop It allows e Auto or Manual operation to be selected e To stop the loop from controlling for commissioning purposes e To hold the integral action e Read PV and SP values Parameters can be soft wired as part of a control strategy 21 3 1 Loop Parameters Main A summary of the parameters which provide an overview of loop 1 Lp1 or loop 2 Lp2 are listed in the following table List Header Lp1 or Lp2 Sub header Main Name Parameter Description Value Default Access E Press or Dto change values Level AutoMan To select Auto or Manual operation uto Automatic closed loop Auto See also This performs the same function as operation section 21 3 2 the Auto Manual button described Manual a power adjusted in section 2 6 by the user operation The process variable input value Range of the input source This is typically wired from an analogue input Inhibit Used to stop th
537. ure the controller the same as for the load cell except set the Txdr Cal Type to Compare Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 293 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 24 5 3 Comparison Calibration Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 Remove or reduce the load from the load cell to establish a low end reference O This starts the low calibration point 2 Press to scroll to Start Cal and a or a to Yes A value must be entered before the controller 3 A Cal Adjust parameter will proceed to the next state becomes available Use a or a to enter the difference between the controller measured value and the reference instrument reading 4 Confirm the value Cal AAA 117 Cancel G4UK 5 Add a load to the load cell this would normally be at full scale of the transducer but may be done with lower weights 6 Press to scroll to Start Hi Cal and a or a to Yes The Output Value parameter should now read 7 Repeat 3 and 4 above for the same as the reference instrument the high point 294 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual NO 4 6 Transducer Scaling Parameters The following parameters allow the transducer type to be configured and calibrated List Header Txdr Sub headers 1 or 2 Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press or a to change values Level Cal Type
538. ussedecndoeansvevasesavenatievsvaneevssaseveve soveveussaveveneeevetenes 190 18 4 1 MuliblenpurOperator Para metelSnd dio 190 18 4 2 A nt ee tro eI ee ee mene See a eyez eT eR ne eran en Cer 190 18 5 VIG Input Operator sessir ror rr a n E A EE N 191 18 5 1 Nun beror NONI esen cence aden A T rT E utcd heat stent sSoattbs tee eeeoae 191 18 5 2 MEUR US a a h Maca essoea A veal tac aaiaath situs tania sn Os cube aats tiles ta atleatindih de dattian 191 18 5 3 Nigel eliaeiiny22 vehl Sion 191 18 5 4 Cascaded Opera ON 192 18 5 5 Fallback Strategy tor MUNA BOS NAAA AAA AAA 192 18 5 6 Mul Operator Paramete Sansen ina iS 193 4 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 19 CHAPTER 19 INPUT CHARACTERISATION oocccccccccccccccccccococococococococicicociciciciciccconcnocos 194 19 1 INPUT LINSAMISAUI OMe scessccstecsitetsccudsenescadeeerceadcrecennleaystescstevececassanacauansnsacersaabascasasanetnsgeacensuareiesaleusnses 194 19 1 1 Compensato Tor Sensor None ai 195 19 1 2 VPA LAE SALI OAS Ae Meter tanda 196 19 2 Polonia cade 197 20 CHAPTER ZO LOAD siii ic 199 20 1 Load Parameters O 199 21 CHAPTER 2T CONTROLCOOP SETUP cosita e E tetetees ede tecn en 201 21 1 Whatis a Control Loop root 201 21 2 Control Loop Function BIOCKS sssini einn Ean E E A A 201 21 3 M i Function Block enron O 202 21 3 1 LOO PP AAMC SS Maen a E E E EE E E 202 21 3 2 AUO MINU a ene A AO A e 203 21 4 Loop Set Up Function Blocca AA 204 21 4 1 Ty
539. ut PV Normally wired to the output of a function block such as PID output to control a plant actuator Status Module status OK Normal operation See note 2 section 10 3 1 0 1 Conf R O L3 Output on if Invert No Alterable if not wired R O The next six parameters are only shown when IO Type Time Prop outputs CycleTime To switch the output on and off Off or 0 01 When Off is selected the Min OnTime See also within the set time period algorithm will run section 8 2 2 Applies only to Time When set to any value the CycleTime Proportioning outputs algorithm will run L3 Min OnTime The minimum time in seconds If set to Auto the minimum on time will Auto L that the logic output is on or off be 110mS Cle Applies only to Time If the logic is used to control an section 8 2 2 Proportioning outputs and is external relay Min OnTime should be only available when Cycle Time set to a minimum of say 10 seconds Off to prevent the relay from switching too rapidly Res n Display resolution No decimal points XXXXX Conf This sets the number of decimal One decimal point places displayed by Disp Hi and XXX XX Two decimal points Disp Lo parameters Three decimal points Four decimal points Disp Hi Lo Maximum minimum output 0 00 to These parameters allow high and low 100 00 L3 demand signal 100 00 limits to be applied to the output against a set limit of the output R
540. ut list header PUI reut 5 Press O to scroll to PV PU This copies the parameter to be wired FROM PUInPuUL pee j 6 Pi EeCancel GOK mios This pastes the parameter 7 Press O as instructed to Tuck j j confirm Shunt tLeate Cal Hiet ira MTree Woo le If you want to inspect this press LE24 Press again to go back to the display above Indicates that the parameter is wired Repeat the above steps to wire TransducerPSU PV from Transducer ShuntState Internal wiring through the controller front panel is also explained in section 5 1 Internal wiring may also be created using iTools see section 27 10 286 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 24 3 4 Strain Gauge Calibration The display views shown below are taken from the configuration level The calibration can be carried out in operator levels unless it has been blocked Remove all pressure from the transducer Then Do This The Display You Should See Additional Notes A pop up message will appear for 1 5 seconds showing that calibration has commenced 1 Press O to select Start Tec Cal and a or a to Yes tar Cal Clear Cal Tare Value If successful another pop up will be displayed for 1 5 seconds Cal Passet If the calibration failed an acknowledge pop up will appear This might happen for example if Lo Cal is done with the full load applied 24 3 5 Calibration Using the Int
541. ut in the event of a fault being detected Fall Value Output The result of the linearisation In Low Adjust to the low input value Out Low Adjust to correspond to the low input value In High Adjust to the high input value Out High Adjust to correspond to the high input value In Adjust to the first break point Out1 Adjust to correspond to input 1 In14 Adjust to the last break point Out14 Adjust to correspond to input 14 Status Status of the block A value of Within operating limits zero indicates a healthy A bad output may be caused by a conversion bad input signal perhaps the input is in sensor break or an output which is out of range The 16 point linearisation does not force you to use all 16 points If fewer points are required then the curve can be terminated by setting the first unwanted value to be below the previous point If the curve is a continuously decreasing one then it may be terminated by setting the first unwanted point above the previous one 96 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 19 2 Polynomial List Header Poly Name Parameter Description Value Default Access DM o h Level to select Press or to change values J Input Lin Units A Fall Type Fall Value Value to be adopted by the output in the event of Status Bad Status Part No HA027988 es Resolution of the output value XXXXX XXXX X XXX XX XX XXX XXXXXK
542. uto Mantial Operation socias 42 Zok BUmpleso ansiedad a 42 2 7 Alarm INGI CATON oie ici 43 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 CN29429 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 2 7 1 ToAcknowledge an Alarm Press E and AKON enana 43 27 SENSO ELS a NIC Ori io 43 2 8 Message Centre veinte 44 a Md T gc ie c ereeerrere eerene rene sete reer ern eT nent eters ern ne me ae eer ee eer eT 44 202 a A O O EE O O EA EN 46 AT joe ca a o E A A o o E 47 A o A A O A 52 3 CHAPTER 3 ACCESS TO FURTHER PARAMETERS sicsssccsccasseccscctssscnecesussnccssscssacsqovowasseaveessaes 53 3 1 LEVON O S seasrasstaceteaehevabecsaussucueeesoneussauen 53 Biz A O EA 53 3 3 To Select Different Levels of Access crisi italia 54 Sk Access Parameter O aaa EAEE ETE EAEE 55 A CHAPTER FUNCTION BLOCKS ocrossopuraiiiensinn nin i E NEE 57 Al TO Aceess a Funcion Bloc sssrinin ne E E EE EA ENA 58 4 1 1 Sub Lists O FIOStanCSS ape os 58 4 1 2 To Access a Parameters in a Function BIOCk ramos A Ocio 58 La ToChangethe Van or Rara Mete siarp eNe AA EEES EOE EEROR 59 4 2 Acc eME slee an E E E E 60 5 CHAPTERS FUNCTION BLOCK WIRIIN Gisscesstecscccscscesccsdesseccctdecacscacceadscansencscacmacdactosenascacsennss 61 5 1 eV UNM E AP ER wcrc na sec sg cr eg ease ca ceca E A tn encased sue calc E ene eae saaicset 62 A ss OOOO q A 62 5 1 2 Wiring Through the Operator S A Ce momia aan anita 63 alko Tokemove a WI Sarita 64 5 14 Wiimga Perameterto Multiple Imo
543. uto AT 65 A PPP e PO E PEF POE nn E A A 65 5 1 6 Wiring Floats with Status Information cccccecceccesssesseseeseeseeseceececceseesesseesecsececeeeesessecsecseceeseeeeaeeaesaecaeceeeeeeeaeeaeeatens 66 Salad EAN MS aos 68 5 1 8 Operation of Booleans and Rounding sivznsscsenesdentionnescasierendarpemnedsnulisiadeovenwsdsasiormedsdvenesdeanvionnanenanen devneu iedwennnondsoneuisles 69 6 CHAPTER6 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION ooocnnnnccccccccccccccccccccccconicocicccccoccccccccoccccccconanos 70 6 1 What Is Instrument Configuration scascssscsiscceccaccesasecessdacaseteenacsatucaescetesesessiesstecsecestnsduecstseatseasesuaesaeass 70 6 2 To Select Instrument Configuratio Niro 70 OS Function Block OPUONS A NEE A 70 6 3 1 To Enable Function BLOCKS renictarsseinasnnnsnntnnisnnndupnssncionintonsannaebedophniiavewosabeleatesumbuniyahsiamtabantonnanbelaibaaieesieaniatintatnntineses 71 6 4 Instrument OC UO o 73 69 Display Formatting ainia 74 Gal TOCCU ola g e TE DEPI aena E RATA N 74 OSa Bar aph DOTON ern O AE EA E AE O O I OTOES 76 6 6 Instrument information ssesssessseseseesseessocesscessceescessceeessesescesseeesceesssessseeecessseseseessesescesssessseseseeeseesse 77 6 7 REI SUP URGENT DIS NOSES unes A 78 Za CHAPIERZ PROCESS INPUT asar gs iiae EEES EESE EERENS 80 7 1 MO SEIGCE PV e 0 eoa E A E E 80 7 2 Process input 80 Zel input Type and Ringe eari A E E EE E E EO 82 E Ne E A E EE E E NEE E E E ET 83 Ps IS Sr iio 84 a E oe
544. utput gt Elapsed Time Triggered Figure 15 5 On Delay Timer Under Different Input Conditions This type of timer is used to ensure that the output is not set unless the input has been valid for a pre determined period of time thus acting as a kind of input filter Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 15 2 4 One Shot Timer Mode This timer behaves like a simple oven timer e When the Time is edited to a non zero value the Output is set to On e The Time value is decremented until it reaches zero The Output is then cleared to Off e The Time value can be edited at any point to increase or decrease the duration of the On time e Once set to zero the Time is not reset to a previous value it must be edited by the operator to start the next On Time e The Input is used to gate the Output If the Input is set the time will count down to zero Ifthe Input is cleared to Off then the Time will hold and the Output will switch Off until the Input is next set Note since the Input is a digital wire it is possible for the operator to NOT wire it and set the Input value to On which permanently enables the timer e The Triggered variable will be set to On as soon as the Time is edited It will reset when the Output is cleared to Off The behaviour of the timer under different input conditions is shown below Input rs E Time Edited Time Edited Output A Time gt gt _ A B Ti
545. uts so that these functions can operate the program externally The software version 2 programmer has in addition Run Reset and Run Hold parameters which can provide the same functions via two digital inputs Hold Run may be implemented by inverting the Run Hold input Hold will only work if already in Run state The triggering actions are as follows 22 14 7 1 Run Reset Run Hold or Reset can also be operated from the user interface when in Run Reset 22 14 7 2 Run Hold Run The program can be Reset from the user interface when in Run or Hold Hold 22 14 7 3 Hold Run e Invert the Run Hold input for Hold Run functionality shown below Hold Run E Only go into Hold if previously in Run It will be possible to Reset from the user interface when in Hold or Run For a SynAll and SyncStart programmer the digital inputs are used to control BOTH program channels 254 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers 22 15 PV Start When Run is initiated PV start for each channel allows the program to automatically advance to the correct point in the profile which corresponds to the current PV For example if the process is already at PV3 when run is initiated then the program will start from the third segment as shown in the diagram below Initial PV PS io as ea Ne ee ae te Rising PV Seg 3 PV2 A er y Rising PV PV1 The user may specify the start point based on a Rising PV as shown in t
546. uttons together 310 Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 27 7 User Pages Editor Up to 8 User Pages with a total of 64 lines can be created and downloaded into the controller so that the controller display shows only the information which is of interest to the user User Pages Press to select this feature The main display can show any parameter on a User Page in this case the Loop 1 Main PV The display however cannot show all alpha numeric characters for example the enumeration no will only be shown as o Tools File Device Pages View Options Window Help Po a amp h GP x e a New File Open Fie Load Save Print Scan Add Remove Access Views v craphical Wiring EBParameter Explorer E Device Panel MM Terminal wiring ByrDevice Recipe amp t EY com1 ID001 3504 i 7 6 Access 3 Instrument Io 1 AlmSummary EUROTHERM Alarm 2 3 1 Comms Alarm 1 Threshold no user text Commstab CHE text only alarm 1 1 Loop EM Loop 1 0P ch10ut 3 Programmer cereza arm Y Program Diag Text entered here will be shown on the instrument dienlav hp Selected User Page Level Level 1 v tem Nr Promote Parameter Totals Style Graph Low Graph High MN Used items 3 Free tems 61 0 00 0 00 Access gt J Browse 3504 v E2 32 Level 2
547. val 61 23 Zirconia H E User_Page H E User_Pool H E UI H E Diag y Browse Options Window Help uu 8 a iF x P gave Print Scan Add Remove Access a E 0 x Mame Description Address Value WedFrom Enablellzer al UValName EnableGSoak EnableDelayedStart EnablePID Sched EnablelmmPSP Synch ode ProgHeset ProgAun ProgHold ProgRunHaold ProghunHeset AdvSeg Slavellnstance SkipSeg Print Praln2 amp PYlafaitlP EventO tl Event utz EventOut3 EverntO td EventOD ut EverntO ute EventQut EventQ ute EndOfS5eg ProgError FYE vent F Liscar AO Enable Programmer User Value User Value Name Enable Guaranteed Soak Enable Delayed Start Enable Programmer PID Set Enable Immediate PSP Synchronisation Mode Program Reset Program Aun Program Hold Program Aun Hold Input Program Aun Reset Input Advance Segment Mot Used Skip Segment Programmer Digital Input 1 Programmer Digital Input 2 Pu Ww ait Input Event Output 1 Event Output 2 Event Output 3 Event Output 4 Event Output 5 Event Output 6 Event Output Y Event Output E End of Segment Program Error P Event Output Lince sho Obes a Yes 1 Powe No 0 gt No 0 gt No 0 gt No 0 gt No 0 Yes 1 No 0 gt No 0 gt No 0 Mo 0 Mo 0 1 Mo 0 Off 0 Off 0 0 00 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off
548. vent each segment may then specify an on and an off time with respect to the start of the segment for the event i i TimeEvent Yes Time Event parameters are listed in the Program Edit page User value not No Conf shown User value shown in every segment No Conf Guaranteed soak parameters are listed in the Program Edit page for all Dwell segments The program will No Conf run immediately Delayed start is listed in the Program Status page Itis also listed in the pop up associated with the RUN HOLD key PID control is under the control of loop settings Yes PID Set is listed in the Program Edit page UserVal Enables a single analogue value to be set in every segment It is only available if Ch1 Ch2PV Event Ves None in the Program Edit page Enable Guaranteed soak ensures that the No work piece remains at the specified dwell setpoint for a minimum of the specified duration Gsoak O This parameter is only shown for SyncStart programmers Z lt O DelayedStart Enables a time period to be set between starting Run and the program actually running lt D 02 PID Set Enables PID set The setting configured in N each segment will automatically select the relevant PID Set for the loop wired to the Programmer Upon completion of the program PID setting ofthe loop will be reset to values prior to execution of the program See also section 22
549. vent to become true program event 1 before proceeding Prgln2 Wait for the program event 2 Prgln1n2 Wait for the program event 1 AND 2 Prgln1or2 Wait for the program event 1 OR 2 PVWartlP Wait segment concludes when PVWaitIP satisfies criterion specified by ChX PV Wait this option is used to Wait Until a specified value has been reached by PVWaitIP Ch2Sync In SyncStart mode the two channels of a program start simultaneously but will end as and when prescribed by their respective profiles Select Ch2Sync to specify points in the program where the two channels must wait for completion of the segment in BOTH channels synchronise before moving on Only offered in channel 1 where Ch2Seq specifies the synchronisation segment The The following two parameters are shown if Wait For PVWaitlP two parameters are shown if Wait For PVWaitIP PV Wait Configures the type of analogue event to be None No alarm type None applied to the PVWaitIP parameter for the applied ee cele ac nana Abs Hi Absolute high Abs Lo Absolute low Dev Hi Deviation high Dev Lo Deviation low Dev Band Deviation band WaitVal This sets the value at which the Ch1 2 PV Range units Wait parameter becomes active It is not shown if Ch1 2 PV Wait None Part No Part No HA027988 Issue IB Junta Issue 15 Jun 13 267 User Manual 3500 series Controllers List Header Pr
550. ver Parameters List Header SwOver Sub headers None Name Parameter Description Value Default Access to select Press O or to change values Level Input Hi Sets the high limit for the switch Input range over block It is the highest reading from input 2 since it is the high range input sensor Input Lo Sets the low limit for the switch over block It is the lowest reading from input 1 since it is the low range input sensor Defines the high boundary of Between Input Hi and Input Lo the switchover region Switch Lo Defines the low boundary of the switchover region Switch Hi L E L L 3 3 3 d Input 1 The first input value This must These will normally be wired to the R O if be the low range sensor thermocouple pyrometer input sources via wired the PV Input or Analogue Input Module The mpura Tae setone pur value This range will be the range of the input chosen O j must be the high range sensor wired In the event of a bad status the Between Input Hi and Input Lo L3 output may be configured to adopt the fallback value This allows the strategy to dictate a safe output in the event of a fault being detected Fall back type Clip Bad See section 18 4 2 Clip Bad Conf Clip Good Fall Bad Fall Good Upscale Downscale Indicates which input is Input 1 0 Input 1 has been selected R O currently selected Input 2 1 Input 2 has been selected 2 Both inputs are used to calculate the outpu
551. w W h 0 Loop 1 0P SafeOutVal Loop 1 SP Rate OO On Loop 1 OP Rate 0x0026 PV Emissivity Loop 1 Diag Error Loop 1 OP PotCalibrate 0 OFF 1 Calibrate Ch1 position input 2 Calibrate Ch2 position input BY BR Wd W W O1 sO 6 D 7 0x002f Alarm 1 Hysteresis D 00 49 50 5 Loop 1 PID ManualReset2 x0033 Loop 1 PID DerivativeTime2 al N Loop 1 PID RelCh2Gain2 O1 OO Loop 1 PID IntegralTime2 Off Loop 1 0OP Ch1PotPosition O1 D Loop 1 SP SP2 LgclO LA MinOnTime Loop 1 OP OutputHighLimit 95 0x0044 0 0045 0x002d LgclO LA MinOnTime Loop 1 PID ProportionalBand2 6 Loop 1 OP OutputLowLimit N x as SA eS a l os S SJ or BI GINO N CO N SO CO N OO Oy BRI Ww OjoOo jOo O O O O O JO O O O O OIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOJIOIOIOIOIOIOJIJOJIOIOIOIOIOIOJIJOJIJOIOIOIOIT x x X X X X x X X x x lt x lt XIXIXIXIXIXIXIXI XIXIXIXIXIXIXIX X XIXIXIXIXIXI XIXIXIXxII Ojoj jojo jo O Ojo jo O O O OJOJOO OJOO OIOIOJIJOJIJOIOJIJOJIJOIOIOIOIOJIJOIOJIJOJIJOIOIOIOIOIOIOJ O Ojoj jojo jo O Ojo jo O O O Ojojojo o o o OoO O O O O O O O O O O OJO OOO O O O O X BR BRI Ww WI Ww w Ww GW GW NO NO NO N N a 2 2 2 2 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O WI RITNT Oo oy A NO D N ul M IN TF F o0 O0o TD o o oan au nN O JO Q O O 0O O0O JO ay BR NI o S O gt Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 355 User Manual 3500 series Co
552. with software version 1 10 and greater use the Remote Setpoint variable at Modbus address 26 if you need to write to a temperature setpoint This has no write restrictions and may also have a local trim value applied There is no restriction on writing to the 2400 or 3500 series 14 8 1 3500 Broadcast Master The 3500 broadcast master can be connected to up to 31 slaves if no segment repeaters are used If repeaters are used to provide additional segments 32 slaves are permitted in each new segment The master is configured by selecting a Modbus register address to which a value is to be sent The value to send is selected by wiring it to the Broadcast Value Once the function has been enabled the instrument will send this value out over the communications link every control cycle 110ms Notes 1 The parameter being broadcast must be set to the same decimal point resolution in both master and slave instruments 2 Tools or any other Modbus master may be connected to the same port on which the broadcast master is enabled In this case the broadcast is temporarily inhibited It will restart approximately 30 seconds after iTools is removed This is to allow reconfiguration of the instrument using iTools even when broadcast communications is operating A typical example might be a multi zone oven where the setpoint of each zone is required to follow with digital accuracy the setpoint of a master controller 3500 Master Figure 1
553. wnloaded to the instrument An alternative way to create a User Page is to drag and drop the required parameter from the parameter list into the appropriate row The example in the next section shows this Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 27 7 2 Style Examples The following examples show the controller display produced for each individual style entered 1 C Text Text entered will appear on the first line of the controller display E g Prime Process Further lines of text may be added Up to four lines will be shown on the controller display at any time Use to scroll through the text on the controller display CEA Conditional Test Text entered will only be shown if a condition l is true e g 3 ao The text only appears when the logic input on LA is true TTT TET TL ME Value Only The value of the chosen parameter will be displayed in the first and subsequent rows E G 150 00 700 DE ee Farane This style does not have user text Clit Row The value of a parameter may be displayed 4 EZ P to the left and to the right of the controller display The following example shows the entry set up for digital inputs LA and Lb CE Single Ao The value ofthe parameter will be displayed on the right side of the user page To customise the text right click in the field shown below and select Edit Text CS Threshold Al 1 Trip a Dual Fou The value of a parameter and
554. xcitation fitted in module position 4 This produces a full load output of 33 3mV 24 3 1 1 Physical Wiring B TAE le Oe a a t py 2 1 10Vdc power A Blue or green supply OE B ES eE 14 gt Internal gt switch to e e Q To read the calibrated ES CQD Black Red value make a link Rea Ss J between controller terminals C and D The PV should read 2400 psi l l l V On mV Input ZA e Y Col C Input if an analogue input module is used in the appropriate slot gt E Figure 24 2 Pressure Transducer Wiring Diagram The above example uses the Dynisco model PT420A Set the transducer power supply module parameter Shunt to External Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 283 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 24 3 2 Configure Parameters for Strain Gauge Calibration Configure the controller as follows Description 1 Enable one Txdr block in the controller options page see example section 24 3 3 1 see example section 24 3 3 2 oon Transducer Power Supply module 10 Volts 3 see example section 24 3 3 3 Shunt Internal if the calibration resistor is fitted in the controller External if the calibration resistor is fitted in the transducer Clear Cal No If set to yes this will clear the previous calibration It may be necessary to reset some of the values in this table For example Input Hi and Scale Hi 2400 80 of 3000 Internal Soft wir
555. y be used as an interlock for other operations Resolution of the output value XXXXX XXXX X XXX XX XX XXX X XXXX To apply a low limit to the output Scaling factor on input 2 Limited to max float None AbsTemp V mV A mA PH mmHg psi Bar mBar RH mmWG inWG inWW Ohms PSIG 02 PPM CO2 CP sec RelTemp Vacuum Conf sec min hrs 99999 Conf Max float to High limit decimal point depends on resolution 999999 Cont Low limit to Max float decimal point depends on resolution Clip Bad Clip Good Fall Bad Fall Good Upscale Descriptions see section Conf 18 4 2 DownScale Limited to max float decimal point depends Conf on resolution 3 a Limited to max float decimal point depends on resolution Limited to max float decimal point depends on resolution Indicates the analogue value of Between high and low limits R O the output Good Bad aa Max float in this instrument is 9 999 999 999 88 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 18 3 3 Sample and Hold Operation The diagram below shows the operation of the sample and hold feature IP 1 Result Figure 18 4 Sample and Hold Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 189 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 18 4 Eight Input Analog Multiplexers The eight Input analog multiplexers may be used to switch one of eight inputs to an output
556. y not necessary when analogue thyristor control is used since compensation for power changes is included in the thyristor driver Consider a process running at 25 power with zero error and then the line voltage falls by 20 The heater power would drop by 36 because of the square law dependence of power on voltage A drop in temperature would result After a time the thermocouple and controller would sense this fall and increase the ON TIME of the contactor just enough to bring the temperature back to set point Meanwhile the process would be running a bit cooler than optimum which may cause some imperfection in the product With power feedforward enabled the line voltage is monitored continuously and ON TIME increased or decreased to compensate immediately In this way the process need never suffer a temperature disturbance caused by a line voltage change Power Feedforward should not be confused with Feedforward which is described in section 21 8 8 Cooling Algorithm The method of cooling may vary from application to application and is selected using the parameter Cool Type For example an extruder barrel may be cooled by forced air from a fan or by circulating water or oil around a jacket The cooling effect will be different depending on the method The cooling algorithm may be set to linear where the controller output changes linearly with the PID demand signal or it may be set to water oil or fan where the output
557. y or triac outputs 21 4 1 4 Motorised Valve Control in Manual mode Bounded VP controls in manual mode by the fact that the inner positional loop is still running against the potentiometer feedback so it is operating as a position loop In boundless mode the algorithm is a velocity mode positioner When manual is selected the algorithm predicts where the valve will move to based on the edit of the manual power Effectively when the raise or lower key is pressed 100 or 100 velocity is used for the duration of the key press and the raise or lower output is turned on In boundless mode it is essential that the motor travel time is set correctly in order for the integral time to calculate correctly Motor travel time is defined as valve fully open valve fully closed it is not necessarily the time printed on the motor since if mechanical stops have been set on the motor the travel time of the actual valve may be different Also if the travel time for the valve is set correctly the position indicated on the controller will fairly accurately match the actual valve position Every time the valve is driven to its end stops the algorithm is reset to 0 or 100 to compensate for any changes which may occur due to wear in linkages or other mechanical parts This technique makes boundless VP look like a positional loop in manual even though it is not This enables combinations of heating and cooling e g PID heat VPU cool and have the manual mode
558. y stage Press a or O to select Abort After a brief flicker of the display Cal State will return to Idle b It is also possible to Abort at this stage The controller then returns to the Idle state By pressing Accept this means that the calibration will be used for as long as the controller is switched on When the controller is switched off the calibration will revert to that set during manufacture To use the new calibration permanently select Save User as described in the next section 7 SetmV source for 50mV or remove the short circuit The controller will again automatically 8 e or Dto select Hi calibrate to the injected input mV 50mV 9 Now repeat 5 and 6 above to If it is not successful then Fail will be calibrate the high mV range displayed Do This Additional Notes 10 Press a or M to select Save User The new calibration data will be used following a power down of the controller Do This Additional Notes 11 Press a or M to select Load fact The factory calibration will be reinstated Part No HA027988 Issue 15 Jun 13 301 User Manual 3500 series Controllers 26 3 4 Thermocouple Calibration Thermocouples are calibrated firstly by following the previous procedure for the mV ranges then calibrating the CJC This can be carried out using an external CJC reference source such as an ice bath or using a thermocouple
559. ypes ssis ia 98 10 3 1 Rola Loge or Te OIL isabelino pain etree Tren 98 2 Part No HAO27988 Issue 15 Jun 13 3500 Series Controllers User Manual 10 3 2 Single SOl StS Logic Output dde 101 10 3 3 DC Control Dual DC Control or DC Retransmission OU eee wee 102 10 3 4 PUGH RESON OR DE DI r E AEE A T E ER 103 10 3 5 o se a E it cous estan one ail eons eyaaloar ol tnonaasaeoad a nines aeman aereneectne aia 104 10 3 6 Ly EM SS Tato RINGES alate ras to E E E a 106 10 3 7 Display Ui e a EE OT EOE 106 10 3 8 Tipbledogle nputane Triple Contact AA 107 10 3 9 FOERMAN pU naaa RO 107 t0310 Mransmiter POWER SUP yona ERA 108 TOS Transoucer Power SUDDIY inen ara 109 10 4 Module Sea NNN ors dai 110 10 4 1 Analogue InputScalngand aro 110 10 4 2 TWO POMt OMS eTe o 111 10 4 3 RELAY Logie Or il Mae OPUS cala 111 10 4 4 O is eeren a EA E A E EE E TAO ATE 111 10 4 5 OLE UO meter UU Sc Ida 112 11 CHAPTERS TT JO EXPANDER canina 113 11 1 To Contigure th lO Expander usina 114 11 1 1 O ExXpa derRata ME tica aca 114 12 CHAPTER 12 ALARM Sissi ala ile ies E 115 12 1 Further Alarma DETINIMIONS altillo lina to caiste io i 115 12 2 PANO GUS Alas da 116 1221 Analogue Alarni AN 116 12 3 NN E E 117 12 3 1 Didil ASIS is A A NAO dias 117 T232 O ea a EE E E E euaceenanniapreencuianmeries 117 12 333 FLOW Alans arena C ALS ras eno 118 12 3 4 TO ALCO WI ECGS AA TIA E e 118 12 4 Analogue Alar Parameters iaa A 119 12 4 1 Example TO Comiquera dt 121 12 5 Digital Ala

3500 Process Controller HA027988_15_3500

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents